diff options
Diffstat (limited to '43944-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 43944-0.txt | 12629 |
1 files changed, 12629 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/43944-0.txt b/43944-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..24a8807 --- /dev/null +++ b/43944-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12629 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 43944 *** + + _THE DEVIL-TREE OF + EL DORADO_ + + + + + [Illustration: "IT WAS PASSED ABOUT; NOW LIFTED HIGH IN THE AIR BY ONE + END, THEN BY THE OTHER." + _Frontispiece._] [_Page 249._] + + + + + _THE DEVIL-TREE + OF EL DORADO_ + + A novel + + BY + FRANK AUBREY + + _WITH ILLUSTRATIONS BY LEIGH ELLIS AND + FRED. HYLAND._ + + [Illustration] + + NEW YORK + NEW AMSTERDAM BOOK COMPANY + 156 FIFTH AVENUE + + LONDON: HUTCHINSON & COMPANY + + + + + COPYRIGHT, 1897, + BY + NEW AMSTERDAM BOOK COMPANY. + + + + +PREFACE. + +SHALL RORAIMA[1] BE GIVEN UP TO VENEZUELA? + + [1] The Indians of British Guiana pronounce this word Roreema. + + +Shall Roraima be handed over to Venezuela? Shall the mysterious +mountain long known to scientists as foremost among the wonders of our +earth--regarded by many as the greatest marvel of the world--become +definitely Venezuelan territory? + +This is the question that hangs in the balance at the time these words +are being written, that is inseparably associated--though many of +the public know it not--with the dispute that has arisen about the +boundaries of British Guiana. + +Ever since Sir Robert Schomburgk first explored the colony at the +expense of the Royal Geographical Society some sixty years ago, Roraima +has remained an unsolved problem of romantic and fascinating interest, +as attractive to the 'ordinary person' as to the man of science. And +to those acquainted with the wondrous possibilities that lie behind +the solution of the problem, the prospect of its being handed over +to a country so little worthy of the trust as is Venezuela, cannot be +contemplated without feelings of disappointment and dismay. + +This is not the place in which to give a long description of Roraima. +It will suffice here to say that its summit is a table-land which, +it is believed, has been isolated from all the rest of the world for +untold ages; no wilderness of ice and snow, but a fertile country of +wood and stream, and, probably, lake. Consequently it holds out to the +successful explorer the chance--the probability even--of finding there +hitherto unknown animals, plants, fish. In this respect it exceeds in +interest all other parts of the earth's surface, not excepting the +polar regions; for the latter are but ice-bound wastes, while Roraima's +mysterious table-land lies in the tropics but a few degrees north of +the equator. + +Why, then, it may be asked, have our scientific societies not exhibited +more zeal in the solving of the problem presented by this strange +mountain? Why is it that unlimited money can, apparently, be raised +for expeditions to the poles, while no attempt has been made to +explore Roraima? Yet, sixty years ago, the Royal Geographical Society +could find the money to send Sir Robert Schomburgk out to explore +British Guiana--indeed, it is to that fact that we owe the discovery +of Roraima--but nothing has been done since. Had the good work thus +begun been followed up, we should to-day have been able to show better +reason for claiming Roraima as a British possession. But, as the writer +of the article in the _Spectator_ quoted on page 3 says, "we leave the +mystery unsolved, the marvel uncared for." This article is commended +to the perusal of those interested in the subject, as also are the +following books, which give all the information at present available, +viz.--Mr. Barrington Brown's 'Canoe and Camp Life in British Guiana,' +and Mr. Boddam-Whetham's 'Roraima and British Guiana.' Mr. Im Thurn's +'Among the Indians of British Guiana' should also be mentioned, since +it contains references to Roraima, though the author did not actually +visit the mountain, as in the case of the first named. + +As an illustration of the confusion and uncertainty that prevail as to +the international status of this unique mountain, it may be mentioned +that in the map of British Guiana which Sir Robert Schomburgk drew out +for the British Government, it is placed within the British frontier. +But in the map of the next Government explorer, Mr. Barrington +Brown--'based,' he says, 'upon Schomburgk's map'--it is placed just +inside the Venezuelan boundary; and no explanation is given of the +apparent contradiction. Again, another authority, Mr. Im Thurn (above +referred to), Curator of the Museum at Georgetown (the capital of the +colony), in his book says that Roraima "lies on the extreme edge of the +colony, or perhaps on the other side of the _Brazilian_ boundary." +These references show the obscurity in which the whole matter is at +present involved. + +Apart, however, from the special interest that surrounds Roraima owing +to the inaccessible character of its summit,[2] it is of very great +geographical importance, from the fact that it is the highest mountain +in all that part of South America, _i.e._, in all the Guianas, in +Venezuela, and in the north-east part of Brazil. Indeed, we must cross +Brazil, that vast country of upwards of three million square miles, to +find the nearest mountains that exceed in height Roraima. Consequently, +it forms the apex of the water-shed of that part of South America; and +it is, in fact, the source of several of the chief feeders of the great +rivers Essequibo, Orinoco and Amazon. Schomburgk, in pointing this out, +dwelt strongly upon the importance of the mountain to British Guiana, +and insisted that its inclusion within the British boundary was a +geographical necessity. + + [2] Mr. Barrington Brown says the mountain can only be ascended + by means of balloons (see article previously referred to on + page 3); and Mr. Boddam-Whetham came to the same conclusion. + +Finally, Sir Robert's brother, Richard Schomburgk, a skilled botanist, +who had visited almost all parts of Asia and Africa in search of +orchids and other rare botanical productions, tells us that the country +around Roraima is, from a botanical point of view, one of the most +wonderful in the world. "Not only the orchids," he says, "but the +shrubs and low trees were unknown to me. Every shrub, herb and tree +was new to me, if not as to family, yet as to species. I stood on the +border of an unknown plant zone, full of wondrous forms which lay as if +by magic before me.... Every step revealed something new." ('Reissen in +Britisch Guiana,' Leipzig, vol. ii., p. 216.) + +Are our rulers, in their treatment of the question, bearing these facts +sufficiently in mind? Are they as keenly alive as are the Venezuelans +to the importance of Roraima? If they are, there is no sign of it; for +while, in the Venezuelan statements of their case, there are lengthy, +emphatic, and repeated references to the importance of Roraima, on the +English side--in the English press even--there is scarcely a word about +it. + +From these observations it will be seen that there is reason to fear +we may be on the point of allowing one of the most scientifically +interesting and geographically important spots upon the surface of the +globe to slip out of our possession into that of a miserable little +state like Venezuela, where civil anarchy is chronic, and neither life +nor property is secure. + +One of the avowed objects of this book, therefore, is to stimulate +public interest, and arouse public attention to the considerations that +actually underlie the 'Venezuelan Question,' as well as to while away +an idle hour for the lovers of romance. + +It has been suggested that, if it is too late to retain the +wonderful Roraima as exclusively British--and to effect this it would +be well worth our while to barter away some other portion of the +disputed territory--then an arrangement might be come to to make it +neutral ground. Standing, as it does, in the corner where the three +countries--Brazil, Venezuela and British Guiana--meet, it is of +importance to all three, and, no doubt, in such an endeavour, we should +have the support of Brazil as against Venezuela. + + * * * * * + +With regard to the oft-discussed question of the situation of the +traditional city of Manoa, or El Dorado--as the Spaniards called +it--most authorities, including Humboldt and Schomburgk, agree in +giving British Guiana as its probable site. We are told that it stood +on an island in the midst of a great lake called 'Parima'; but no such +lake is now to be found in South America anywhere near the locality +indicated. An explanation of the mystery, however, is afforded by the +suggestion that such a great lake, or inland sea, almost certainly +existed at one time in precisely this part of the continent; in that +case what are now mountains in the country would then have been islands. + +Indeed, most of British Guiana lies somewhat low, and it is estimated +that if the _highlands_ were to sink two thousand feet the whole +country would be under water--the mountain summits excepted--and there +would then be only 'a narrow strait' between the Roraima range and the +Andes. In this great supposed ancient lake the group of islands now +represented by mountain summits might well have been the home of a +powerful and conquering race--as is to-day Japan with its group of more +than three thousand islands--and Roraima, as the highest, and therefore +the most easily defensible, may very well have been selected as their +fastness, and the site of their capital city. + +Schomburgk thus states his speculations upon the point, in his book on +British Guiana, page 6:-- + +"The geological structure of this region leaves but little doubt +that it was once the bed of an inland lake which, by one of those +catastrophes of which even later times give us examples, broke its +barriers, forcing for its waters a path to the Atlantic. May we not +connect with the former existence of this inland sea the fable of the +lake Parima and the El Dorado? Thousands of years may have elapsed; +generations may have been buried and returned to dust; nations who +once wandered on its banks may be extinct and exist no more in name; +still, tradition of Parima and the El Dorado survived these changes of +time; transmitted from father to son, its fame was carried across the +Atlantic and kindled the romantic fire of the chivalric Raleigh." + + * * * * * + +As a natural sequence to the foregoing arises the inquiry, What sort +of people were those who inhabited this island city, or who 'wandered +on the banks' of the great lake? Here much is to be learned from the +recent discoveries of the Government of the United States who, of late +years, have devoted liberal sums to pre-historic research. The money +so expended has been the means of unearthing evidence of a startling +character--relics of a former civilisation that existed in America +ages before the time of its discovery by Christopher Columbus. The +Spaniards, as we know, found races that were white, or nearly so; but +these later discoveries go to show that long anterior to these--at +a time, in fact, probably coeval with what we call the Egyptian +civilisation--America was peopled with a white race fully as cultured, +as advanced in the sciences, and as powerful on their own ground as the +ancient Egyptians; and as handsome in personal appearance--if some of +the heads and faces on the specimens of pottery may be accepted as fair +examples--as the ancient Greeks. + +It has long been known that America possesses extraordinary relics of +a former civilisation in what are known as the great 'earthworks,' +which are still to be seen scattered about in many parts of the +continent, and which, as vast engineering works, challenge comparison +with the pyramids themselves. But now discovery has gone much +further; bas-reliefs and pottery have been found that set forth with +marvellous fidelity many minute details concerning this pre-historic +people--their personal appearance, and their ornaments and habiliments; +the style of wearing the hair and the beard; and other particulars +that can be appreciated only by inspection and study of the reduced +fac-similes lately printed and issued by the Government of the United +States. + +Many of them relate to the custom of human sacrifice which, as most +people are probably aware, prevailed largely in America when the +Spaniards first landed there; though few, perhaps, know the terrible +extent to which it was carried. Prescott tells us that few writers have +ventured to estimate the yearly number of victims at less than twenty +thousand, while many put it as high as fifty thousand, in Mexico alone! +If we consider that the lowest of these estimates represents an average +of some four hundred a week, or nearly sixty a day, such figures +are appalling! And now we learn, beyond the possibility of a doubt, +that the same practices obtained in America in times that must have +been ages before the Spanish conquest, and, judging by the frequency +of the representations of such things in these old bas-reliefs, as +extensively. In these sculptures we can see the very shape of the +knives used; the form of the plates or platters on which severed heads +of victims were placed, and other such details; and in a certain series +we are enabled to note the curious point, that, while the officiating +priests always wear full beards, the victims appear to have usually +possessed no hirsute adornments, or to have 'shaved clean,' as we term +it. It may be added that these ancient white people seem to have been a +totally different race from those the Spaniards found on the continent; +and that between the two there is believed to have been a gap lasting +for many ages, during which the country was overrun by Indian or other +barbaric hordes; though how or why this came about is one of those +mysteries that will probably never be unravelled. + + * * * * * + +In conclusion, I have to acknowledge my indebtedness to the writers +whose books of travel I have named for the information I have made use +of; as well as to express a hope that the writer of the review in the +_Spectator_ will regard with indulgence the liberties I have taken with +his admirable article. I am sanguine enough to believe, however, that I +shall have the sympathy and good wishes of all these in the endeavour +here made to arouse public attention to the real meaning and importance +of the 'Venezuelan Question'; and to add to the number of those who +feel an interest in the future status and ultimate exploration of +the mysterious Roraima. I wish also to express my thanks to Messrs. +Leigh Ellis and Fred Hyland, the artists to whom the illustrations +were entrusted, for the thought and care they have bestowed upon the +work, and the successful manner in which they have carried out my +conceptions. + +For the rest--if objection be taken to the accounts of the mountain +and what is to be found on its summit given by the characters in my +story--I desire to claim the licence of the romance-writer to maintain +their accuracy--till the contrary be proved. If this shall serve to +stimulate to renewed efforts at exploration, so much the better, and +another of my objects in writing the book will thereby have been +attained. + + FRANK AUBREY. + + + + +CONTENTS. + + + CHAPTER I. PAGE + "WILL NO ONE EXPLORE RORAIMA?" 1 + + CHAPTER II. + MONELLA 17 + + CHAPTER III. + THE JOURNEY FROM THE COAST 26 + + CHAPTER IV. + THE FIRST VIEW OF RORAIMA 36 + + CHAPTER V. + IN THE 'DEMONS' WOOD' 45 + + CHAPTER VI. + THE MYSTERIOUS CAVERN 58 + + CHAPTER VII. + THE CANYON WITHIN THE MOUNTAIN 70 + + CHAPTER VIII. + ALONE ON RORAIMA'S SUMMIT 79 + + CHAPTER IX. + VISION OR REALITY? 88 + + CHAPTER X. + IN SIGHT OF EL DORADO! 98 + + CHAPTER XI. + ULAMA, PRINCESS OF MANOA 106 + + CHAPTER XII. + A PRELIMINARY SKIRMISH 119 + + CHAPTER XIII. + A KING'S GREETING 129 + + CHAPTER XIV. + DAKLA 141 + + CHAPTER XV. + MARVELS OF MANOA 153 + + CHAPTER XVI. + LEONARD AND ULAMA 167 + + CHAPTER XVII. + THE FIGHT ON THE HILLSIDE 177 + + CHAPTER XVIII. + THE LEGEND OF MELLENDA 188 + + CHAPTER XIX. + HOPES AND FEARS 199 + + CHAPTER XX. + THE MESSAGE OF APALANO 210 + + CHAPTER XXI. + THE GREAT DEVIL-TREE 221 + + CHAPTER XXII. + SMILES AND TEARS 236 + + CHAPTER XXIII. + THE DEVIL-TREE BY MOONLIGHT 246 + + CHAPTER XXIV. + TRAPPED! 256 + + CHAPTER XXV. + 'IN THE DEVIL-TREE'S LARDER' 268 + + CHAPTER XXVI. + CORYON 282 + + CHAPTER XXVII. + ON THE 'DEVIL-TREE'S LADLE' 290 + + CHAPTER XXVIII. + RALLYING TO THE CALL 301 + + CHAPTER XXIX. + 'THOU ART MY LORD MELLENDA!' 308 + + CHAPTER XXX. + A TERRIBLE VENGEANCE 317 + + CHAPTER XXXI. + 'THE SON OF APALANO!' 327 + + CHAPTER XXXII. + THE TREE'S LAST MEAL 339 + + CHAPTER XXXIII. + THE LAST OF THE GREAT DEVIL-TREE 350 + + CHAPTER XXXIV. + A MARRIAGE AND A PARTING 360 + + CHAPTER XXXV. + JUST IN TIME! 369 + + CHAPTER XXXVI. + THE END 382 + + + + + LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. + + + "IT WAS PASSED ABOUT; NOW LIFTED HIGH IN THE AIR + BY ONE END, THEN BY THE OTHER" _Frontispiece_ + + "THERE BEFORE THEM ... THEY SAW THE MYSTERIOUS + RORAIMA" _To face page 39_ + + "A SCENE THAT WAS GRATEFULLY REFRESHING" " " 72 + + "THE SUN WAS JUST HIGH ENOUGH TO LIGHT UP THE + GLISTENING TOWERS AND CUPOLAS" " " 106 + + "SHE STOOD REGARDING THEM WITH WONDERING LOOKS" " " 115 + + "OTHER BRANCHES SWOOPED DOWN, COILING ROUND HIM" " " 252 + + "HE WAS STANDING WITH ONE ARM EXTENDED" " " 286 + + ON THE DEVIL-TREE'S LADLE " " 297 + + + + + THE + DEVIL-TREE OF EL DORADO. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +"WILL NO ONE EXPLORE RORAIMA?"[3] + + [3] The Indians of British Guiana pronounce this word Roreema. + + +Beneath the verandah of a handsome, comfortable-looking residence near +Georgetown, the principal town of British Guiana, a young man sat one +morning early in the year 1890, attentively studying a volume that +lay open on a small table before him. It was easy to see that he was +reading something that was, for him at least, of more than ordinary +interest, something that seemed to carry his thoughts far away from +the scene around him; for when, presently, he raised his eyes from the +book, they looked out straight before him with a gaze that evidently +saw nothing of that on which they rested. + +He was a handsome young fellow of, perhaps, twenty-two years of age, +rather tall, and well-made, with light wavy hair, and blue-grey eyes +that had in them an introspective, somewhat dreamy expression, but +that nevertheless could light up on occasion with an animated glance. + +The house stood on a terrace that commanded a view of the sea, and, +in the distance, white sails could be seen making their way across +the blue water in the light breeze and the dazzling sunlight. Nearer +at hand were waving palms, glowing flowers, humming insects and +gaudily-coloured butterflies--all the beauties of a tropical garden. On +one side of him was the open window of a sitting-room that, shaded, as +it was, by the verandah, looked dark and cool compared with the glare +of the scorching sun outside. + +From this room came the sounds of a grand piano and of the sweet voice +of a girl singing a simple and pathetic ballad. + +At the moment the song ceased a brisk step was heard coming up the path +through the garden, and a good-looking young fellow of tall figure and +manly air made his way to where the other still sat with his eyes fixed +on vacancy, as one who neither sees nor hears aught of what is going on +about him. + +"Ha, Leonard!" the new-comer exclaimed, with a light laugh, "caught you +dreaming again, eh? In another of your reveries?" + +The other roused himself with a start, and looked to see who was his +visitor. + +"Good-morning, Jack," he then answered with a slight flush. "Well, +yes--I suppose I must have been dreaming a little, for I did not hear +you coming." + +"Bet I guess what you were dreaming about," said the one addressed as +Jack. "Roraima, as usual, eh?" + +Leonard looked a little conscious. + +"Why, yes," he admitted, smiling. "But," he continued seriously, "I +have just been reading something that set me thinking. It is about +Roraima, and it is old; that is to say, it is in an old number of a +paper bound up in this book that a friend has lent me. I should like to +read it to you. Shall I?" + +"All right; if I may smoke the while. I suppose I may?" And the +speaker, anticipating consent, pulled out a pipe, filled and lighted +it, and then, having seated himself on a chair, crossed one leg over +the other, and added, "Now, then, I am ready. Fire away, old man." + +And Leonard Elwood read the following extract from the book he had been +studying:-- + + "Will no one explore Roraima, and bring us back the tidings which + it has been waiting these thousands of years to give us? One of the + greatest marvels and mysteries of the earth lies on the outskirt + of one of our colonies, and we leave the mystery unsolved, the + marvel uncared for. The description given of it (with a map and + an illustrated sketch) in Mr. Barrington Brown's 'Canoe and Camp + Life in British Guiana' (one of the most fascinating books of + travel the present writer has read for a long time) is a thing + to dream of by the hour. A great table of pink and white and red + sandstone, 'interbedded with red shale,' rises from a height of + five thousand one hundred feet above the level of the sea, two + thousand feet sheer into the sapphire tropical sky. A forest crowns + it; the highest waterfall in the world--only one, it would seem, + out of several--tumbles from its summit, two thousand feet at one + leap, three thousand more on a slope of forty-five degrees to the + bottom of the valley, broad enough to be seen thirty miles away. + Only two parties of civilised explorers have reached the base of + the table--Sir Robert Schomburgk many years ago, and Mr. Brown and + a companion in 1869[4]--each at different spots. Even the length + of the mass has not been determined--Mr. Brown says from eight to + twelve miles. And he cannot help speculating whether the remains + of a former creation may not be found at the top. At any rate, + there is the forest on its summit; of what trees is it composed? + They cannot well be the same as those at its base. At a distance + of fifteen hundred feet above sea-level the mango-tree of the + West Indies, which produces fruit in abundance below, ceases to + bear. The change in vegetation must be far more decided where the + difference is between five thousand and seven thousand feet. Thus + for millenniums this island of sandstone in the South American + continent must have had its own distinct flora. What may be its + fauna? Very few birds probably ascend to a height of two thousand + feet in the air, the vulture tribe excepted. Nearly the whole of + its animated inhabitants are likely to be as distinct as its plants. + + [4] Since then Roraima has been visited by two or three other + travellers; but their accounts have added little to our + knowledge. They entirely confirm Mr. Brown's statements as to + its inaccessibility. (See Preface.) + + "Is it peopled with human beings? Who can tell? Why not? The + climate must be temperate, delicious. There is abundance of water, + very probably issuing from some lake on the summit. Have we here a + group of unknown brothers cut off from all the rest of their kind? + + "The summit, Mr. Brown says, is inaccessible except by means of + balloons. Well, that is a question to be settled on the spot, + between an engineer and a first-rate 'Alpine.' (What is the + satisfaction of standing on the ice-ridge of the Matterhorn, or + crossing the lava-wastes of the Vatna-Jökull, compared to what + would be the sensation of reaching that aerial forest and gazing + plumb down over the sea of tropical verdure beneath, within an + horizon the limits of which are absolutely beyond guessing?) + + "But put it that a balloon is required, surely it would be worth + while for one of our learned societies to organise a balloon + expedition for the purpose. No one can tell what problems in + natural science might not be elucidated by the exploration. We have + here an area of limited extent within which the secular variation + of species, if any, must have gone on undisturbed, with only a + limited number of conceivable exceptions, since at least the very + beginning of the present age in the world's life. Can there be a + fairer field for the testing of those theories which are occupying + men's minds so much in our days? And if there be human beings on + Roraima, what new data must not their language, their condition, + contribute for the study of philologers, anthropologists, + sociologists? + + "One more wonder remains to be told. The traveller speaks of + two other mountains in the same district which are of the same + description as Roraima--tables of sand-stone rising up straight + into the blue--one larger than (though not as high as) Roraima + itself. It is only because of their existence, and because, for + aught that appears, they may be equally inaccessible with Roraima, + that one does not venture to call Roraima _the_ greatest marvel and + mystery of the earth!" + +"What is that taken from?" asked Jack Templemore when the reader had +put down the book. + +"It is from the _Spectator_.[5] I say, Jack, what a chance for an +explorer! Fancy people spending their money and risking their lives in +exploring an icy, cold, miserable, desolate region, like the Arctic +Circle, when there is a wondrous land here in the blue skies--yet +no wilderness of ice and snow--waiting to be won; and no one seems +to trouble about it! I do wish you would do as I have so often +suggested--set out with me upon an expedition and let us see whether +we cannot solve the secret of this mysterious mountain. You have the +leisure now, and I have the money. Dr. Lorien and his son are now on +their way back from near there; if they can undertake the journey, so +could we. Besides, it is not as though we were novices at this kind of +travel; we have been on short trips to the interior times enough." + + [5] This article appeared in the _Spectator_ of April 1877. + +Jack Templemore looked dubious. He was, it is true, used to roughing +it in the wild parts of South America. He had been trained as an +engineer, and, for some years--he was now twenty-eight--had been +engaged in surveying or pioneering for new railways in various places +on the Continent. His father having lately died and left him and his +mother very poorly off, he was now somewhat anxiously looking about for +something that would give him permanent occupation, or the chance of +making a little money. He and Leonard Elwood were great friends; though +they were, in many respects, of very different characters. Elwood +was, essentially, of a romantic, poetic temperament; while Templemore +affected always a direct, practical, matter-of-fact way of looking at +things, as became an engineer. He was dark, tall and sturdily built, +with keen, steady grey eyes, and a straight-forward, good-humoured +manner. Both were used to hunting, shooting, and out-door sports, and, +as Elwood had just said, they had had many short hunting trips into the +interior together. But these had been in previous years, since which, +both had been away from Georgetown. Templemore, as above stated, had +been engaged in railway enterprises, Elwood had gone to Europe, where, +after some time spent in England, during which his father and mother +had both died, he had travelled for a while 'to see the world,' and +finally had come out again to Georgetown to look after some property +his father had left him. On arrival he had gone at first to an hotel, +but some old friends of his parents, who lived on an estate known as +'Meldona,' had insisted upon his staying with them for a while. Here he +found that his old friend Jack Templemore was a frequent visitor, and +it was an open secret that Maud Kingsford, elder of the two daughters +of Leonard's host, was the real attraction that brought him there so +constantly. + +Now Jack Templemore, as has been said, was more practical-minded than +Leonard. He had not shrunk from the hardships and privations of wild +forest life when engaged upon railway-engineering work, when there +had been something definite in view--money to be made, instruction +to be gained, or promotion to be hoped for. But he did not view with +enthusiasm the idea of leaving comfortable surroundings for the +discomforts of rough travel, merely for travel's sake, or upon what +he deemed a sort of wild-goose chase. He had carefully read up all +the information that was obtainable concerning the mountain Roraima, +and had seen no reason to doubt the conclusions that had been come +to by those who ought to know--that it was inaccessible. Of what use +then to spend time, trouble, money--perhaps health and strength--upon +attempting the impossible? + +So Jack Templemore argued, and, be it said, there was the other reason. +Why should he go away and separate himself for an indefinite period +from his only surviving parent and the girl he loved best in the world, +with no better object than a vague idea of scrambling up a mountain +that had been pronounced by practical men unclimbable? + +Thus, when Leonard appealed to him on this particular morning, merely +because he had come across something that had fired his enthusiasm +afresh, Jack did not respond to the proposal with the cordiality that +the other evidently wished for. + +"I don't mind going a short trip with you, old man," Jack said +presently, "for a little hunting, if you feel restless and are +a-hungering after a spell of wandering--a few days, or a week or two, +if you like--but a long expedition with nothing to go upon, as it were, +seems to me only next door to midsummer madness." + +Leonard turned away with an air of disappointment, and just then Maud +Kingsford, who had been playing and singing inside the room, stepped +out. + +Leonard discreetly went into the house and left the two alone, and +Maud greeted Jack with a rosy tell-tale flush that made her pretty +face look still more charming. In appearance she was neither fair nor +dark, her hair and eyebrows being brown and her eyes hazel. She was an +unaffected, good-hearted girl, more thoughtful and serious, perhaps, +than girls of her age usually are--she was twenty, while Stella, the +younger sister, was between eighteen and nineteen--and had shown her +capacity for managing a home by her success in that line in their own +home since her mother's death a few years before. The practical-minded +Jack, who had duly noted this, saw in it additional cause for +admiration; but, indeed, it was only a natural outcome of her innate +good sense. She now asked what her lover and Leonard had been talking +of. + +"The usual thing," was Jack's reply. "He's mad to go upon an exploring +expedition; thinks we could succeed where others have failed. It's +so unlikely, you know. Now, if he would only look at the thing +practically----" + +Maud burst into a merry laugh. + +"You do amuse me--you two," she exclaimed; at which Jack looked a +little disconcerted. "_You_ always insisting so upon being strictly +non-speculative, and Leonard, with his romantic phantasies, and his +dreams and visions, and vague aspirations after castles in the air. You +are always hammering away at him, trying to instil practical ideas into +him with the same praiseworthy perseverance, though you know that in +all these years you have never made the least little bit of impression +upon him. Your ideas and his are like oil and water, you know. They +will never mix, shake them together as you will." + +"But--don't you think I am right? Isn't it common sense?" + +"Quite right, of course; and you _are_ persevering; I'll say that for +you." + +"For the matter of that, so's Leonard," said Jack with a good-natured +laugh. "He's as persevering with this fad of his as any man I ever +met in my life. I do believe he's got a fixed idea that he has only +to start upon this enterprise, and he will come back a made man with +untold and undreamt-of wealth and----" + +"And a princess for a bride--the fair maid of his dreams," Maud put in, +still laughing. "We have not heard so much of her, by the bye, lately. +He has been rather shy of those things since his return from Europe, +and does not like to be spoken to about them. We began to think he had +grown out of his youthful fancies." + +The fact was, that, from his childhood, Leonard had been accustomed +to strange dreams and fancies. These five--Leonard, Templemore, and +Mr. Kingsford's son and two daughters--had been children together, and +in those days Leonard had talked freely to his childish companions of +all his imaginative ideas; and as they grew older, he had not varied +much in this respect. Moreover, Leonard had had an Indian nurse, named +Carenna, who had encouraged him in his fantastic dreamings, and who +had, by her Indian folk-lore tales, early excited his imagination. +Her son Matava, too, had been Leonard's constant companion almost so +long as he could remember, first in all sorts of boyish games and +amusements, and later in his hunting expeditions; and both Matava and +Carenna had been always more devoted to Leonard than even to his father +and mother. + +But when Mr. and Mrs. Elwood left the estate they had been cultivating, +to go to England, the two Indians had gone away into the interior +to live at an Indian settlement with their own tribe. About twice a +year, however--or even oftener, if there were occasion--Matava still +came down to the coast upon some little trading expedition with +other Indians; and at such times he never failed to come to see the +Kingsfords and inquire after Leonard. + +The Dr. Lorien, of whom mention had been made by Leonard, was a retired +medical practitioner who had turned botanist and orchid-collector. +He had been a ship's doctor, and in that capacity had voyaged pretty +well all over the world. Since he had given that up he had travelled +further still by land--in the tropical regions in the heart of Africa, +in Siam, the Malay Peninsular and, latterly, in South America--in +search of orchids and other rare floral and botanical specimens. The +vicinity of Roraima being one of the most remarkable in the world for +such things--though so difficult of access as to be but seldom visited +by white men--it is not surprising that he had lately planned a journey +thither. + +From this journey the doctor and his son were now daily expected back. +One of the Indians of their party had, indeed, already arrived, having +been despatched in advance, a few days before, to announce their safe +return. + +Thus it came about that Templemore and Maud, while still talking, were +not greatly surprised at the sudden appearance of Matava, who stated +that he had come down with the doctor's party, who would follow very +quickly on his heels. + +Maud, who knew the Indian and his mother well, received him +kindly; and, to his great delight, was able to inform him that his +'young master'--as he always called Leonard Elwood--had returned to +Georgetown, and was at present with them. + +Matava had, indeed, expected this, for he had heard of Leonard's +intention at his last visit to the coast some six months before. He +was greatly pleased to find he was not to be disappointed in his +expectation. Moreover, the Indian declared, he had news for him--"news +of the greatest importance"--and begged to be allowed to see him at +once. So Maud sent him into the house--where he knew his way about +perfectly--to find Leonard; and then, turning to Templemore, she said, +laughing, + +"I wonder what his 'important' intelligence can be? Some deeper secret +than usual that his old nurse has to tell him, I suppose." + +"I hope it's nothing likely to rouse a further desire to set off on +this mad-cap expedition he has so long had in his mind," Templemore +returned; "for," looking at her with a sigh, "if he _should_ make up +his mind to start, I am, in effect, pledged to go too, whether I wish +or not." + +"Why should you expect it? and how are you obliged to go?" Maud +inquired with evident uneasiness. + +"I know that Leonard saw Dr. Lorien in London before he came out last, +and had a long talk with him. When he learned of the expedition upon +which the doctor was then setting out, he was much annoyed at being +unable to join him. He said, however, that he should be in Georgetown +himself in a few months, and hoped to see the doctor on his return; and +he particularly asked him to try to collect for him all the information +and particulars he could concerning the best route by which to make +the journey to Roraima. Dr. Lorien told me all this before he left +us, adding that he felt certain Leonard's object in coming again +to Georgetown was quite as much to arrange for an expedition as his +ostensible one of looking after his property. And _I_ know, too, from +what I have seen since Leonard has been back, that his thoughts are +full of the idea. You say he does not now talk much of it to you or to +others?" + +"No; and as I told you just now, we had begun rather to think he had +given up his former romantic yearnings for adventure; and, when you +have referred to them before him, I have thought that you were only +teasing him a little about old times." + +"Oh dear no; by no means. Whatever he may say, or leave unsaid to you +and his general acquaintances, he is, in his heart, just as much set +upon it as ever." + +"It is odd, that," Maud observed thoughtfully, "because he used to +be so fond of telling us about his dreams and visions and all the +castles in the air and half-mystical imaginings he used to build upon +them. But," she went on slowly, "I have noticed that, since his long +absence from us, Leonard Elwood is very different from what he was as +I remember him. He seems, at times, so reserved and distant, I almost +feel inclined to call him 'Mr. Elwood' instead of 'Leonard.' And he is, +in a manner, unsociable, too. He is so preoccupied always, so silent, +and so wrapped up in himself, that you generally have to wait, if you +speak to him, while he collects his thoughts--brings them back from the +distant skies or wherever they have gone a-wandering--before he replies +to you. Not that he is intentionally cool or distant, I think; and I +am sure he is just as good-hearted as ever. Yet there _is_ a change of +some sort. Stella says the same. And, do you know, he sometimes gives +me a sort of feeling as though he were not English at all, but of some +other race, and that he feels half out-of-place amongst us, a fish out +of water, as it were? I wonder whether he is in love!" And Maud gave a +ringing little laugh. + +Templemore shook his head. + +"If he were, it would be with some young lady on the other side of the +Atlantic," he returned. "And he would not be desirous of prolonging +his stay on this side. No; _I_ know what is the matter with him. He +talks freely enough to me. And, now that he is expecting Dr. Lorien +back, he is gradually working himself up into a state of excitement +and expectation. He has quite made up his mind for some news or +information--Heaven only knows why--and that is what makes him by turns +restless and preoccupied. If, therefore, what Matava has to tell has +anything to do with what I know to be so much in his thoughts, it may +be the means of deciding him to go; and then I should have to go too." + +"But why? I don't see what it has to do with you, Jack." + +"It has this to do with me, dear Maud," said Templemore, taking her +hand; "Leonard, some time ago, made me a very handsome--to me a very +tempting--offer if I would make up my mind to start with him on this +vague expedition. He offered me £300 clear, he paying all expenses, +and giving me, besides, half of whatever came out of it. Unfortunately +for myself, I am not now in a position to say 'no' to such an offer. I +have been, now, nearly a year waiting for something to 'turn up.' My +mother has barely enough to live on, and depends upon me for ordinary +comforts, to say nothing of little luxuries; and what I had saved up +from former engagements is steadily getting less and less, and will +shortly disappear. I do wish with all my heart I could get anything +else, almost, rather than this wild-goose affair of Leonard's. Yet +nothing has offered itself; so what am I to do? For your sake, for the +hope of being able one day to provide a home for you----" + +"Nay, Jack," Maud interposed, with a deep flush, "do not say for _my_ +sake. I would not have you set out on an enterprise of danger and +difficulty for my sake. But I see clearly enough you must do it, if it +be again offered, for your mother's sake. Yes, for hers, you must." The +girl hesitated, and it was easy to see she found it hard to say the +words, but she went on bravely, "So, I repeat, if it be again offered, +you must accept it, Jack. And be sure I will look after your mother, +and comfort her while you are away." + +"That is spoken like my own dear girl," Templemore answered with +emotion. "Yes, I cannot well refuse; and I know I may look to you to +console my mother. You will comfort each other." + +Just then they heard Leonard's voice calling out in excited tones for +Templemore. A moment or two later he came rushing out of the house. + +"Jack, Jack!" he cried. "Such a strange thing! Here is our opportunity! +Matava has brought some extraordinary news!" + +Leonard was so incoherent in his excitement, that it was some time +before his hearers grasped his meaning. + +His news amounted, in effect, to this. A white man had been staying +for some time near the Indian village at which Carenna and her son +Matava lived; and he had had many talks with both about a project for +ascending the mountain of Roraima. It being an arduous undertaking, he +sought the co-operation of one or two other white men; and Leonard's +old nurse had urged him to communicate with her young master, who +would shortly be in Georgetown, assuring him that he would be the very +one--from the interest and enthusiasm he would feel--to join him and +help him to achieve success if success were possible. Matava, who knew +of Dr. Lorien's presence in the district, had suggested to the stranger +to go to see him, and a meeting had thus been brought about. The doctor +would tell him the result; but the main thing was that the stranger had +sent an invitation to Leonard to join him and to bring, if he pleased, +one other white man, but no more. The doctor was now at the Settlement, +near the mouth of the Essequibo, transferring to the steamer, from +the Indian canoes in which they had been brought down the river, his +botanical treasures and other trophies of his journey. If Leonard +wished to go back with the canoes and the Indians who were with them, +he would have to let them know at once, and they would wait. Otherwise +they would be on their way back in a day or two; which would involve +the organising of a fresh expedition--a matter of great trouble--should +Leonard make up his mind to proceed later. + +The enthusiastic Leonard needed no time to make up his mind. + +"I shall go," said he. "If you will come too, Jack, I shall be only too +glad. But, if not, I may be able to find some one else; or I shall go +alone. So I shall send word at once to keep the boats and the Indians." + +"But," objected Maud Kingsford, "consider! You know nothing of this +stranger; he may be a blackleg, an escaped murderer or desperado, or +all sorts of things." + +"No, no! Carenna knows. She has sent word that I can trust this man, +and she knows. She is too fond of me to let me get mixed up with any +doubtful character. Dr. Lorien, too, and Harry have seen him, and +talked with him, and think well of him; so Matava says. I shall know +more when I see them in a day or two. Meantime, I shall keep the canoes +and Indians, and risk it." + +Then he rushed off to have a further talk with Matava, and, as he said, +see about getting the Indian "some grub." + +Jack and Maud, left alone, looked at each other in dismay. It had been +one thing to talk vaguely of what they would do in case Leonard should +take what at the time seemed a very unlikely step. It was quite another +to be thus suddenly brought face to face with it. + +Maud turned very pale and seemed about to faint. She felt keenly how +hard it would be to see her lover depart upon an adventure of this +uncertain character, the end or duration of which no one could even +guess at. But she recovered her self-possession with an effort and, +looking steadily at Templemore, said, + +"What you said you would do for our sakes is to be very quickly put to +the test, it seems. You--will--go, Jack?" + +"Yes," he answered firmly; "since it is your wish." + +"You must," she answered. "It is hard to lose you; it will be hard for +us both. But go--and go with a good heart. Be sure I will be a daughter +to your mother while you are away." + +He took her hand in his and pressed it to his lips. + +"For your sake, dear Maud, I shall go," he said. "For your sake and for +my mother's; in the hope that some success may result; but not--Heaven +knows--for the mere sordid hope of gain." + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +MONELLA. + + +Two days later Dr. Lorien and his son arrived in Georgetown and, +after taking rooms at the Kaieteur Hotel, went at once to call upon +the Kingsfords. This haste was, in reality, prompted by Harry, whose +thoughts were bent upon his hopes of once more seeing the pretty +Stella; but the ostensible reason that he urged upon his father was +somewhat different, and had to do with the message of which they were +the bearers from the white stranger they had met in their travels. + +At the evening dinner the matter was discussed, Mr. Kingsford and his +son Robert and the others being present. + +The two travellers had much to tell of their adventures, which had +been full of both interest and danger, apart from the matter of the +stranger's message. + +"And yet, I think," observed the doctor, thoughtfully, "our meeting +with this stranger, and his behaviour, impressed me more than almost +all else that happened to us." + +"How so? What is he like?" asked Mr. Kingsford. + +"In figure he is very tall; of a most commanding stature and +appearance. _I_ am not short." + +"Why, you are over six feet!" put in Harry. + +"And yet I almost think, if he had held his arm straight out, I could +have walked under it with my hat on, and without stooping." + +"I'm sure you could, dad," Harry corroborated. + +"As to age--there I confess myself at sea. As a doctor I am accustomed +to judge of age; yet he thoroughly puzzled me. If I could believe in +the possibility of a man's being a hundred and fifty years old and yet +remaining strong and hale and vigorous, I should not be surprised if +he had claimed that age. On the other hand, if one could believe in a +young, stalwart, muscular man of thirty with the face and white hair +of an old-looking, but not _very_ old man, then I could have believed +it if I had been told he was no more than thirty. In fact, he was a +complete puzzle to me; a mystery. But the most remarkable thing about +him was the expression of his eyes; they were the most extraordinary I +have ever seen in my life." + +"Wild--mad-looking?" Templemore asked. + +"Oh no, by no means; quite the reverse. Very steady and piercing; but +wonderfully fascinating. Mild and kind-looking to a fault; and yet +changing to a look of quiet, almost stern resolution that had in it +nothing hard, or cruel, or disagreeable. In fact, I hardly know how to +describe that look, or convey an idea of it, except by saying that it +was something between the gaze of a lion and that of a Newfoundland +dog. It had all the majesty, the magnanimity, the conscious power of +the one, with the benevolence and wistful kindness and affection of the +other. Never have I seen such an expression. I really did not know the +human countenance could express the mingled characteristics one seemed +to read so plainly in his--all kindly, all noble, all suggestive of +sincerity and integrity." + +"You _are_ enthusiastic!" said Robert, laughing. + +The old doctor coloured up a little; then took out his handkerchief and +wiped his face. + +"I know it sounds strange to hear an old man of the world like me +speak so forcibly about a man's appearance," he returned; "but, if it +is true, I do not see why I should not say it. Ask Harry here." + +"I couldn't take my eyes off his face," Harry declared. "He fairly +fascinated me. I felt I should have to do anything he told me; even to +taking my pistol and killing the first person I met. I do believe I +should have done it--or any other out-of-the way thing. And he made you +feel, too, as though you liked him so, that you longed to do any mortal +thing you could to please him." + +"What's his name?" asked Templemore. + +"Monella." + +"Monella? Is that all? No other name?" + +"None that I heard. And as to his nationality, I cannot even so much +as guess. I have been in Central Africa, in Siam, in India, in China, +in Russia, and have picked up a smattering of the languages of those +countries; but this man jabbered away in all; additionally, he spoke +French, German, Spanish and Portuguese, besides English. So much I +know. How many more he speaks I can't say." + +"Injun," said Harry. + +"Oh yes, I forgot that. We had some of three different tribes with us, +and he spoke to each in his own tongue." + +"And what is his object in going in for this Roraima exploration?" +asked Mr. Kingsford. + +"He has a curious theory. He declares that the ancient island-city of +El Dorado--or Manoa--was not at the lower end or part of the Pacaraima +mountains, as some have surmised, but at the further and highest point +of the range, which is Roraima itself. He holds that the great lake +or inland sea of Parima once washed around the bases of all those +mountains, making islands of what are now their summits; and that the +highest and most inaccessible of all, Roraima, was selected by the +Manoans for their fastness, and for the site of their wonderful 'Golden +City.'" + +"But that theory won't help him to get up there, will it?" Jack asked. + +"Ah, but there is something else. He states that he was brought up by +some people, the last members of what had once been a nation, but has +now died out. They lived in a secluded valley high up on the slopes of +the Andes. He has travelled all over the world, and went back to these +friends of his, only to find that they were all dead, save one, and +that he was fast dying. This survivor gave him an ancient parchment +with plans and diagrams, by means of which, it was declared, the top of +the mountain can be reached, where will be found whatever traces may +be left of the famous city of Manoa or El Dorado. This man, Monella, +has other old parchments which he can read, but I could not--he showed +me some--and from these he declared his belief that there is almost +unlimited wealth to be gained by those who find the site of this +wonderful city." + +All this time Leonard had been listening with sparkling eyes and +flushed cheeks, though in silence. Here he glanced with a satisfied +smile at Templemore, and said, + +"There's method in all that; at all events he is not undertaking the +thing in a haphazard way and without something to go upon, that's +certain." + +Jack did not look hopeful. + +"It is probably just as wild and hopeless an adventure all the same," +was his reply. "What 'directions' or 'plans' or 'diagrams' can help +a man to-day after the lapse of hundreds and hundreds of years--even +if they were reliable, and the old party who handed them over was not +mad--as he probably was?" + +"As to Monella," observed the doctor, "I could see no sign of madness +in him. He is one of the most intelligent, best-informed men I ever +met. I cannot say anything, of course, of his informant." + +"Has he any money, do you suppose--this man?" Robert asked. + +"I don't know. But he pays the Indians well, and has got together a +lot of stores, it seems; which must have been a costly thing to do. +They have been brought over the mountains from Brazil. And he specially +said you need not trouble to load yourself up with much in the way +of stores--only sufficient to get to him. After that you will be all +right. And he said nothing about money being wanted. But," and here +the doctor hesitated, "he is very particular as to the character and +disposition of those he purposes to work with. In fact, he subjected +me to a long sort of cross-examination respecting our friend Leonard +here. He had already gained a lot of information about him from the +old Indian nurse, it seemed, and I was surprised at the details he +had picked up and remembered. In fact, Master Leonard," continued the +doctor, addressing the young man, "he seemed to know you almost as well +as if he had lived with you for years. And your friend Mr. Templemore, +too, he seemed to know about him, and to expect that he would join you." + +"How could that be?" Jack demanded. + +"Oh, from the old nurse and Matava, I suppose." + +"To tell you the honest truth," Harry interposed, "I believe there's +some hocus-pocus business about those two. She is reputed to be a +witch, you know; not a bad witch, but a good sort. And I quite believe +Monella to be a wizard; also of a good sort. And when those two laid +their heads together, they could know a lot between them, I suspect. I +should not at all wonder if he were not magician enough to lead you to +the 'golden castle,' or 'city,' or whatever it is, and find its hidden +stores of gold. I wish I had a chance to join him. But dad's wanting me +somewhere else. So I am out of it." + +"Yes," observed his father. "We have to go on to Rio, where I have some +law business on. But we shall not be away a great while, and then we +are going back to that district." + +"Going back?" said Templemore in surprise. + +"Yes, there is a lot to be done there. It is a wonderful place for my +sort of work, and we really saw but very little of it after all. So we +are going again when we return from Rio; but I cannot at all tell when +that may be." + +The doctor was a fine-looking specimen of a hardy, bronzed traveller. +He was, as has been said, over six feet in height; his hair and beard +were iron-grey, his complexion was a little florid beneath its tan, +and his expression good-humoured and often jovial. His son, Harry, was +somewhat slight in build, but wiry, and had been used to knocking about +with his father. He was a young fellow with boundless animal spirits +and plenty of pluck and courage. His ready kindness to every one made +him a general favourite; and the lively, captivating Stella and he were +special friends. + +Mr. Kingsford asked the doctor whether any time had been estimated for +the length of the expedition. + +"That would be difficult," Dr. Lorien answered. "Apart from the long +and tedious journey there, there is the girdle of forest that surrounds +Roraima to be cut through. That may take months, I am told." + +"Months!" The exclamation came from Maud who, with Stella, had been a +silent but appreciative listener. + +"Yes. It is a curious thing, but this forest belt is never approached +even by any of the Indian tribes. They look upon it with superstitious +awe and will not even go near it. Indeed, they all regard Roraima with +a sort of horror. They declare there is a lake on the top guarded by +demons and large white eagles, and that it will never be gazed on +by mortal eyes; that in the forest that surrounds it are monstrous +serpents--'camoodis' they call them--larger far than any to be found +elsewhere in the land; besides these, there are 'didis', gigantic +man-apes, bigger and more ferocious and formidable than the African +gorilla. Altogether, this wood has a very bad reputation, and no +Indian will venture near it. Indeed, the mountain of Roraima and all +its surroundings are looked upon as weird and uncanny. As a former +traveller has expressed it, 'its very name has come to be surrounded by +a halo of dread and indefinable fear.'" + +"How, then, is the necessary road to be made through this promising bit +of woodland?" asked Templemore. + +"_There_ has been Monella's difficulty," returned the doctor. "But +for that, doubtless, he would not have troubled about any one else's +joining him. But, though he is very popular amongst the Indians, they +cannot get over their fear of the 'demons'' wood, as they call it. +They are, in fact, quite devoted to him, for he has done much that has +made him both loved and feared--as one must always be to gain the real +devotion of these people. He has effected many wonderful cures amongst +them, I was told; but, more than that, he has saved the lives of two +or three by acts of great personal courage. So that, at last, he even +prevailed upon them to enter the 'haunted wood' with him. But they are +making very little progress, it appears; he cannot keep them together, +and they give way to panic at the slightest thing and make a bolt of +it; then he has to go hunting over the country for them, and it takes +days to get them together again--and so on. He is in hopes that the +presence and example of other white men will inspire them with greater +confidence and courage." + +"A promising and inviting outlook, I must say," said Jack, eyeing +Leonard gravely. + +"Never mind," Leonard exclaimed with enthusiasm. "If he can face it, so +can we; and if it is good enough for him to brave such difficulties, +it is good enough for us. It only shows what sterling stuff he must be +made of!" + +At this Jack gave a sort of grunt that was clearly far from implying +assent to Leonard's view of the matter. + +There was further talk, but it added little to the information given +above; and, inasmuch as Leonard had already made up his mind, almost +in advance, and had to ask no one's permission but his own, he +determined at once to set about the necessary preparations; and Jack +Templemore--though with evident reluctance--agreed to accompany him. + +"I have a list of all the things I took with me," remarked Dr. Lorien, +"and notes of a few that I afterwards found would have been useful +and that I consequently regretted I had not taken; and also some +specially suggested by the stranger Monella. You had better copy them +all out carefully, for you will find it will save you a lot of time and +trouble." + +Thus it came about that in less than a week their preparations were all +made, and the two, with Matava as guide, were ready to set out. Matava +had with him fourteen or fifteen Indians, who had formed the doctor's +party, and these, and the canoes with the stores on board, were soon +after waiting at the Settlement, ready to make a start. + +Then, one sunny day at the beginning of the dry season, the Kingsfords, +with Mrs. Templemore, and the doctor and his son, all took the steamer +to the "Penal Settlement" (a place a few miles inside the mouth of +the Essequibo river, the starting place of all such parties), to see +the young men off and wish them God speed. When it came to this point +the struggle was a hard one for Maud and for Templemore's mother; but +they bore themselves bravely--outwardly at least. The three canoes put +off amidst much fluttering of handkerchiefs, and soon all that could +be seen of the adventurers were three small specks, gradually growing +less and less, as the boats made their way up the bosom of the great +Essequibo river--here some eight miles in width. Their intended journey +had been kept more or less a secret; such had been the wish of him they +were going to join. Hence no outside friends had accompanied the party +to see them off. Those who knew of their going away thought they were +only bent upon a hunting trip of a little longer duration than usual. + +For two loving hearts left behind the separation was a trying one. +For a few days Mrs. Templemore stayed on at 'Meldona' with Maud, and +the presence of Dr. Lorien and the vivacious Harry helped to cheer +them somewhat; but, when the doctor and his son started for Rio, the +others returned sadly to the routine of their everyday life, with many +anxious speculations and forebodings concerning the fortunes of the two +explorers. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +THE JOURNEY FROM THE COAST. + + +The greater part of the interior of British Guiana consists of dense +forests which are mostly unexplored. No roads traverse them, and but +little would be known of the savannas, or open grassy plains, and the +mountains that lie beyond--and they would indeed be inaccessible--were +it not for the many wide rivers by which the forests are intersected. +These form the only means of communication between the coast and the +interior at the present day; and so vast is the extent of territory +covered with forest growth that it is probable many years will elapse +before any road communication is opened up between the sea and the open +country lying beyond the woods. + +Of these vast forests little--or rather practically nothing--is known +save what can be seen of them from the rivers by those voyaging to and +fro in canoes. There are a limited number of spots at which the Indians +of the savannas come to the banks of the rivers to launch their canoes +when journeying to the coast; and to reach these places they have +what are known as 'Indian paths' through the intervening woods. These +so-called paths are, for the most part, of such a character, however, +that only Indians accustomed to them can find their way by them. Any +white man who should venture to trust himself alone in them would +inevitably get quickly and hopelessly lost. Hence--save for a few +miles near the line of coast--there are, as yet, absolutely no roads in +the country. + +Naturally, under such conditions, the forest scenery is of the wildest +imaginable character, and its flora and fauna flourish unchecked in the +utmost luxuriance of tropical savage life; for the country lies but a +few degrees from the equator, and is far more sparsely populated than +even the surrounding tropical regions of Brazil and Venezuela. + +Fortunately, however, for those who for any reason have occasion to +traverse this wild region, there is no lack of water-ways. Several +grand rivers of great breadth lead from the coast in different +directions, most of them being navigable (for canoes and small boats) +for great distances, leaving only comparatively short stretches of +forest land to be crossed by travellers desiring to reach the open +plains and hills. + +Of these rivers, the Essequibo is one of the finest, and it was by +this route that the two friends, Elwood and Templemore, set out, under +Matava's guidance, to reach their destination. From this river they +branched off into one of its affluents, the Potaro, noted for its +wonderful waterfall, the Kaieteur, which they visited _en route_. Here +their canoes were left and exchanged for lighter ones, hired from the +Ackawoi Indians, who live at a little distance above the fall; their +stores and camp equipage being carried round. So far the journey had +been uneventful, save for a little excitement in passing the various +cataracts and rapids; but the two young men knew their way fairly well +thus far, having visited the Kaieteur with Matava some years before. + +When, however, the journey was resumed above the Kaieteur, the route +was new to them; and, among the first things they noticed, were the +alligators with which the river abounded. In the Essequibo they had +seen none, and not many below the fall; but from this point, as far as +they ascended the river, they saw them continually. Once they had a +narrow escape. They were making arrangements for camping on the bank, +and were nearing the shore in the last of the canoes, when a tremendous +blow and a great splash overturned the boat, and they found themselves +struggling in the stream. An alligator had struck the canoe a blow with +its tail and upset it. Fortunately, however, it was in shallow water; +and the Indians, seeing how matters were, made a great splashing, and +thus frightened away the reptile. The contents of the canoe were partly +recovered, not without difficulty; but some were damaged by the water. + +As they proceeded up the river, the rapids and cataracts became more +frequent, and the negotiation of them more difficult, till they reached +a spot where further navigation was impossible, and they had to take to +the forest, their stores and baggage being henceforward carried by the +Indians. + +This marked the commencement of the really arduous part of the journey. +So long as the stores were carried in the boats, the Indians had been +cheerful and docile, and easy to manage. But now their work was harder, +and food was scarcer--for game is difficult to shoot in the forest. +Then, after two or three days, the gloom of the woods began to have an +evident effect upon their spirits; they first became depressed, and +then began to grumble. This would not have been of so much consequence, +perhaps, but that Matava became apprehensive that they might desert. +They were not people of his tribe, it seemed; they had come with Dr. +Lorien from a different district; and when they began to understand +that the eventual destination was Roraima, they became still more +depressed. + +All the Indian tribes who have heard of Roraima, in any way, have the +same superstitious dread of it; and those now with the two young men +were evidently not exceptional in this respect. Templemore and Elwood +began to feel anxious and, to make matters worse, food ran short +for the Indians. The latter live chiefly on the native food, a kind +of bread called cassava, and, of this, a good deal of what they had +brought with them had been lost or spoiled by the upsetting of the +canoe. + +In consequence, Matava advised that they should interrupt their direct +journey to turn aside to an Indian settlement that he knew of, about +a day's journey off the route they were pursuing; there they would +be able to replenish their stores, he thought; and to this course a +reluctant assent was given by the two friends. + +It turned out to be more than a day's journey, however; but they +reached the place on the second day. It was called Karalang; there were +not more than a dozen huts, and the people at first said that they +had no food to spare; but eventually promised to procure some if the +travellers would wait a few days; and this they were perforce compelled +to do. + +This village was situated on a hill in a piece of open country in the +midst of the great forest; and, during their enforced rest, the two +friends were enabled to engage in a little hunting, and to see more of +the wild life of the woods than they had seen before. + +The first thing they did on arrival was to procure a couple of fowls +for cooking, of which there were plenty in the village. But these were +of no use as food for the Indians, who never eat them. Throughout the +country this is everywhere the case; the Indians keep fowls, yet never +eat them; and it is said that, were it not for the vampire bats and +tiger-cats, these would increase beyond all reason. Though, however, +they object to fowls as a diet, they have no dislike to fish, and they +were not long in discovering that there were some in a stream that ran +near the village; and a supply was caught by their method of poisoning +the fish in such a way that they float on top of the water as if dead, +but are nevertheless palatable and wholesome as food. The poison is +prepared from a root. + +Amongst the miscellaneous stores the two had brought they had a liberal +supply of firearms--five Winchester rifles, half-a-dozen revolvers +and two guns, each with double barrels, one for shot and the other +for ball. The extra weapons were in case of loss or accident, and +Templemore had a good stock of tobacco, for he never felt happy for +long together without his pipe. + +On their way up they had had very little shooting. Jack had indeed +killed an alligator, by way of relieving his feelings after the +upsetting of the canoe; but there had been very little time to spare +for sport. Every morning they had started as soon as the morning meal +had been eaten, and had gone into camp at night only in time to cook a +meal before it became dark. For in this part of the world night closes +in at about half-past six on the shortest days of the year, and a +little before seven on the longest. Practically, therefore, the varying +seasons bring little difference in the length of the days. One cannot +there get up at three or four o'clock and "have a good long day," with +an evening keeping light till eight and nine o'clock, as in summer-time +in Europe. Hence the days seem short for travel and sport, and the +nights very long. + +"I think we've stuck to it pretty well," Jack observed in the evening, +as he sat smoking by the camp fire, outside their tent--for though the +day had been hot the evening was chilly--"and we deserve a rest. So it +is just as well. We will have two or three days' shooting, and a look +round, before we go on to tackle 'the old man.'" + +'The old man' was the one they were on their way to see--the one Dr. +Lorien had met and described so enthusiastically. Jack was a little +sceptical as to whether the good-natured doctor had not sacrificed +strict accuracy to his friendly feeling for the stranger. Leonard, too, +felt full of curiosity upon the same point. + +"I can scarcely believe, you know," Jack continued, "that our friend +will turn out all that the doctor pictured him." + +"I shall be glad if he does, at any rate," Leonard made reply. "He +would be almost worth coming to see for himself alone." + +Jack laughed. + +"That's rather stretching a point, I think. However, I am keeping an +open mind on the subject. The gentleman shall have 'a fair field and +no favour,' so far as my judgment of him goes. I won't let myself be +prejudiced in advance, either one way or the other." + +During the following days they enriched their stores by the skin +of a fine jaguar, shot by Templemore, a great boa-constrictor--or +'camoodi'--twenty-four feet long, shot by Leonard, and many trophies of +lesser account. Then, a fresh lot of cassava having been procured for +the Indians, the journey was resumed. + +In about three weeks from the time of their start, the party emerged +from the forest into a more open country, where rolling savannas +alternated with patches of woodland. Here the air was fresher and more +bracing, so that the depressing effect of the gloomy forest was soon +thrown off. They could shoot a little game, too, as they went along; +there were splendid views to be had from the tops of the ridges and low +hills they crossed. The ground steadily rose and became first hilly and +then mountainous, till, having crossed a broad, undulating plateau, +they once more entered a forest region, but this time of different +character. The trees were farther apart; there were hills, and rocky +ravines, and mountain torrents, steep mountains, and deep valleys. The +way became toilsome and difficult; game was scarce, or at least not +easy to obtain, owing to the nature of the ground; the cassava ran +short, and, once more, grumbling arose and trouble threatened. + +At last, one evening, Matava, with perplexity in his face, led the two +young men aside to hold a consultation. + +"These people," he said in his own language, "say they will not go any +farther!" + +"How far do you reckon we are now from your own village?" asked Jack. + +"About four days. If we could but persuade them to keep on for two days +more, we could fix a camp, and I could go on alone and bring back some +of my own people to take all the things on." + +"Ah! a good idea, Matava. Well, let us see what persuasion will effect. +Any way, we had better get them to go as far as we can, and then encamp +at the first likely camping-ground." + +In the end the Indians were prevailed upon, by promise of extra pay, to +go the additional two days' journey. Beyond that they would not budge. + +"They think that mountain over there in the distance is Roraima," +Matava explained; "and I cannot get them to believe it isn't. And they +are frightened, and won't go any nearer to it." + +There was, therefore, nothing to be done but to adopt Matava's +suggestion. It was agreed that the two friends would stay in camp and +keep guard over their belongings, while he started next day for his +village, to bring help. + +The spot was a convenient one in which to camp for a few days, with a +stream of water near. That evening, therefore, the Indians were paid, +this being done in silver, which they knew how to make use of. The next +morning, when Elwood and Templemore got out of their hammocks, they +found they were alone with Matava. All the others had disappeared. + +"Ungrateful beggars!" said Jack. "They might, at least, have gone in a +respectable manner, and not like thieves slinking away. Let's hope they +are not thieves." + +But they were not. An examination showed that nothing had been stolen. + +"The poor fellows were only frightened," Leonard observed. "They are +honest enough." + +Matava, meantime, was making ready to set off alone for carriers from +his own village. When he was ready, Templemore expressed a desire to +walk a little way on the road with him 'to take a peep over that little +ridge yonder'; which is a wish common to travellers in a country that +is new to them. But when they reached the ridge, there was only to +be seen another short expanse of undulating savanna, whereupon Jack +decided to return, leaving Matava to continue on his way. + +Leonard, left to himself, finished the occupation he had in hand--the +cleaning of his double-barrel--and, having loaded it, strolled out of +the camp in another direction, to take a look round. He left the camp +to itself, not intending to go far, and expecting that his friend would +be back in a quarter of an hour or so. Not far away a 'bell-bird' was +ringing out its strange cry, that has been compared by travellers to +the sound of a convent bell. He had heard these birds often in the +forest since leaving the boats, but, in consequence of the density of +the woods, had never been able to get near one. Here, where the trees +were more open, there seemed to be a better chance, and he followed, as +he thought, the sound. But soon he came to the conclusion that he had +been in error; or the bird had flown across unseen; for the direction +of the sound seemed to have changed. He, therefore, turned off towards +where he fancied the bird now was; and this happened several times, +till at last he became confused and found he had fairly lost his way. +It is a peculiarity of the 'bell-bird,' as it is of many other birds +of the forest, that their notes are often misleading; it is one of +those cases of what has been termed by naturalists 'Ventriloquism in +Nature,' many examples of which the traveller in these wild regions +comes across. Leonard had arrived at the head of a small glen, and +found himself on a grassy bank beside a little stream, sheltered from +the glare of the sun by over-hanging branches. He laid down his gun +and went to take a drink of the inviting limpid water, and then sat +awhile on the bank looking down the picturesque ravine. It was very +quiet and peaceful all around, and he fell into one of his day-dreams. +At such times the minutes pass on unheeded; and he sat for a long while +oblivious of all that went on about him. But presently, behind him, a +silent, cunning enemy crept up unseen and unheard till near enough for +a spring; then there was a loud roar, and the next moment Leonard was +lying on the ground in the grasp of an enormous jaguar. + +For a minute or two the beast stood over him growling, but not touching +him after the first blow that had knocked him down; while Leonard lay +dazed and helpless, with just enough consciousness to have a vague idea +that the best thing he could do, for the moment, was to lie perfectly +still. Then, with another roar, the animal seized him by the shoulder +and began to drag him down the slope towards some bushes. At that +moment Leonard, whose face was turned away from the brute, saw, like +one in a dream, the undergrowth through which he himself had come, +part asunder and three figures appear. Two of them were Templemore and +Matava, who stood rooted to the spot with horror-stricken faces; the +third was a tall stranger who towered above the other two, and who also +stood still for a second or two eyeing the scene, while the jaguar +growled threateningly. + +Then the tall stranger advanced, and the animal released its hold and +was itself seized and pulled from over Leonard. In another moment +he felt himself lifted in two giant arms, and, looking up, saw the +stranger bending upon him a gaze in which there seemed a world of +tender anxiety and compassion. Everything appeared to swim around him, +and he knew that consciousness was leaving him; yet, for a space, the +fascination of that look seemed to hold him chained. + +"You--must--be--Monella!" he said, softly. Then he fainted. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE FIRST VIEW OF RORAIMA. + + +When Leonard came to himself sufficiently to see and understand what +was going on around him, for the moment he thought himself once more in +his days of childhood; for the first face he recognised was Carenna's, +his Indian nurse, who was bending over him in much the same way and +with the same expression as of yore. But, when he looked round, he +saw that he was in an Indian hut; and slowly the memory of what had +occurred came back to him. + +Carenna, when she saw that he was himself again, gave a joyous cry; +then, conscious of her indiscretion, put her finger on her lips +to imply that he must remain quiet. He felt no inclination to do +otherwise, and soon fell into a refreshing sleep, which lasted for some +time. + +When next he opened his eyes they rested on another pair, large and +steady, and that seemed to have a wondrous depth and meaning in them. +Then he saw that they belonged to the stranger who had pulled the +jaguar off, and was now sitting alongside the mattress on which he lay. + +"Keep thee quiet, my son," said he in a low, musical voice. "All goes +well, and in two or three days you will be as strong as ever again." + +There was something soothing in the mere glance of the eye, and in the +very tones of the man's voice; and Leonard, reassured by them, remained +passive for a while, till Carenna again appeared with a drink she had +prepared for him. + +When, later, Jack Templemore came in, and Leonard was able to talk, he +found he had been ill for a week, and that he was then in the hut of +Carenna at the village of Daranato. + +"I've had an awfully anxious time of it," Jack said; "but Monella seems +skilled in doctoring, and Carenna has been most devoted in her nursing +and attention and would brook no interference; so I've had to hang +around and pass the time as best I could." + +When once Leonard had 'turned the corner,' as Jack called it, he +recovered rapidly, and was able, in a few days, as Monella had +predicted, to get about again. Nor was he any the worse for his mishap; +for the beast's teeth had just missed scrunching the bone. + +When he wished to offer his thanks to Monella, the latter put him off +with a quiet smile. + +"We think nothing of little incidents like that, my son, in a land such +as this. Your thanks are due to God who sent me to you at the moment; +not to me. Being there, I could not well have done otherwise than I +did." + +It appeared that Monella had come out from the village a day or two +before to look out for them, and had fallen in with Matava. The Indian +had led him towards the camp, near which they had met Jack, who was +wandering about in search of Leonard. On learning that he was missing, +Monella had proceeded to the camp and thence--by some method known only +to himself--had tracked Leonard's footsteps--a thing that even Matava +confessed himself unable to do--and thus had come upon him just in time. + +"When I saw how matters stood," said Jack, "my very heart seemed +to stand still. Neither I nor Matava dared to risk a shot, for the +brute stood up nearly facing us and holding you in his mouth. But +that wonder, Monella, quietly laid down his rifle and drew his knife, +keeping the beast fixed with his eye all the time; then he walked up to +it as coolly as though he were going to stroke a pet cat, put out his +hand and caught it with such a grip on the throat that it nearly choked +and had to let go of you at once. And presto! Before it could get its +breath, whizz went the knife into its heart! And he lifted it up and +threw it away from him, clear of you, as easily as one might a small +dog. Then he picked you up and carried you to the camp, as though you +were but a baby. The whole affair took only a few moments, and passed +almost like a dream. It's fortunate he happened to come out to meet us. +How could he possibly know we were coming?" + +"I have always told you," said Leonard dreamily, "that there seems +to be a strange sympathy between my old Indian nurse and myself. She +tells me she 'felt' that I was in the neighbourhood, and sent word to +Monella, who at once went to her, and then came on to try to intercept +us. Only, you know, you never believed in those things. Yet here, you +see, Monella must have believed her, or he would not have had such +confidence in our coming as to wait about for us as he did." + +"It's very strange," Jack admitted. "I confess I do not understand you +'dreamers.' I am out of the running there altogether. + +"They say," he continued, "that from the top of yonder low mountain +before us you can see Roraima pretty plainly. But I had no heart to +go out to look for it while you were so ill, and, since you have been +getting better, I have preferred to stay and keep you company. But now, +I suppose, it will not be long before we set eyes, at last, upon the +wonderful mountain that is to be our 'El Dorado'!" + + [Illustration: "THERE BEFORE THEM ... THEY SAW THE MYSTERIOUS + RORAIMA." + [_Page 39._] + +When Elwood heard this, he became anxious to get a sight of the object +of their journey; so, two days after, they started before dawn, with +Monella, to walk to the top of the low mountain Jack had pointed out. + +They reached the summit of the ridge just when the sun was rising, +and there before them, like a veritable fairy-land in the sky, they +saw the mysterious Roraima, its pink-white and red cliffs illumined +by the morning sun, and floating in a great sea of white mist, above +which showed, here and there, the peaks of other lower mountains like +the islands they once were, but looking dark and heavy, in their +half-shadow, beside the glorious beauty of this queen of them all, that +reared herself far above everything around. + +It is impossible to give an adequate idea of the impressive grandeur of +this mountain, which might be likened to a gigantic sphinx, serene and +impassive in its inaccessibility. + +Or it might be likened to a colossal fortress, built by Titans to guard +the entrance to an enchanted land beyond; for the cliffs at its summit +appeared curiously turreted, while at the corners were great rounded +masses that might pass for towers and bastions. + +In places, with the light-coloured cliffs were to be seen darker rocks, +black and dark green and brown, worked in, as it were, with strange +figures, as though inlaid by giant hands. And everywhere the sides were +perpendicular, smooth, and glassy-looking. Scarce a shrub or creeper +found a precarious hold there; but down from the height, at one spot, +fell a great mass of water--like a broad band of silver sparkling and +glistening in the sunlight--that came with one mad leap from the top +and disappeared in a cloud of spray and mist two thousand feet below. +Further along could be seen other narrower falls like silver threads. + +There was no crest or peak as with most mountains. The top was a +table-land, beyond whose edge one could see nothing. This edge was +fringed with what looked like herbage, but, seen through a powerful +field-glass, proved to be great forest trees. + +Then, as the sun rose higher and warmed the air, the mist cleared +somewhat around the lower part of the precipitous cliffs, so that +far, far down could now be seen the foliage that crowned the great +primæval forest--the 'forest of demons'--that girdled the cliffs' base. +Gradually the mist descended, and the full forest's height showed up +like a Titanic pedestal of green, itself floating in the haze that +still remained below. + +By degrees the mist rolled down the mountain's side, for below this +extensive forest-girdle the actual base and lower slopes began slowly +to appear, with waterfalls, and cascades, and rushing torrents and +great rivers dashing and foaming in their rocky beds. Then other +intervening ridges and patches of forest and open savanna gradually +came into view, with the full forms of the surrounding smaller +mountains, the whole making up a panorama that was marvellous in its +extent and in the variety of its shapes and tints. + +But scarcely had the sun revealed this wondrous sight to their +astonished eyes, when a cloud descended upon Roraima's height. + +Almost imperceptibly it grew darker, then darker still and yet more +sombre, till the erst-while fairy fortress seemed to frown in gloomy +grandeur. Its salmon-tinted sides, but now so airy-looking in their +lightness, turned almost black, and seemed to glower upon the brilliant +landscape. The forest also lost its verdant colouring and looked dark +and forbidding enough to pass for an enchanted wood peopled by dragons, +demons, and hobgoblins to guard the grim castle in its centre. + +Then the cloud descended lower still, and castle and haunted forest +passed out of sight, as swiftly and completely as though all had been a +magical illusion that had vanished at a touch of the magician's wand. + +Leonard rubbed his eyes and felt half inclined to think he had been +dreaming. All this time not a word had been exchanged. Each had seemed +wrapped up in the weird attraction of the scene; and the new-comers, +even the practical Jack, had been astounded, almost overwhelmed, at the +sight of the stupendous cliffs and tower-like rocks of the mysterious +mountain, and its changes from gorgeous colouring and ethereal beauty +to black opacity and shapelessness. + +Presently Monella turned and led the way back to the camp, the others +following, each absorbed in his own thoughts. + +Templemore was more impressed by what he had just witnessed than he +would have cared, perhaps, to own. Never before had he seen such a +mountain, though he had crossed the Andes, and had looked upon the +loftiest and grandest on the American Continent. To him there was +something about Roraima that was wanting in all other mountains; +a suggestiveness of the unseen, of latent possibilities. He could +now understand why the Indians regarded it with fear and awe. It +was, indeed, impossible to look upon it without believing that some +wonderful story was hidden in its inaccessible bosom; some mysterious +secret that it kept jealously concealed from the rest of the world. +For, perhaps, the first time in his life, he was conscious of a feeling +that bordered on the superstitious. What if that which they had +witnessed were meant to shadow forth a warning; to be an omen! Did it +portend that, should they gain the summit of Roraima, they would find +there indeed a sort of earthly Paradise, but that it would turn--as +suddenly and completely as the fairy-like first view had changed that +morning--to the darksome solitude of a charnel house? + +But Leonard, for his part, when he came to talk upon the matter, was +only more enthusiastic than before; and Monella smiled with indulgent +approbation when, with the ingenuous impulsiveness of youth, he +enlarged upon his delight and expectations. + +When they returned to the Indian village preparations were begun for a +forward move to the place Monella had made his head-quarters; not far +from the commencement of the mysterious forest the Indians regarded +with such dread. + +During the march thither they had many more glimpses of Roraima; +finally they emerged upon the last ridge that faced it, from which a +full view of its towering sides and of the forest at their base could +be obtained. + +Between them was a deep ravine, along which flowed a narrow river +dotted with great boulders. Having crossed this with some difficulty +and ascended the other side, they reached an extensive undulating +plateau, an open savanna with here and there small clumps of trees. +They were now almost under the shadow of the great cliffs, and before +them, three or four miles away, was the beginning of the encircling +wood. + +Rounding the end of a thicket distant a mile or so from this wood, they +came suddenly upon a large and substantially built log hut, and this, +Monella told them, was his temporary residence. Near it were several +smaller huts roughly but ingeniously formed of boughs and wood poles, +which the Indians who worked with him had constructed for themselves. + +As they entered the larger dwelling Monella thus addressed them: + +"This, my friends, is where we shall have to live until our work in +'Roraima Forest' shall be completed. Make yourselves as much at home +as the circumstances will permit; we are likely to occupy it for some +time." + +And a fairly comfortable home it was; far more so indeed than the young +men had ventured to expect. There was rough furniture, there were lamps +for light at night, a number of books, and many other things that took +them altogether by surprise. + +"It must have taken you a long time," said Jack Templemore, "to get all +these things transported here, and this place built and its furniture +made." + +"It has taken me years!" was the reply. + +The Indians who accompanied them, numbering about twenty, were all +of Matava's own tribe; altogether a different race from those who +had accompanied them nearly to Daranato and had been paid off and +gone home. When Monella had left his abode, temporarily, at Carenna's +request, to come to meet the two, all the Indians had gone with him, +objecting to be left so near to the 'demons' wood' without him. Now, +however, they quickly distributed themselves among the huts, one acting +as cook and servant in the house, and Matava attending to all other +matters as general overlooker. + +So far little had been said between the young men and their strange +host as to the objects and details of their enterprise. The +circumstances of their introduction had been so unusual that the +discussion had been tacitly postponed until Leonard should have +recovered sufficiently to take part in it. And even then, when Jack had +broached the subject, Monella had remarked, + +"You had better wait till you have been to my cabin near Roraima, when +I can better explain the nature of the undertaking. Then, if you do not +care to join me in it, or we seem unlikely to get on well together, we +will part friends and you will merely have had an interesting bit of +travelling." So all farther explanation had been adjourned. + +"I call this more than a 'cabin,'" said Leonard, when they had had time +to make a sort of tour of inspection. "I think we ought to give it a +better name. Suppose we call it 'Monella Lodge.'" And 'Monella Lodge' +it was henceforth called. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +IN THE 'DEMONS' WOOD.' + + +The following day, Monella led the two friends to the road he had begun +to cut into Roraima Forest; but first he showed them two llamas that +were kept in a rough corral near his dwelling. + +"I brought them all the way from the other side of the continent," he +said. "You know that there they are the only beasts of burden, and in +this country there are none. They will be useful to us later." + +As to the so-called 'road,' it was really but a pathway; and, in +places, almost a kind of tunnel. The great trees of this primæval +forest were so high and dense that but little daylight penetrated to +the ground beneath; and on all sides the undergrowth was so thick and +tangled that almost every foot had to be cut out with the axe. Here and +there one could see for a few yards between the giant trunks, and at +these spots the path had been made wider. One curious thing Jack noted: +the path did not start from that part of the wood opposite to 'Monella +Lodge'; nor even from the margin of the wood itself. + +Asked why this was, Monella thus made answer: "If in our absence others +should come here, they might hunt up and down for the path a long time +before they hit upon it--and very likely never find it. On this stony +ground the tracks we leave are very slight and difficult to trace." + +"But," said Jack, "your Indians know the way." + +Monella smiled. + +"Not one of them would ever show another man the way," he replied, "let +him offer what he might." + +"But why all these precautions?" + +"Later you will understand." + +But, when Jack came to look round, his heart sank within him. + +"I should not care to have a few miles of railway to cut through wood +like this," he said. "It's the worst I ever saw. I do not wonder +you have found it more than you could manage--only yourself and +these Indians--and it's a wonder you ever got them to join at all, +considering all the circumstances." + +"Yes; that's where it is," Monella answered. "Many men would have +despaired, I think. We have had trouble, too. Two Indians met with +accidents and were badly hurt; though now they are recovering. Then, +some of the small streams that issue from the mountain became suddenly +swollen once or twice, and washed away the rough bridges we had made +across them; and we have met with many unexpected obstacles, such as +great masses of rock, or a fallen tree, some giant of the forest that +was so big it was easier to go round it than to cut through it." + +That evening, Monella explained his project, and showed the young men +the plans and diagrams Dr. Lorien had spoken of, and then went on to +say, + +"If you decide to join me, you ought to know something of the language +in which these old documents are written. I both read and write it, and +I speak it too. You will find it interesting to decipher them, and an +occupation for the evenings." + +Jack was not enthusiastic at this suggestion; but Leonard cordially +embraced it. + +"To learn the language of an unknown nation that has passed away will +be curious and _very_ interesting," he declared, "and will, as you say, +help to pass the time. You may as well learn it too, Jack. You speak +the Indian--why not learn this? Then we can talk together in a tongue +that no one but ourselves and our friend here can understand." + +"And where did these ancient people 'hang out'?" asked Jack +irreverently. + +"Have you heard of the lake of Titicaca and the ancient ruins of +the great city of Tiahuanaco; a city on this continent believed by +archæologists to be at least as old as Thebes and the Pyramids?" +Monella asked. + +"_I_ have," Leonard answered, "though I know very little about them. +But I believe I was in that country when very young, and had a curious +escape from death there." + +Monella turned his gaze quickly upon the young man. + +"Tell me about it. What do you remember?" he asked. + +"Oh, I do not remember anything; I was too young. But I have been +_told_ how that my father went somewhere in that district on a +prospecting expedition, and, not liking to be separated from my mother, +took her with him, and my nurse, Carenna, and myself. Whilst there they +came across a small settlement of white people, as I understand, and +remained with them some time. There was amongst these people a child of +my own age, and so exactly like me, that my nurse grew almost as fond +of it as she was of me, and used to like to take the two out together. +One day, it seems, we both went to sleep on the grass, and she left us +for a few minutes to gather fruit. When she returned a poisonous snake +crawled hissing away, and she found the other poor little child had +been bitten and was dead. + +"That's all I know about it. Who the people were, and where the place +was, I cannot say. I have always understood, however, that it was +somewhere in the direction of Lake Titicaca. But Carenna could tell you +more." + +"And what about this ancient people of yours?" Templemore asked of +Monella, who still gazed thoughtfully and inquiringly at Leonard. +Templemore had heard of Elwood's early adventure many times before. + +"High up on the eastern slopes of the great Andes is an extensive +plain, as large as the whole of British Guiana," the old man replied. +"It is twelve thousand feet above the level of the sea, and there, at +that great height, is also the largest lake of South America, Lake +Titicaca, over three thousand square miles in extent, on the shores of +which was once a mighty city called Tiahuanaco. It is now in ruins; +yet, even amongst its ruins, it boasts of some of the oldest and most +wonderful monuments in the world. Two thousand feet above this again, +are another large plain and another lake, little known to the outside +world, being, indeed, almost inaccessible. It was there my people +dwelt, and tradition asserts that they retired thither when driven +out of Tiahuanaco by some invasion of hordes from other parts of the +continent." + +"Is it a very old language, do you suppose?" Jack asked. + +"Undoubtedly one of the oldest in the world; and yet not difficult to +acquire by those who know the language of Matava and his tribe--as you +do. It has some affinity to it." + +As regards the tongue spoken by the Indians, Leonard had learnt it from +Carenna in his childhood; and Templemore had picked up a good deal from +the same source, as well as on his hunting expeditions with Leonard and +Matava. + +When it came to discussing terms, Monella declared that he had none to +make, except that on no consideration whatever should any other white +man be invited or allowed to join them. As to the rest, he simply +suggested that any wealth they might acquire by their enterprise should +be shared equally between them. + +"Suppose one of us were to die," observed Jack. "How then? Might not +the survivors choose some one else to join them? Though," he added +thoughtfully, "if it were _you_, we should not be likely to go on." + +"_I_ shall not die, my friend, until my task be finished," replied +Monella with conviction. + +"You cannot say," was Jack's rejoinder. + +"No, I do not say I _know_, yet I can say I _feel_ it. No man dieth +till he hath fulfilled the work in life allotted to him by God," +Monella finished solemnly. + +The others already knew him, by this time, as a man with deep-seated +religious convictions; though he made no parade of his beliefs. He +seemed to have a simple, steady faith in an overruling Providence, and +showed it, unostentatiously, in many ways, both in his actions, and in +the advice he gave, on occasion, to the young men. + +In the result, the bargain--if it can be so termed--was concluded. +Elwood and Templemore formally enrolled themselves under Monella's +leadership, and henceforth performed the duties he assigned to them; +amongst other things assisting almost daily in the formation of the +path that was to take them through the forest. When not so engaged, +they would go out with some of the Indians on hunting or fishing +excursions in search of food. + +Monella had with him, amongst other things, a beautifully finished +theodolite of wonderful accuracy and delicacy; with this he settled +the direction of the road from day to day. Often, obstacles were +encountered that made it impossible to go straight; these had to be +worked round and the proper direction picked up again by means of +Monella's calculations. + +Another circumstance worthy of note and that caused the two young men +at first some surprise, was the fact that Monella had with him some +mirrors specially prepared and fixed in strong cases for carrying +about in rough travel, and intended for heliographic signalling. They +frequently took these out and practised with them by sending messages +to one another from the ridges of hills far apart. Monella tried also +to instruct Matava and some of the Indians in the work, but without +success. They were indeed afraid of the glasses, and looked upon it all +as some kind of magic. + +"Wouldn't it be simpler to go up the bed of this stream that you +seem to have been following more or less all the time, even if it be +longer?" observed Jack one day. + +Monella shook his head. + +"No use, my friend. It divides into so many branches; and then again, +in case of a rise of its waters, we should have all our road submerged +at once." + +On Sundays they always rested. This, it appeared, had been Monella's +custom all along. + +In his conversations in the evenings and during their Sunday strolls, +he would instruct and amuse his hearers with his reminiscences and +adventures in all parts of the world, or with his intimate knowledge +of the wild life around them. From his account, he had undergone, at +times, terrible and extraordinary hardships and privations on the +plains and in the forests of India and Africa; of Australia; the +Steppes of Tartary; the Highlands of Thibet; the interior of China and +Japan; the wilds of Siberia; of Canada; the prairies of North America, +and the pampas, plains, and rugged mountains of South America--all, +as Dr. Lorien had said, seemed to be alike known to him. Nor was he +less familiar with the countries and cities of Europe; yet he spoke of +his travels and experiences in a simple manner that had in it nothing +of boastfulness or ostentation, but as though his sole object were to +amuse and entertain his two young friends. + +As they penetrated farther into the forest, their work became harder +and the progress slower. This latter was unavoidable, since each day +they had to walk farther and farther to and fro. Moreover, the Indians, +who had displayed greater courage--so Monella had said--now that they +had two more white men with them, once more began to show signs of +nervous apprehension and fear. + +This was doubtless due to the great difference in many ways--some +definite enough, others indefinable and vague--between this forest and +those generally to be found in the tropical regions of South America. +Not only were the trees still more gigantic--making it gloomier--and +the undergrowths more dense and tangled, but the birds and animals, +judging from their cries, were unfamiliar to them. Many of the sounds +usual to forest life in British Guiana were absent; the constant note +of the 'bell-bird' was not heard, nor was even the startling roar of +the howling monkeys. Instead were heard other sounds and noises of +an entirely novel and peculiar kind, unknown even to the Indians who +had been used to forest travelling all their lives; sounds that even +Monella either could not explain--or hesitated to. One of these was a +horrid combination of hiss and snort and whistle, loud and prolonged +like the stertorous breathings of some monstrous creature. Some of the +Indians declared that this was the sound traditionally said to proceed +from the great 'camoodi,' the monstrous serpent that is supposed to +guard the way to Roraima mountain; while others inclined to the +opinion that it was made by the equally dreaded 'didi,' the gigantic +'wild man of the woods,' that also had, as they averred, its special +haunts in this particular forest. At times, a startling, long-drawn +cry would echo through the wood, so human in its tones as sometimes +to cause them to rush in the direction it seemed to come from, in the +belief that it was a cry for help from one of the party who was in +danger. This strange, harrowing cry, the Indians called 'The cry of a +Lost Soul'[6]; and they were always seized with panic when it was heard. + + [6] This strange cry is often heard in the depths of the forests + in this region, and has never been accounted for, the only + explanation given by the Indians being the one stated above, + viz., that it is 'the cry of a Lost Soul.' It is alluded to by + the American poet, Whittier, in the following lines:-- + + "In that black forest where, when day is done, + + * * * * * + + Darkly from sunset to the rising sun, + A cry as of the pained heart of the wood, + The long despairing moan of solitude + And darkness and the absence of all good, + Startles the traveller with a sound so drear, + So full of hopeless agony and fear, + His heart stands still, and listens with his ear. + --The guide, as if he heard a death-bell toll, + Crosses himself, and whispers, 'A Lost Soul!'" + +There were other cries and sounds equally mysterious and perplexing; +and, so the Indians began to declare, strange sights too. Of these they +could give no clear account, but they maintained that, in the shadows +in the darker places, or just before nightfall, while returning from +their work, they now and then caught passing glimpses of vague shapes +that seemed to peer at them and then disappear within the gloomy +forest depths. And even Elwood and Templemore were conscious of the +occasional presence of these silent unfamiliar shapes, and sometimes +fired at them, though without result. These facts they made no attempt +to conceal from one another, though, in their intercourse with the +Indians, they put a bold face on matters, and affected to disbelieve +the stories told them. + +Monella alone was--or appeared to be--entirely undisturbed by all these +things. If conscious of them, he gave no sign of it, but went about +whatever he had to do as though danger were to him an unknown quantity. + +There was, however, one unpleasant fact that could not be ignored, and +that was the unusual number of 'bush-masters' of large size in the +wood. This is a poisonous snake, very gaudily coloured, whose bite is +certain death. It does not--like most serpents--try to get out of the +way of human beings, but, instead, rushes to attack them with great +swiftness and ferocity. It is the only _aggressive_ venomous snake of +the American continent. It usually attains a length of five or six +feet; but, in this forest, the explorers killed many of eight or nine +feet, and two--that came on to the attack together--were nearly eleven +feet long, with fangs as large as a parrot's claw. In consequence of +the frequency of the attacks of these reptiles, so much dreaded by the +Indians, and indeed by all travellers, one or two of a working party, +armed with shot guns, had to be told off to keep watch; rifles being of +no use for the purpose. + +Templemore, as it happened, had had a bad fright when a child from an +adventure with a snake; and this--as is frequently the case--had left +in his mind, all the rest of his life, a great horror of serpents. He +found, therefore, the presence of these 'lords of the woods,' as their +Indian name implies, a source of ever-present abhorrence. + +Besides the 'bush-masters,' there were the 'labarri'--also a large +venomous snake, but not aggressive like the other--and rattlesnakes. +There were also, no doubt, boa-constrictors, or 'camoodis,' of the +ordinary kind; but, thus far, only one had been seen, and that, though +large, was nothing out of the way as regards size for that country. + +Nor were serpents their only visible enemies; there were others of a +kind new to the two young men. One day, while with the working party at +the farthest part of the track, they heard the whole forest suddenly +resound with a perfect babel of discordant noises. There were shrill +cries and squeals, hoarse roars and growls, then a kind of trumpeting. +The Indians retreated, throwing down their axes to pick up their +rifles. As they hastily retired, four large animals sprang into their +path, one after the other, with loud roars and growls. But Monella, +who was behind Elwood, stepped forward and rolled two over with his +repeating rifle, and Jack stopped another of the beasts with his. The +fourth, apparently not liking the way things were going, leaped into +the thicket and disappeared; though, judging from the sounds that came +from the direction it had taken, there were many more of its fellows +close at hand. Gradually their cries grew fainter, until they died away +in the distance. + +Meanwhile, further shots had given the _coup de grâce_ to the three +that had been knocked over, and the victors went up to examine them. +They seemed to be a kind of panther or leopard of a light grey colour, +approaching white in places, with markings of a deeper colour. + +Neither Templemore nor Elwood had ever previously seen any animal, or +the skin of one, at all like these. They were, moreover, of different +shape from either the jaguar or the tiger-cat; larger than the latter, +and more thick-set than the former. + +"These must be the 'white jaguars' that the Indians say help to guard +Roraima," Jack observed, looking in perplexity at the strange creatures. + +"Yes," said Matava, who had now come up, "and they are 'Warracaba +tigers.'"[7] + + [7] A vivid account of an adventure with these formidable animals + will be found in Mr. Barrington Brown's 'Canoe and Camp Life + in British Guiana,' page 71. Very little is known about them, + but they are believed to have their haunts in the unexplored + mountain districts, from which they occasionally descend into + other parts. Mr. Brown states that the Indians fear them above + everything; and, while comparatively brave as regards jaguars and + tiger-cats of all kinds, give way to utter panic at the mere idea + that 'Warracaba tigers' are in their neighbourhood. It is said + that nothing stops or frightens them except a broad stream of + water--not even fire. + +"What on earth are they?" asked Leonard. + +"Warracaba tiger," Monella said, "is the name given to a species of +small 'tiger' (in America all such animals are called 'tigers') that +hunts in packs, and is reputed to be unusually ferocious. They have a +peculiar trumpeting cry, not unlike the sound made by the Warracaba +bird--the 'trumpet-bird'--hence their name." + +"They look to me more like light-coloured pumas," Jack remarked. + +"No; pumas are not marked like that, and do not make the sounds we +heard. Besides, you need never fear a puma, and should never shoot at +one, unless it is attacking your domestic animals." + +Both Templemore and Elwood looked up in surprise. + +"I always thought," the latter said, "that pumas were such bloodthirsty +animals." + +"So they are, to other animals--even the jaguar they attack and kill. +But men they never touch, if let alone. I do not believe there is a +single authenticated instance of a puma's hurting any human being, man, +woman or child. In the Andes and Brazil--where I have lived long enough +to know--the Gauchos call the puma 'Amigo del cristiano'--'the friend +of man'--and they think it an evil thing to kill one."[8] + + [8] A very interesting account of the South American puma will + be found in 'The Naturalist in La Plata,' by Mr. W. H. Hudson. + He states that the puma has a strange natural liking for, or + sympathy with, man; that, though ferocious and bloodthirsty in + the extreme as regards other animals, yet it never attacks man, + woman, or child, awake or asleep. He quotes many authorities, and + gives numerous instances, of a very remarkable character, from + the accounts of hunters and others whom he has himself seen and + questioned. + +A few days after, they were attacked again by these furious creatures, +and this time did not come off so well, for two of the Indians were +badly mauled. But for Monella's cool bravery, indeed, matters would +have been much worse; and Templemore had a narrow escape. Then, a day +or two later, one of the Indians was stung by a scorpion; and Jack came +near being bitten by a rattlesnake--would have been but for Monella, +who, just in time, boldly seized the reptile by the tail, and, swinging +it two or three times round his head, dashed its brains out against a +piece of rock. + +Indeed, upon all occasions where there was any kind of danger, +Monella's ready, quiet courage was always displayed in a manner that +won both the admiration of his white colleagues and the devotion of his +Indian followers. Moreover, as Dr. Lorien had stated, and as Leonard +had found by actual experience, he was skilled in medicine and surgery. +To wounds he applied the leaves of some plant, of which he had a store +with him in a dried state, the curative effects of which were reputed +among the Indians to be almost marvellous. + +But even these incidents were surpassed by a startling experience +they had a short time afterwards. On going to their working ground +one morning, two or three Indians in advance of the remainder of the +party saw, lying across the path, what they took to be the trunk +of a tree that had fallen during the night; and they sat upon it, +indolently, to wait for the others to come up. Suddenly, one of them +sprang up, exclaiming, "It's alive! I felt it move! It is breathing!" +They all jumped up, in alarm, when the great snake--for such it proved +to be--glided off into the wood. Most likely the others would have +ridiculed their story, but that Templemore happened to come up in time +to witness what occurred. And through the underwood, on both sides of +the path, was plainly to be seen a sort of small tunnel that marked the +place where the serpent had been lying asleep. + +Matava and his fellows, of course, insisted that this was the great +'camoodi,' that Indian tradition had long declared existed in this +forest--set there specially, by the demons of the mountain, to guard it +from intrusion. + +These constant dangers and adventures made the task of keeping the +Indians from deserting doubly difficult, and rendered the work both +harassing and tedious to the others. Only Monella showed no weariness, +no sign of the strain it all involved; so far from that, these troubles +seemed only to increase his vigilance, his power of endurance, and his +determination. + +And all the time they were cutting their way through vegetation that +would have astonished and delighted the heart of a botanical collector +such as Dr. Lorien. Not only within the wood, but in the whole district +round, unknown and wondrous flowers and plants abounded. But the +explorers had neither time nor inclination to take that interest in +them they merited, and would, at any other time, have undoubtedly +excited.[9] + + [9] See extract given in the preface (page viii.) from Richard + Schomburgk's book 'Reissen in Britisch Guiana.' + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +THE MYSTERIOUS CAVERN. + + +When the time drew near for the adventurers, if Monella's calculations +proved correct, to reach the base of the towering rock towards which +they were making their way with so much labour, a suppressed excitement +became apparent throughout nearly the whole party. It was clearly +visible in the Indians and in Elwood; and Templemore, even, showed +signs of anxiety. Monella alone was imperturbable as ever, and, if +any unusual feeling arose in his mind, there was no trace of it to be +seen in his placid manner. Perhaps a close observer might have seen, +at times, a little more fire in the gaze of his keen eyes; but it was +scarcely noticeable to those around him. + +Elwood did not attempt to hide the state of expectancy into which he +had gradually worked himself; but while he, on the one hand, grew +more excited, Jack Templemore, on the other, became steadily more +pessimistic and moody. Since the adventure of the great 'camoodi' he +seemed nervous and depressed, and he no longer troubled himself to +conceal the discontent that now possessed him. The continued sojourn +in that terrible forest was becoming too much for his peculiar +temperament. Its gloom oppressed him more and more each day; and he +had become silent and unsociable, often sitting for long intervals +stolidly smoking and, if addressed, replying only in monosyllables. +They had now been for some weeks in the wood, camping in it every +night, and going back to 'Monella Lodge' only for the Sundays. To this +rule Monella rigidly adhered; but, since it took the greater part of +a day to reach the edge of the forest from the point they had now +attained, but little work was done at the path-making on Saturdays, +Sundays, or Mondays. Hence their progress had become slower, and +Templemore's discontent and impatience increased in proportion. + +One morning, after breakfast, Jack was sitting on a log moodily +smoking, while Elwood was busying himself clearing up after the +meal recently finished. Monella and all the Indians had gone to the +path-end, and were out of sight; but the strokes of their axes, and +their calls one to another, could be heard distinctly, now and again, +echoing through the almost silent wood. Very little else broke the +stillness, but once or twice they had heard that weird sound, half +hiss, half whistle, that the Indians attributed to the monstrous +serpent. Presently, Jack took his pipe from his mouth and addressed +Elwood:-- + +"You heard what Monella said last night, that he hoped to-day or +to-morrow would see the end of this work. Supposing, as I expect, that +we find that we merely run against inaccessible cliff, I want to know +what you intend to do. To attempt to work either to right or to left, +along the foot of the rock, in the hope of finding an opening would +be, I feel convinced, a mere wild-goose chase, and would lead us only +farther into this hateful forest, and uselessly prolong our stay in it. +Now, Leonard, is it agreed that the thing is to end when we get to the +cliff? I've asked you again and again as to this, but you always put me +off." + +"I put it off--till the time comes for deciding about it; that's +all, you old grumbler. What is the use of talking before we see how +Monella's calculations come out?" + +"If I grumble, as you call it, it is because I am anxious for others. +I gave a solemn promise before I left my poor old mother that I would +not rush into any obvious and unnecessary danger; any danger, that is, +beyond the ordinary risks of travel in a country like Guiana. Now----" + +"Well, what dangers have we courted that are beyond the 'ordinary risks +of travel,' as you call them?" Elwood demanded cheerfully. "We have +come safely through forests and plains thus far, and now we are in +another forest----" + +"Yes, but what a forest! I have been, as you know, pioneering in the +furthermost recesses of Brazil and Peru; I know a little--just a +_little_--you will allow, of wild life; but never have I seen the like +of this wood! No wonder the Indians shun and fear it; indeed, it is a +marvel to me how Monella ever induced them to enter upon this work, +and it is still more wonderful how he has managed to keep them from +deserting him. Heaven knows what we have experienced of the place is +enough to try the courage of the best--the most ferocious 'tigers,' the +biggest serpents of one sort ever dreamed of, and the more deadly and +more fiercely aggressive venomous ones; strange creatures that one can +only catch glimpses of and can never see; sounds so weird and unnatural +that even the Indians can offer no explanation. That great serpent, +alone, fills me with a continual cold horror. We never know where it +may be lurking; it may make a rush at one of us at any moment, and what +chance would one have with such a beast? What consolation, to think it +would probably get a bullet through its head from one of us, if, while +that was being done, it crushed another to a jelly?" + +"Your old horror and dislike of serpents make you nervous, old boy. +I wish you could get over it. In all else, you know, you are as bold +as--as--well, as Monella himself; and that is saying a lot, isn't it? +You must admit that, if our enterprise has its dangers, we have a +leader who knows what he is doing." + +"A splendid fellow! but--a dreamer--or--a madman!" + +"A madman! He has method in his madness then! I admire him more and +more every day. He is a man to lead an army; to inspire the weakest; +to put courage into the most timid. I do not wonder the Indians are +so devoted to him. _I_ would follow him anywhere, do anything he told +me! His very glance seems to thrill you through with a courage that +makes you ready to dare everything! He is a born leader of men! He +carries out, in every action, in his manner, his air, his principles, +his extraordinary cool courage, and his gentle, simple courtesy, all +my ideas of a hero of romance of the olden time--the very _beau idéal_ +of a great king and chivalrous knight. _I_ can see all this; his very +looks, his slightest motions are full of a strange dignity; never have +I seen one who so excited alike my admiration and my affection! Yet, I +do admit he is a mystery. One knows nothing----" + +"Exactly," Jack burst in, interrupting at last the speech of the +enthusiastic Leonard. "It is true, what you say, in a measure. He seems +to have in him the making of such a man as you, I can see, have in your +mind--a hero, a leader of men. Yet here is he, an unknown wanderer +on the face of the earth, giving up the last years of his life to a +fatuous chase after El Dorado, with a few Indians and a couple of +credulous young idiots joining in his mad quest. I like him; I admire +him; I believe in his sincerity. But I say he is mad all the same, a +dreamer; and for the matter of that, so are you. You suit each other, +you two. Two dreamers together!" And Templemore got up and began pacing +up and down, restless in body and disturbed in mind. + +Leonard watched him with a half smile; but Templemore looked serious +and anxious. + +"We are surrounded by hidden enemies--many of them deadly creatures," +he went on gloomily. "Already three of us have fallen victims, and +we know not who may be the next. Even the most constant and watchful +vigilance does not avail in a place like this; and the never-ceasing +worry of it is becoming more than I can stand. One wants eyes like a +hawk's and ears like an Indian's. One cannot feel safe for a single +minute; you want eyes at the back of your head----" + +Leonard went up and put his hand on the other's arm. + +"All because you are so anxious about _me_ and others, dear old boy," +he said. "If you really thought of yourself alone you would never +trouble; but you make a great affectation of nervous apprehension for +yourself, while all the time you are thinking only of me." + +Templemore shook his head. + +"I don't know how it is," he returned, "but the thought of that great +snake _haunts_ me. I feel as if some terrible trouble were in store +for us through it. A kind of presentiment; a feeling I have never had +before----" + +Elwood burst out laughing. + +"A presentiment! Great Scott! _You_ confessing to a presentiment! You +who always deride _my_ presentiments, and dreams, and omens! Well, this +is too good, upon my word! Who is the dreamer _now_, I should like to +know?" + +Just then they heard a call, and, looking along the path, saw Monella +at some distance beckoning to them. + +"Bring a lantern," they heard him say, "and come with me, both of you." + +"A lantern!" exclaimed Jack. He took one up and examined it to see that +there was plenty of oil. "What on earth can he want with a lantern? Is +he going to look for the sun in this land of shadow?" + +When they came up to Monella they looked at him inquiringly, but no +sign was to be had from a study of his impassive face. Yet there +seemed, Jack thought, a softer gleam in his eyes when he met his gaze. + +"I think our work is at an end," he said to the young men; "and," +addressing Jack more particularly, "your anxiety may now, let us hope, +be lightened." + +Then he turned and walked on with a gesture for the two to follow. And +Templemore felt confused; for the words Monella had spoken came like +an answer to the thoughts that had been in his mind; so much so that +he could not help asking himself, had this strange being divined what +he and Elwood had been talking, and he (Jack) had been so seriously +thinking, of? + +However, these speculations were soon driven away by surprise at the +change in the character of the wood. The trees grew less thickly, and +the ground became more stony, the undergrowth gradually thinner; more +daylight filtered down from above, and soon they found they could see +between the trunks of the trees for some distance ahead. And then, in +the front of them, it grew lighter and lighter, and shortly the welcome +sound of falling water struck upon their ears. Then they came upon a +stream--presumably the same that they had been, in a measure, following +through the wood--rushing and tumbling in a rocky bed--for they were +going up rising ground--and splashing and foaming in its leaps from +rock to rock. The trees became still sparser, and the light stronger, +till, finally, they emerged into an open space and saw, rising +straight up before them, the perpendicular flat rock that formed the +base of Roraima's lofty summit. + +It was here fairly light; indeed, a single ray of sunlight played upon +the splashing water in the little stream, and the spray sparkled in the +gleam. But still very little sunlight ever entered the place. The great +wall of rock that reared itself in a plumb-line two thousand feet into +the sky, overshadowed it completely on the one side; and on the other +were the great trees of this primæval forest towering up three hundred +feet or more, and extending their branches above across almost to the +rock, though below, the nearest trunk was quite fifty yards away. They +stood, in fact, upon the edge of a semi-circular clearing that extended +for a distance of perhaps a hundred yards, its radius being about fifty +yards if taken from the centre of the exposed portion of the cliff. At +each end of this space the trees and undergrowth closed in again upon +the rock in an impenetrable tangled mass, denser, and darker even, than +that through which the explorers had been slowly cutting their way. + +Some of the Indians were grouped round the stream, two or three +enjoying the luxury of wading in it, or sitting on the bank and +dangling their feet in the clear cool water. Matava and the others +were busy upon some kind of rough carpentering. Templemore and Elwood +saw that the stream issued from a hole in the rock near one end of the +clearing; and this was of itself a matter for surprise. They were, +however, still more astonished when Monella, with a strange smile, +pointed out another aperture in the rock near the centre of the open +portion of the cliff. It was about sixteen or eighteen feet from the +ground, and was not unlike a window or embrasure in a stone building of +considerable thickness. Within--at a distance of eighteen inches or +so--it seemed however to be closed by solid rock. + +The two gazed in silence at this unexpected sight; Elwood showing in +his eager manner the hopes that it aroused, and Templemore pondering in +silent wonder as to what it all meant. That Monella's 'calculations' +had led them to a most unexpected result thus far--whether by accident +or otherwise--he could not but admit. Of the fact there was now no +doubt. But a clearing of this character, opposite to what looked like +an opening in the rock, or entrance to a cave, was a fact too startling +to be the outcome of a mere coincidence, or a lucky chance. He knew +that a party of explorers might spend years--centuries, indeed, if they +could live long enough--in a search for such a place in that forest +and never find it, unless guided by the most exact information. Then +the fact that the opening was so nearly in the centre of the clearing +had a significance of its own; the question whether it was actually +the entrance to a cave or merely a curious accidental hollow in the +rock was thus answered, as it were, in advance. Besides, just below +the 'embrasure' a small stream trickled out, and, falling down the +rock, found its way amongst the stones to the larger water-course +beyond. Here there seemed presumptive evidence that the space at the +back of the rock was hollow--was, in fact, a cave. But in that case +the entrance must have been purposely closed by human hands. If so, by +whom? and when? and why? + +These thoughts revolved rapidly in Templemore's mind while he stood +looking at the rock. He glanced around at the giant trees, and thought +of the almost impenetrable character of the forest they had come +through, and he felt that, if the ideas that had come into his mind +were correct, it was impossible to suppose that such a cave could be +the retreat say, of any unknown Indians living at the present time. +Therefore, the puzzle seemed the greater. _Who_ could have been there +before them--and how long ago? + +But Matava now approached the cliff bearing a sort of rough ladder +that he had constructed under Monella's directions; this he placed +against the rock just under the opening, planting the ends firmly in +the ground. He had cut down two young saplings and, partly by means of +notches, and partly by twisting some strong fibres to hold them, had +fastened cross-pieces at short intervals, and so fashioned the whole +into a very serviceable ladder. + +Monella signed to him to hold it firmly, and proceeded to test its +strength. Then, satisfied as to this, he quietly mounted it till he +could insert his hand into the aperture. After a moment or two he +called to Elwood and Templemore to assist in steadying the ladder; and, +when they had come to the assistance of Matava and another Indian who +was with him, Monella leaned over into the opening and, exerting all +his great strength, pushed away the stone that was closing it, exposing +to view a cavern beyond. After a brief look inside, he asked for a +lighted lantern and a long stick, and, while these were being handed +up, the expectations and curiosity of his companions became excited +to a lively degree. The Indians, who had been amusing themselves in +the water, came crowding round, half pleased, half afraid at this +unexpected development of events. + +"You're never going to venture into that place?" Templemore asked. "It +may be full of deadly serpents. For Heaven's sake do not be rash enough +to risk it. Send one of the Indians----" + +Monella replied with a look--a look that Jack remembered for many a day +after. His eyes simply flashed; and then he said quickly, + +"Did you ever know me bid another go where I would not venture myself?" + +Then he took the lighted lantern, swung it into the cavern at the end +of the stick, and, having satisfied himself that the air within was +not foul, he threw the stick in first and followed, himself, into the +semi-darkness. + +A minute after, his head and shoulders re-appeared, just when Jack was +half way up the ladder to follow him. + +"Wait a few minutes before you come up," he asked him. "I just want to +give a glance round, and there is but one lantern. Or--well--suppose +you come up and wait inside. But tell the others to keep to the bottom +of the ladder, and be ready to hold it in case we should wish to beat a +hasty retreat." + +This seemed prudent counsel, and was carried out. When Jack got off +the ladder into the opening, he was told to jump down inside; and he +found there a level rocky floor about three feet below the aperture, +which had thus a resemblance to a veritable window. By the dim light it +gave he could see that he was in a cavern of considerable height and +extent, and Monella, with his lantern, disappearing through an arched +opening at some distance that seemed to lead to another cave within. He +had brought with him his double-barrel, one barrel loaded with small +shot, the other with ball, and he gave a look at the revolver in his +belt while he stood waiting at the entrance and gazing curiously about +him. He saw that a small stream of water ran through one side of the +cave; there were, in fact, two streams, for one ran in a ledge at some +distance from the ground; but when it came to the opening they had +come through, it fell to the floor and joined the other stream, the +whole finding its way out through a fissure in the rock and running +down outside, as has been before described. Now the stone slab that +had closed the 'window,' as Jack called the opening, had rested on a +continuation of what may be termed the sill, and, on being pushed, had +rolled off. It was a thin slab, roughly circular in shape; not unlike +what one might suppose a millstone to be in the rough. Jack regarded it +with close attention, almost indeed with awe; it spoke so plainly of +human beings having inhabited the place, or, at least, of their having +fashioned this method of closing the entrance to the cave. How long ago +had they been there? And, when they went away, why had they closed the +entrance so carefully? + +Monella seemed a long time away; so long that Jack at last began to +think of starting to look for him--they had already sent for another +lantern in case it should be required--when he heard his footsteps in +the distance, and shortly afterwards saw the gleam from his lantern. +When he came closer, Jack scanned his face keenly, but, as usual, read +nothing there. + +"You can call Elwood," said Monella, "and I will take you to where +I have been. You need have no fear; the place is quite free from +reptiles." + +When, however, Leonard was called, a difficulty arose; Matava and his +fellows objected very strongly to being left alone outside; but it +also appeared that they objected still more strongly to coming into +the cavern. On no consideration whatever would they enter 'the demons' +den,' as they had already named it. But, since they had to make a +choice, they elected, in the end, to remain outside and wait. + +When Elwood was inside and had had a few moments in which to get +accustomed to the obscurity and peer wonderingly about him, Monella +pointed out how the opening had been closed. + +"I want you to notice," he observed, "that this stone was _cemented_, +and this little stream of water that has accidentally found its way +round here, has, in the course of time, loosened the cement; else I +could not have pushed the stone away. We should have had to blast it." + +"Yes," said Jack; "and it also shows that it was closed _from the +inside_. Whoever last closed it never went out again--at least not by +this entrance. Where then did they go to?" + +"That's what we have to see about," returned Monella. "Now, follow me, +and I will show you something that will surprise you." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +THE CANYON WITHIN THE MOUNTAIN. + + +Monella, with the lantern in his hand, led his two companions through +an arched opening into a second cavern which seemed to be larger and +loftier than the first; and this, in turn, opened into a third, at one +end of which they could see that daylight entered. Monella stopped here +and, lifting the light high in one hand, pointed with the other to +side-openings in the rock. + +"They are side-galleries, so to speak," he said, "but do not appear to +be of any great extent. I have been to the end of two or three. They +all seem to be perfectly empty too; not so much as a trace of anything +did I see, save loose pieces of stone here and there, that had, no +doubt, fallen from the roof. Now we will go to the entrance on this +side." And he turned and walked on towards the place where they could +see the glimmering of daylight. + +Quite suddenly they turned a corner and saw before them a high archway, +leading out into the open air; and, before the two young men had had +time to express surprise, they had stepped out of the gloomy cavern +into a valley, where they stood and stared in helpless astonishment +upon a scene that was as lovely and enchanting as it was utterly +unexpected. + +They saw before them the bottom of a valley, or canyon, of about half +a mile in length, and nearly a quarter of a mile in width; its floor, +if one may use the expression, consisted chiefly of fine sand of a warm +tawny hue; its sides, of rocks of white or pinkish white fine-grained +sandstone, with here and there veins, two or three feet wide, of some +metallic-looking material that glistened in the sunlight like masses +of gold and silver. In other places were veins of jasper, porphyry, +or some analogous rock, that sparkled and flashed as though embedded +with diamonds; other parts again were dark-coloured, like black marble, +throwing up in strong relief the ferns and flowers that grew in front +of them. + +At the further end of the valley a waterfall tumbled and foamed in +the rays of the sun which, being now almost overhead, threw its beams +along the whole length of the canyon. The stream that flowed below the +fall widened out into clear pools here and there, fringed by stretches +of velvety sward of a vivid green. The water of this stream was of a +wonderful turquoise-blue tint, different from anything, Templemore +thought, that he had ever seen before; and he and Elwood gazed with +admiration at its inviting pellucid pools. But most extraordinary of +all were the flowers that nearly everywhere were to be seen. In shape, +in brilliancy of colouring, and in many other respects, they differed +entirely from even the rare and wonderful orchids and other blossoms +they had come across in the vicinity of Roraima. Of trees there were +not many, though a few were dotted about here and there by the side of +the river; and, in places, graceful palms grew out of the rocky slopes +at the sides and leaned over, somewhat after the fashion of gigantic +ferns. Though the valley was so shut in, and the heat in the sun very +great, yet the amount of green vegetation on all sides, the blue +water, and the light-coloured, cool-looking rocks, made up a scene +that was gratefully refreshing after the gloom of the forest scenes to +which the explorers had been so long accustomed. Moreover, by stepping +back into the cool air of the cavern, they could look out upon it all +without experiencing the drawback of the intense heat. + +Elwood was in ecstasies. The triumphant light in his eyes, when he +turned round and looked at his friend, was a thing to see. + +"You confounded, wretched old grumbler," he exclaimed, "what have you +to say now? Is not _this_ worth coming for? Or is it that even _this_ +will not suit you? Perhaps it is all too bright, the water too blue, +the flowers too highly coloured, or"--here a most delicious scent was +wafted across from some of the flowers--"they are perfumed too highly +to please you! You haven't found fault with anything yet, and we have +been here nearly five minutes!" + +Jack laughed; and Leonard noticed that it was more like his old, easy, +good-natured laugh. + +"I think you are too severe upon me, Leonard," he replied. "Don't you +think so, Monella?" + +Monella, the while, had been standing gazing on the scene like one in a +dream. More than once he passed his hand across his eyes in a confused +way, as though to make sure he was awake. When thus addressed, however, +he seemed to rouse himself, and, without noticing the bantering +question that had been addressed to him, and, extending one hand slowly +towards the valley that lay before them, said, + +"I praise Heaven that I have been led, after many days, to the land +that I have seen in my visions. _Now_ do I begin to understand why they +were sent. And you too, my son," he added, looking at Leonard, "you +have had your visions and your dreams. Tell me, does this not remind +you of them?" + + [Illustration: "A SCENE THAT WAS GRATEFULLY REFRESHING." + [_Page 72._] + +"Indeed it does," returned Leonard seriously. "Though, till you spoke +of it, I had not thought of it. I felt so glad to think we had been +successful so far, and that your expectations were being justified. It +is all very strange." + +"I am out of all that," observed Jack, with a comical mixture of +offended dignity and good-natured condescension. "You dreamers of +dreams have the best of such beings as I am. _You_ are led on by +visions of what is in store for you, as it would seem, while _I_ have +to work in the dark, and follow others blindly, and----" + +"And think of nothing but how best you can serve and protect your +friends," said Monella, looking at him with a kindly smile. "We are +not all alike, my friend. It is not given to all to 'dream dreams,' +any more than it is given to all to have true manly courage combined +with almost womanly affection for those they call their friends. We +three have little to boast of as between one another, I fancy. Would +it were so more often where three friends are found grouped together +or associated in any undertaking. But now to consider what is next +to be done. It seems to me we could not have a better place for our +head-quarters in our future explorations than this cavern. Here we +have all we want: shelter from rain, and sun, water--pretty well all +we could ask for. We must see about getting our things along here." He +paused for a moment and then continued, "On second thoughts I see no +reason why you should not remain here. There is no more baggage than +the Indians can carry amongst them, and that is all we have to trouble +about. I will go back, and you two stay here." + +"That seems scarcely fair," Jack protested. "I have been lazy all the +morning. I propose I go and leave you here." + +Monella shook his head. + +"You cannot manage the Indians as I can," he answered. "Indeed, that is +one reason why I think you would do better to remain here. When they +find you do not return, and that they have to obey me or remain in the +forest alone, they are more likely to do what we require. But I will +ask you not to go far away, and not to fire off a gun or anything, +unless in case of actual danger and necessity." + +"You do not believe that the place is inhabited?" Jack exclaimed in +surprise. + +"Who can tell?" was the only reply, as Monella took up the lantern and +turned away. + +Left to themselves, Jack pulled out his inevitable pipe, the while that +Elwood sought, and brought in, a couple of short logs from a fallen +tree to serve as seats; and the two then sat down in the shade of the +cavern-entrance. + +Jack was very thoughtful; but his thoughtfulness now was of a different +kind from his late moody silence. He, indeed, was ruminating deeply +upon Monella, who was every day--every hour almost--becoming a greater +mystery to him. He had been particularly struck with his manner and +the expression of his face when they had stood together, looking out +upon that curious scene. In Monella's _words_ there had not been much +perhaps, but in other respects he had strangely impressed the usually +unimpressionable Templemore. There had been in his features a sort of +exaltation, a light and fire as of one actuated by a great and lofty +purpose, so entirely opposed to the idea that his end and aim were +connected with gold-seeking, that Jack Templemore confessed himself +more puzzled with him than he had ever been before. Too often, as he +reflected, when a man sets his mind, at the time of life Monella might +be supposed to have reached, upon gold-seeking, he is actuated by sheer +greed and covetousness. But by no single look or action whatever had +Monella ever conveyed a suggestion that the lust of gold was in his +breast. Yet, if that were not so, what was his object? Did he seek +fame--the fame of being a great discoverer? Scarcely. Again and again +he had declared, on the one hand, his contempt for and weariness of +the world in general, and, on the other, his fixed intention never to +return to civilised life. Jack began to suspect that all his talk about +the wealth to be gained from their enterprise had been chiefly designed +to secure their aid, and that for himself it had no weight--offered no +incentive. What, then, _was_ Monella's secret aim or object? What was +the hidden expectation or hope, or belief, or whatever it was, that +had led him into an undertaking that had appeared almost a chimera; +that had so taken possession of his mind as to have become almost a +religion with him; that had enabled him to support fatigue and physical +exertion, privation, hunger and thirst, as probably could few other +men on the face of the earth; and that had become such an article of +faith--had made him such a firm believer in his own destiny, that no +danger seemed to have any meaning for him? Neither storm nor flood, +lightning nor tempest, savage beasts nor deadly serpents--none of +the dangers or risks that the bravest men acknowledged, even if they +faced them, seemed to have existence so far as this strange man showed +any consciousness of them. Never had they known him to step aside +one foot, to pause or hesitate one moment, to avoid any of them. He +simply went his way in supreme contempt of them all; and, until quite +lately--till within the hour almost--Jack had attributed all this +either to madness, or to an inordinate thirst for riches for riches' +sake--which, as he reflected, would be, in itself, a sort of madness. +Now, however, his opinion was altering. The liking he had all along +felt was changing to surprised admiration. He remembered the calm, +unwavering confidence with which Monella had led them through all +their seemingly interminable difficulties and discouragements to their +present success--for success he felt it was, in one sense, if not in +another. In the strange flowers and plants before them, alone, there +were fame and fortune, and what might there not be yet beyond, now that +they had in very truth penetrated into that mysterious mountain that +had so long defied and baffled all would-be explorers? Monella, he +still felt, might be a bit mad--a dreamer or a mystic--but, evidently, +he was a man of great and strange resources. Few engineers, as Jack +himself knew, could have led them thus straight to their goal from +the data he had had to work upon. Yet he showed now neither elation +nor surprise, and in particular, as Jack confessed to himself rather +shamefacedly, no disposition to remind him of his many exhibitions +of contemptuous unbelief. With these thoughts in his mind, and the +remembrance of Monella's unvarying kindness of manner--to say nothing +of the way he had exposed himself to danger on his behalf--Templemore +began to understand better than he ever had before the affection that +the warm-hearted Leonard entertained for their strange friend, and +he became conscious that a similar feeling was fast rooting itself +in his own heart. In fact Monella was now, at last, exercising over +the practical-minded Templemore that mysterious fascination and magic +charm that had made the Indians his devoted slaves, and Leonard his +unquestioning admirer and disciple. + +Presently, Leonard, who had fallen into one of his daydreams, woke up +with a slight start and exclaimed, + +"What a paradise!" + +Jack smiled, and said, "I wonder whether it is a paradise without a +serpent, as it is without an Eve? But your dreams, Leonard, if I +remember, were mixed up with a comely damsel; and there is none here. I +fear we shall have to regard her as the part that goes by contraries, +as they say." + +Leonard looked hard at him, and there was evident disappointment in his +glance and tone when he asked, + +"Do you then think this place is uninhabited?" + +"I do," was the reply. "And I will tell you why. That stone that closed +the entrance from the forest was placed there by some one, no doubt, +and by some one inside. Yes; but how long ago? A very long time! +Hundreds of years, I should say. It has taken quite that time for that +stream of water to hollow out the little channel in the rocky side of +the cave and play upon the cement until it has become loosened. The +wood outside tells the same tale. It must be hundreds of years since +any human beings made their way to and fro through the wood, to or +from this place. _Once_ there were many people here; and they were +not ordinary people either, I can tell you. Not Indians, I mean, for +instance. They were clever workers in stone. That 'window,' as I call +it, through which we came in, is artificial." + +Elwood gave an exclamation of surprise. + +"Yes; I noticed it, though you did not. I have little doubt that +Monella noticed it too. The cavern was formerly all open, or, at +least, it had a large opening, and I am almost certain its floor was +originally level with the ground outside. If so, the present floor +is artificial, and there are probably vaults beneath. Outside, the +stonework is so artfully done that you see no trace of it; it appears +to be all solid rock; but inside I saw distinctly traces of the joints. +Then, look at these archways, at the one we are now sitting under! They +have been worked upon too--to enlarge them, probably; to give more +head-room when the floor was made higher. See! here are marks of the +chisel!" And Templemore got up and pointed to many places where the +marks left by the tool were clearly to be seen. + +"Well," said Elwood, "I suppose we shall solve the problem and set all +doubts at rest before many days are over. For my part I am in a curious +state of mind about it--half impatient, half the reverse. If it is to +turn out as you say, I am in no hurry to terminate the uncertainty. +This strange spot, the fact that we are really, at last, inside the +wonderful mountain--these things open such a vista of marvellous +possibilities that I--it seems to me--I would rather, you know----" + +"Oh, yes, I know, you old dreamer," Jack exclaimed, laughing. "You +would rather wait and have time to dream on for a while than have your +dreams rudely dispelled by hard facts. Now suppose we go and take a +look round in the shade over there. We need not go out of sight of this +entrance; so that Monella will find us immediately he returns." + +The sun had now moved so far over that one side of the valley was +lying in shadow, and they strolled out to observe more closely the new +flowers and plants they had thus far seen only from a distance. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +ALONE ON RORAIMA'S SUMMIT. + + +When Monella returned about two hours later, the two young men had much +to tell him of the wonderful flowers and plants they had found, of +strange fish in the water, and curious _perfumed_ butterflies that they +had mistaken for flowers. + +There were many of these extraordinary insects flying about. In +colouring and shape they resembled some of the flowers; when resting +upon a spray or twig they looked exactly like blossoms, and upon +nearing them, one became conscious of a most exquisite scent. But just +when one leaned a little nearer to smell the supposed flower, it would +flutter quickly away, and insect and perfume disappeared altogether. +Many of the flowers that were scattered about the rocks were shaped +like exquisitely moulded wax bells of all sorts and kinds of colours +and patterns, white, red, yellow, blue, etc., striped, spotted, +speckled. So distinct were they from anything the explorers had before +seen, that they had picked some and brought them into the cavern to +show Monella; but he could not give them a name. + +The stream from the waterfall, they found, disappeared into the ground +just before it reached the cavern. No doubt this was the stream they +had seen issuing from the rock upon the other side. + +At the further end the valley began to rise, following the stream, +which came down in a series of small falls or cataracts. About this +part they had found some other caves; but had not entered them. + +"And most remarkable of all," said Templemore, "we have not seen a +single snake, lizard, or reptile of any sort or kind. Yet this is just +the sort of place one would have expected to be full of them. Nor have +we seen either animals or birds." + +Monella told them the Indians still refused to enter the cave. They +all three, therefore, went to the 'window,' and assisted to get their +camp equipage inside, the Indians bringing the things to the top of +the ladder and handing them through the opening. They preferred, +themselves, to camp outside, and had already made a fire to cook some +monkeys they had killed with bows and arrows. + +When all their things were safe inside, Leonard and Jack took some +fishing nets and soon caught some fish in the pools of the stream in +the canyon. They then made a fire just outside the cavern entrance, and +cooked them for their evening meal. The fish seemed to be a kind of +trout, but of a species they had never seen before. + +Monella expressed his regret that all attempts to persuade the Indians +out of their fear of 'the demon-haunted mountain' had failed. + +"They will neither come inside nor remain outside by themselves; +that is, if we go away from here to explore farther. It seems to me, +therefore, that we ought to have all our stores brought here before we +start, and then let the Indians go back by themselves. We may be here +for months, so had better get them to fetch everything we can possibly +require from 'Monella Lodge.'" + +Such was Monella's advice. + +"It will take two or three days at least--possibly more," he continued, +"to transport all our stores here. During that time we must be content +to attend to nothing else, and postpone any further exploration of the +mountain. Besides, when we once start, none can tell how far we may be +led on. Better have our 'base of operations' settled and secure first. +How far away are those other caves that you saw?" + +"About a quarter of a mile," Jack answered. + +"We will have a look at them in the morning," Monella said +thoughtfully. "It may be wiser to hide some of our stores and +belongings in different places, so that, if any accident should happen +to one lot, the others may be all right. Eh, Templemore?" + +"Just the very idea I had in my head when I spoke to you of those other +caves," Jack responded. "We can take half an hour or so to explore them +in the morning." + +"Better take longer," observed Monella. "Better take the day, and do it +thoroughly. Much may depend upon it hereafter. Suppose, therefore, that +you remain here while Elwood and I return to 'Monella Lodge' and see +about packing and bringing some of the 'belongings'? Then, if we find +another journey necessary, you can go next time, and Elwood and I will +remain here on guard. But we cannot get back to-morrow night. Do you +mind staying here alone?" + +"Not I!" said Jack, laughing. + +"Very well then; we will arrange it so. We shall load up our two +animals, and perhaps one journey will suffice after all. Any way, you +hunt for the best and most secret hiding-places you can find. See that +they are dry, you know. There are the three casks of powder----" + +"What! Will you bring them too?" + +"Certainly. We may have blasting to do before we have done with what +we have in hand. The extra arms, too, we will divide, and secrete in +different places." + +"I see the idea," Jack assented. "Rely on me to do the best that can be +done." + +The three went back, after their meal, to where the Indians were +camping just outside the 'window.' Matava looked grave, and shook his +head dubiously, when Leonard told him of the arrangements come to. + +"My heart is heavy, my master," he said in his own language, "at the +thought of leaving you to fight the demons of the mountain. It is +not good this thing that you are about to undertake. Doubtless the +demons have left this place open as a trap to tempt you to enter their +country. When you are well inside they will close it and have you +securely captured and we shall never see you more. Alas! that my mother +should ever have said aught to lead you on to this terrible enterprise. +Better had she died first. I feel sure, if you go inside there, we +shall never see you again!" + +Elwood only smiled, and bid him be of good cheer. + +"We shall return," he replied, "and, I trust, not empty-handed. And, if +so, you and my old nurse shall share in my good fortune. But, if you +think there is danger, why do you not come with us to help? It is not +like a brave Indian to be afraid!" + +The Indian shook his head and sighed. + +"Matava is no coward," he responded. "His master knows that well. +Against all earthly dangers Matava will help him to his last breath, +but to battle with the demons of Roraima is but madness--and it is +useless. No mortal man may brave them and live. _Some_ one must take +the tale to those left behind. It is not good that they should never +know." + +"That is a nice way of getting out of it, Matava," said Templemore, +who had just come up and heard the last sentence. "But please don't +take intelligence of our fate till you have learned it. Above all," he +continued seriously, "do not alarm our friends in Georgetown by any +wild, preposterous----" + +"Oh, don't trouble as to that," Elwood interrupted. "Our friends know +Matava and his superstitions about the mountain too well by this time. +Besides, we will leave letters with him, to deliver, in case he returns +before we get back." + +It was now getting dark, and the three white men went back into the +cavern to prepare their sleeping arrangements. First, it was determined +to make a more thorough examination of the side-galleries, and this was +soon done, for they were found to be of very limited extent. In passing +the archway that led into the canyon, however, Leonard happened to +glance out, and uttered an exclamation which called the others to his +side. They also looked out into the valley, and were as much astonished +as at their first sight of it that morning. It seemed to be lighted up! + +On all sides, high and low, small lights were seen. They were of +various colours, and hung, some singly, some in groups or clusters. +Many drooped over the water, and were reflected in the pools below. The +effect was extraordinary. The place seemed a veritable fairy land; and +exclamations of astonishment and admiration burst from each of them +while he stood and gazed upon the scene. + +Then they went out to the nearest lights, and the marvel was explained. +The bell-shaped flowers that had excited their curiosity during the +afternoon all glowed with radiance. Inside each was a small projection +apparently of a fungoid character, that was phosphorescent. It sent +forth a light nearly as brilliant as that of a firefly; and this +illumined the bell-shaped blossom, which then appeared of different +hues according to its colouring by daylight. Even those that Elwood +had picked, and thrown down at the entrance of the cavern, glowed with +appreciable glimmer. + +"I've heard of some kinds of toadstools and fungi being +phosphorescent," Templemore remarked, "but never of such a thing in +flowers." + +"Yet," observed Monella, "if you come to consider the matter, there is +nothing more remarkable in the one case than in the other." + +The night passed without incident, and all were astir before dawn, +making preparations for the day's work. After a light meal, all +except Templemore set out on their way to 'Monella Lodge,' while Jack +went out into the canyon to seek for caves and likely hiding-places +for their stores, and to look about generally. He took with him his +usual two-barrelled gun, a supply of cartridges, and some biscuits +and other provisions. Water he knew he could get in plenty. He also +took a lantern to enable him to explore the caves. Before leaving the +'window,' as he now always called the entrance by which they had found +their way into the first cavern, he drew up the ladder, and then, with +some difficulty, rolled the stone that had closed it into its place +again. Most likely he could not have given any reason for this action +if he had been asked; but probably a vague hatred of the gloomy forest, +and satisfaction in shutting it out of view, were what chiefly prompted +him. + +"I will take all I want round to the other side," he said to himself. +"I like that side best. It's a more cheerful outlook." + +He thoroughly explored the caves, and decided that they were fairly +suitable for the purpose they had in view. Then, quite accidentally, +he came upon another that was so hidden by a tangled mass of creepers +that its existence would never have been suspected. He fancied he had +seen a small animal disappear behind a bush, and trying with a stick +to see whether he could rout it out, he found what at first he thought +was a large hole; but, on pushing back the creepers, which hung like a +curtain across it, he found a large opening about eight or nine feet +high. Inside was a roomy cavern with many recesses here and there, like +high shelves in the rock, and many short side-galleries. Just the very +place they wanted, he decided. Neither here nor elsewhere did he meet +with any signs of his pet aversion--the serpent tribe. + +He now began the ascent of the canyon, following always the course +of the stream that came down it. In some places the way was easy and +direct; indeed, as he could not but remark, there was every appearance +that a well-defined, wide pathway, with steps here and there, had at +one time existed. But in places it was broken away; the steps cut in +the rock had crumbled, or trees growing in the fissures had rent them +asunder. In other places masses of rock, fallen from heights above, +blocked the road; and, occasionally, the trunk of a fallen tree. Then +he came to a wayside cave, and was glad to rest in its shade from +the heat of the sun, which began to pour down into the canyon with +intolerable fierceness. He had proceeded so far that he imagined he +must be half way to the top; and he looked up the canyon still beyond +him and at the overhanging cliffs with curiosity, wondering how much +farther he would have to go to reach its head, and what he would see +when he arrived there. + +While he sat quietly pondering this question, and enjoying a smoke +following upon a light lunch, the idea grew upon him to complete +the ascent that afternoon. He knew that, if he did so, it would be +impossible to return that night, and this meant passing it in the open +air. But that he did not at all mind; he was accustomed to it; and, +since he saw no signs of serpents anywhere, there was an absence of the +only thing that troubled him in such case. Monella and the others would +not return till the following evening; he had plenty of time to do it +in, and nothing else to occupy his time. + +But would Monella like it? Why, however, should he object? He could do +no harm in going to the top and back. It was not as though the place +were inhabited and he might get involved in any adventures with the +'natives.' + +The more he thus thought about it, the more strongly did the feeling +grow upon him to make the venture. True, he had not much with him in +the way of provisions; but he had enough for supper and breakfast if he +put himself upon short rations. In the end he resolved to risk it. + +Accordingly, so soon as the sun had gone across sufficiently to shade +the path, he started off once more, and made his way still upwards. He +encountered many obstacles that delayed his journey, but eventually, +just when night was falling, he arrived at what he calculated must be +the top of the ascent. It was a grassy plateau of a few hundred yards +in extent, facing cliffs that rose still higher and shut out the view +and were inaccessible. Down these the stream still flowed, though much +smaller in volume than was the case below. What, however, caused him +dismay, was to find that he was shut in on the other side by a belt +of forest that seemed to be almost as dense and impenetrable as the +hated wood below. It was too late to think of going back; there he must +stay and pass the night. It was cold, too, up there, and he had no +rug in which to roll himself. In fact, he began to wish himself back +in the cavern, where he could have cooked himself a good supper and +then rested comfortably. There was not even a view; he had hoped to +have a glorious prospect and, having brought his field-glass, even that +he might be able to look across the forest and savanna and make out +'Monella Lodge'; possibly see his friends, who would now be nearing it. +Instead of that, he was shut in upon a narrow ledge beside an unknown +forest that might be full of wild animals of a dangerous kind. + +Altogether Jack felt he had not acted wisely. He went a little way into +the wood; but, finding it very dense, and fearful of losing his way in +its dark recesses, he soon returned to the clearing. Finally, as it +grew dark, being tired and drowsy after his exertions in climbing the +canyon, he fell asleep. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +VISION OR REALITY? + + +The following afternoon, a long train of Indians, with Monella and +Elwood at its head, was making its way slowly along the tunnel-like +road that had been cut through the heart of Roraima Forest. They all +carried loads, and they had with them, besides, Monella's two llamas, +which were also loaded with as much as they could carry. All looked +more or less wearied from their long march, and cast many anxious +glances ahead as they approached the end of their journey. When they +reached the part where the path opened and the trees became thinner, +Matava fired two shots, the agreed-on signal to Templemore; they were +answered at once by one from him, and, shortly afterwards, he was seen +making his way towards them. He relieved Elwood of a few things he was +carrying, and inquired whether they brought any news. + +"None," said Elwood; "and you?" + +"First of all," returned Jack, "here's a very curious and awkward +thing. I have come across a large _puma_ that has taken a great fancy +to me, and has become somewhat of a 'white elephant.' At the present +moment it is looking out of window, anxiously awaiting my return; and, +though it has not yet learned to scramble down the ladder, I'm not at +all sure it won't acquire that accomplishment shortly--or it may even +risk the leap down. What I am thinking of is the animals you have with +you--they might tempt it; otherwise, it seems tame and good-natured +enough, and I do not think it will hurt either you or the Indians." + +"Does it seem like an animal that has been tamed, then?" asked Monella. +"And where did you come across it? Inside, I suppose?" + +"Why, yes. But I'll tell you later. Meantime, can't we halt the animals +here, and keep them out of sight for awhile? My new friend is as big +as a lioness, and of the same sex--and would have one of them down in +a moment, if she felt so inclined. You can't tie her up, you know, +without a collar and chain, even if one cared to make the attempt. I +tried to drive her away, but it was of no use; and I've been sitting +there racking my brains as to what on earth I was to do when you came, +and hoping against hope that the beast would take herself off." And +Jack looked the picture of comical perplexity and bewilderment. + +Meantime, the train had come to a halt, and Matava and the other +Indians crowded round Templemore and examined him with great curiosity +and attention. There were many strange Indians who had been induced, +for a consideration, to accompany the party, and these were equally +inquisitive. Some came and touched him, as though to make sure he +was real flesh and blood. Since Jack seemed inclined to resent this, +Leonard laughingly explained. + +"They can scarcely believe that any man can have passed a night in the +mountain and live to tell the tale," Elwood told Templemore. "Their +idea is that you have been eaten up or captured by the 'demons,' who +have sent back a ghostly presentment of their victim to lead on the +others. So they are anxious to know whether it is really yourself or +a spectral imitation. You may be sure, too, your 'lioness' will be a +matter of serious speculation to them. She will be looked upon as a +familiar spirit, to a certainty." + +Monella had said little; but he now proposed to go on to the cave at +once with Jack and Elwood, to see how matters really stood, leaving the +others to await their return. + +On nearing the 'window' they saw, sure enough, the head and paws of an +immense tawny-coloured animal that gave a cry--a sort of half-whine, +half-roar--of recognition on seeing Jack. The ladder was lying on the +ground outside. + +"There you are," he observed with a mixture of mock gravity and real +anxiety; and he waved his hand towards the animal. "Let me introduce +you to the 'Lady of the Mountain.' I only hope to goodness she will +behave herself and receive you in a friendly manner; for, if not, _I_ +have no control over her. I disclaim all responsibility." + +Monella and Elwood looked curiously at what they could see of the +animal. It seemed, as Jack had said, nearly as large as a lioness. + +"It is a puma," said Monella decidedly, "though a very large one. I +never saw one anything near the size. However, there is no need to be +afraid of it; you have heard me say you need never fear a puma." + +"Yes," returned Jack, "and here is an opportunity of testing your +faith in your own theory. I confess, if I did not already know she was +well-disposed towards myself, I should think twice before I ventured +upon going near her." + +"Nonsense!" said Monella, taking up the ladder and placing it against +the opening. "I will show you the creature is tame and friendly enough. +I could see it at the first glance." And he ascended the ladder and +entered the cavern, pushing the puma on one side as coolly as if it +were a pet dog. Then he turned and called to Elwood to follow. + +Jack also went after them, and found the puma already on friendly terms +with both, much to his own relief; for he had had misgivings. + +"The question now is what about the llamas?" he next said. "Do you +think she is to be trusted there--and with the Indians?" + +"With the Indians--yes--though _they_ probably would object," replied +Monella; "but, with the llamas, it is doubtful. So we had best be on +the safe side, and keep them, if possible, out of her sight." + +"She's wonderfully playful," observed Jack; "just like a great kitten. +I've been playing with her with my lasso, and she will run about after +it by the hour together, just for all the world like a kitten. If you +want to keep her out of the way on the other side, all that need be +done is for one of us to stay there and play with her." + +"Let Elwood do so then," Monella decided. "He is tired; and you can +come and help unload." + +The animal had, in fact, already begun to show a liking for Leonard, +and, when he went out towards the canyon, it followed him at once. Jack +watched this with some surprise, and affected much disgust. + +"Just like the generality of females," he remarked, "inconstant and +changeable. Here have I been at the trouble of capturing the beast, and +being worried with her all day, only to see her transfer her affections +and allegiance to some one else at the very first opportunity!" + +The unloading was then proceeded with, and before dark everything they +had brought was placed within the cavern temporarily, to be moved on to +other places, as might subsequently be determined. + +When all had been brought in, the Indians set to work to cook their +evening meal, while Jack did the same outside the canyon entrance. +The hunters had shot an antelope, and with some of this and some fish +a satisfying meal was provided; the puma lying down and watching +the proceedings with evident curiosity, but with no more attempt at +interference or stealing than in the case of a well-trained dog. +Needless to say she was rewarded for her patience with a share. + +When the meal was over, and Jack and Leonard took out their pipes, +Monella, looking at the former, said,-- + +"You have something of importance to tell us. What have you seen?" + +At this Elwood turned and regarded Jack with surprise. + +"Why, what is it?" he exclaimed. "You have said nothing about it all +this time!" + +Jack looked a little sheepish. He was somewhat taken aback, too, by +Monella's direct question. It brought to his mind the query that had +often arisen before--could this strange being read his thoughts? + +"I scarcely know whether I have seen something or only dreamed it," he +began hesitatingly; and seeing Leonard, at this, open his eyes, Jack +went on desperately: "Well, yes! I may as well out with it and make a +clean breast of it! I _have_ something to tell you, and for the life of +me, I cannot make up my mind whether I actually _saw_ it, or dreamed +it--whether, in short, it was reality, or only a vision!" + +Leonard opened his eyes wider than ever, and gave a long whistle. + +"_You_ having 'visions'!" he exclaimed in unbounded astonishment. +"_You_, the scoffer, the hard-headed, prosaic-minded derider of dreams +and visions! Great Scott! Is the world then coming to an end? Or have +the demons of the mountain in truth bewitched you as Matava declared +they would?" + +"Ah! I knew you would laugh at me, of course. And I feel I deserve it. +However, if you want to hear what I have to tell, you will have to keep +quiet a bit. I cannot explain while you are talking, you know." + +"I'll not say another word; I'm 'mum,' but amazed!" Elwood answered. +"Now go a-head." + +"Well, yesterday, after you left, I pulled up the ladder and carefully +closed the 'window' by rolling the stone back into the place, as we +first found it. I thought to myself I would shut out the gloomy forest. +Then I went up the canyon to explore the caves we spoke of, and soon, +by accident, found a new one, so curiously hidden from sight, that +it seemed the very thing we wanted; so there was no need to search +farther. Then I thought I would stroll up the canyon a bit, and +reconnoitre; and I found another cave about half way up, and, finding +the sun getting warm, went in and had a rest. When it grew shady again, +I thought, instead of coming back, I would go on to the top to see the +view." + +Monella uttered an exclamation. + +"Ah! yes. I know you mean I ought to have kept below. However, no harm +has been done, and I could see no objection to going up and taking a +peep from the top. I had my glasses with me and thought I might even +catch a glimpse of you on your way to 'Monella Lodge.' However, by the +time I reached the top it was getting dusk, and, after all, I found +myself quite shut in by yet higher rocks on one side that I could not +climb, and a thick wood on the other. There was a grassy knoll of a few +hundred square yards in extent, and there I had to make up my mind to +pass the night. I was tired out; and, soon after it grew dark, I fell +asleep." + +Templemore paused, and glanced doubtfully at Monella, as if expecting +him to say something; but he remained silent, and Jack proceeded:-- + +"I seemed to wake up after being asleep for an hour or two. I say +_seemed_ to wake up--I really cannot say--but either that, or I dreamed +the whole thing. Well, I seemed to wake up, and fancied I heard distant +shouts. I looked sleepily round and was surprised and alarmed to see +a very unmistakable glow in the sky through the trees. It struck me +at once that the forest must be on fire, and if so, I thought, my +position might be an awkward one. If the wood were burning, and the +fire travelling in the direction of where I was, to have to retreat +down the canyon in the dark would be anything but agreeable. After +some consideration I decided to venture a little way into the wood, +and climb a tree in the hope of getting a view of what was going on. I +could hardly, I reflected, lose my way, for, when I wished to return, +I should only have to turn my back on the direction in which the fire +lay and march straight back. Accordingly, I made my way into the wood; +at first it was very dense, but soon it grew thinner, and, encouraged +by this, I went straight on, when I emerged on to a high plateau, where +an extraordinary sight presented itself. I seemed to be on the edge of +an extensive sort of basin; I could see for miles; and in the centre, +as it appeared, there was a broad lake, and beside the lake were lofty +buildings lighted up on all sides, the lights being reflected in the +water. There seemed to me a large city; there were buildings that +looked like grand palaces; there were wide noble-looking embankments +and promenades and bridges, all well lighted; and, on the lake, boats, +also lighted, were going to and fro, filled with people. I could hear +shouts and cries, though of what nature it was impossible to say; and +through my glasses I could plainly distinguish numbers of people moving +about. It was as though some kind of _fête_ were going on. The large +buildings towered into the air, and their cupolas and turrets glistened +as though built of gold and silver. In effect, it was a wonderful +sight, and how long I stood watching it I cannot say; but, after a +time, the lights went down and all became silent and dark. I managed to +find my way back to my camping ground, and, while thinking it all over +in astonished wonder, I fell asleep again, as I suppose. At any rate, +when I finally awoke, the sun was shining and this animal was lying on +the grass by my side." + +"What! the puma?" Leonard asked. + +"Yes. I was rather upset at first sight of her, you may be sure. To +wake and find oneself in a wild place at the mercy of a great animal +like that is a startler for any one's nerves, I can assure you. No +chance to use one's rifle or anything, you know. However, while I lay +very still and watched it, not knowing what to do, I saw it must be +a puma, though an unusually large one. Then I thought of what you, +Monella, had told us--that we need never be afraid of a puma. And then +the beast turned round and began licking my hand! It stood up, too, and +purred, and put up its tail just like a tame cat; so I made friends +with it and found it was quite disposed to be on good terms. After a +bit my dream came back to me, and I went into the wood some distance, +but could see nothing. The forest seemed awfully thick, and to get +denser at every step; so I finally came away, thinking I must either +have had a remarkably vivid dream or vision, or that I had really been +the sport of some demons of the mountain such as Matava and his Indian +friends so thoroughly believe in." And Jack paused, and looked at his +two companions with an odd mixture of doubt and bewilderment. + +Elwood's face, while he had been listening, had become lighted up with +sympathetic enthusiasm. It fell a little at the end of the recital, +when Jack made the suggestion about the 'demons.' + +"Certainly," he said, "it sounds like witchcraft to hear you, our own +matter-of-fact Jack, who never dreams, make such suggestions. But, +either one way or the other, it goes to prove that there is something +very extraordinary about this mountain." + +Elwood looked at Monella. + +"What do you think of it all?" he asked. + +"I think," he replied, "that our friend ought, in future, to be less +ready to deride those who may have to tell of strange things, whether +dreams and visions, or out-of-the-way experiences." + +"I admit that to be a just rebuke," Jack responded with a good-natured +laugh; "but it does not tell us, all the same, what your real opinion +may be." But Monella had already risen from where he had been sitting +and moved away to speak to the Indians. + +"I say, Jack," said Leonard, "can't you _really_ say, straight out, +whether you _saw_ this or only dreamed it?" + +"Truly, my dear boy, it seemed so natural that I should say it was +real, only for the inherent improbability of the thing. Then, too, I +could see nothing this morning to confirm it, you know." + +"Surely," Elwood said dreamily, "the Indian tales of demons that +can bewitch you cannot have any foundation? There cannot be an +unsubstantial city of demons to be seen at night, that vanishes and +becomes only plain forest in the daytime? That is taking us back to the +Arabian Nights, isn't it?" + +Jack shook his head. + +"I am more bewildered and puzzled than I can possibly give you any idea +of," he returned. "The whole thing is beyond me; the sight I saw, or +dreamed; and then, again, the behaviour of this animal here." + +"Ah," Elwood said, "this puma! Does it not behave as though it were a +tame animal used to the company of human beings?" + +"I must say that idea has occurred to me more than once to-day; but +the more I think over it, the more hopelessly puzzling the whole thing +becomes." And Templemore, for the time being, gave it up. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +IN SIGHT OF EL DORADO. + + +The next morning Templemore, after leading Monella and Elwood to the +hidden cave he had discovered, set out early with the Indians for +'Monella Lodge' to bring in the remainder of the stores; and, while +there, in the evening, he wrote long letters to his friends, to be +entrusted to Matava to take to Georgetown. Amongst them, we may be +sure, was one to the fair Maud, who, amidst all the excitement of his +adventures, was never long absent from his thoughts. His letter to her +was grave, almost sad in its tone. He knew he was about to set out upon +a critical venture, the end of which none could see, and he warned her +not to be surprised if nothing were heard of them for a long time. + +When, the following afternoon, he and his party once more made their +way back through the forest to where they had left Monella and Elwood, +and had halted just out of sight, those two soon came to meet him in +response to the usual signal-shots. The first glance at Elwood's face +told Jack that he had some important news to impart. While Monella +was greeting the Indians and giving directions for the unloading and +camping, Leonard whispered to Jack, + +"We've been up to the top and have seen all you saw. It was no dream, +old man, but simple reality. But don't let the Indians hear anything +about it, or they would stampede straight away." + +Jack stared in mute surprise, scarce knowing what to think, whether to +be most pleased to have it established that he was not 'a dreamer of +dreams,' or astonished at the almost incredible fact it conveyed--that +the top of the mountain was, in very truth, inhabited. + +"And the puma?" he asked. + +"Is still with us. You had better go in and have a rest and take charge +of her, while we see to the unloading." + +This Jack was glad to do, and, on entering the cavern, he was welcomed +by the animal with every demonstration of gladness at his return. + +"Ah! you have not forgotten me then, old girl," he said, and he patted +and stroked the creature. "You're not so very fickle, then, after all. +Now come along with me for a while--I'm going to have a wash." + +When all the fresh stores had been placed inside, and the Indians were +engaged upon their evening meal, and Monella and the two young men were +seated at theirs, Jack asked for further details of the wonderful news +Leonard had briefly spoken of. + +"It is substantially a repetition of what you told us," said Elwood, +"save that we managed a little better in the morning than you did. That +is to say, we did not go the wrong way into the wood, as I suppose you +did; and thus, at sunrise, sure enough, we saw the wonderful city, +which Monella avers can be no other than Manoa--or, as the Spaniards +called it, El Dorado! We saw its palaces, and towers, and spires, +glistening and glittering in the sun--a marvellous sight! So, Jack, old +boy, you can be at ease; you are not yet 'a dreamer of dreams.'" + +"But your intelligence, all the same, makes me feel quite dazed," +answered Jack. "Are you _really_ sure about it? Are you certain--do you +feel confident that--er--well, that it won't all have melted into thin +air by the time we get up there?" + +"Scarcely. It is too substantial for that." + +"Then it means this--that the mountain _is_ inhabited after all," said +the puzzled Jack. "If so, what sort of a reception are they likely to +give us?" + +"Well, that of course remains to be seen. But, meantime, it is certain +that all your clever theories about the place 'not having been peopled +for hundreds of years' are fallacious." + +Jack presently asked Monella what he purposed doing next. + +"We must put away our stores," was the reply, "and then arrange our +plans for making our presence known to the inhabitants, whoever they +may be, of the mountain." + +"Yes, and then, if they speak the same language that you have been +teaching me," Leonard put in, "Jack will have reason to be sorry he has +not stuck to it a little more, I fancy." + +Of late, Jack had practically dropped all efforts in this direction, +particularly during the last fortnight; while Elwood had neglected no +opportunity for using it in his converse with Monella. Elwood had, in +consequence, got so far as to be able to speak it fairly well; but Jack +was much behind him. + +"By Jupiter! But I begin to think there is wisdom in what you say," was +Jack's response. "I must do my best to make up for lost time." + +The night passed without incident. The Indians stayed on through the +following day, and Matava even yielded so far as to enter the dreaded +cavern, and take a look into the canyon. Elwood managed to persuade +him to do thus much, that he might take back to his friends at +Georgetown a description of the scene. Matava was rather afraid of the +puma, but the animal was quite friendly. The Indian evidently believed +that Elwood and his friends were going to their destruction, and would +never again be seen by mortal eyes. However, at Monella's suggestion, +he made for them during the day a more substantial ladder, which the +nails and tools brought with the stores enabled him easily to do. He +also made some poles or struts to form bars to close the stone from +within, and, with much perseverance, cut slots in the rock and in the +stone to receive them. When completed, and the struts put in their +places, the stone was firmly fixed and could not be moved from the +outside. + +Then Monella made another suggestion. He arranged with Matava a few +simple signals that might be made from the mountain-top by flashing +small quantities of powder at night, and that Matava could, in turn, +answer from the plain beyond the forest, or, indeed, from 'Monella +Lodge'. These signals were simply--"All well," "Coming down," "_Not_ +coming down." It was deemed best not to risk more than these, Matava's +intelligence in such directions being limited; and, since he could not +read, to write them down would have been useless. + +When, on the last morning, the leave-taking came, the scene was an +affecting one. The Indians were well pleased with the rewards given +them for their services; but they were, one and all, in genuine +distress at the thought of leaving the three adventurers to what they +thoroughly believed would be a terrible fate. They even besought them +to alter their minds and "come away from the accursed place"; needless +to say in vain. + +Matava, almost in tears, was loaded with messages to those in +Georgetown, should he go back before seeing the travellers again; +the understanding being that, if he found they did not return within +a short time, he was to conclude they would remain for an indefinite +period, in which case he would shut up 'Monella Lodge' and return to +Georgetown, and only expect to hear of them when he came that way again +in the usual course. + +At last, the Indians sorrowfully set out and disappeared in the forest, +and Monella and his two companions set to work to distribute their +stores and spare arms and ammunition. It was decided, after some +discussion, to place the larger portion in the secret cave; leaving +only a comparatively small part hidden in the cavern they were in, it +being obvious that the latter was the one most likely to be searched, +if any should be. + +In the carrying out of the plan settled by Monella, the whole of the +stores were divided roughly into two parts; two-thirds, and all the +spare arms, ammunition and powder, being hidden in the secret cave; +the other third, including most of their camping equipage, lanterns, +store of oil, etc., but no arms, being stowed away in various remote +parts of the cavern by which they had entered from the outer forest. +This was in accordance with certain anticipations and eventualities +that he had carefully thought out. Thus, if the people of the place +should prove unfriendly, and they were forced to retreat at once to +the entrance cavern, they had there, ready to hand, in addition to the +arms, etc., they took with them, all that was really necessary either +for a temporary stay or for the journey back to 'Monella Lodge.' On the +other hand, if the inhabitants should turn out to be hospitable, and +invite the travellers to stay with them, it might be a little while +before they returned to the cavern at the entrance; in the meanwhile it +might be entered and searched by others, who might carry off what had +been left there. But in that case the loss would not be a serious one +to the explorers, nor would the thieves find any arms or powder. + +Early the next morning Elwood went out a little way into the forest +to cut some short poles he was in want of, when the puma--apparently +finding the new ladder more to her taste than the old one had +been--scrambled down after him and disappeared into the wood. + +"We had better leave the ladder and go on with our work," observed +Monella, when told she had gone off and not returned. "No doubt she +will find her way back presently." + +But they saw nothing of her till the afternoon, when she came in, +bearing in her mouth a good-sized wild pig, which she laid down quietly +at the feet of her astonished friends. + +"Why, Puss," exclaimed Jack--he had of late insisted upon giving her +that name--"that _is_ an accomplishment, and no mistake! You can go out +hunting and get your own dinner, can you, and ours too? Well, after +this we need not want for fresh meat, apparently, while we stay here." + +The meat was not only a welcome addition to their larder, so far as +they themselves were concerned, but solved the difficulty that had +begun to puzzle them, viz., how to find food for so large an animal. +Up to now there had been enough left over from what the Indians had +captured and brought in; but, since they had gone away, fresh meat had +been growing scarce, and to feed 'Puss' out of their limited stores of +tinned meats was, of course, out of the question. + +"You'll have to leave us and go back to your friends, whoever they +are, Puss," Jack had said only that very morning. "We appreciate your +society and all that sort of thing, and shall be sorry to turn you out +of doors; but, unless you can crunch up meat-tins and imagine they are +marrow-bones, I really do not see where another meal for you is to come +from." Whether 'Puss' understood this speech or not, she had certainly +settled the question in her own way, and very quickly. + +"You shall go out again, to-morrow, on this sort of expedition, Puss," +observed Jack. And she did; and next time brought back a small antelope. + +This led to a discussion and a good deal of speculation as to whom +'Puss' might actually belong to. + +"I wonder who owns her, and whether they have missed her?" said Jack. +"And I wonder too whether there are many more like her on the mountain? +If so, why haven't we seen anything of any of the others?" Since, +however, no answer could be given to these questions, the speculation +remained a barren one. + +After the stores had all been disposed of to his satisfaction, Monella +decided to stay on another day before making the venture of showing +themselves to the inhabitants; this was partly by way of a rest and +partly to give them an opportunity of studying the plants and rocks +in the canyon. Most of this day he spent in hunting for strange herbs +and leaves; while Jack and Elwood were more interested, after the +first feeling of surprise and pleasure in examining the flowers had +passed off, in searching for signs of gold among the rocks. They found +undoubted traces of both gold and silver, but in what quantity they +might exist it was not possible at the time to form any opinion. + +Every night the canyon was lighted up in the fairy-like manner of +the first evening; and, during the day, two harp-birds had visited +the valley and enlivened it with their dreamy music. The travellers +also caught sight of two or three small animals; but did not obtain +a sufficiently good view to make them out, and Monella particularly +desired that they should not shoot at anything. + +Of fish there was plenty; and bathing in the cool, limpid pools of 'The +Blue River,' as Jack had named the stream, was a welcome luxury. + +Finally, having completed all their preparations, the three, on the +morning of the third day after the departure of the Indians, set out on +their enterprise of visiting the mysterious inhabitants of "The Golden +City." + +They started at daylight, with just sufficient camping things for +passing the one night, heavily laden with spare ammunition, and +taking their Winchester rifles and revolvers, and one extra gun--a +double-barrelled fowling-piece. After a midday rest in the cave that +lay about half way up, they reached the summit, as before, at nightfall. + +They assured themselves that the strange town was still in the same +place--had not vanished into thin air as an illusive creation of the +demons of the mountain. Then they settled down to sleep and were +undisturbed during the night. + +When they woke at dawn on the day that was to prove so eventful, they +found that the puma had disappeared. + +"Puss has deserted us," said Jack. "She knew she was close at home and +preferred the kitchen fireside, I suspect, like a respectable tabby, +to passing the night out here; and small blame to her. I shouldn't be +surprised, if we happen to come across her when she is in the company +of her own friends, to see her pass us by with her nose in the air with +a 'don't-know-you' sort of look. You'll see, she won't know us! she +would lose caste, I expect, if it were known that she had been away for +a week hob-nobbing with a party of houseless vagabonds like ourselves." + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +ULAMA, PRINCESS OF MANOA. + + +The morning broke fine, and the sun rose with a splendour that was not +often seen even in this land of gorgeous sunrises. As Leonard looked +up at the sky above, with its tint of deep sapphire blue flecked +with cloudy flakes, and cirri tinted with gold and pink and crimson, +he thought he had never witnessed any effect to equal it. But, when +they had quietly passed through the narrow belt of wood, and stood +just within its cover, gazing down at the wondrous 'golden city' that +lay sleeping at their feet, the three friends remained silent and +almost spell-bound. The scene was indeed one to which no description +can possibly do justice. The sun was just high enough to light up +the glistening towers and cupolas; and these, and the spangled sky +above, were reflected in the glassy waters of the lake. Beyond and +around all was haze of a rose-coloured golden hue, which gave to the +centre picture the effect of a vignette. From the upper parts, which +showed the clearest against this background of rosy mist, the various +buildings grew less substantial as the eye followed their lines +downwards, till the bridges and embankments seemed almost ghostly +and unreal, yet strangely beautiful in their airy lightness. And the +picture was so faithfully repeated in the lake that, but for the +reversal of the images, the line that divided the reality from the +shadow could scarcely be discerned; while the whole seemed poised, as +it were, in the ruddy-golden haze like a _mirage_ in mid-air. Just +below them a rocky spur jutted out with clear-cut outline against the +central scene, the palms and other trees with which it was crowned +showing a lace-work pattern of feathery foliage through which naught +could be seen but the golden mist. This part alone seemed real; the +city, with its towers, its lofty buildings, its bridges, and its lake, +seemed too fairy-like a creation to be indeed an earthly reality. + + [Illustration: "THE SUN WAS JUST HIGH ENOUGH TO LIGHT UP THE + GLISTENING TOWERS AND CUPOLAS." + [_Page 106._] + +Of the three who were thus looking out upon this glorious sight, it +would be hard to say, perhaps, which was most affected by its subtle +influence. Templemore, notwithstanding his affectation of putting on +ultra-practical glasses through which to regard and analyse everything, +had, in reality--as is not infrequent with such characters--a deep +undercurrent of appreciation of beauty, whether exhibited in nature +or in the works of man. As an engineer, he could appreciate the rare +grace and exquisite proportions of the buildings, and of the bridges, +viaducts, and other such works, far better than could Elwood's less +trained mind; and then, his was a naturally generous and unselfish +nature, and--he was in love. Such a temperament cannot look upon +anything that charms, that satisfies the senses, without wishing +that the loved one were present to participate in the pleasure and +gratification experienced. And the absence of that companionship must +necessarily strike a chord of sadness and longing. He was one, at +heart, deeply sensible of these emotions; so sensible, indeed, that he +shrank from displaying them to onlookers; and thus it was that he half +unknowingly hid them beneath a veneer of 'matter-of-fact.' + +Elwood's younger impulses, on the other hand, bubbled up on all +occasions unchecked and uncontrolled. He was of a highly imaginative +and poetic turn of mind; he was not in love, and hence, the vague +aspirations of his affections had as yet met with nothing upon +which to rest, or, as it were, to centre themselves. He was filled +with unformed hopes and shapeless expectations. The beautiful was +not satisfying in itself; it was but a stepping-stone, an enticing +indication of something still more pleasing yet to be met with beyond, +in the indefinite future. Thus he was always looking forward to an +horizon that lay beyond his ken; while Templemore's hopes and longings, +though they also turned upon the future, had found, in the being who +had won his love, a settled, definite purpose in life. Not that the +latter was altogether uninfluenced by that spirit of adventure which +always actuates, more or less, young men of his age and character; +though, in this respect, he might be swayed by somewhat more practical +considerations than was the enthusiastic Elwood. In the breasts of the +two, it could scarcely be but that there was some feeling of exultation +and pride in the consciousness that what they had achieved was likely +to bring them a high reward either directly or indirectly--in fame, or +wealth, or both--even though no sordid, grasping greed mingled with the +generous impulses natural to youth. + +And Monella? With what feelings was _he_ swayed while he silently +surveyed the fair city that embodied the fulfilment of what he had +been striving after for so many years? He was old, he had no children +or other kin (he had declared) to interest himself in. Fame, power, +riches, he despised--so he had uniformly given his two companions to +understand. None of the motives that prompted the two younger men +seemed to apply in his case; yet the fact was patent to them--had been +all along, since first they met him--that he had been instigated by +some overmastering idea that had become, as Templemore had phrased it, +a sort of religion to him, a faith, a belief; that had urged him on +unceasingly where success had seemed hopeless and the difficulties of +his enterprise insurmountable. Templemore, at Monella's side, could +not but reflect upon this now; as he had similarly reflected upon it +when first they had found themselves veritably inside--so to speak--of +the hitherto inaccessible mountain. But now, mingled with Templemore's +admiring appreciation of all these things, there was a new element in +his feelings towards Monella, which he could only define to himself +as one of reverence. He felt inclined almost to take off his hat, and +deferentially salute the indomitable, high spirit that had led them +on to success, where success had seemed but a fallacious, impossible, +fatuous dream. + +But Monella seemed unconscious of all such thoughts. He gazed out on +the scene before him with a countenance that expressed only a high +and simple joy. His tall, commanding form had never seemed to his +two companions so instinct with dignity and latent power as at this +moment; and in his eyes, when he turned his glance, with a smile, to +meet theirs, there were a kindness, a benevolence, a magnanimity even, +that seemed to fill up the measure of the feeling of respect that was +growing upon them--that made them wonder they had ever ventured to +treat such a man as one of themselves. This strange emotion swayed both +of them; they both felt it, though each thought it influenced himself +alone. Afterwards they found this out by comparing notes; and yet +again, in the time to come, they lived to comprehend that this vague +idea had been something more than a fancy; it had been an instinct +growing out of a solid, though then unknown, reason. It signified that +the parting of their several ways, as between them and him who had been +their comrade thus far, had commenced, had been already entered upon. + +For a while they continued to gaze with swelling emotions upon the +wonderful town. Bathed in the light of the rising sun, it slowly grew +more substantial to the view, and its stately buildings gradually +assumed increased solidity and reality. Their graceful outlines and +proportions, their masterly design and bold execution, the novelty +and originality everywhere apparent, impressed Templemore with +astonishment, just as they delighted and satisfied the poetic fervour +of Elwood. Templemore presently turned to Monella. + +"Never have I seen the like of those structures," he exclaimed, "either +in the places I have visited or in the pictured representations of +the most celebrated cities of the world. Surely this people must be a +nation of architects!" + +"You speak truly, my friend," Monella returned. "I have travelled the +world over and I have not seen the like elsewhere. But, as I have +told you before--as I warned you I expected would be the case--we +have here the chief town of an ancient people; a race so old that the +oldest Egyptian records of which the world has any knowledge relate to +peoples, and times, and things that are but as yesterday compared to +the remote period to which these people can trace back their history. +So is it written in my parchments." + +"And is what we see, that glistens everywhere, truly _gold_--upon the +very spires and roofs?" asked Elwood. + +"I cannot say; but it may well be so, for these parchments of mine +assert that gold is the most plentiful metal of any in these mountains. +They say that the inhabitants used it for common purposes as other +nations use iron; and that, in fact, iron and steel were far less +common than gold and silver. But I think it is time we started down the +slope to reconnoitre and await our opportunity." + +The plan Monella had arranged was that, after concealing in the wood +at the top the few camping requisites they had brought with them, they +should move down towards the city through the clumps of trees, keeping +within their cover, till they came to the point where the trees ended; +that they should remain thus concealed for a time to see what sort of +people passed to and fro, stepping out and making their presence known +only when they saw any one who might be supposed to be a person of +standing or authority. + +Following out this plan, the three moved on through groves and +plantations of trees bearing luscious, tempting fruits of a kind and +nature totally unknown to them. Wonderful flowers, too, they saw on all +sides, and many strange and curious birds; amongst them the harp-bird, +whose enchanting notes came floating every now and then upon their +ears. In due course they reached the farthest and lowermost clump, and +here they were therefore compelled to pause. So far they had seen no +one; but it was yet early morning. + +The thicket within the shelter of which they now stood was upon a knoll +that was not a great way from the lake. Looking across its waters +of turquoise blue, they now made out that which had so puzzled them +before. Moving on its surface were numbers of white swans of gigantic +size; and it was these, as they subsequently ascertained, that drew the +boats about which had seemed to glide here and there without sails or +oars. They had seen these great swans through their glasses, but had +believed them to be vessels fashioned in that shape; deeming them too +large to be really living creatures. + +Suddenly, Elwood gripped Templemore's arm, and pointed to some one--a +youthful maiden seemingly--walking along the border of the lake in +their direction. She came to within a few hundred yards, and then stood +looking dreamily out over the lake at the towering, palatial buildings +upon the opposite side. + +"Great heavens!" Elwood exclaimed in a whisper. "The face, the form, +the very _dress_ that I have so often seen in my dreams! Can it be +possible? Am I awake, or is this, too, but a vision from which I shall +awake by-and-by?" + +Monella put his hand upon his shoulder as a sign to him to be silent, +and pointed to other forms approaching from the same direction. They +all seemed to have come from a great pile of buildings near the water's +edge some half-mile away. It was partially screened by groups of waving +palms and other trees, which hid from view the entrances. + +The new-comers consisted of a tall, handsome man, of a dark-hued skin, +and richly dressed, and a following of a score or so of men, apparently +a guard or escort. They carried spears that flashed and glittered in +the sun, as did their burnished shields and helmets. These seemed to be +of gold; they wore short black tunics and sandals. They halted--upon +a sign from the one who seemed to be their leader--while he advanced +towards the girl. Just then she turned and caught sight of him. At this +she uttered a sharp cry expressive of surprise and fear; then walked +quickly up the slope towards where the three travellers were concealed. + +The man followed and overtook her when she was about a hundred and +fifty yards from the edge of the wood. He seized her by the wrist; but +she, wresting herself free, turned and confronted him, regarding him +with a proud disdain, in which, however, fear was also plainly--too +plainly--written. + +Now that they were closer, the concealed witnesses could distinguish +pretty clearly, through their glasses, the features of the two who +stood facing one another, neither for a full minute uttering a word. + +As to the maiden, she was in very truth a dream of loveliness. With +skin as white and fair as the most delicately reared Englishwoman, +glistening golden hair, large grey-blue eyes of entrancing and lustrous +beauty, a perfect oval face, and a figure the very embodiment of grace, +she appeared indeed more like the creation of a vision than an earthly +being of flesh and blood. She was not exactly tall, yet of fair height +for a woman. Her dress seemed of silk; it was rich-looking, but quiet +in colour, and flowing in design. She wore golden ornaments enriched +with glistening gems, and her hair, falling loosely over her shoulders, +was confined by a broad gold circlet on the head and was cut short +over the forehead. And in her face was an expression of exquisite +sweetness--albeit now there were distracting emotions mingled with it. +The clear-cut, pouting lip curled in scorn, though, the while, the +eyes showed fear, as do those of the hunted hare. Timidly she glanced +around, as if for aid; but not a soul was to be seen save those who +accompanied the man she feared, and from them, it was clear, she could +expect no help. + +As to the man himself, he was, as has been said, of fine stature and +handsome; but his was not beauty of a prepossessing character. His +dark face expressed arrogance and cruelty; in his smile was cold, +deadly menace; his haughty features wore a scowl; and his dark eyes +fairly blazed with passion. Upon his head he wore a coronet of curious +design in lieu of helmet or other covering. His tunic was of black +material--silk apparently--with a large star worked in gold upon the +breast. A belt as of gold was round his waist, and a short sword and a +dagger were by his side. His hair, full beard, and bushy eyebrows were +jet black; so far as one might judge he looked about thirty-five years +of age. The tunic had short sleeves and was cut low so as to display +his neck, round which was a kind of necklace; upon his bare arms were +bracelets, and in all these ornaments there flashed, as he moved, +sparkling jewels of large size and surprising lustre. + +Then ensued, between the two, a hot discussion or dispute, though those +within the wood were too far away to understand its purport. The man +advanced again and again in a threatening manner towards the girl, who +as often retreated a short distance up the slope; then, each time, +turned and faced her adversary. + +Suddenly, the man seemed to give way to a burst of fury; with a gesture +whose murderous import there was no possibility of mistaking, he drew +his dagger from its sheath, and tried to seize the girl; but she, +eluding him, turned and ran farther up the slope. The man followed, and +coming up with her, seized her by the wrist, and raised the hand that +held the dagger. + +At this moment Monella stepped out from the wood and called loudly +to the assailant, at the same time holding up his hand in warning; +but Elwood, revolver in hand, rushed forward in advance of him, and +levelled the pistol at the moment when the blade was poised in the air +and was about to be plunged into the bosom of the girl, who had now +fallen upon her knees. He was only just in time; for the weapon had +already commenced its fatal downward sweep when the report rang out; +the murderer's arm gave a jerk that cast the dagger a distance of +some yards, and the man himself fell backwards with a bullet through +his heart. + + [Illustration: "SHE STOOD REGARDING THEM WITH WONDERING LOOKS." + [_Page 115._] + +Elwood hastened to the assistance of the girl, who swayed as though +about to faint; but the sight of the strangers seemed to rouse her, +for she rose to her feet and stood regarding them with wondering and +evidently doubtful looks. Then she turned her glance upon the dead man, +and shuddered at the thought of the death she had so narrowly escaped. +Looking once more at the three who now stood in a group a short +distance from her--for Elwood had drawn back on seeing her rise to her +feet--she drew herself up with a charming dignity and grace, and, to +the surprise of the two young men, asked, in the language Monella had +taught them, + +"Who are you?" + +The words were intelligible enough. The inflection, the accent, or the +exact pronunciation, may have been slightly different from Monella's, +but the words rang out clear enough. + +"Who are you?" + +Monella stepped a pace or two towards her. His lofty form seemed to +grow in dignity the while he bent his gaze upon her; and, looking up +into his face, she could scarcely fail to read the true meaning of the +glance she met. She felt its extraordinary fascination, and yielded to +its influence, as so many had before. Her confidence went out to him at +once; and her look, that for the moment had been proud and distrustful, +softened into one of friendly interest. She bowed her head as though +in involuntary respect--the respect a dutiful child might show to a +parent--and spoke again; this time varying the form of her question:-- + +"My father, whence come you?" + +"We are strangers from far countries, my daughter," Monella made reply. +"We came here in peaceful and friendly intent, but fate has so ordered +it that our arrival has been marked by the shedding of blood. Still, +though of that I am deeply regretful in one way, I cannot pretend to be +sorry, if, as I see reason to believe, it has saved your young life." + +"Truly it has, and I thank you; and the king, my father, will thank +you too; though I know not by what marvel it was accomplished, nor by +what other marvel ye have come here, you who wield the lightning and +the thunder, who hold men's lives in the hollows of your hands, and yet +speak our language." + +"Time enough to explain that, anon, my child," was Monella's answer. +"For the moment we must know what yonder people are about to do. Their +intentions seem scarcely to be friendly." + +This referred to the small company of guards or soldiers, who were +being harangued by one who appeared to be their officer, and who, when +he had ended his speech, formed them into line, as though for a charge +upon the strangers. + +The girl turned round and looked at them; and, doing so, her face grew +pale. + +"Alas, yes!" she exclaimed. "I had forgotten them for the moment. They +are the special soldiers of Zelus whom ye have slain; and their officer +will seek to carry you all before the father of Zelus, the dread High +Priest. His vengeance will be cruel and terrible, if you fall into his +power; but, if we could but get back to my father's palace, you would +be safe; for he would protect you for my sake--for the sake of what ye +have done for me to-day. But alas! How can that be? They are many and +ye are but three. Ye have not even swords or spears--unless, indeed, ye +can serve them as ye have served this one." + +"Fear nothing for us, my daughter. We can truly serve these others +in the same way, if the necessity unfortunately should arise. But we +seek it not; we have come here, as I have told you, with peaceful +intentions, and we have no wish to signalise our arrival by further +bloodshed. Will you not, yourself, speak to these foolish people, and +warn them not to rush upon destruction? Tell them we are powerful, and +that, in your own words, we hold their lives in the hollows of our +hands. If they will depart in peace, they may, and bear with them the +body of their chief; but, if they dare approach with hostile intent, +then shall they fall before us, ere even they have time to come a dozen +paces, even as men are struck down by lightning. Tell them this, and +urge them to be friendly; for we are not of the nature of those who +take delight in slaying. To us, to slay is easy, but abhorrent." + +The girl heard this with increasing wonder. She viewed the rifles +(which all three were now handling) with a curiosity she did not care +to hide. She took them for some sort of magic wands. + +"I will perform your wish," she said, "but I doubt my power to stay +them, for they are men used to working their own will, and now they +seek your lives in revenge for this man's death. Indeed, they well know +they go to their own deaths if they return to Coryon, the High Priest, +and bring not with them those who slew his son." + +She turned to go towards the soldiers, who were now standing in two +ranks, with spears in rest, awaiting the word of command. + +"Stay," said Monella. "If they listen to your words, they will want +to come here to take up the body of their chief. We are willing they +should do so; but it were better we did not meet, for I do not trust +them, and they might plot treachery. See!" And he took his lasso from +where it hung at his waist and laid it in a straight line on the +ground about twenty feet from the dead body. "We will retire towards +the wood; and let it be clearly understood that they must not cross +that line nor touch that cord. If any man do so, he shall surely die +then and there. Let them not think, however, that we retire from +fear, because of their number. But now, my daughter, take heed lest +they seize you. Be sure you keep near enough to avail yourself of our +protection; but stand not between us and them, lest the lightning +strike your own form in its course. Once launched, it goes straight to +its mark, and blasts all whom it meets upon its path." + +"I understand," she answered. "But you need have no fear for me, so +far as these people are concerned. Their chief has dared more to-day +than has ever been known before; but none of these would lay hand upon +Ulama, the daughter of their king." + +"Then," said Monella, "if you feel sure as to that, do not approach +them, but go thirty or forty yards to the right, and bid them come +near enough for you to address them from there. For the rest we will +answer." And, with a sign to his companions, he walked slowly up the +slope towards the wood they had left but a few minutes before. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +A PRELIMINARY SKIRMISH. + + +The words that had been spoken on both sides in this conversation the +two young men had followed fairly well; though they had listened in +silence and made no attempt to join in the discussion. On their way +back towards the wood, Elwood was at first very thoughtful; then he +turned to Monella and said excitedly, + +"How do we know she is safe, out there alone? And what will her father, +the king, say to us, if harm come to her? It seems to me we are acting +in strange fashion to leave her thus." + +"Patience, my son," returned Monella quietly; "we must avoid the +shedding of blood, if it be possible. We have come here, as I have +already said, with peaceful motives. If violent acts be forced upon +us in self-defence, let us keep at least our conscience clear; let +us be in a position to show that they _were_ forced upon us. Let it +not be said of us that we have come into a strange land to introduce +dissension, and discord, and internal warfare; and all for no other +reason than the gratification of an adventurous spirit." + +"But," said Elwood, "_we_ have not introduced dissension and trouble. +It is clear enough that a terrible murder would have been perpetrated +had we not been here to prevent it. Surely, no one can accuse _us_ +of commencing bloodshed; and, as to the rest, why, what are the lives +of two or three scoundrels like these, the infamous myrmidons--if we +may believe what we heard--of a bloodthirsty 'high priest'; what are +the lives of two or three such wretches, compared with the safety of +this gentle, trustful girl, whom we are leaving now almost at their +mercy? In my view this is one of those cases in which offence is the +best defence. They are showing their intentions pretty clearly; let +us anticipate them by shooting one or two. That will frighten the +remainder, and stop further hostile action; and, moreover, prevent +their coming near this young lady, or princess, as I suppose she really +is." + +"I am bound to say I rather agree with Leonard," said Templemore. "I +see, clearly enough, we are in for a fight, and shall have to kill two +or three. Why not as well do it first as last? If, as she says, they +are used to do as they please in the land, and if what we have just +seen is a specimen of their style, pity is thrown away upon them. And, +besides, is it good generalship, Monella? To attack first would be sure +to scare them; but, if they make a rush, in absolute ignorance of the +power of our rifles, may they not, some of them, charge home? And then +we should have a hand-to-hand fight where they would be four or five to +one." + +Monella passed his hand over his face, and answered almost sadly, + +"There is a time to be forward in attack, and a time to be forbearing. +If the time come for the former, no man will ever see me flinch from +it. But you know what has been said, that the shedding of blood is like +unto the letting out of water, and that he who begins it is accursed. +If these people begin it, we will not shrink; but at least we shall +have clear consciences. Now listen to my plan. We must not enter the +wood, or they will think we have fled. If they cross the line I have +laid down, let each take the man opposite to him in the line, and bring +him down. Then, if they still rush on, fire once more, and step back +into the shelter of the wood. If they follow, you know what to do; your +revolvers will suffice." + +Meantime, Ulama, as she had called herself, had been addressing the +soldiers. Their officer had advanced to speak to her, and angry talk +had been exchanged, which those standing at the edge of the wood, with +rifles at the 'ready', could not hear. But when, finally, she shook her +head meaningly, and began to retire towards them, Jack Templemore set +his teeth and said, + +"I told you so! I knew it meant a fight! We might just as well have +begun it, as let them think we are afraid." + +"There is yet a chance," replied Monella. "They may hesitate to pass +the line I have laid down. In any case, all we can now do is to wait +and see." And, as Ulama came towards them, he signed to her to step +aside, out of the line of fire. + +The officer had returned to his men, and, after a short consultation +with one who seemed to be next in command, the two ranks advanced, with +the slow, measured tread of a well-disciplined troop, up the slope. On +reaching the dead body they were halted while the two officers examined +it. They had not understood how their leader had been killed; nor did +they understand it now. They had heard the report of the pistol and had +seen their chief fall, but the report had not been a loud one; and as +Elwood had run forward at the time, for all they could see (Ulama being +between them) he might have hurled a spear at Zelus. Yet the sound of +the explosion had puzzled them, and stayed them from rushing instantly +to the assistance of their leader. Altogether, they were perplexed. +The dress of their opponents showed them to be strangers. They appeared +to be unarmed, yet had they killed their dreaded master in the face +of his guard. This argued conscious power; and it behoved them not to +be too precipitate. After this fashion, probably, reasoned the two +officers. + +If so, the examination of the dead body could but add to their +uncertainty; for they found there a wound they were quite unable to +account for. It was not a spear thrust; it was not a wound from a sword +or dagger. The scrutiny, in effect, yielded them no enlightenment; but +the sight of the dead body of their leader and of the blood exasperated +both officers and men, and murmurs were heard, and cries for vengeance. +They probably began, too, to remember what Ulama had suggested--that +if they went back with the dead body of their chief and without the +slayer, their own lives would be forfeited. And all this time the +strangers stood calmly regarding them, watchful of their movements, but +offering neither to retreat nor to attack them. + +After some further consultation, the one who seemed to be in command +turned towards where the three strangers stood; flinging down his +sword, he stepped forward and threw out both his hands, to signify that +he desired a parley. + +Thereupon Monella also advanced a few paces; then paused for the other +to address him. + +"Who are you? Whence come you? Why do you enter our land in this +fashion by killing one of the greatest in the country?" asked the +captain of the guard. + +"The answers to your first questions are for your king's ear alone," +returned Monella. "As to the last, we came in peace, but interfered to +save a maiden from being murdered." + +The other's face expressed an evil sneer, and he made answer: + +"It is not usual, with us, for men to throw away their lives for +women. For what you have done yours may be required. Still," he added +diplomatically, "I am not judge nor executioner--unless you resist me. +If, therefore, you will surrender like men of peace--as you say you +are--and will come with me to tell your tale to my master, I promise +you good treatment while in my custody." + +Monella shook his head. + +"You have had my answer," he said. "We seek your king. We will yield +ourselves to no one else. And," he continued, with louder voice, "since +you, my friend, dare to deride us for taking a woman's part, know that +in the land we come from we are not accustomed to stand still and look +on while women are being murdered. What manner of _men_ are _ye_ who +dare openly proclaim so vile a doctrine? Soldiers of a High Priest? +Guardians of a 'religion' that teaches things like this? The span +that shall be left to such a being as ye serve is growing short. His +power is waning, his days are even now numbered." He raised his arm, +and extended it towards him he was addressing; then, with gathering +force, and even passion, till he seemed like an inspired prophet of +old thundering his denunciations against evil-doers--"We came here in +goodwill and peace; we may remain to be a withering scourge to you and +him you call your master. See to it, and take warning! There must--and +there _shall_--be an end of such deeds as we have this day seen +attempted by--as ye have no shame in avowing--the favoured son of your +High Priest. Hence from my sight, ere scorn and anger overcome me! I +have but to move my finger, and you fall dead before me!" + +For the first time in their knowledge of him Templemore and Elwood saw +their leader, usually so calm and equable, moved by a passion that was +almost uncontrollable. They glanced at one another in surprise; and +well indeed they might. For whereas, at first, they had felt almost +impatient of his equanimity, and had feared he lacked the sternness to +deal with those they were opposed to, yet now they thought only how to +restrain his sudden and unlooked-for passion, lest it should embroil +them further than was actually necessary. + +But the fire of Monella's rage expired as suddenly as it had kindled. + +"You have heard," he went on, coldly and disdainfully, to the captain +of the hostile group. "I have warned you. I spare your life to give you +time to do better." + +But this contemptuous treatment, so far from having the effect +intended, seemed to rouse the other's fury. + +"Think not to impose on me by empty threats and vain-glorious +boasting," he retorted. "I summon you to yield and come with me. If +not, and we have to kill you in striving to enforce obedience, the +consequences be upon your own heads." + +"And I say that I have warned _you_," returned Monella quietly. He +stooped and picked up a stone, then threw it to within three or four +feet of the cord that lay between them. + +"If," he said, "you but cross that cord so far as that stone, you die." + +Instantly the other took up the challenge. He stepped back for his +sword, then walked boldly forward, Monella meanwhile falling back in +line with his companions; but the instant the other crossed the cord, +Monella's rifle rang out, and the fatuous soldier fell prone upon the +sward. + +Then a tall fellow burst from the ranks and, brandishing his spear, +rushed towards the fatal cord; he was followed by an adventurous +comrade; but, e'en as they stepped across the line, they both bit the +dust. Then all the others turned and fled; all save the second officer, +who stood his ground, neither advancing nor retreating. He remained +leaning on his sword, and looked, by turns, first at his flying men, +then at the dead bodies that lay around him, finally at Monella and his +companions. + +Monella advanced and thus addressed him, + +"How is it you stand thus in hesitation, friend? Are you in two minds, +whether to fight or to fly?" + +The second officer was a fine-looking young fellow with features that +were not unpleasing. With a steady glance he looked Monella in the face +and answered, + +"I am no coward to run away, and no fool to rush to meet a thunderbolt. +Whoever you are, it is plain that we are powerless against you. But +indeed," he went on, with something almost like a sigh, "when I heard +your words I felt no stomach to fight against you, if so be that they +are true." + +"I am well pleased to hear you say so, friend," Monella said, laying +his hand upon the other's shoulder. "You have seen what it is in our +power to do. I call upon you to be a witness in the presence of your +king--of all your people--that we did not resort to force until all +other means had failed." + +"That will I gladly do," returned the officer, bending his head in +courteous salutation. "Few would have been so persistent in their +merciful intention. For myself, I know my fate if I rejoin my master; +therefore, if you will accept my service, I would fain join myself to +you. One can but fight and die; better to do so in the service of such +a chief as you, than of him I have lately served," and he seemed to +shudder while he spoke. + +Just then the maiden joined them, and he saluted her respectfully. She +looked at him with sorrowful eyes. + +"And is it Ergalon," she said, "that could stand by to-day and see +another man raise his hand to slay the daughter of his king, and not +move a step to hinder him? Has Ergalon indeed sunk so low as this?" + +The words were said in pained surprise rather than in anger; and in the +gentle eyes she turned upon him there was no sign of aught but mild +reproach. But this seemed to cut him to the heart, when ringing words +of accusation would, perhaps, have failed to move him. He fell upon one +knee and bent his head. + +"Alas! Princess," he cried, "I well deserve your scorn; yet knowest +thou not how that against my will I have been forced into this service. +Well I know that to ask pardon would be useless--the king will never +pardon, should this reach his ears; still less will Coryon. Yet I care +not if thou wilt but grant me _thy_ forgiveness. If these strangers are +thy friends, grant me to serve thee by serving them; and should this +service be even to death, it will content me that thou shouldst say of +me that Ergalon had done his duty, and redeemed himself in thine eyes." + +"Be it so, Ergalon," Ulama answered, her voice and manner charged with +a sweet graciousness that quite captivated the three bystanders. Then, +turning to Monella, she continued, "My father, I owe you much for what +you have done to-day. I shall try in the future to repay you to some +measure. Meantime you will need friends--accept from Ergalon this +proffered service. I feel sure, after what has happened, you may trust +him--even to the death. I know not who you are, whether immortals, or +beings of like nature to myself, thus timely sent by the Great Spirit +to my aid. But this I know, that I may trust you; that you have come +to be my friends, and my friends from henceforth you shall be." + +It would be difficult to convey an idea of the wonderful mixture of +simple gentleness and queenly dignity with which these words were +spoken. Further, it would be hard to say which of her hearers was most +impressed. She had the art of winning hearts without intending or +desiring it; and few could long resist the fascination of her presence. +Small wonder then if Leonard Elwood had already fallen incontinently, +helplessly, irretrievably in love. + +"And now," she finished, "I invite you to my home, where my father will +bid you welcome." + +"And these?" Monella asked, pointing to the dead bodies. + +"Ergalon will know what to do," she answered; and moved away in the +direction she had indicated. + +But by this time a small crowd was on its way to meet them. Those +forming it were, as it appeared, chiefly her maidens and attendants and +a file of soldiers--her guards. They looked curiously at the strangers, +but, at a sign from her, fell in respectfully behind the little party. + +"Doubtless you marvel," she observed to Elwood and Monella, between +whom she walked, "how it comes about that with all these people to +attend and guard me, I was alone this morning. But for that chance the +dead Zelus had never found his opportunity of saying that he did to me. +He must have been watching for it; perchance had heard that I sometimes +like to steal away alone for a little ramble. One gets so tired of +always having people around one," she added, with an almost childish +wilfulness. "But this will cure me. For the future I shall be more +careful." + +Templemore, meantime, strolling along behind the others, found himself +somehow placed between Ergalon and a dainty little damsel whose name, +he afterwards found, was Zonella. She was Ulama's close friend, and was +most busy plying Ergalon with questions about what had taken place. At +the noise of the firing they had rushed out in alarm; then, missing the +princess, had set out to seek her. In reply to her inquiries, Ergalon +gloomily referred her to Templemore, and on this slender introduction +the two soon found themselves in friendly converse, rather to the +increase of their companion's moodiness. + +It was well for Templemore that day that his affections were +unalterably fixed upon a chosen fair one; else, inevitably, had he lost +his heart either to the fair Ulama or to the dark-eyed, captivating +Zonella. As it was, he was compelled to own that he had never seen +two more fascinating maidens--save--save, of course, Maud Kingsford. +In that reservation--and in that alone--lay the salvation of his +heart. But this Ergalon knew not; and since he had long ardently--but +vainly--sought the favour of Zonella, he was none too pleased to see +her so quickly place herself on friendly terms with a total stranger. + +But Templemore's acquaintance with the language was so limited, that +his part in the conversation consisted more in listening than in +talking; and his thoughts were more concerned in observing all that +went on around him than in studying Zonella herself. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +A KING'S GREETING. + + +During the walk--which now more resembled a procession, for they had +been joined by numbers of the inhabitants who had heard the rifle shots +and had come out in curiosity or alarm to inquire into the cause--Jack +Templemore had observed many pumas that, like tame dogs, accompanied +the people who crowded round them. They were mostly smaller than the +one that had followed him from the mountain top down the canyon, though +a few equalled it in size. But he looked in vain for any sign of +recognition from any of them; and it really seemed as though his own +jesting prophecy were being actually fulfilled. + +They now arrived at a colossal edifice that reared its soaring walls +and towers high up in the sky. They passed between its open gates, that +appeared to be of gold and iron, beneath an archway that, far above +their heads, spanned the space between two lofty towers of pink-white +stone. In the courtyard within were many other soldiers. These, when +the party entered, seemed crowded together in some confusion; but, at +sight of Ulama and her attendants, they quickly formed into lines, in +obedience to hoarse words of command, shouted by officers in gorgeous +blue uniforms, and with white plumes waving in their helmets. + +The courtyard was large enough for two or three hundred men to drill +and march about in. In the centre was a fountain that threw into the +air a jet of water that fell back with a sound of refreshing coolness +into a marble basin, from which rose curious-shaped green plants that +showed in pleasing contrast to the dainty whiteness of the stonework. +Here and there were marble statues, and, between them, large vases +filled with flowering plants. Above, a broad gallery ran round the +enclosure, and from this a number of richly-dressed people gazed down +upon the strangers as they entered with Ulama. The latter, making signs +to Monella and his two friends to follow her, proceeded, through lines +of soldiers and attendants who fell back respectfully before her, to +an apartment at one side, outside which all remained save two or three +whom she specially invited to accompany her. Around, were benches or +divans and couches covered with richly embroidered stuffs; upon these +she bade her guests be seated, begging them to await her while she +sought out the king and solicited an audience. + +When she had gone, a sudden silence fell on those she left behind; a +silence that was the more noticeable, coming, as it did, after the +confused hubbub and clank of arms that had filled the courtyard on the +arrival of the strangers. + +The scene was certainly a curious one. The homely, travel-stained +dress of the new-comers contrasted strangely in its nineteenth-century +plainness with the elaborate, brilliantly-coloured costumes of Zonella +and the half dozen members of the princess's suite who had entered with +her; with the luxurious carpets, rugs, and cushions everywhere around; +and with the magnificence of the whole surroundings, that spoke more of +the sumptuous luxury and elaborate decorations of a Moorish 'Alhambra' +than of what one would have expected in this isolated city of the +clouds. + +Monella stood, lost in thought, with bowed head and folded arms, +his rifle, that that day had sent three human beings to their long +account, resting against the wall beside him. Elwood, whose eyes had +followed Ulama till she had disappeared through the inner door, also +stood plunged in reverie, not noticing aught of his surroundings. Of +the three, Jack Templemore alone seemed alive to the interest and +strangeness of the scene. His keen, steady eyes were making mental +notes of every line of the architectural designs, as though with the +object of afterwards constructing a like edifice from memory; and, from +the building, they travelled to its furniture and decorations, and +thence, finally, to the dress and appearance of those of the princess's +suite who stood or sat around. Ergalon had remained outside with many +more. + +Presently, Templemore said quietly to Zonella, somewhat to her +astonishment, + +"What is the name of this city?" + +"What!" she exclaimed, "do you not know then that you are in Manoa? +Where did you suppose you were?" + +"Manoa! H'm. The same as 'El Dorado,' I suppose, as the Spaniards +called it?" + +"I know nothing of that, or of who you mean by 'the Spaniards,'" she +replied. "Fancy your coming here and not knowing the name of the place! +_Where_ have you come from? I long to hear all about it. Are all the +people there white like you and those with you? We have always been +instructed, by our teachers here, that only black demons lived in the +world beyond our island--at least we still so call it; though, of +course, it is no longer an island; has not been for many, many long +ages." + +But when Jack attempted explanations, he soon discovered that he knew +too little of the language to make things clear to his companion. He +became hopelessly involved, his descriptions quite impossible, and, in +the end, he had to give it up as hopeless. + +"You must wait till I know your language better," he said with a sigh; +"or else question my friends, who know far more of it." + +"I will wait as patiently as I can until you can tell me yourself," she +answered with an arch look. "I shall like better to hear it from you. I +feel, too, a little afraid of your friend there--the older of the two. +He seems so proud and dignified." + +Jack laughed. + +"He is anything but that. He is as kind-hearted and good-natured a man +as I have ever known. To-day he looks more serious than usual, perhaps. +You see, we have had a disagreeable adventure, and do not yet know what +may be its consequences." + +"I think, all the same, he is a man of great pride and dignity," +Zonella repeated. "He might be a great chief--a king--so far as one can +judge from what one sees. He is not of the same race as you," she went +on with decision. "He is more like one of my own people. Your younger +friend, too, is not unlike one of our people; though I do not see the +resemblance so strongly there, as in the case of the other." + +This odd suggestion almost startled Templemore. Curiously enough, the +same idea had struck him several times during the past half-hour; +since, in fact, the opportunity had offered of comparing Monella's +face and form with those inhabitants he had seen. Except that he was +taller than any, there were many points in which there was obvious +resemblance; and Jack began to ponder upon it as a strange coincidence. + +He was also surprised at the confidence with which the young girl had +declared Monella to be of different race from himself. + +"You must be an unusually quick observer," he said presently, "to +distinguish these things so readily. In my land young ladies do not +much trouble themselves----" + +Suddenly, Zonella laid her hand upon his arm and leaned forward with a +look of fervid earnestness. + +"_Who_ is this man?" she asked. "What is his name, and what brings him +here, and just at such a time, too?" This last seemed to be said more +to herself than to her companion. + +"He is called Monella," Jack told her. "I know of no other name; and, +as to why he is here, I can no more tell you that than why you yourself +are here. In some things he keeps his own counsel absolutely, and is +altogether inscrutable." + +"Ah!" Zonella said this with a long breath. "Then, though he is your +friend, and you are here together, you _really_ know nothing of him. Is +that what you mean?" + +"Well," returned Jack slowly, "it's rather an abrupt way of putting it, +but--well, I never thought of it in that light before--but--I really +think you have about hit it." + +"Yes! You and he have met by chance, and have agreed to travel together +for a time. And you have let him bring you here, I suppose, without +troubling yourself to ask him his objects?" Zonella went on, still with +her glance fixed on Monella. + +Jack opened his eyes. + +"You have a very direct way of putting things, I must say," he laughed. +"But again, I am bound to admit you are not far out." + +"And your other friend--what do you know of him?" + +"Oh, I have known him since he was a child." + +"And yet," the girl persisted, "he is very different from you. Are you +_sure_ he is of the same race as yourself?" + +"Quite," Templemore replied, laughing. "We are both of a nation that +I suppose you have never heard of, but that makes no small amount of +noise in the outer world, I can assure you. We are both English." + +Just then a heavy curtain was drawn back, and Ulama entered, and with +her an immense puma, larger even than their friend of the canyon, and +behind it the latter animal itself! + +"Why," exclaimed Zonella, "there is 'Nea,' who has been missing for +several days," and she called the animal to her. Great was her surprise +to see it, after a brief acknowledgment of her greeting, turn to Jack +and his two friends, with every sign of recognition and delight. + +"Why, it's Puss, by all that's wonderful!" Jack cried. "At least, +that's the name I gave her," he added, by way of explanation to Zonella. + +"Do you know her, then? But how can that be?" + +"She has been living with us for the last week; but she deserted us +last night, and we wondered where she had got to." + +"Then that accounts for it. We could not think what had become of her." +And she began to chide the animal for its desertion of its home and +mate. + +"If 'Tuo' had known you were off gallivanting with strange people, +'Nea,' I fancy he would have come after you and marched you back." +Then, to Templemore: "But how odd that she should attach herself to you +like that; you must have had some strong attraction for her." + +"It was not what she got to eat, at any rate," said Jack. "In fact, I +fear she was half starved. And at last she got so disgusted at what, I +suppose, she thought our stinginess, that she went off hunting on her +own account; and what she caught she offered, with a splendid lack of +selfishness, to share with us." And he went on to tell how he first met +the animal; Elwood, meanwhile, recounting the same story to Ulama; and +they learned that the two pumas were named 'Tuo' and 'Nea.' + +Presently, the princess gave a sign to her attendants, and they all +followed her from the apartment, leaving the three strangers by +themselves. + +Elwood was the first to speak. + +"We are to wait till the king is ready to receive us," he said. "I +wonder what he is like, and what sort of a reception he will give us! +What say you, Monella?" + +The latter turned slowly, and seemed to wake as from a deep reverie. + +"I know not what to say, my son; but I am full of pain at all that has +happened to-day. My mind misgives me that civil war will come out of +it; yet we can but try to do our best, and leave the rest to a higher +power." + +It was not long before the curtain was drawn aside again, and one +entered who seemed to be a dignitary of the court. + +"I have come," said he, "to conduct you to King Dranoa." And, with a +ceremonious bow, he motioned to them to follow him. + +They passed through many passages, across galleries and large halls, +and up broad staircases covered with thick soft carpet that was +noiseless to the tread. + +On their way they saw many people of various costumes and appearance, +who regarded the new-comers curiously, but not rudely. Presently they +reached a heavy curtain before a doorway, where stood more soldiers and +officers in brilliant uniforms. The curtain being drawn aside, they +entered an immense hall, its sides lined with people, but the whole +centre part unoccupied. They were ushered up this hall and there left +standing, their conductor retiring to one side. + +They found themselves confronting a high canopy, beneath which, upon a +raised dais, a man, apparently somewhat past middle age, was seated; +they had little doubt he was the king. He was a man of a fine presence, +and seemed hale and vigorous, though his dark hair and beard were +streaked with grey. His features were regular and well formed, his +eyes steady and piercing; his expression was not unkindly; but his +chin suggested weakness, a wavering and unsettled temperament. He was +dressed in a long flowing robe, and large jewels sparkled upon his +breast and shoulders, in the belt that girdled his waist and in the +hilt of his short sword. On his head he wore a circlet that was simple +in design, and scarcely to be called a crown; it was a band of gold +with gems set as stars. Ulama was seated by his side; she, also, wore +a golden circlet in which gleamed, with softened radiance, one cluster +of large pearls. She had changed the simple dress in which she had been +clad when they had first seen her, and now appeared in a costume that +was fairly dazzling in its richness, yet in exquisite taste, and well +chosen for showing to advantage her graceful figure. + +At her feet Zonella sat, or rather half reclined, and other members of +her suite were grouped around. Upon the other side of the king stood +his ministers and officers of state, and his body guard, and, ranged +around the hall, were many others of both sexes, looking curiously and +silently upon the strangers. + +Over the canopy was an immense star wrought in solid gold. Statues on +pedestals were to be seen at intervals, and, most curious of all, on +the walls were well-executed coloured frescoes depicting battle scenes. + +The king rose and addressed them. + +"Friends, I know not whence ye come, what brought ye hither, nor how ye +succeeded in passing the wood of black demons and forced your way into +our land. In ordinary circumstances it would have been my duty to send +ye away forthwith, or even to imprison ye--possibly, still worse might +have befallen. But my daughter hath told me that ye have saved her +life--a life doubly, trebly dear to me in that she is my only child. +But that ye came so opportunely on the scene, she who is my heart's +pride would e'en now be lying in the cold grasp of death." + +Here he paused, overcome with emotion. + +"So," he presently went on, "it has been described to me. I understand, +also, that, by some strange chance, ye speak our language, and +comprehend what I would say. We knew not that there were people outside +this land of ours who were white like us, and, above all, could speak +our tongue. But these wonders ye shall explain afterwards at your +leisure. At this moment not curiosity, but gratitude inspires me, in +that ye have restored my child to me. There is not one here"--his eyes +travelled round the packed assemblage--"who will not join with me in +thanking ye for that which ye have done. What say ye, friends?"--this +to his people--"Ye have heard in what dire peril hath my daughter been +this day. Shall we not give to those who rescued her a right good +welcome?" + +At this, the hitherto silent crowd burst out into acclamations. They +cheered, they clapped their hands; they waved banners, they raised +their spears and swords aloft and flashed them in the air; again and +again the shouts went up, till they seemed in very truth to shake the +walls. + +When, by a motion of his hand, silence had been restored, the king +resumed, + +"Ye hear! All greet ye, and _I_ thank ye. Be assured of my protection +an' ye have come in peace. But alas! I grieve to say I am not +all-powerful. There are reasons for enjoining upon ye that ye be +circumspect in your going to and fro, have always with ye the escort I +shall give ye, and visit only places they shall indicate. This is not +the time or place for further explanations, nor is it fitting I should +now hear the wondrous things I doubt not ye can tell me. I only wish it +understood that while I shall give ye my protection, and that of those +devoted to me, ye must not hope too much from it; and it may fail ye, +if ye observe not the conditions and limitations I have stated; the +cause whereof I shall explain hereafter." + +"While we return thee our thanks, O King," Monella answered, "on our +part, also, let it be understood that we can protect ourselves. The +cowardly assailants of the princess thy daughter fell before us like +chaff before the fire. We could, an' we had chosen, have destroyed them +all, even to the last one; but we spared some that they might noise +the tale abroad and warn others of their kind not to raise their hands +against us. Yet do I regret that it was necessary to kill any. We came +in peace and goodwill, not to maim and slay, or to spread alarm and +desolation through thy land. Yet this was forced upon us." + +"It hath been so told to me. Perhaps, as ye say, ye can protect +yourselves; and it hath been further told to me how ye wield the +lightning and the thunder and blast your enemies, hurling them to the +ground ere they can reach ye. For all that, if ye would go about in +peace, and avoid the need for further exercise of your death-dealing +powers, accept the guard I offer. If occasion arise, and they fail ye, +and ye can help in your own defence--well, by so much the better will +it be." + +"Thou hast well said, O King. It shall be as thou hast spoken," Monella +returned. + +Throughout the interview the king had been eyeing the commanding +figure of the man before him, not only with great intentness, but also +even anxiously. Indeed, Monella, with his lofty stature and intrepid +bearing, his nobly chiselled features, his bold, unflinching glance, +would have made no unfitting occupant of the throne. And, possibly, +this thought had struck the king, who once more spoke. + +"And now I would fain know thy name, and what hath brought thee." + +"I am called Monella." + +"Monella! It hath a sound as of our own tongue," returned the king. +"And thine end in journeying hither?" + +"That is for thine ear alone, O King," Monella replied with decision, +thereby arousing the surprise of all, the king included. Then, drawing +from his breast a sealed roll of parchment he had brought with him, +"But here is that which will in part explain." And he handed the +document to the king. + +The king unrolled the parchment, but, as the first words met his eye, +he started; then, growing more intent, he read on. But presently, in +evident agitation, he stepped down from the dais, placed his hand on +the other's arm, and said in a voice that trembled with emotion, + +"I will speak with thee alone. Follow me into my private chamber." And, +looking neither to the right nor to the left, he passed down the hall, +Monella following, the crowd opening out to give them egress. + +No sooner had they gone, than confused murmurs of astonishment and +curiosity burst out on all sides. Elwood and Templemore, as much taken +by surprise as any one, looked each in the other's face inquiringly; +but Zonella glided to their side and said in a low tone to Templemore, + +"Said I not that thy friend was no ordinary man? Monella! Is it +not like my name, Zonella? Methought, the moment my eyes rested on +him, 'That man is a great man--a wondrous man--and he is one of our +people!'" + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +DAKLA. + + +Ulama also left her seat and came forward to the two young men. + +"Your friend," she said, "has taken my father by surprise; else had he +bidden you be seated. Nor did I know that he could not earlier have +received you, or I would have sent my maidens to you with refreshment. +Come now and sit near us, and I will point out to you my friends that +they may be your friends; meantime Zonella will order fruit and wine +for your sustainment. Anon you will be invited to our table; but +meantime you will need something. We all do," she added, when they made +gestures of dissent, "so you will not be conspicuous in partaking here +of what we offer you." + +Pages then entered bearing luscious fruits and tempting-looking foaming +drinks; the former on massive salvers of pure gold, the latter in +chalices of gold and silver set with gems. The fruits were all new to +them, as also were the drinks; but, on tasting them, they found them to +be all they looked. + +The fruits were indeed delicious and refreshing; the drinks cooling +and exhilarating: to Elwood and Templemore they were as nectar and +ambrosia, and they said so, and asked many questions concerning them. +But, seeing that the only information they received was a string of +names that conveyed to them no meaning, they added little to their +stock of knowledge. + +They now talked freely with those around them; but found the questions +showered upon them from all sides somewhat more than they could answer, +so that Templemore said at last in an aside to the other, + +"Tell you what it is, Leonard; we shall have to give a public +lecture--or perhaps a series--and invite as many at a time as the +Town Hall of the place will contain. Pity we didn't bring some magic +lanterns and dissolving views to illustrate what we have to tell them. +I _would_ have done so if I had only known." + +They, in their turn, were not less full of curiosity and interest in +all they saw around them. The statuary, and, above all, the pictures +amazed them. + +"It upsets all one's notions of history and all that," said Jack +quietly to Leonard, "to find this sort of thing in the so-called 'new' +world. We might be back in Ancient Greece." + +"Or Babylon, or Nineveh," Elwood answered. "It's like a dream--and, +strange to say, I have dreamed much of it before. I keep thinking I +shall wake up presently and find that this city, with all that it +contains, has vanished." + +"I trust not," said Ulama--to whom the last part of the sentence had +been addressed--with a smile. "I should not like to think that I, +myself, am but a dream. But, since you speak of having dreams of that +which you find here, know that I have strange dreams also. All my life +it has been thus with me. Of late they have been less frequent than of +yore, and the memory of them is confused and indistinct; but I know +that in them I have seen--aye, more than once--_your_ face, and the +face of him you call Monella." + +Elwood regarded the maiden in surprise, and she continued, + +"Yes, it is true. Tell me, Zonella, have I not often described to thee +those I had seen in my dreams; and did not some resemble these? As to +face thou canst not know, but as to garb and other details?" + +"'Tis true," replied Zonella gravely. + +But the matter-of-fact Templemore found it hard to credit this; visions +and the like were nothing in his way. + +"Are you serious?" he asked. + +"Quite," both said. + +"And--me--a--I--myself, I mean; was I there too?" + +Templemore's manner when he asked this question was so humorously +anxious that Ulama laughed--a joyous, ringing laugh, the token of a +soul innocent and free from care. + +"No, indeed," she answered. "I never dreamed of you." + +"And you?" he asked, turning to Zonella. + +"No, never;" and she too laughed merrily. + +"It really doesn't seem fair," said Jack, with an injured air. "Waking +or sleeping, my friend has been a dreamer all his life; when we met +with Monella we found he was one of the same sort; so those two were on +terms immediately; but I--I am out of it all. Never had a dream in my +life worth remembering. Not only that, but--as it now seems--I can't +even get into other people's. I put it to you, Princess, am I not a +little hardly done by?" + +Thus they laughed and chatted, and time passed on, and still Monella +and the king were closeted together. It was more than an hour--nearer +two--before the king returned; and then alone. + +"My friends," he said, "the audience is at an end. Affairs of state +demand my earnest thought, and I must now dismiss you. But," beckoning +the two young men to him, and taking in his own a hand of each, "once +more let me commend these strangers to your care and friendship. +They have rendered me to-day a service that is beyond price, and in +rendering it to me, they have rendered it to us all. More I need not +say, except to charge you to make their stay with us a pleasant one." + +He withdrew, and, with his absence, the crowd began to thin; only those +belonging to the court remaining. + +And now Ulama spoke. + +"I shall hand you over to my good friends here," she said. "Doubtless +you will wish to make a change in your apparel and----" + +"Unfortunately we brought no change with us," said Jack. + +"They will bring you a choice of vestments," she answered, laughing. +"You will surely find something to your taste." She bowed courteously, +and went out, followed by Zonella and her attendants. + +They were now taken in charge by the high chamberlain, whom they +already knew by name--Colenna. He, in turn, handed them over to his son +Kalaima, a bright-eyed, fair, talkative young fellow with whom they +quickly found themselves on pleasant terms. He conducted them to a +suite of chambers which would be, he said, reserved to them. They found +there various suits which he laid out for their selection, instructing +them, with much good humour, in the way in which they should be worn. +These were, so he told them, the distinctive dresses of a noble of high +degree; and were presents from the king as a mark of his special favour. + +Elwood laughed at Jack's expression while he turned over the various +articles after Kalaima had left them to themselves, examining in turn +the white tunic of finest silk embroidered with strange devices, the +cap with jewelled plume, the heavy belt of solid gold, and the short +sword and dagger; all ornamented with precious stones of greater value +than they could estimate. + +"Are you really going to deck yourself out in these things, Leonard?" +he asked, with a rueful look. "Am I expected to do so too? Great +Scott! What would our friends in Georgetown say if they could see us +masquerading in this toggery?" + +"When at Rome you must do as Rome does, I suppose," Elwood returned +lightly. "After all, I don't suppose it will seem half so strange to +the good people here as would our continuing to wear our present dress." + +"There's a good deal, no doubt, to be said for that view," Jack said +with resignation. "And, since it is intended as a compliment, I suppose +we must e'en accept it as such. I only hope I shall be able to keep my +countenance when I look at you--that is, before the king and others. At +present I feel very much afraid that it may prove beyond my powers." + +In their suite of chambers was a bath, with water deep and broad +enough to swim in. A refreshing plunge, a reclothing in the unfamiliar +raiment, and they emerged from their apartments dressed as nobles +of the country. The attempts, honest, but too often futile, made by +Templemore to preserve his gravity, caused him at times more personal +discomfort than did even the strange garb but, since use accustoms us +to pretty nearly everything the efforts required became gradually less +and less. + +But what sobered him, so to speak, the most, was his meeting with +Monella, who was now attired in like fashion to themselves. The change +seemed to have made an extraordinary alteration in the man. He looked +taller and more imposing than ever, and in his gait and manner there +were an added grace and dignity. It could now be seen that his form was +supple and muscular as that of a young man's, graceful in the swing of +the limbs and in every pose. His eyes retained their unique expression +that seemed to magnetise those upon whom they fell; but his face had +a greater gravity than ever, and something of a majesty that awed +Templemore when he noted it. + +"Of a truth," he said to Elwood, "that man seems to alter from day to +day even from hour to hour. He is just as kindly, as courteous, and as +gentle; just as thoughtful--yet, I feel somehow that there is a gulf +deepening between us, and that it is widening, slowly but surely. Yet +not because one likes him less--that's just it, you seem to like him +and admire him more and more--but you feel you do it from afar--from a +gradually increasing distance." + +And when, later in the day, they sat down to a banquet at the king's +table, and saw Monella seated beside the king, taking the post of +honour and accepting it with the easy dignity of one who had been +used to it all his life; not only the observant Jack, but the less +seriously-minded Leonard, felt, with increasing force, the feeling the +former had described. + +During this repast they learned that the Manoans were vegetarians; +though their cookery was so skilful that such dishes as the strangers +tasted they found both appetising and satisfying. Not only that, but, +as they soon discovered, these dishes were fully as invigorating and +nourishing as a meat diet. This was due to the presence of some strange +vegetable or herb in nearly every dish; but what this was they could +not then determine. + +At dusk, a new surprise awaited them; for, not only the palace, but +the whole city was lighted up by what they quickly recognised as the +electric light. They now could understand the brilliant aspect of the +city as first seen by them at night from the head of the canyon. + +After the meal, Templemore and Elwood went out, with many more, upon +a terrace that overlooked the lake; where now boats were going to and +fro, some paddled by oars, some drawn by the large white swans. But +what at first puzzled the new-comers were the antics of some who threw +themselves into the water from considerable heights. Instead of falling +almost vertically, as a diver would, they swept down in a graceful +curve, striking the water almost horizontally, then bounded up and flew +through the air for a short distance, till once more they touched the +water and bounded up again. Finally, when the impetus was expended, +they swam back to shore or were taken thither in a boat. Of course this +style of bathing could not be practised _in puris naturalibus_, or in +ordinary bathing dress; so they were furnished with a kind of divided +parachute, or twin parachutes, not unlike artificial wings; with these +they could descend from towers and great heights and with a long +swallow-like sweep, striking the water and rebounding again and again. +By practice some had obtained a wonderful dexterity in this amusement, +and their evolutions would have deceived a stranger, viewing them from +a distance, into a belief that they were actual flying creatures. Some +of the children--who chiefly delighted in this pastime--were very +expert at it. + +While watching the gay scene before them--a repetition of what they had +witnessed from afar--Kalaima came to say that the king requested their +presence in his council chamber. Following the young man they entered +a hall, smaller than that in which they had first been received, and +found the king throned under a canopy as before, and Monella seated +near him. Around the hall were ten or twelve of his chief ministers and +officers, each placed before a small table, Upon which were ink-horns, +pens, and sheets of parchment. + +Standing in the centre of the chamber was a man of swarthy skin and +haughty mien, his expression cruel and deceitful. He wore a black tunic +on which was worked a large golden star like that displayed by the +ill-fated Zelus. Standing respectfully a short distance behind this man +were two others, somewhat similarly attired. + +The leader had just finished speaking when Templemore and Elwood +entered, and he cast at them a scowl that was almost appalling in its +malignity. + +The king signed to the young men to seat themselves beside Monella; +then, turning to the man who had just spoken, said, + +"It avails nothing, Dakla, for thee to come to us with messages of this +intent, and with presentments, void of truth, of what befell to-day. +Here are the three strangers who, as thou sayest, opposed themselves +to Zelus, the son of Coryon thy master. They slew him, it is true, and +some of those who followed him, but it was to save my daughter from his +violence." + +"It is false, O King! They lie, if they say so! For our lord Zelus had +no thought of violence!" This from Dakla. + +"If thine errand here is but to charge with falsehood these three men, +I'll grant thee audience no longer." The kings voice was stern, and +his eyes flashed angrily, so that Dakla trembled, and there was less +confidence in his tone when he replied, + +"But they are strangers whom the king knows not; wherefore should he +accept their word before our trusted servants?" + +"Because it is confirmed by mine own daughter, sirrah! And if thou +darest again to say it is untrue that Zelus lifted his hand to take her +life, thou shalt not return unpunished, be the consequences what they +may!" + +By the king's impressive manner, and still more by the menace he had +thus let fall, Dakla seemed daunted. He had expected to be able to +carry things his own way. He hesitated, then said in a milder tone, + +"But even so, they should not have taken the life of our lord Zelus, +but have brought him before _thee_." + +"How could they do that when he had more than a score of men with him, +and they were but three? Furthermore, there was no time for parley. An +instant's hesitation, my daughter saith, and it would have been too +late." + +Dakla reflected; then he made a fresh suggestion. + +"It will content us if the king remit to us for trial him who, with his +own hand, did slay our lord. If, on due inquisition, it shall be found +even as the king hath said, then shall he be returned unhurt." + +The king's face clouded, and his lips curled with scorn as he replied, + +"Out upon thee, with thy tricks and cunning snares! Thinkest thou we do +not know thy master by this time? These strangers are my guests--under +my protection! Hark ye! I say under my protection! If harm shall befall +them, I will seize thyself, an' thou comest again within my reach, or +any others of thy master's minions on whom I can lay hands, and their +lives shall pay the forfeit." + +"Thy words will grieve my master, King Dranoa," said Dakla, with a +scarcely hidden sneer. "He careth only for the welfare of the king and +of his people. But how shall there be safety for the dwellers in this +land if such as these may go abroad and slay at will, and be protected +by the king?" + +"What safety is there now for any, when even the king's daughter cannot +walk near mine own palace without assailment?" the king wrathfully +demanded. "Hold thy peace, sirrah! and quit my sight ere worse betide +thee!" + +At this Monella rose, and, bending towards the king, said something +in a low tone to him; the king, assenting with a nod, Monella slowly +turned his glance upon the henchman of the priest, and thus addressed +him, + +"I have the king's permission to send a message of my own to Coryon, +since the opportunity now offers. It is well that thou shouldst bear +it, and better still if thou takest it to heart. I sent the same +message by the murderous crew that followed at the heels of thy late +shameful lord--as thou callest him--Zelus. It is this: that such things +as he attempted will bring down vengeance and retribution on you all. +Bid Coryon take heed and mend his ways; if not, his doom is fixed. We +are but three; yet, if we chose, and the king so willed it, we could +clear thee and thy master and his brood from off the land--aye, ere +another sun has risen and set. And tell Coryon this, by the king's +permission we are here, and, as thou hast heard, under his protection. +For that protection we are grateful, but we need it not. If thou, or +any of thy serpent brood molest us, we will hold you all to such a +vengeance as shall repay the wrongs of others and rid the earth of you. +I sent this message by Zelus's craven hounds, but my mind misgives me +that in their flight they scarce remembered it; or, perchance, they +feared to give it. Wilt thou now bear it to thy master?" + +"Who art thou that dares to send a message of defiance to the great +Coryon?" Dakla asked. + +"One who can carry out his words; one who, as the ally of the king, +will bring upon your heads that which has been so long deserved. One +who, though he spared thy myrmidons to-day, will spare no more. Beware! +Attack us, and we show no mercy!" + +With each succeeding sentence he seemed taller, more imposing, and more +menacing; until the last words were fairly thundered out, and his eyes +flashed fire. + +The countenance of Dakla fell before his gaze; he hesitated, panted, +turned to go, then turned back, and finally, as one who spoke against +his will, he said, with no show of his former mocking insolence, + +"Sir, I will bear thy message." Then, with an obeisance to the king, he +and his attendants left the place. + +"I would give something to know what the king and Monella talked about +so long to-day," said Elwood to Templemore that night, when they found +themselves alone together. + +"So far as I can gather," Jack replied, "there is a grand old feud on +here between these rascally old priests, on the one side, and the king +and his followers on the other; and Monella, I suspect, has learnt +enough concerning it to lead him to back up the king. Well! So far as I +am concerned, I am game to back him up, too, against such a murdering +lot as they seem to be. What say you?" + +"You need not ask _me_," Elwood answered with some surprise. "But I +thought that you--well--that is----" + +"Would be rather more slow to get up enthusiasm, eh?" Jack interrupted +with a laugh. "Not at all. Fooling about in a dark, gloomy forest, with +no apparent end in view, was one thing; taking part in an adventure +of this kind to help a lot of people who have received us kindly, is +quite another; to say nothing of helping the king, who's a regular +brick, and his daughter, who's----" + +"An angel!" put in Leonard. + +And Jack laughed, but approvingly, and said good-night. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +MARVELS OF MANOA. + + +During the following days Elwood and Templemore learned much of the +strange land in which they found themselves; of its people, of their +condition, and other details. But, since to give every separate +conversation, incident, or other means by which they gained their +information, would be tedious, it will suffice to cite some extracts +from Templemore's diary that summarise the knowledge then and +subsequently obtained. + + * * * * * + +"I am able now to jot down some account of this strange place and its +inhabitants, so far, at least, as my limited knowledge of its language +and other means of information go. + +"The people seem to be amiable, fairly intelligent--considering, +of course, that they know nothing of the great world outside--and +generally well disposed. Although they maintain a small force of +'soldiers' or 'guards,' and drill and discipline them with as much +assiduity as though they might be called upon to engage in warfare, +yet, as a matter of course, there are no people with whom they can go +to war; nor is there any likelihood of their having to fight, except +amongst themselves. And this, unfortunately, has not been unknown; +moreover, there are 'signs in the air' that it may not be unknown +again. + +"An unexpected discovery we have made is, that this mountain is +connected with another close to it and called 'Myrlanda.' The +connection is underground, and was made originally in the course of +mining operations. + +"Undoubtedly, _once_ these people were a great nation. Their arts +and sciences, their buildings, their engineering works, and their +knowledge of mechanics, all give evidence of this; but, since a nation, +isolated as this has been for ages, must necessarily either progress +or retrogress, the Manoans slowly, gradually, but surely, have done +the latter. They have numerous museums which are full of wonders of +all sorts, pointing to lost arts, lost sciences, lost inventions, lost +knowledge of all kinds. The fact that the demand has fallen off with +diminishing population has led to the discontinuance of manufactures; +though, in the museums, there are evidences that they once existed. + +"This is the case as regards chronometric instruments. Their +occupations being desultory, they have little need to know the time of +day; so the use of clocks and watches has 'gone out of fashion,' and +there does not now exist a person in the two 'islands'--as they still +call these two inaccessible mountains--who can make a clock or a watch. +Yet, in their museums they have many ancient specimens of clocks and +watches of various kinds. + +"Like remarks apply to many other arts and sciences and +manufactures. The cause is likely to be found in the fact of their +non-intercommunication with other nations. + +"But the most wonderful thing of all, in this land of marvels, is a +plant or herb they call the 'Plant of Life.' This, I am assured (though +it seems hardly credible), if taken from time to time in certain +forms, combined with other plants found here, induces great longevity +in the recipients. The king, for instance, who looks between fifty and +sixty years of age, I am seriously told is three hundred and forty! Yet +that, even, is nothing out of the way here; for--assuming that they +speak the truth--there are among the priesthood a few who have lived +in the land one thousand, fifteen hundred, and two thousand years and +more! I should scarcely take the trouble to write this down, were it +not that I find it a matter of such common belief on all sides that +it is impossible to avoid regarding it seriously. When first these +statements were made to me I sought Monella and reported to him what +had been told me, remarking that I thought it somewhat in bad taste +on the part of my informants to combine together--as it seemed to me +they must have--to palm off such tales upon a stranger. To my utter +astonishment, he replied that he had reason to believe that there +was truth in what I had been told! He had doubtless heard the same +thing--and he is so quick to probe to the very root of whatever excites +his interest, and a man so difficult to deceive, that, on receiving his +solemn assurance (I asked for it) that he was not jesting, I felt bound +to regard the matter attentively. I, therefore, set to work to get at +all the facts as well as I could, and to see and examine the wonderful +plant for myself. In this way I have arrived at the following data:-- + +"The plant, which is called 'karina' in the language of the country, +is of a curious delicate, clear, blue tint--almost transparent in +appearance, and in texture smooth and glassy-looking as to the +leaves. It grows to a height of two or three feet, and is succulent +in character; exuding freely, when squeezed, a juice which has a very +strong bitter-sweet taste. It is prepared in several ways--many +having, it is believed, secret recipes which have been handed down +from father to son from generation to generation; but they all relate +more or less to a tea or infusion of the leaves, with or without the +admixture of other herbs or drugs. To have the full effect it must be +taken regularly, almost from infancy; indeed, it is so powerful that +those not accustomed to it must take but very weak doses at first for +a long time, till the system learns to assimilate it; otherwise, it +may even act as a poison. Taken, however, regularly from childhood, +it produces and maintains perfect health, defying all those usual +fevers and diseases that afflict humanity in other parts of the world, +and carrying the body unimpaired in all its functions--accidents, +of course, excepted--into extreme age, without loss of vitality or +strength. + +"People do not, however, live for ever; there is one disease and only +one that the 'karina' cannot cure. This is called the 'falloa'; there +is also another name for it signifying the 'don't care sickness.' +Those attacked with it gradually sink, and die painlessly and easily. +This disease, no doubt, must come to all sooner or later; but it is +generally believed that the priests--and they alone--are aware of some +way of so preparing the 'karina,' that they can either cure even the +'falloa,' or keep it at bay for very much longer periods than other +people succeed in doing. + +"It is certainly a remarkable fact that throughout the land disease, +in the sense in which we understand it, is unknown. Consequently, +physical pain is almost absent, save in case of physical injury. Nor is +it necessary to be continually taking the preparation of the 'karina.' +When once the system becomes inoculated with it, as it were, it is +sufficient, afterwards, to repeat the doses at long intervals; and a +traveller, as I gather, might take sufficient of the dried plant with +him on his travels to keep him in perfect health for many years in any +part of the world. + +"And when, at last, the 'falloa' attacks its victim, it causes neither +pain nor suffering of any kind; only melancholy, and a distaste for +life in general; while its approach is so gradual as often to be +unnoticed. + +"There is little doubt that the absence of ordinary diseases exerts +a corresponding effect upon the physical development; and this alone +is sufficient to account for a fact that is very noticeable here, +viz., the beauty of the inhabitants. Both the women and the men are +remarkable in this respect; and probably not in all the rest of the +world put together could so many beautiful women and handsome men be +found as one sees in this small, but strange country; and this applies +to the old, in a measure, as well as to the young generally. Whether it +also applies to the old amongst the priests, one cannot say, for they +seem to keep entirely to themselves. + +"As regards these 'priests,' there are two sects in the country, called +respectively the 'Dark,' or 'Black,' and the 'White.' + +"The religion of the 'White' priests, or 'Brotherhood,' resembles, +in many respects, that of the Hebrews, save that for 'God' they use +the term 'Great Spirit,' or 'Good,' or 'Almighty' Spirit. These have, +however, now no influence in the country, and have been exiled to +Myrlanda, where they confine themselves to a small 'domain,' have few +followers and very little communication with the general inhabitants. +The chief of these is named Sanaima. + +"The chief of the 'Dark Brotherhood'--as they denominate themselves, +and well they deserve their name, from all I hear--is called Coryon; +and he and Sanaima are both popularly supposed to be more than two +thousand years old! But, since both these millenarian gentlemen keep +themselves shut up amongst their own immediate adherents, and seldom +show themselves to the people, it would not be very difficult to keep +up a tradition of this sort without a word of truth to back it. It may +be urged in support of it, however, that we see many going about who, +we are assured, are three, four, or five hundred years old; and these +assert that they have not the true secret of preparing the 'karina'; +this being known only to the priests. + +"But whatever be the truth as to their longevity, the 'Dark +Brotherhood' seem to be a set of bloodthirsty, licentious tyrants, +ruling the people with a rod of iron, for the king, though nominally +an autocrat, has but little real power; but his rule, so far as it +extends, is mild, and his people appear loyal and well disposed towards +him. + +"The real ruler of the land is Coryon, the High Priest of the 'Dark +Brotherhood'; a man who, though never seen beyond the limits of his +own domain, makes his power felt everywhere. What I have heard of him +and his chosen band sounds too atrocious to be true; yet I am assured +I have heard only a part; the whole truth is of such a nature that men +shrink from speaking of it to one another. + +"It is said that they have many wives, whom they choose at will +from amongst the daughters of the people; but what becomes of them +afterwards no one knows, for they are never seen again when once they +disappear behind the gates that shut in the domain 'sacred' to the +'Brotherhood.' Further, they lay a 'blood-tax' upon the population +for 'religious sacrifices'; at certain intervals these victims are +selected, it is _said_, by a sort of ballot, and from that moment +vanish like the others, and their fate is never known; or at least no +one professes to know. It is, indeed hinted, that it is too terrible +to be published. One or two who have escaped back to their homes +have, it is averred, died raving mad; their ravings being of so dread +a nature that it could not be determined whether they referred to +scenes actually witnessed, or were the offspring of their madness. +What becomes of the children of these 'priests'--or at least of a +large proportion of them--is also a matter for conjecture. They cannot +well all live, or they would probably overrun the land. It is darkly +whispered that all but a certain definite proportion are sacrificed. At +any rate they are seldom heard of. Zelus, the one Elwood killed, was +an exception, it would appear. He is described as the 'only remaining' +son of Coryon; but what has become of his other children, if any, is +not known. Zelus had set his mind upon taking Ulama from her father +to make her, against her will, his wife--or one of them. Now it is +generally understood that the king and his family, and the members +of his household, are safe from molestation by the 'Brotherhood.' +Therefore, in seeking to force Ulama, Zelus was offending against the +strict law; yet, such was his insolent contempt for all law but his +own will, that he not only designed to bear her off, but, in his rage +at her resistance and the scathing disdain and scorn she showed in her +refusal, he would have killed her. And it is quite certain that, had +he succeeded, he would have been protected by his father, so that no +punishment would have fallen on him. + +"If, however, as appears from this, even the king's only child is +not safe from these atrocious wretches, what must be the position of +the common people? As a matter of fact, though they are by nature +cheerful, contented and unselfish, yet over all there seems to hang the +shadow of an ever-present dread, the overpowering, constant fear that +to-morrow or the next day--this day, even, they or some of those they +love, without the slightest warning, may be seized and borne off to an +unknown fate. All the information vouchsafed in such a case is that +the victim has been chosen by the so-called ballot; but it is hinted, +and no doubt believed, that, if one of the priests, or one of their +favourite adherents, happen to cast an approving eye upon a daughter of +the people--be she maiden or wife--the 'ballot' is pretty sure to fall +upon her before very long. + +"This is the awful despotism wielded by these 'priests' in the name +of religion. Needless to say, it is not confined to the particulars +stated. If the priests themselves are not much seen in public, some +of their emissaries and followers are continually about, and they +domineer over the people and perpetrate many shameful acts of cruelty +and injustice, in almost all of which they are supported and protected +by those they serve. For, though these wretches are nominally amenable +to the civil law, or to be brought before the king, few, even of the +boldest of their victims, care to risk the after vengeance that they +know would overtake them as the consequence. + +"It was these miscreants that the king had in his mind when he insisted +upon giving us an escort during our sojourn here. And, though our +firearms are undoubtedly our best protection, still, as has been +pointed out to us, we have made enemies who are treacherous and +relentless, with fanatical adherents, who mingle with the people and +might stab one of us in the back without warning, were they allowed the +opportunity of coming near us in the guise of ordinary well-disposed or +curious citizens. We have thought it, therefore, only prudent to accept +the proffered guard. + +"Of the 'White Brotherhood' one hears little. Sanaima, their chief, is +reputed to be an upright, well-disposed man, who would, if he had his +way, assist the king to put an end to the domination of the other sect +and its human sacrifices and other evils and abominations; but they do +not seem to have the power, or, if they have, they lack the resolution +to take any decided or practical steps to shake off the tyranny of +Coryon. Nor could it be done without plunging the country into a civil +conflict that might last indefinitely and be productive of almost +endless suffering; and the king, as a kind-hearted man, shrinks from +precipitating such a calamity. So Sanaima shuts himself up in his own +domain and gives himself up, it is understood, to abstruse study. + +"Turning to another noteworthy and surprising thing--the fact that +these people are acquainted with electricity and the electric +light--it seems that they collect and store it underground in some +way I do not yet understand. But upon all high rocks are placed metal +rods--lightning rods, in fact--and it is asserted that at all times, +day and night, but more particularly when there are clouds around +the mountain, a constant stream of electricity passes down the rods +and is retained and stored in insulated receptacles constructed for +the purpose underground. The effect of this arrangement is that +thunderstorms are unknown here. The armature of lightning rods draws +off all the electricity from the surrounding atmosphere; and, though +thunderstorms are often witnessed in the distance--playing round other +mountains, for instance--yet they never burst over Manoa or Myrlanda. + +"On this mountain--Roraima, as we call it--a name, by the way, entirely +unknown to the inhabitants--the city of Manoa and its lake stand at +one end of the great basin that lies within the summit. All around are +terraces of rock rising, one behind the other, till they end in high +wooded crags that form, in fact, the edge of the summit as seen from +outside. Down these crags or cliffs pour numerous cascades that find +their way, eventually, into the lake; whence they issue again as the +great waterfalls that tumble from the summit--or near it--to the base +of the mountain. For though, from a distance, these falls seem to start +from almost the very summit, they, in reality, burst out from the level +of the lake, more than a hundred feet lower than the highest rocks upon +the top of the mountain. + +"The rest of the top--apart from the lake and city--is a country of +hill and dale, rocks and woods, very picturesque, and forming, in +places, minor basins, or vales, of considerable extent and beauty, +quite shut off from one another. I estimate the total extent roughly +at a hundred square miles; but I believe Myrlanda covers nearly two +hundred. + +"None of the land in Manoa is given up to cultivation, save in the +form of gardens, or orchards, and groves of fruit-bearing trees. The +lower rocky terraces around the lake are beautifully laid out in this +way. Here, are cultivated fruits of every kind. The trees are planted +in such a way as to form shady walks and resting-places; beneath them +are seats and fountains that are always playing, fed by the streams +that rush down at intervals towards the lake. And across these streams +are numerous bridges; some, where the torrents open out on approaching +the lake, are necessarily of considerable width; those on the terraces +above are small rustic structures--but all are ornamental, and some of +exquisite design. Around the terraces flowers grow in profusion, partly +wild and partly cultivated. Wonderful orchids, gloxinias, begonias; +orange-groves covered with flowers and fruit; and gardenias with their +deliciously scented blossoms; with many others that I have never seen +before and have not yet learned the names of. + +"The cereal and other crops required are grown in Myrlanda, which is +principally devoted to agriculture; there also there are numbers of +goats, and a kind of sheep, and large quantities of fowls. Pumas, which +are kept as pets in Manoa, are not allowed in Myrlanda, for they would +play sad havoc amongst the flocks and poultry; though, probably, they +live upon them all the same; for the Manoans, being vegetarians, never +eat meat, but give the flesh of their animals to their pets. The latter +include cats, of which there are large numbers; some of most curious +kinds. These two animals, between them, it is said--the puma and the +cat--have cleared the land of all wild animals, including serpents; for +there is no more deadly enemy of serpents--even venomous ones--than the +cat; and the puma will attack and overcome larger non-venomous snakes. + +"No one, to see these latter great animals playing continually with +the children of their masters--as may be witnessed here all day +long--would think they were naturally of such bloodthirsty instincts. +It has been said of pumas that, with the possible exception of some +kinds of monkeys, they are the most playful animals in existence. One +can certainly see ample evidence of this in Manoa, for the creatures, +whether large or small, old or young, seem ever ready to start a game +of romps with whomever they can get to indulge them--whether little +folk or their grown-up elders. + +"The large swans that swim about on the lake, though very tame, +can scarcely be regarded as pets, though they are frequently to be +seen docilely drawing a small boat about; or a team of them will be +harnessed to a vessel of larger size. They get their own living +among the fish in the lake, and seem able to hold their own with the +pumas. I am told that this comes about from the fact that the young +pumas, being often foolish enough to attack them in the water, meet +with such treatment that--if they succeed in escaping drowning--they +ever afterward leave the birds alone. These swans make their nests and +rear their young on some islands that lie out near the centre of the +lake. Often, towards night, when the sun has perhaps set for the day +on the lake and the country surrounding it, these birds may be seen in +small flocks circling and whirling in the air, and presenting a very +beautiful sight as they rise out of the shadow, and the rays of the +setting sun light up their plumage. These are undoubtedly the 'white +eagles' that are asserted by the Indians to be the 'guardians of the +lake' on the top of Roraima. + +"Myrlanda is honeycombed with mines, but hardly any are at present +worked, the demand for their products having practically ceased; and +such large stocks have accumulated from former workings that I am told +they are not likely to be reopened for many years. So far, I have only +partially inspected the museums. They are more surprising than even +the people, for they speak plainly of a wonderful past history. Here +are many strange inventions and machines, the very meaning and use of +which are now but a matter of conjecture. They contain, too, stands +of arms--spears, javelins, swords, daggers, shields, bows and arrows, +etc., as well as suits of beautifully wrought chain armour--sufficient +to fit out a small army. Most of these are mounted in gold, and many +are ornamented with jewels. All are kept bright and in admirable order. + +"The statues are surprising specimens of art, as are the bas-reliefs +with which most of the buildings are embellished. Yet there are now no +sculptors here, nor any painters. There are potters, but their work is +inferior to specimens preserved in the museums. In many other branches +of manufacture, also, the artificers of to-day are evidently unskilful +as compared with those of former times. + +"In the museums are also preserved manuscripts of great antiquity, +and interesting as throwing light on the past history of the nation. +Many of the nobles and chief people can write and read; but, printing +being unknown, their opportunities of keeping up such accomplishments +are necessarily very limited. The materials used for dress are mostly +silk--obtained from silkworms--wool, and linen; the last being obtained +from a fibre resembling flax. In the manufacture of these materials +into fabrics the Manoans are particularly skilful; especially in +working or embroidering upon them all kinds of new and quaint designs. +Their boats, too, that float about the lake, are exquisite models; so +that one can quite believe that the nation was once, as they declare, a +maritime people, with fleets of ships, or, at least, large vessels of +some kind. In the museums, by way of confirmation, are pictures--very +cleverly executed works--of naval battles; and, in these, large vessels +with two and three masts are represented. + +"It is worthy of remark that in all these pictures representing +battle-pieces--and these are many--none but white people are depicted. +That different races intermingled in the fighting is indubitable; but +the difference consists in dress and other details; not in the colour +of their skins. + +"It is a tradition of the Manoans that they formerly ruled over 'the +whole world.' This may be taken to imply either the whole continent of +America, or a large portion of it; but they knew nothing, formerly, of +black or red races; and their archives bear this out--their pictures, +perhaps, more forcibly than anything else. + +"As regards the buildings, their architectural magnificence is +undeniable--almost, indeed, defies description. On many structures gold +has been freely employed in the roofing, and for other purposes where +we should employ lead or iron. They say the gold came chiefly from +Myrlanda, and certain neighbouring 'islands'--_i.e._, mountains--from +which they are now isolated. Gold cornices, and embellishments, of +every conceivable shape and form, are commonly used for outside +decorations; the very conduits to carry off water being often of gold +or an amalgam consisting largely of that metal, and wrought into +elaborate designs. Indeed, both iron and tin--and lead also--seem to +have been much more sparingly employed than gold and silver. Iron seems +to have been used only where extra strength and weight were required, +and, in the form of steel, for weapons, or for common utensils, tools, +etc.; and of copper there is very little anywhere to be seen. Silver, +even, is less common in heavy decorative metal work than is solid gold. + +"Thus the tales that Sir Walter Raleigh heard of the splendours of the +ancient city of Manoa--or El Dorado--and that for many hundreds of +years since have been regarded as fables, appear to have been based, +after all, upon actual fact." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +LEONARD AND ULAMA. + + +"How I should like to see this wondrous outside world that you come +from!" said Ulama dreamily. "The more you tell me of it, the more you +whet my curiosity, and the more I long to see its marvels for myself." + +"And yet," was Elwood's answer, "nowhere will you find so marvellously +beautiful a scene as that which now surrounds us. I have travelled a +good deal myself; and my friend Jack much more; and Monella, where has +he not been? He seems to have visited every corner of the world! Yet +he said to me, but yesterday, that he thought this the fairest spot on +earth; and in this Jack agrees, so far as his experience extends. + +"Since I first came here I have looked upon it from many points of +view; from the water, as the boat drifts from one side to the other; +from different places round the shore; from various spots on the rocky +terraces above; and these different views I have seen under all the +shifting effects of sunlight, moonlight, and in the mountain mist. Yet +do I find myself unable to decide which I like the best. Whatever I +do, wherever I happen to be, I see constantly some fresh enchantment, +some new charm, some effect at once unexpected and delightful; till I +strive in vain to make up my mind which I admire the most." + +It was about a week after the arrival in the city of the three +travellers; and Ulama and Leonard were seated in a favourite boat in +which the princess was wont to spend a large portion of her time. +It was, really, a small barge, of curious but graceful design and +elaborate decoration. Over the after part was a white and light-blue +awning; the bow ran up in the shape of a bird with out-stretched wings +wrought in gold and silver, and the stern was fashioned like a fish +with scales of blue and gold, its tail being movable, and running down +below the water-line to form the rudder. Upon the sides provision was +made for several oars; but this morning Ulama and Elwood had put off +alone, content that the boat should drift wherever the slight air or +current might direct. + +Truly Leonard had not over-rated the beauty of the scene around them; +scarce indeed would it be possible to do so. The water was a dazzling +blue, yet so clear and limpid that it seemed more like a film of tinted +air than water, so that the eye could pierce to great depths where +many strange creatures could be seen. The sun, high in the sky, poured +down its rays upon the buildings and the trees, in some parts lighting +up only the tops and throwing purple shadows over the rest; in other +places, touches of vivid green contrasted with the pink-white tints of +the faces of the buildings; the whole quivering in the shimmering haze +that conveys an idea of unsubstantiality in what one sees--a suggestion +that it may be only a mirage that a passing breeze may dissipate. + +Ulama was leaning in contented listlessness over the boat's side, +her hand playing idly in the water. On the shapely arm, bare to the +elbow, was a plain gold band in which was set a single diamond that +even crowned heads might have envied. It flashed and sparkled in the +sunlight with dazzling fire and power. A gold fillet, set with another +matchless diamond, confined her hair, which fell loosely in wavy +tresses round her shoulders. Her dress was of finest work, its texture +thin as gossamer; pure white with here and there a silken knot of blue. +It was gathered into her waist by a golden zone whose clasp was hidden +by another and even larger diamond. No other style of dress could have +so well set off the perfect symmetry and beauty of her figure. Thus, +bending in unconscious ease over the boat's side, the young girl formed +one of the rarest models of maidenly grace and loveliness that could +that morning have been found amongst Eve's daughters. + +Yet, probably, to most observers, the purity and sweetness that looked +out from her soft, wistful eyes would have seemed the chief and most +attractive charm of this radiant maiden of the 'city of the clouds.' +And her gentle, lustrous eyes were the index of the pure and loving +soul within. + +No wonder, therefore, that she was, beyond compare, the best loved, the +most honoured person in the land. + +She was her father's chief, almost his only, joy. Apart from her he +found but little that gave him happiness. At the same time he loved +his people and honestly desired to do his best for them; and gladly +would he have made great sacrifices to bring about their emancipation +from the priestly tyranny that oppressed them. But he shrank from the +extreme step of precipitating a civil war; yet the alternative of +allowing things to take their course and continue in the old groove +grieved him deeply; so much so that his distress had begun to take the +form of settled melancholy. His courtiers, who were devoted to him, +noticing this, themselves became a prey to anxious misgivings, fearing +in it the first symptoms of the sole incurable disease they knew--that +which they termed the 'falloa.' + +Leonard's last words had started a fresh train of thought in the young +girl's mind, and presently she spoke again. + +"Do you then mean that you would fain pass your life with us; you to +whom the great world beyond is known, with all its endless interest? +It seems strange that! Methinks that, were I in your place, I should +deem life here but colourless and childish. For me, certainly, it has +sufficed. I have a father who loves me dearly--dotes on me; my mother I +never knew. She died when I was very young. I have kind friends around +me whom I love, and who love me, and who seem to think far more of me +than I deserve. And, were it not for the sadness in the land, I think +I should be very happy; certainly I should be contented. Yet, now +that you have told me of a spacious world beyond, full of all sorts +of mysteries and unheard-of marvels, I confess I should like to see +something of it." + +"To do so would bring you no lasting pleasure," Leonard answered. "If +we--if I--who have looked upon these things, have been brought up +amongst them, if I am weary of them, and never care to see them more, +and would spend the remainder of my life here, for you they would have +no attractions." + +Ulama glanced up shyly at him from under her long lashes. + +"But are you--would you?" she asked with a slight blush. "Would you +truly like to stay here all your life--never to go back to your own +land?" + +"Yes! I _do_ mean that!" And there was a fervid glow in Leonard's +countenance. "All my life I have had a restlessness impelling me to +seek--I knew not what--in distant lands. All my life I have had strange +dreams and visions; not only in the stillness of the night, but also +amidst the busy hum of day, and in all these one form was ever present; +it hovered round me so that I could almost see and touch it. But--and +now comes the strange part of it--that first day I set eyes on you, the +moment you drew near, I saw in you the living image of her who had been +the central figure of my waking visions, and held sweet converse with +me while I slept. Then--when my eyes met yours--I understood it all! +I knew then what had led me hither; what it was I had unconsciously +been seeking, and wherefore I had been restless and unsatisfied at +home. I knew that in you I had discovered all I craved for--the sweet +fulfilment of my soul's desire. And then--then--I saw you in the grasp +of one who would have slain you! And my heart stood still, for I knew +that, unless my hand were steady and my eye unerring, in striving to +save your life I might destroy it. Oh, think, think what must have been +my anguish! Think, how----Ah! never will you know a tenth of what I +suffered in that brief space; or my relief and thankfulness when I saw +him fall, and you stand scatheless!" + +The young girl looked shyly at him; then, noting the love-light in his +eyes, and the glowing flush upon his cheeks, the while he had poured +out all that he had felt for her, an answering blush stole over her +own fair cheek; while a coy, dainty little smile seemed to flit airily +around her mouth, setting into little dimples first here then there; +in like manner as a ray of light, reflected from a mirror, will dance +coquettishly to and fro in obedience to the hand that moves the glass. + +There was silence for a space, she gazing downwards at the water, but +now and then stealing a shy glance at her companion. + +Then another line of thought passed over her mind and shadowed her face +for a moment. + +"I wonder," she said with touching innocence, "what people see in me to +like so much? I fear it is not always well that this should be. It was +that which led--Zelus"--she shivered at the name--"to thrust himself +upon, and at last threaten me, and has placed you in danger for having +slain him. It is very strange! To like, to love, should mean naught but +happiness and loving-kindness and innocent delight; yet here it has led +a man to attempt an awful crime, and has placed others in great peril." + +"It was not _love_ on that man's part," said Leonard, savagely, between +his teeth. "At least, not the sort of love that urged _me_ on, that has +guided me--even as the unwinding of a clue leads the traveller through +the maze--to the side of her I loved and worshipped in my visions. Mine +is not the love that could ever do its object hurt; that could ever----" + +He paused abruptly, seeing her glance up at him with a look of wonder +on her face. + +"You love me?" she exclaimed. "But that is past believing! 'Tis but a +few days since you first saw me. You cannot know what I am really like! +How then can you _love_ me? I love my father because he has cared for +me and loved me all my life; I love Zonella--and--and--other friends, +because I have known them for so long, and they have been kind and good +to me. How can you yet tell that you will love me? Perchance when you +know me better you may even come to hate me." + +"Oh! Ulama! What is that you say?" he said impetuously. "You cannot +mean it! You are playing with me! But it is cruel play! The love I mean +is not such as the slow growth of a child's affection for a parent +or a girl-friend. It is a swift, resistless passion, that centres on +one being above all others in the world, and says, 'This one only do +I love; this one possesses all my heart and soul! From this one I can +never swerve--my love will end only when my heart no longer beats; I +cannot live without it.' Such a love bursts forth spontaneously from +the heart, as does a tiny spring from the earth's bosom and that, when +once it has found vent, for ever bubbles up fresh and clear and pure, +and, commencing in a little rill, increases to a torrent whose force no +power can stem. _That_ is the love I mean; and 'tis such a love I bear +for you, Ulama. Can you not understand something of all this?" + +"I know not," replied the maiden in a low voice, and glancing timidly +at him. "You frighten me a little--or you would, but that I like you +too well to feel afraid of you--but--I have no knowledge of such love +as you describe." + +"But, you have _heard_ of a love that far exceeds mere friendship--far +stronger than affection?" + +"Y-es. I have _heard_ of it; and--ridiculed it as fiction. Yet--if +you affirm its truth, and in your own person have experienced it--I +must fain believe you, for I know you would not say what is not true. +But"--here she sagely shook her head--"though my ears receive your +words, the time has not yet come when they have reached my heart." + +Leonard seized her hand. + +"But, meanwhile, I have not offended you, Ulama?" he asked +entreatingly. "You will let me love you? Indeed, I am powerless to help +it. And you will try to--to--like me--ah, you have said you _do_ like +me already. Will you not try to love me a little?" + +"Nay," she frankly answered, "you would not surely have me _try_? What +sort of love would that be that we had to _try_ to bring into being--to +force upon an unresponsive heart? You have said that it should burst +forth spontaneously. I scarcely understand when you speak thus." + +Leonard sighed. + +"You are right, Ulama, as you ever are; and I am wrong; but my love +makes me impatient. I will not expect too much of you. I will wait with +such content as is in me to command until your gentle heart shall beat +in unison with mine; and something in me tells me that one day it will." + +Just then they heard the voice of some one calling to them, and, +looking round, they saw Jack Templemore and Zonella, with several +others, coming towards them in another boat. + +When they were within speaking distance, Jack said that Monella had +sent him to tell Leonard he wished to speak to him; Leonard accordingly +took up the oars and rowed the barge slowly to shore. There he left +Ulama with the party, and proceeded in search of Monella who, he had +been told, was awaiting him upon a terrace that overlooked the lake. + +Here Leonard found him seated with a field-glass in his hand. Monella +turned and looked searchingly at the young man, who felt himself +colouring under the other's glance. + +"I love not to seem to spy upon your acts, my son," Monella began +gravely, "but when I caught sight of you in yonder boat holding the +hand of the princess, the daughter of the king, who is our kind and +gracious host, I could not well do otherwise than seek a talk with +you. I fear you have not well considered what you do." + +At this rebuke Leonard coloured up still more, albeit the words were +spoken with evident kindness. For that very reason, probably, they sank +the deeper. It was the first time anything savouring of reproof to him +had fallen from Monella's lips; and, up to that moment, its possibility +had seemed remote; and now the young man deeply felt the fact that the +other should have thought it necessary. + +"I think I know what you would say," he answered in a low voice. "I +feel I have been wrong--guilty of thoughtlessness, presumption, and +seemingly of breach of confidence. I understand what is in your mind. +Yet let me say at once that so far little--practically nothing--has +been said, and nothing more shall be--unless--you can tell me I dare +hope. But oh, my good friend, you who have treated me always as a son, +and shown such sympathy and kindness towards me--who have known of my +half-formed aspirations, and the ideas that led me on and ended in my +coming here, and encouraged me in those ideas--who have learned that in +the king's daughter I have found the living embodiment of the central +figure of all my dreamings--_you_ surely will not now turn upon me and +tell me I must stifle all my feelings, and--give--up--the hopes--that +had arisen--in my heart?" And Leonard sank wearily into a seat. + +Then, for the first time realising his actual position, how next +to impossible it was that the king would regard with favour his +pretensions, he placed his hands before his face and groaned aloud. + +Monella rose, and, going to him, laid his hand kindly upon his +shoulder. + +"I might bring all the arguments and platitudes of the 'worldly-wise' +to bear on you," he said, "but I forbear; and I know they will not +weigh with you. Moreover, it is undeniable that the circumstances are +unusual and unlooked-for. But they do not justify you in forgetting +what you owe to a kingly host and--I may add--to others; to us, your +friends, for instance. You know, also, that our position here is +critical; there is trouble brewing in the land. If the king should +have reason to believe that one of us has abused his confidence in +one matter, he may lose his trust in all, as touching other, and far +more weighty matters--matters that may affect even his own personal +security; to say nothing of our own lives, and those of many of his +subjects. Therefore----" + +Leonard sprang up and looked at him imploringly. + +"For pity's sake say no more," he said, "or I shall begin to hate +myself. I understand--only too well. Trust me--if you will; if you feel +you can; if you have not lost confidence. You shall not have further +reason for complaint." + +Monella took Leonard's hand in his and pressed it affectionately. + +"'Tis well, my son," he said. "I have full confidence, and will trust +you. And you, on your side, must trust me. I may have opportunity to +sound the king, and, if it so happen, you may count on me to say and +do all that my friendship for you may dictate--and that will not be a +little." + +Leonard wrung the other's hand and tried to thank him, but a burst of +emotion overcame him, and he turned away. When he again looked round he +was alone. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +THE FIGHT ON THE HILLSIDE. + + +It had become the custom of the two young men to go every morning, +when the atmosphere was clear, to a height at one end of the valley, +from which a view could be obtained over the whole country surrounding +that end of Roraima. The spot was a level table of rock under a +picturesque group of fir-trees--for on the upper cliffs fir-trees were +numerous--and from it, looking in the direction farthest from the +mountain, the view was grand in the extreme; while, on the other side +of them was the great valley or basin in which lay the lake and the +city of Manoa. + +It would be but labour lost to attempt to give an adequate idea of the +prospect over which the eye could travel on a clear day, when one stood +upon this giddy height. It extended to an almost illimitable distance; +for, when one looked beyond the surrounding mountains of the Roraima +range, there were no more hills to break the view till it reached the +far distant Andes, had these been visible. Indeed, it was said that +they _were_ visible on a few days in the year; but, if that were so, +it would perhaps be rather as an effect in the nature of a mirage than +what is usually understood by an actual view of the far-away mountains. +But nearer at hand, in other directions were mountain ridges and +summits in seemingly endless succession, piled up in extraordinary +confusion. From Roraima, as the highest of all, one could look down, +to some extent, upon the others. Myrlanda was upon the other side, but +Marima, and others of the strange group, lay before the eye, and one +could see the woods and lakes upon their summits; but enough could +not be seen to enable the spectator to decide whether they might be +inhabited or not. + +The beauty of the expanse of tropical vegetation immediately below was +indeed marvellous. Here the explorers gazed down upon the tops of the +trees of the gloomy forest that girdled the mountain (though not that +part through which they had made their way with so much wearying, but +dogged perseverance), and lo! it was a veritable garden of flowers of +brilliant hue! For the trees beneath which they had crept, like ants +among the stems of a field of clover, were gorgeous above in their +display of blossoms, while shutting out the light from those who walked +below. + +Here and there, amid the green, the great cascades and torrents from +the mountain side dashed impetuously from rock to rock; the streams +that were in fact some of the feeders of the greatest of all rivers, +the mighty Amazon; that river of wondrous mysteries, that pursues its +course of four thousand miles through the plains of Brazil, and finds +its way round at last into the Atlantic, there to hurl the volume of +its waters with such force into the sea, that even the ocean waters are +pushed aside to make a path for them hundreds of miles from land! + +Here, upon the table of rock, in full view of one of the grandest and +most eloquent natural panoramas it is possible for the mind of man +to conceive, Leonard and Templemore stood the morning following the +former's interview with Monella, looking out upon the scene. A high +wind, of bracing and exhilarating freshness, blew in their faces, +rushed with a roar through the branches above them, swaying the great +trees to and fro, and then, seeming to tear off across the valley at +one leap, continued its wild course amongst the trees on the heights +that lined the further side. Leonard, on turning to look across the +lake, saw Ergalon advancing up the slope and making signs to him. He +drew Jack's attention to the signals, and they both descended the +terraces of rock below to meet him. Here all was quiet; they were +sheltered from the gusts of wind; the roar of the gale no longer met +their ears. + +All the time they had been in the city they had had a guard. It +consisted of a file of soldiers with an officer, and they followed the +two young men in all their walks, movements, journeys, never thrusting +themselves on their attention, yet always ready to assist and defend +them, if occasion should arise. Monella, also, had an escort whenever +he went out. He had particularly enjoined on the other two never to +stir abroad without their rifles, and this injunction, though they did +not always see its necessity, they implicitly observed. + +They had not seen much of Ergalon of late; he had attached himself +more particularly to Monella, and had, in fact, become his particular +attendant. Monella had trusted him so far as to explain to him +something of the secrets of the firearms, and had instructed him in +the loading of them in case circumstances should arise in which his +assistance might be needed. Accordingly, when Leonard saw him coming up +the hillside and signifying that he wished to speak to them, he at once +called Templemore and left the ledge where they had been standing. + +Soon they saw their guard approaching with Ergalon in advance of them, +and, following them, Monella, who came on leisurely from ledge to +ledge, occasionally giving a glance behind him. + +The hillside was marked out in terraces, or tables of rock, most of +them covered with greensward and fringed at the sides with belts of +trees. Ergalon, who had taken his stand below, made signs to the two +to come down to him, and, when they had descended within hearing, he +addressed them. + +"The lord Monella has sent me to warn you to await him here and to be +ready for a contest. There is trouble afoot." + +"But why wait here?" asked Jack. "We will go down to him at once." + +Ergalon shook his head. + +"No," he said. "He particularly desired that you would await him here." + +"So be it; if you are sure you rightly understood him. But tell us, +friend Ergalon, what all this means." + +Ergalon explained that Coryon had unexpectedly dispatched a large +force of his soldiers to capture the three strangers. They had hoped +to surprise them without giving time for others of the king's soldiers +to lend their aid. But he (Ergalon) had, through a former comrade who +was still one of Coryon's people, attained intimation of the intended +movement, and had been able thus to warn Monella. + +"So the lord Monella," he explained, "sent on your guard in advance, +and then himself walked up the hill towards you that they might see +him. Thus he hoped to draw Coryon's people away from the palace and the +houses to this place, where, he says, it will be better to make a stand +and fight them, since thus no other persons will be injured in the +encounter." + +It was strange, but all who spoke of Monella, or to him, gave him some +title of honour or respect. Ergalon called him 'lord.' Even Dakla, +at the meeting in the king's council chamber--spite of his insolent +swagger towards the king--had been awed by this man's look into +addressing him by the equivalent in their language of 'sir.' + +"How many are there of them?" asked Jack. + +"Oh, a hundred--or perhaps more. But the lord Monella has said their +number matters not; and he sent me to the king to beg that none of his +soldiers should interfere. 'They would only be in the way,' he said. +He sent these extra things for you. See." And he showed a parcel of +cartridges he had brought with him. + +"Good," said Jack. "He is quite right. That's all we wanted; we can +answer for the rest. More soldiers would only be in the way; and some +of them would be pretty sure to get hurt, if not killed outright--and +all for nothing. I think I see Monella's idea. It is"--turning to +Elwood--"to take up our position here and shoot them down as they come +across this wide terrace just below us. Not a man of them will ever +cross that stretch alive." + +"Here are your guards," observed Ergalon. "The lord Monella desired +that you should place them somewhere where they would be out of the +way, but within call." + +"Let them get on to this next ledge, then, just behind us. There they +will have a fine view of everything. Did these people think to surprise +us, do you think, friend Ergalon?" + +"No doubt. Your habit of coming here of a morning has been noted, I +suspect, and they had intended, I imagine, to creep round and get up +through the woods unseen. But the lord Monella, being warned by me, +went up on a high rock, where he could see them in the distance; when +they saw they were observed by him, they gave up that plan and came +straight on." + +"I see. Well, we owe you something for having warned us, friend." + +"It is nothing," Ergalon answered simply. "My life was forfeited that +day, and you spared me; and through the lord Monella and the princess, +I gained the king's pardon. I owe you all my service." + +By this time the guards and their officer had arrived, and were placed +by Ergalon on a terrace above and behind that on which the two were +standing. + +"We like it not, this mode of yours--putting us in the background, out +of danger, while you stand up in front," observed the officer; "we +consent only because the lord Monella so desires it. They are many, but +we should not shrink; and others from the king's palace would soon come +to our assistance." + +"Yes, yes, good Abla. We have no misgivings of your courage. But you +could do no good with so few men--they are more than ten to one, I +hear--and your men would but impede us. Besides, it will give them a +lesson for the future, if we deal with them ourselves, unaided." + +Abla bowed and walked away unwillingly, as one who is bound to obey +orders, but does so against his will. + +Monella now came in view, and was soon standing by their side. After a +few words of explanation, he said gravely, + +"They thought to have surprised us all three up here; but, when they +saw they had failed in that, they took a bold course and came straight +on. Now that means, in effect, an open challenge to the king. It +means," he continued with increased earnestness, "civil war. Civil war, +you understand, has therefore broken out in the land--unless we nip it +in the bud, _here, now_, as we can, if we show no untimely hesitation. +These men are scoundrels of the serpent's brood; cruel, bloodthirsty +tools of the human fiends behind them. They deserve no mercy, no +consideration. Let none be shown to them! My plan is simply to shoot +them down the instant they appear on that ledge below us. They _must_ +climb up in front; there is no way round it, nor any means of getting +to the height above us. Therefore, they must cross that piece of open +ground. One word more. The chief, Dakla, leads them. Do not fire at +him. I wish to take him alive, if possible; he will make our best +ambassador hereafter." + +Under such conditions the battle could not be a long one. Monella had +chosen his ground skilfully, so as to make the utmost of the advantage +firearms gave him. The black-coated myrmidons of Coryon scaled the +fatal terrace only to be shot down the moment that they came in sight. +There were only four or five places where they could climb up and, at +these, not more than two men could pass together. Those who reached the +top and escaped a bullet, turned back when they heard the explosions of +the firearms, saw the flashes and the smoke, saw also their comrades +fall. Others of those below who could see nothing of what was going on, +swarmed up in their places, only to fall or turn back at once in like +manner; till, in a short time, every man had been up and witnessed the +ghastly sight of the dead and wounded lying around, and had satisfied +himself that not one could cross that level piece of rock to come near +their foes. Finally, the survivors were all seized with panic when one +of the last to show his head above the ridge came back crying out that +"the white demons were coming down after them." At this, all those who +were unhurt turned and fled. But many had fallen, dead or wounded, and +lay at the foot of the rock they had climbed up only to be instantly +shot down. Above, on the terrace itself, but at one side, stood Dakla +and one of his subordinates. These had been amongst the first to appear +above the ledge, and had moved aside to let the men form into line up +on the rock; but now they were left alone, and, when Monella quietly +descended from the rock above, they had the mortification of seeing all +their men who were capable of running disappear in frantic terror down +the hillside. + +Then he who stood by Dakla made a rush at Monella with uplifted sword, +thinking, since he seemed to be unarmed, that he would fall an easy +prey; but the man fell with a pistol ball in his breast ere he had gone +half way to meet Monella. + +"Now yield, Dakla," Monella called to the other. "It is useless either +to fight or run." + +"We will see to that," Dakla exclaimed savagely. "If thou be man, and +not demon, this sword shall find thine heart." And he too made a sudden +rush. But, before he had gone three yards, the sword flew from his hand +and his arm dropped useless by his side. Monella had shot him in the +arm. + +"Thou see'st," he said coldly, as he now approached the crestfallen +chief, "how ill-advised thou hast been not to give heed to all my +warnings. I could have slain thee earlier in the fight; I could have +killed thee now, as I did thy friend there; but I have spared thy life. +It is not for thine own sake, but that thou mayest bear a message to +thy master, and witness to him of that which thou hast seen and warn +him once more of the futility of warring against us, the allies of the +king. Dost thou understand?" + +The other cast a murderous scowl upon Monella, but made no answer for +a moment. Then, after reflection, he said in a dogged, surly tone, + +"So be it. But thou must give thy message quickly and let me go; for +thou hast hurt me sore and the blood flows fast----" + +"We will see to thy wound," Monella replied composedly. "Let me bind it +up till we get to the king's palace; there it shall be seen to farther." + +And Dakla, reluctantly, and with an ill grace, submitted to have his +wound bound up by his enemy, who, before commencing, took away the +other's dagger. + +"I cannot trust thee with these playthings," he observed. "Thou art of +the wolf tribe, Dakla." + +Meanwhile, the officer and men of their guard had come down to the +lower terrace, with Templemore and Elwood, and were looking in awe and +horror upon the outcome of the fight--if so one-sided an encounter +could be so called. On Monella and the two young men they gazed in +wonder; and, gradually, they drew away from them in fear, from that +moment treating them with even greater deference than before. + +Monella despatched Abla to summon more soldiers from the king's palace +to bring down the dead and wounded; and himself set about attending to +the latter, first handing Dakla over to Templemore. + +"Look you!" said Jack to his prisoner, "if you attempt to escape, I +shall not kill you, but hurt your other arm; and, if that does not stop +you, I shall hurt your leg, and I know that that _will_. Do you follow +me?" + +Dakla nodded a sour assent; then stood looking with evident surprise at +the trouble Monella was now taking with some of his late enemies. Such +singular behaviour he did not understand, and he shrugged his shoulders +in contempt. + +When, after a time, more soldiers, with some officers, arrived upon +the scene, these were at once set to work to bear the dead and wounded +down the hill. Monella followed with his friends and Dakla. The noise +of the firing had brought out great crowds of people, who were now +massed about the palace waiting to receive them. They had watched the +precipitate flight of the survivors of the soldiers of Coryon, and +rejoiced greatly at their defeat. But, when they saw the dead and +wounded, and that Dakla was himself a prisoner, and heard that not one +had been hurt upon the other side, their astonishment was complete. + +The king himself, with some of his ministers and officials, came out +to meet the victors; and his gratitude and emotion, when he noted all +these things and greeted Monella and his friends, were profuse and +heartfelt. + +"Ye have indeed rendered us a service," he exclaimed, "and taught +Coryon a lesson he will do well to take to heart. I feared me greatly +that harm would come to ye, and that war would follow in the land." + +"Nay, we have laid the dogs of war, I trust, at any rate, for the +present," Monella returned, with a grave smile. "They will not attack +us further, I opine, nor brave thee in the future in this rebellious +fashion." + +Then they entered the palace, and Ulama came forward to welcome them, +with Zonella and many more. + +"We have been in such trouble about you," she said, the tears standing +in her tender eyes, "ever since they told us that over a hundred of +Coryon's people had gone up the rocks to take you. And we heard the +noise of the thunder-wands, and were in great fear, till they told us +that your enemies were fleeing. Then we looked out and saw them rushing +madly down the hill, throwing away their spears, and their helmets, and +even fighting one another in their haste to scramble down the rocks. +Then Abla came and told us you were all safe, and then----" + +"Then," said Zonella, "you sat down and wept." And at that Ulama +laughed. + +"I fear it is true," she said. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +THE LEGEND OF MELLENDA. + + +Monella's anticipations of what would follow the severe lesson they had +given Coryon's followers turned out to be well founded. For when Dakla, +with his arm in a sling, revisited his master, bearing a message from +the king, the conditions offered were accepted. + +Dakla had been straightly charged that these terms would have to be +submitted to; if not that his master and all his followers would be +starved into submission. They would be confined to their own colony, +supplies of food refused, and any of their number leaving their retreat +would be killed at sight. + +The conditions imposed were that not merely the three strangers, but +all the 'lay' inhabitants were to be free from molestation by Coryon's +people; and that no more 'blood-tax' was to be levied. + +After many journeys to and fro, and much delay, Dakla at last announced +that Coryon agreed to the conditions for a time--for four months. After +that, their great festival would be coming on, and--well, time would +show. + +"It is only a truce," said Monella, with a sigh, to his two young +friends. "I would it had been permanent; but it will give us time, +and the opportunity of shaping out our course. The people will have a +respite from the terrible fear that now is ever with them; and, short +of engaging in a protracted civil conflict, for which the people are +not yet prepared, I see not what better could have been arranged." + +They were thus now able to move about more freely, and without a +guard; their rifles, too, could be left behind when they went abroad; +though Monella had counselled that they should always carry their +revolvers; for he feared they were not altogether safe from treachery, +or from some fanatical outbreak on the part of certain of the priests' +adherents. + +Thus Templemore and Elwood were now able to mingle more freely with the +populace and to see more of their social life. And, wherever they went, +they were well received, and treated with both confidence and respect. +They visited the houses of people of all classes, from the palaces of +the nobles to the dwellings of the peasantry, if so the lower classes +might be called. There were, however, no poor in the country, in the +ordinary sense of the word. The crops grown were supplied to all +alike; every one had plenty to eat, and plenty of clothes to wear, and +well-built houses to live in. And, beyond these requisites, there was +little in the land to pine for. There were forests, and from these +all were free to cut wood for fuel; the electric light was laid on +to all alike. The water they required they supplied themselves with +from the lake, or from one or other of the streams that everywhere +gushed forth from the rocks above. Of shops there were none; but +there was a market-place, and a sort of market or exchange was held +there once a week. Even this, however, was falling into disuse. There +was a currency; and there were many kinds of coins; but they were +seldom used. They were of ancient make and were preserved rather as +curiosities, seemingly, than for use. There was so little that the +people wanted, either to buy or sell, that a simple system of barter +sufficed for practically all their needs. + +Elwood and Templemore, as they came to know all these things, and +gained experience of the simple good-nature of the people, felt +increased indignation and resentment against the priests. They saw that +the horrible tyranny of these men had turned a land that might have +been a realm of perfect peace and goodwill, into one where constant +dread and hopeless misery and suffering had become so common, that all +seemed helplessly resigned to it. + +One day, when the two were in a boat with Ulama and Zonella, Kalaima, +and others, Templemore, who had been talking of these matters, asked +whether the state of things they had seen had been of long duration. + +The reply came from Zonella. + +"Ever since the time of the great Mellenda. So we are told. It is +the punishment sent by the Great Spirit upon the people for their +ingratitude to him." + +"And who was Mellenda?" asked Elwood. + +"What! You ask who was Mellenda? But I forgot; of course, you have not +been here very long, and cannot know our history and legends." + +"I have been prying about more in your museums than has my friend," +Jack observed, "and I have learned something of Mellenda. But I know +nothing of any legend. Pray let us hear it." + +"Yes, tell us about it," Leonard urged. "I like fine old legends and +tales of wonder." + +"Ask the princess to tell you." + +"No, no, Zonella," Ulama interposed. "You began it; you finish it. +Besides, you are more learned in such things than I am." + +"Very well," Zonella said resignedly. "I can only give it as I know +it. If you want further details, you must go to the museum, or ask +Colenna, the High Chamberlain, who is a very learned man. Only I do +not wish you to ridicule it"--this to the two young men--"for, though +I call it a legend, yet it is history; and all our people implicitly +believe it. You could not offend them more than by treating it lightly +or affecting to disbelieve it. I give _you_ that as a caution, more +particularly," she added, looking mischievously at Jack, "for I know +that you are very much inclined to scepticism in such things." + +"I will promise to be very good, and to make no frivolous remarks," was +Jack's laughing answer. + +"Then you must know," Zonella began, "that we deem Mellenda the +greatest of our kings; that is, of our later kings. Our ancient line +of kings before him had made Manoa the greatest, the most powerful, +and the richest country of the world. These mountains that you have +seen around us were all islands in a great lake--the lake of Parima. +Its waters extended to the great mountains that we can sometimes see +from the highest points about Manoa--far, far away. But over those, and +over lands in every direction, our nation held sway. These islands were +our chief fastnesses, and this one, Manoa, being the highest and the +most naturally favoured of them all, was the seat of government, and +its city was the capital to which were brought all the wealth and the +most valued productions of the other countries that formed part of its +empire. + +"But, after many mighty kings had lived and died, a weakness seemed to +fall upon the people. They were defeated in battle; provinces revolted, +and many distant parts of the empire were lost, passing under other +kings. At that time, it is said, our kings and nobles and chiefs among +the nation were too much given to feasting and enjoyment; and, it is +declared, they began cruelly to oppress the weaker of the people. And a +change came over the religion. Up to then all had worshipped only one +Great Spirit, who was said to be a good Spirit--the great ruler of all +spirits, in fact, and his priests were called 'Children of the Light.' +Their rule--what they taught--was gentle; it is recorded that they +were men of peace and of great--very, very great--wisdom. But another +religion had been introduced, coming, it is believed, from some of the +lands that had been conquered; and this was the exact opposite of the +old one. Its votaries and high priests called themselves 'Children of +the Night'; they worshipped, not one God, but many strange and terrible +gods; their priests, also, were thought to possess great wisdom, but +of an evil kind. They taught that there was but one way to escape the +power of the Spirits of Darkness, and that was by propitiating them by +constant sacrifices; and they killed many people at their festivals to +give them to their gods. + +"Then Mellenda came to the throne. He was the only son of the last of +the ancient line of kings. While young he had travelled far and gained +much knowledge in strange countries; and he had already, as general +of some of his father's armies, defeated the enemies of the country, +and regained some of the lost provinces. His father was killed in +battle, and Mellenda immediately set about plans for reviving the old +power and recovering the former empire of the nation. He taught, too, +that the White religion was the true religion, and he made endeavours +to put down the other. But he was absent for long periods at a time, +upon distant expeditions, from which, it is true, he always returned +victorious; but, while he was away, establishing peace and order +in some distant province, the Dark Priests were craftily at work +undermining his authority at home. However, for a long time, nothing +came of their plottings, and Mellenda reigned for several hundred +years----" + +"That's a long time," Jack interrupted, regardless of his promise. + +"For several hundred years," repeated Zonella with a reproving look +at the interrupter, "which was not very long, considering that his +father had reigned for fifteen hundred years, and was then cut off, +in the flower of his age, by an accident in battle. He (Mellenda) +had restored peace at last throughout the whole empire; reformed the +style of living, himself setting an example of great simplicity; and +his wisdom and justice and kindness of heart had made him revered and +loved wherever the name of Manoa was known. Then, finally, he married +a princess he was passionately fond of, named Elmonta, and had four +children, upon whom, they say, he lavished the most tender love. But +some occasion arose for him to leave Manoa once more, to visit a +distant part of his great empire. There was a treaty of alliance to be +made with another monarch, or some such matter of importance. He sailed +away and returned after a long absence, to find that Coryon----" + +"Coryon!" exclaimed Jack, once more forgetful of his promises. + +"Yes, Coryon, the same Coryon, as is believed, that we have here in the +land to-day. He had seized upon the government and gained over a vast +number of the most dissolute and discontented spirits to his side. He +was then, as now, the chief of the Dark Brotherhood, or Children of the +Night. All the crowd of idle, self-indulgent nobles and men of wealth, +but of loose life, among the people, whom Mellenda had rebuked and +curbed, broke out and joined Coryon's revolt; and they actually seized +upon Elmonta, Mellenda's queen, and his children, and offered them as +sacrifices to their gods. Coryon set up a king of his own choosing; +and, when Mellenda returned, he found his wife and children dead, and +the government in the hands of a puppet king controlled by Coryon, who +threatened him with death if he landed and fell into his hands. Such +was the message sent out to Mellenda when he arrived in sight of our +island on his return, successful in the mission that had called him +away, and impatient to get back to his wife and children. He had with +him a great fleet of vessels; and, though the revolt had spread to +the other islands, he could, perhaps, have found followers enough in +other parts of the empire to have regained his throne, had he been so +minded. But he was broken-hearted, and said that, since his wife and +children were no longer living, he had nothing left to fight for, and +cared not to take part in a civil war with his own people. Instead, he +decreed that their punishment should be that he (Mellenda) would go +away and leave them for many ages to suffer under the lash of the foul +religion they had supported; till all who had sinned against him saw +their wicked error, when he would return to punish finally the Dark +Priests and those who still wilfully supported them. Then, and for ever +afterwards, there should be peace and happiness and justice throughout +the land for all his people. + +"So Mellenda sailed away, and was never seen or heard of more. Not long +after his departure came the great sinking of the waters, and the lake +of Parima disappeared. This the better-disposed inhabitants left here +regarded as a special punishment for their allowing Coryon to usurp +the government and drive away the great, good, and wise Mellenda. And +they rose up against Coryon and the king he had set up. But the crafty +priest had obtained too strong a position for the movement to succeed. +Moreover, he managed to pacify a part of his opponents in a strange +way. He declared he had not put to death all Mellenda's children, and +produced a boy, who, it is said, was recognised by those who ought to +know as one of Mellenda's children. This child he promised to place +upon the throne; and afterwards he did so. + +"The nation, shut off from all the world, has much decreased in +numbers, and is now unknown where it was once all-powerful. For +centuries, it is said, the surrounding country was but a chaos of swamp +and mud. By degrees there grew up vegetation, and finally trees that, +in time, became thick, tangled forests that could not be penetrated. +Thus, for long ages, we have been cut off from all the other peoples +of the world. Some parties were sent out, hundreds of years ago, to +explore the surrounding country; but some never returned, and those +who did brought back such terrible accounts of awful woods haunted +by fearful creatures, and of deserts beyond, inhabited only by black +demons, that it was considered better to keep the country here entirely +to ourselves. So I believe the only known way that led out into the +woods was sealed up for good; and thus ended the last attempt to +communicate with the outside world. + +"Many of the White Priests fled to Mellenda's vessels, and were taken +away with him when he departed; but the others, including their chief, +Sanaima, retired to Myrlanda, where they have ever since maintained +themselves. + +"That is the story of Mellenda, and of how he left us, and of what +befell the proud city of Manoa after his departure. When he will come +back we know not; but some old prophecies obtain amongst the people +according to which the time of his return is very near, if it is not +indeed overpast." + +"His return!" said Jack. "You surely would not have us understand +that you expect this venerable old fossil to return, in the flesh, +to trouble himself about the present state of the descendants of his +ungrateful people?" + +Zonella stared. + +"Why, _of course_ we do!" she answered. "There is not a man or a +woman--scarcely a child of a few years old--that has not been taught to +believe in it." + +"I should think so," Ulama exclaimed, almost indignantly. "We all +_know_ it will be so; we believe it absolutely." + +"But," said Jack, "how long ago do you reckon all this took place?" + +"About two thousand years," Zonella replied, after a brief, but +apparently careful, calculation, counting up on her fingers. + +"Two thousand years! And you--you two sensible young people--tell us +you expect to see this badly-treated, but respectable, old gentleman +turn up again, just much as usual, I suppose, after two thousand years!" + +"Why not?" Ulama asked. "We have Coryon and Sanaima, both said to be +older than that." + +"Yes--but"--looking at Leonard--"I fancy that is like the Pharoahs of +old, you know, where there was always a Pharoah on the throne, though +kings were born and died. It would be easy to keep up a farce of that +sort where, as here, the 'High Priest,' black or white, is so seldom +visible--always in the background." + +"But if the king is three hundred and forty, may it not be possible to +live to two thousand, or more? I can point out many men of more than +five hundred in the king's palace," observed Zonella. + +The gentle Ulama, even, looked somewhat offended. + +"We do not question the wonderful things you tell us about the world +outside," she said. "Why should you question what we know to be true?" + +"It seems to me," said Leonard, "that it all depends upon the virtues +of the 'Plant of Life.' Now, if that herb, or plant, or whatever it +is, really has the qualities attributed to it, why, the rest is easy +enough." + +"I admit that," Jack said, laughing. "When once that is conceded, a +man may just as easily live to five thousand years. Only, even in that +case, I see a difficulty. How would Mellenda get the necessary 'Plant +of Life' away from here?" + +"The White Priests who went away with him would not be likely to leave +their secret behind," explained Zonella. "Besides, it is specially +stated in our historical manuscripts--so Colenna has told me--that +those who went out from the island for long periods--governors of +distant provinces and the like--not only took a large supply of the +dried plant with them, but seeds that they might grow it; and in some +places they found the plant do well; though they kept its virtues a +secret from the peoples they went amongst. These things would be known +to Mellenda and to the White Priests who went away with him; and, +probably, they settled in a place where they knew the plant was being +grown." + +"Were that so, it would explain something of the former far-reaching +fame and power of a small nation of islanders like these," said +Leonard. "The secret of such a plant--the rapid increase of population +when there were so few deaths in proportion--would of course give them +a long pull over other nations." + +"As to the question whether we seriously expect Mellenda to return +to us," resumed Zonella, "in the large museum you will see one of +his suits of armour, his banner, and a celebrated sword of his, all +kept bright and ready for use and well preserved. They are kept there +waiting for him." + +"I saw them," Jack remarked. "He must have been a big fine man, if that +suit fitted him. But, to go back to the son of this great king, said to +have been saved after all, and then put on the throne; did he have any +descendants?" + +Zonella nodded. + +"There have been five kings in the direct line since." + +"I see. So that the present king is----" + +"A great-great-great-grandson of the great Mellenda," put in Ulama. + +"I think it was rather fortunate you managed as you did when you came +here," Zonella said after a pause; "for, if Coryon had been the first +to know of you strangers being in the country, he would have striven +in every way to have killed or captured you. They say he is a firm +believer in the early coming of Mellenda, and is in mortal terror about +it." + +Jack was silent awhile, and then he observed drily, + +"Well, all I can say is that I should very much like to see the good +gentleman, if he is still about; and I only hope and wish he will +arrive while we are here. If he has been travelling around all these +years, by this time he must know a thing or two! I wonder whether he +will come in a balloon!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +HOPES AND FEARS. + + +Amongst other advantages of the peace or truce that had been arranged +with the mysterious Coryon, one was that Elwood and Templemore were +free to visit the canyon and the caves where their reserve stores lay, +and assure themselves that they were all safe. To do this they had to +arrange to be away one night, since it was a day's journey each way. +That night they passed in the cavern--which they had named 'Monella +Cave' in honour of their friend; the canyon itself they called 'Fairy +Valley'--and their camp equipage being all found intact where they +had hidden it away, they had everything at hand for making themselves +comfortable. They found, on examination, that the stone that closed +the entrance was in the same position as when they had left it. Having +removed the wooden bars, they rolled it to one side, and looked out +into the gloomy depths of Roraima Forest. + +From this outlook Templemore turned back with a shudder of disgust. + +"How I hate that forest!" he exclaimed. "How miserable it seems out +there! Verily it is wonderful, if you come to think of it, that we ever +had the patience and perseverance to cut our way through to this place." + +"We never should have done so, but for Monella's influence," observed +Leonard. "How strange it all seems, doesn't it? Now that we are back +here, we could almost think all we have been through a dream. One thing +is certain; no other party of explorers would ever work their way +through this wood as we did; they would get disheartened before the end +of the first week. Nor could they possibly do any good by persevering, +unless they had that to guide them which Monella had. What is that +piece of white over there?" + +And Leonard indicated a white patch upon a tree-trunk at the edge of +the clearing. + +Templemore took out his glasses and looked through them. + +"It's a piece of paper," he cried excitedly. "Some one's been here! We +must go out and inquire into this!" The ladder was quickly got out, and +they hurried down it and across the clearing to the tree that bore the +unexpected _affiche_. But, though the paper must have been purposely +nailed in its place it was blank; on opening it, however, they found +a few straight lines that formed a somewhat vague resemblance to the +letter M. + +"Matava has been here!" Leonard cried out. "All he can do in the +writing line is to make some marks that mean M--his own initial, you +know. Poor fellow! Fancy his venturing here to seek for us!" + +The paper had been folded many times, the 'M' being in the inside; +and it had been nailed just under an overhanging piece of bark, as a +protection from the weather. + +"He must have executed this elaborate piece of penmanship at 'Monella +Lodge'," said Jack, "and brought it with him in case his journey here +should be in vain. He's a good fellow! Knowing, as we do, how he and +all his tribe abhor this wood and the mountain, we can appreciate +the devotion that led him to screw up his courage so far. And then to +have come for nothing! It's too bad, poor chap! What a pity we could +not have got down here and seen him! Plainly he had some hope we might +return, or he would not have left this simple yet ingeniously contrived +message for us!" + +"His hope would be but a faint one at best," Leonard replied gravely. +"Having been here and found the entrance fast closed, and after our +failing to make any signals, as arranged, I fear he will carry back an +alarming tale to Georgetown." + +"I fear so too, Leonard," Jack assented very seriously. "They will be +terribly alarmed about us; worse than if he had gone straight back +without coming here." + +That evening, after they had cooked their evening meal, they sat by the +smouldering fire, both silent and both thoughtful. Jack smoked away +moodily at his pipe; Leonard was absolutely idle, except that he turned +his eyes, now on the glow of failing daylight overhead, then down at +the scene around him. + +Each knew what was in the other's mind; yet neither liked to be the +first to speak of it. But at last Jack spoke. + +"It's no use blinking the fact, Leonard," he began, "that this visit +of Matava here and the account he is sure to carry back is a serious +matter. Our friends will be more than alarmed; they will, perhaps, give +us up for dead. This raises the whole question again, What are we going +to do here, how long are we going to stay, and what about getting back? +We can't stay here for ever--at least, _I_ certainly don't mean to. I +don't like the idea of going away and leaving you here. Where are we +drifting to?" + +Leonard was gloomy. He had been so more or less ever since that +conversation with Monella about Ulama. For a few minutes he made no +reply; then said, with a tinge of bitterness in his tone, + +"You must wait awhile, Jack. I am not prepared to say yet, but--it may +be I shall be ready to clear out soon with you." + +Jack raised his eyebrows and gave a brief, but keen, glance at his +friend. Then he smoked on stolidly for a while and ruminated. + +"There's one who will never go back with us," presently he went on, +"and that's Monella. He spoke truly when he said he should never +return to 'civilisation.' He seems to have resolved to make his home +here for the future. He is now the king's right hand--his 'guide, +counsellor, and friend,' with him constantly, except when he's away +in the place they call Myrlanda, on some mysterious business. And, +perhaps, the oddest thing of all is that he is the most popular man at +the court--even with those he has, in a sense, displaced. You would +think there would be all kinds of envy, and hatred, and jealousy, and +counter-plotting, and general 'ructions,' when a stranger, suddenly +come from goodness knows where, stepped upon the scene and became +straight away the favourite and confidant and counsellor of the king! +Yet, the more he takes that character upon himself, the more they all +seem to like him!" + +"Who can help liking him?" Leonard sighed. "Who can help loving him? +Even where he reproves, he does it so tenderly you only love him the +more for it. How can any one feel jealous, or angry, or envious with a +man who behaves to all as he does? For myself I do not wonder; he was +born to be a leader of men, as I said long ago; he has that magnetic +attraction that makes a great commander--a commander who inspires such +devotion that thousands and hundreds of thousands are ready to give +their lives for but a glance of approval or a word of praise. There +can't be many such men at this moment in the world; there cannot have +been many since the world was made. But, when such a man appears, he +quickly spreads his influence around him." + +Jack gave a little laugh; but not an ill-natured one. + +"You are as full as ever of enthusiasm for your hero," he remarked, +"though he _has_ been a sort of cold shower-bath to you lately, eh?" + +Leonard coloured, and shifted uneasily on his seat. + +"How did you know that?" he asked. + +"I guessed it, old man. In fact, I saw the 'cold shower-bath' in his +eye that day--you know." + +"Yes--perhaps you are not far out, Jack. However, I promised to leave +things in his hands, and there they must remain at present. Of his +regard for me I have no doubt whatever--or for us both. If he cannot do +the almost impossible, I shall accept my fate, and try to bear it as +well as may be. Let us say no more about it now." + +Jack, who for all his usual habit of appearing somewhat unobservant, +could see most things, thought he could have told his friend of some +one else who was displaying signs of unhappiness under Monella's 'cold +shower-bath' treatment--Ulama, to wit. She had become very quiet and +grave of late; and, indeed, the fresh, childish gaiety she had shown +during the first few days after their arrival had disappeared. But +Jack discreetly decided to keep these thoughts to himself, and let +events take their course. He knew that they were in the keeping of a +head wiser and more far-seeing than his own--Monella's. Of late they +had seen comparatively little of him; he was most of his time either +closeted with the king, or had gone, it was said, to Myrlanda, to visit +Sanaima, the chief of the 'White Priests.' On these occasions he would +be away for two or three days together. Yet, whenever either of the +young men chanced to run against him--or, if they met at the king's +table--they found no alteration in his manner. Indeed, he showed, if +anything, increased kindliness in both his words and actions, often +going out of his way to do some little thing, in a manner all his own, +to show, before whoever might be present, his cordial feelings towards +them. For the rest, he had the air of one whose mind is charged with +anxious and weighty thoughts, and both Templemore and Elwood _felt_ +rather than knew that he was occupied with fears of trouble in the +future. + +One morning, a few days after the visit to the canyon, Monella invited +Leonard to walk out with him, and they went together to the place they +had named 'Monella's Height.' + +The day was clear and bright, and a slight breeze came sighing through +the tree-tops. The scene around was full of soft repose, soothing and +curiously satisfying to the mind. But Leonard noticed it not to-day; +his heart beat fast, and his colour came and went, for something in +Monella's manner told him that he was about to hear a statement of +moment on the subject that was always uppermost in his thoughts. He +tried to brace himself to bear the worst, if it must come; but his +effort was not too successful. + +"My son," Monella presently began, "I promised to speak with you, when +I could, upon the matter we talked about one day. Is your mind still +the same concerning it?" + +Was it? Did he need to ask? Leonard impulsively replied. And he +launched into a rhapsody that need not here be given at length. Monella +listened in silence till the young man had finished, and then went on, + +"Have you considered whether your wish is a wise--a final one? That, +were it granted, you must remain here for good? Never to return to your +own people?" + +"Why, never?" Leonard asked. "In the future--one day, perhaps----" + +Monella shook his head. + +"You must clearly understand," he said, "that that cannot be. I have +told you all along that I never expected to return from my journey +here; and now I know that I shall never leave this place. And you +and your friend--you will have ere long to decide either to stay +here for good, or leave for good. If you elect to go, the king will +send you away rich--so rich that you will no more need to strive for +wealth; if to stay, he will give you posts of honour where you can +profitably employ yourselves in helping me in the great task I have +set myself--the teaching of the true religion of the one great God to +these my people; for"--he continued, when Leonard looked up at him in +surprise--"it is true that I am one of this nation by descent, and that +I have, therefore, 'after many days,' only wandered back to mine own +people. But I have seen too much of the world outside to love it; my +people desire to keep to themselves, and I can only, from what I have +seen and experienced, confirm them in that wish. I cannot find it in +my conscience to do otherwise. Therefore, we are resolved that there +shall be no intercourse between us and the great world beyond. It is +useless to say more upon the subject; it is settled beyond all reach +of argument or discussion. Hence, it will be necessary for both you +and your friend to decide whether to remain and cast in your lot with +us for your whole future lives, or to say farewell and return--but +not empty-handed--to your own people. It is a serious and weighty +matter for you to decide; therefore should not be settled hastily. Nor +is there any need for haste; take as long as you please to think it +over. Wait awhile, till you have seen more of the place, and have come +to know the people better. Or wait until"--here the speaker's voice +became impressive well-nigh to sternness--"until I shall have stamped +out this serpent brood that hath too long held this fair land in its +loathsome coils. Then shall ye see a new era here--an era of peace, and +cheerfulness, and godliness--and ye shall see that it is good to dwell +in such a country." + +"I do not believe that any amount of reflection can alter my wishes in +this matter," Leonard answered earnestly. "Painful as the thought of +never seeing my friends again would be, yet it would be still harder +to leave here and never look again on her my heart has chosen for its +queen--aye, for years before I saw her. No! Now that fate has led me to +her, nothing in this world shall part us--if the decision rests with +me." + +Monella regarded the young man fixedly, and there were both affection +and admiration in his glance. Very handsome Leonard looked, with the +light in his open honest eyes, and the flush upon his cheek. Then +Monella's look waxed overcast as from a passing shadow, and he made +answer, with a sigh, + +"Youth, with its hopes and aspirations, when they come from honest +promptings, is always fair to look upon; more's the pity that these +aspirations all lead to but one end--sorrow, and disappointment, and +weariness. Verily, all is vanity, vanity! We travel by different roads, +but we all arrive at the same goal." He looked dreamily away across +the landscape to the far distant horizon; then continued, as though +talking to himself: "Yet youth pleases, because it desires to live in +love--and love is God and Heaven in one. It is the principal of the +only two things--it and memory--we carry with us in our passage from +this life to the next. Love and memory are two great indestructible +attributes of the human soul. True, we take with us our 'character,' +as it may be called, but that counts little, unless it be founded upon +love. And memory is the ever-living witness showing forth whether our +life here has been influenced mainly by selfishness, or ambition, or +hate, or cruelty, or--love. For only the love shall live and flourish +again; all the rest shall wither and die. Ye hear of 'undying hate,' +but there is no such thing. All hates, even, die out at last; love only +lives for ever and can never die." + +He paused, and remained for a space gazing into the distance. Finally, +he turned again to Leonard. + +"Come with me, and find your friend; I have that to show you that I +wish you seriously to consider." + +They walked together down the hill. Meanwhile he continued, + +"You say your mind is made up, if the decision rests with you. Well, +nominally, it rests with the king, of course; but, in reality, I +suspect, in this case with the maiden herself. The king is too fond of +her--too anxious for her happiness--to desire to thwart her wishes. And +he has remarked of late that she is not as she used to be; that she has +fits of sadness and melancholy. Her state alarms him. I think, perhaps, +he fears it may be the first sign of what is called here the 'falloa.' +But," looking at Leonard with a half-smile, "I suspect there is a +remedy for her disease, whereas there is none known for the 'falloa.'" + +When Leonard heard these words his heart and pulses bounded, and he +felt indeed as though walking upon air. Nor did he forget what he owed +in the matter to his friend. His breast swelled with gratitude, and he +poured out his thanks with a rush of words that stopped only when he +caught sight of Templemore coming towards them. + +Leonard ran to meet him, and somewhat incoherently explained what +Monella had been saying, while Monella led the way to his own +apartments in the palace. + +When they were seated there he went over again most of what he had +impressed on Leonard--for Jack had understood but little of Elwood's +impetuous talk--and added, + +"Now I want you to advise your friend and consult with him, lest he +should decide too hastily; and that must not be. I also must speak +further with the king. You see," he continued gravely, "this is a +serious thing. The king's son-in-law will look forward to be king one +day; therefore he must not be lightly chosen. Again, to choose one of +an alien race is no small thing. For myself, I am free from any worldly +prejudices about birth, and 'family,' and 'royal blood,' and all that +vain, foolish cant. And the king is of the same mind, and wants only to +choose for his child the one who pleases her, provided he is worthy. +For that I have passed my word to him. I have lived long upon the earth +and have consorted with many men; thus I have learned to judge of +character and disposition. And I have met none to whom I would sooner +trust a daughter of mine own, than to our friend here. On that point, +therefore, I have been able to satisfy the king; and fate seems to have +settled the rest beforehand. For, incredible as the sceptic may regard +it, these two had met in visions long before they encountered one +another in the flesh. Thus, in the present, as in the past, fate points +the way, and so it will be in the future. For no one can escape his +destiny. For good or ill, each has a destiny prepared for him, and that +destiny he must perforce fulfil." + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +THE MESSAGE OF APALANO. + + +The furniture in use in the city of Manoa, in material and style, was +not unlike that found in Japan. That in the palace was of exquisite +design and finish, much of it inlaid with gold and silver. It was such +a cabinet that Monella now unlocked: he took from it a parchment roll. + +"This," said he, "is the document I gave the king the first day he +received us. Now, of course, it belongs to him; but I have borrowed +it, temporarily, to show you. It was written by Apalano, the last +descendant of those 'White Priests' who fled this country ages ago +with the king Mellenda. In some of the old parchments in my possession +it is described how those who thus went away found the empire going +everywhere to pieces, and falling a prey to barbaric hordes of black +or red or cruel white races; and how they eventually took refuge in +the secluded valley high up amongst the peaks of the Andes, of which +I have already spoken to you, and dwelt there through many centuries. +They had brought with them, and succeeded in cultivating, the 'Plant +of Life,' or 'karina'; but, notwithstanding--and albeit it made them +all long-lived--the fatal disease, the 'falloa,' claimed them one after +another, till Apalano and I alone were left. Then the 'falloa' laid +its withering hand upon Apalano also; he lost his last child, and that +affected him very deeply; for, before he died, he wrote this strange +letter which tells all about myself that I know with certainty; yet +hints, as you will see, at still more to be learned in the future. I +will read it to you:-- + + "'TO SANAIMA, THE CHIEF WHITE PRIEST OF MANOA. OR, IF DEAD, HIS + DESCENDANT OR SUCCESSOR. OR TO THE REIGNING KING OF MANOA, + GREETING. + + "'I, Apalano, the last of the descendants of the White Priests who + fled with the great King Mellenda, do commend to your care the + bearer of this letter, he whom ye will know by the name of Monella. + He is, after myself, the sole survivor of our race outside thy land + of Manoa. Treat him with all courtesy, respect and confidence, + for he is of royal descent, and the unsullied blood of thine + ancient line of kings flows in his veins. Mark well his counsels, + give heed to his warnings, and observe his rulings; for he comes + to restore the true religion of the Great Spirit, and to bring + peace and happiness to our land. Long years ago he did receive a + grievous injury to the head in combat with a savage foe. This cast + a shadow upon his memory of the past, so that he knoweth naught + of what went before, and his former life is blank, save for some + vague passing glimpses that, at rare times, come back to him in + the guise of dreams and visions. We could have told him much of + all that went before, but we have refrained;--first for that he + might not have rightly comprehended what we had to tell, and next, + in mercy; for he hath suffered much. It was deemed best that the + recollections of his sufferings should sleep until the time for his + awakening should arrive, when the work for which the Great Spirit + hath appointed him shall lie before him and shall form his sorrow's + antidote and comfort. + + "'The memory that hath untimely been suspended--for we know that it + may not be destroyed--perchance may be restored to its full power + by such an accident as wrecked it; but, failing that, there is but + one sure treatment--namely, to drink of the infusion of the herb + called 'trenima' that groweth in Myrlanda and nowhere else. Let the + stranger Monella, that bringeth this to thee, drink of 'trenima' + in accordance with the rules I have laid down for him upon another + scroll; let him, for some weeks, take of it sparingly even as I + have written; then more frequently, and lo! all his past life, + now hidden, shall be revealed to him, the sun shall light up the + recesses of his memory, and he shall know himself and what lies + before him. + + "'And my dying eyes, though unable yet to pierce the future, still + can see that his coming amongst you shall be in itself a sign + of the truth of these my words. When he shall appear to you I + know not; only that it will be at the time the Great Spirit hath + appointed--not an hour sooner nor an hour behind that time--ay, not + one minute. And herein ye shall read a message from the Almighty + Spirit, and ye shall know that Monella's coming at that special + time was marked out by the hand of Destiny. And ye shall find upon + his body marks whose meaning will be known unto Sanaima, or to him + on whom hath fallen his mantle. + + "'With my greeting, I bid ye now farewell--ye unto whom this + scroll shall be delivered--my first and last message to the land + of my forefathers, and to those that now rule there. Through many + centuries we, a faithful few, have kept your memory and our love + for you green in our hearts; and I and those who have been with me + had hoped, as the appointed time drew near, that the Great Spirit + would have deigned to grant to us to see our ancient city and our + native land. But it was not to be; all have gone save me and him + who brings you this; but in him I send the blessing that we have + preserved and nursed for you through long years of persecution and + despair. + + "'If ye would return our love and care for you, I pray you show + them unto him we send. I know that he is worthy of them; and, + further, that in his own breast he bears for you the sum of all the + love we in our own persons would have shown, had we been spared to + greet ye--I and those who have preceded me to the land of the Great + Spirit. + + "'Farewell! + "'APALANO.'" + +When Monella had finished reading this strange letter, he leaned his +chin upon his hand and fell into a reverie, Leonard and Templemore +meanwhile looking on in silence. Presently Monella roused himself, and, +with a deep-drawn sigh, passed his hand across his forehead with a look +of pain. His action was as though he had half-caught some flitting +thought or memory, that had, after all, eluded him; and that the effort +to retain it had cost him mental pain. After a short interval he said, +with one of his rare smiles and in the musical voice that captivated +every one, so full were they of kindliness, + +"Now you know as much about me as I know myself. I did not show you +this before, because I had been charged to hand it only to those to +whom it was addressed; and this is the first opportunity I have since +had, for the king sent it to Sanaima, who returned it only a day or +two ago. But, since you must now consider seriously the question of +your going or remaining, it is right that you should know all I can +tell you of myself. It is very little; yet sufficient to explain my +present feelings. You can understand, now that you have read that +letter, that I am now, with all my heart and soul, one with these +people. I look at everything from their point of view; I consider only +their interest, their welfare, their safety, their advantage. If you +shall elect to remain with us--to become one of us--you shall find me +ever a staunch friend who will do all he can to make you feel at home +amongst us, and will place you in positions of great honour. If, on the +other hand, you prefer to leave us, you shall not go without such marks +of the king's favour as are beyond, perhaps, your dreams. These are the +alternatives that lie before you. Take time to ponder them; there is, +as I have already told you, no need for an immediate decision." + +When, after leaving Monella, the two were once more alone together, +Leonard burst out with the thought that filled his mind, + +"I scarcely know how to express my feelings. I am full of sadness and +yet of joy, and I know not which predominates." + +"I know what it will be," said Jack gloomily. "You will stay, and I +shall have to return alone. What excuse I shall give to people for +leaving you here--dead to them and to the world for ever--or whether +I shall ever be forgiven for appearing to have deserted you, God only +knows. I wish you would think a little upon all this. For the rest, +I congratulate you with all my heart. To be the future king of so +ancient and remarkable a nation, is a piece of 'luck' that does not +fall to everybody. By Jove!" he exclaimed with increasing earnestness, +"upon my word I don't wonder at your going in for it--indeed, if--that +is--well, if I had not already set my mind upon something else, I +would chuck up the world in general and throw in my lot with you and +be your--your Prime Minister--or State Engineer--or some other high +functionary." And he laughed good-naturedly at the ideas the suggestion +called up in his mind. + +"Don't let us meet trouble half way," said Leonard hopefully. "The time +of parting is not yet; who knows what may turn up? Monella may make us +some concession that will meet the case. And now look here. I have been +thinking of a plan for sending a message home." + +Jack stared. + +"How on earth?" he asked. + +"It won't be much of a message, and perhaps it will never reach home; +but we can try. Let us find a place where we can get a view in the +direction of 'Monella Lodge' and watch at night for camp fires out on +the far savanna. We must find a spot screened from observation on this +side. Then we will bring some powder up from our stores, and flash some +signals as Monella had arranged." + +"But what good will that do? Even if they are seen it will only be by +Indians who will not understand them." + +"Never mind. If any Indians see them they are sure to spread the news +about; and probably the first place to hear of it will be Daranato, the +Indian village where my old nurse Carenna lives. Matava may have told +her about the signals, or even other Indians. At any rate, she will be +pretty sure to hear of them and let Matava know when he returns; or +perhaps even send a message down by some one going to the coast, to say +that signals had been seen that showed we were alive on the summit of +Roraima." + +Jack reflected. + +"Yes!" he presently said slowly. "Yes. There is something in the idea. +We will try it; it can do no harm. But, to be of any good, we shall +have to signal frequently; once or twice would not be of much use." + +"Precisely. Before long, Matava will be back from the coast, and will +hear of them, and will come out on to the savanna at night to see them +for himself. And he would watch night after night with an Indian's +patience till he saw them." + +"Yes; I suppose Monella won't object? We ought not to do it without +his consent. But for that awful forest, we might even go farther; we +might make an expedition for a week or two, and get to 'Monella Lodge' +and leave a letter there; or even to Daranato, and leave letters to be +taken to the coast by the first Indians going that way." + +"No, we can't manage that, nor would Monella like us to be away so +long. You never know what trouble might turn up here with these priests +and their vile crew. And that reminds me of that letter Monella read +to-day. What did you think of it?" + +"An extraordinary letter! Really, I feel almost inclined to go back to +my former idea that Monella and his friends were all mad together!" + +Leonard stared aghast. + +"What! You speak of that again?" he exclaimed, real indignation in his +tones. "After the way everything has come out--after all Monella's +kindness----" + +Jack stopped him with a smile and a touch of his hand on the other's +arm. + +"Put the brake on, old man," he said. "I don't mean anything +disrespectful. But if Monella, who already seems to have been about +the world and to have seen as much as three ordinary men of three +score years and ten--if the point to which his memory reaches is only +a portion of his life--why, you see, he must be Methuselah, or the +Wandering Jew himself, or some other mythical being. Already, he has +puzzled me, times enough, with his extraordinary tales; at the same +time you cannot doubt his absolute sincerity. So that if his 'complete' +memory is to go back farther still, why--Heaven help us!--we sha'n't +know whether we are on our heads or our heels." + +After a short silence Leonard spoke. + +"But, if they had this 'Plant of Life' with them--those he was +with--would that not in part account for it?" + +"It might; but it is making large demands on one's credulity. But what +I really mean is this. I am inclined, at times, to think Monella a bit +mad. He has a religious mania; he has persuaded himself--and evidently, +from that letter, has been encouraged by others to believe it--that +he has a religious mission to these people. Well, no harm in _that_, +you say. No; and that he is honourable, upright, sincere, I feel very +certain. Still, he may be self-deceived. He seems to me to be one of +those fervidly religious mystics who can persuade themselves into +almost anything." + +"Yet he is no fanatic. See how mild and gentle he can be; how slow to +anger, how just in his discrimination between right and wrong!" + +"I admit all that. Still, I repeat, he might easily deceive himself." + +That afternoon Leonard sought out Ulama and asked to be allowed to row +her on the lake; and to this she smiled a glad assent. When he had +rowed the boat out a long distance from the shore, he laid down the +oars, and let her drift. A gentle breeze was blowing, and this served +to temper the ardour of the waning sun. + +"Do you remember the last time we were thus alone, Ulama?" presently he +asked her. + +"Indeed I do," she answered, her cheek, that had of late been very +pale, now glowing with a rosy flush. "But I began to think _you_ had +forgotten, and were never going to take me out again." + +"Ah! It was not my fault, Ulama." + +"Whose else could it be?" she asked. + +"Well--I cannot tell you now. But, if you remember the occasion, do you +remember also what we spoke of?" + +The colour deepened in the maiden's face. She bent her head and fixed +her eyes dreamily upon the water; and one hand dropped over the boat's +side, as on that day of which he had reminded her. + +"I then said," he went on, "that I loved you dearly, and asked +you whether you could love me in return. And you said you did not +understand such love as I described to you. Do you remember?" + +"Yes; I remember," she said softly. "But then I said I could scarce +credit such sudden love for me; and that you might change. And it seems +you have, for, since then, you have never told me that you loved me." + +He seized her hand. + +"No, Ulama," he cried passionately, "it was not so. I have not altered. +But I feared--that--well, that your father might be angered. 'Twas for +that reason that I spoke no more to you of love." + +"In that you did my father wrong," she answered frankly. "My father +loves me far too well to cause me pain and----" + +"Ah! Then--would it pain you were I to go away from here and never see +you more?" + +She started, and a look of mingled fear and grief came into her eyes. + +"You are--not--going away?" she faltered anxiously. + +"Not if you bid me stay, Ulama. If you but whisper in my ear that +you may come to love me--if only a little--then I will stay--stay +on always--forget my country, my own people, my friends; give up +everything, and live for you--for you alone, my sweet, my gentle Ulama; +my beloved Ulama!" + +Gradually her head sank until it rested on her hand; her colour +deepened, she made no reply, but still gazed pensively into the water. + +"Tell me, Ulama--am I to stay or go? Oh, say that you will try to love +me!" + +He still retained her hand, and now he passed his own gently over it, +she making no effort to withdraw it. Thus answered, he pressed his lips +upon it, and at this, also, she showed no resentment. + +"I would have you stay," she presently murmured softly; "but indeed I +fear it is too late for me to try to love you, for my heart tells me +you have my love already." + +And the boat drifted aimlessly in the evening light. The sun had set, +and the moon, the witness of so many lovers' vows--both true and +false--had shown her silvery light above the surrounding cliffs; and +still the two sat on and scarcely spoke, yet, in speechless eloquence, +recounting to each other the old, old tale. + +And, when the sweet Ulama left the boat, her heart could scarce contain +the joy that filled it; and in her eye there was a light that it had +lacked before, so that the king, her father, drew her affectionately to +him and asked her what had wrought this wondrous change. + +She shyly bent her head and answered him, + +"To-morrow thou shalt know, my father." Then she hid her blushing face +upon his shoulder. "I have a favour to ask of thee; but--I would fain +not speak of it this evening." + +Then, as though fearing that he would wrest from her the secret of her +joy, she stole swiftly to her room, and from her window looked across +the lake, now shimmering in the silver moonbeams. + +For long she sat there motionless, dreaming youth's fond dreams; +dwelling, in loving tenderness, on every word and look she could recall +of Leonard while the boat had drifted here and there, and the lap, +lap, lap, of the ripples against the sides had kept up a soft musical +accompaniment to the rhythm of love's heart-beats. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +THE GREAT DEVIL-TREE. + + +In pursuance of their design of making signals from the summit of +Roraima, the two friends made further explorations of the northern +side. And this led them into an adventure, one day, that had well-nigh +proved fatal to them both. + +On mentioning their intention to Monella, he had at first objected; +but, upon Leonard's reminding him of the anxiety and distress +Templemore's mother and _fiancée_ might be, too probably were, in, he +had given a reluctant consent. + +"Your friends, Dr. Lorien and his son, talked of coming back again," +he remarked. "Do you think they are likely to make the journey with +Matava, and to be coming to seek for you?" + +"Certainly they are coming into this neighbourhood, after orchids," +Leonard replied; "and, now you speak of it--though I had not thought +about it lately--the news Matava will probably take back may cause +such anxiety that they may hurry to get here sooner than they would +otherwise have been likely to, in order to make inquiry about us on the +spot." + +"Matava might lead them to the cavern, if they came to Daranato," said +Monella thoughtfully. + +"Yes; of course that is possible." + +"And a very little ingenuity or a small charge of powder would force an +opening; and their way would then be easy to get up here?" + +"Certainly." + +Monella's face clouded. + +"That must not be; you must clearly understand that you must tell me in +time if there seems any such probability. I wish not to seem unfriendly +towards your friends--and personally I liked them--but to allow them to +come in here would be as the beginning of a flood, as the letting out +of water. It cannot, must not be." + +"Well, after all, it is only a supposition," observed Jack. "Time +enough to deal with it, if the occasion actually arise. They were going +on to Rio on some law business which was likely to occupy them some +time; they might be detained there indefinitely, they said." + +"Quite so," Monella answered decisively. "Only, remember, I rely upon +you to inform me in time. And be very cautious and vigilant upon that +side of the country, for, as you know, it is in that direction that +Coryon and his people have their habitation." + +In their walks they were often accompanied by one or both of Ulama's +pumas, and on the day referred to the male one, 'Tuo,' as it was +called, came after them when they had gone a little way, and trotted +quietly beside them; and this, as it turned out, saved their lives. + +They came upon a place they had not seen before. Two great iron gates +of highly finished workmanship, and picked out with gold, shut in +a narrow opening in a high rock. They were such as might form the +entrance to a public garden. A broad road wound round from the inside +of the gates; but outside, where Templemore and Elwood were, the rocks +rose up fifty or sixty feet, or even more, on either side; and though +they followed them a considerable distance on both sides of the gates, +the rocks still towered up precipitously for as far as they could see. + +"This can scarcely be the entrance to Coryon's 'domain,'" said Jack, +"or there would be some people about on guard. It must be some kind of +public place." + +"A cemetery, perhaps," suggested Leonard. + +"I believe you've hit it. Well, there's a gate open, so I suppose +there's no harm in our having a peep inside." + +"Suppose some one were on the watch, and were to pop round and close +and lock the gates when we were inside and out of sight," said Leonard +suspiciously. "Monella warned us to be wary and to suspect traps." + +"We have our revolvers; and, if the worse came to the worst, we could +climb over these rocks." + +In the result they went inside; then made their way to a wide terrace +that ran round an extensive area of horseshoe shape, half natural, half +artificial, as they judged. This terrace extended several hundreds +of yards in both directions from the point at which they stood; but +it narrowed off considerably on one side of the horseshoe. Above and +behind it, cut out of the rock, were other terraces, like steps or rows +of seats, but broad below and narrowing as they got higher. These went +all round, almost to the top of the rocks. It was, in fact, a vast +amphitheatre where many thousands of people could stand or sit. At the +farther end it was open; and in the centre was a large arena sunk some +fifteen feet below the main terrace on which they stood. + +This arena opened out into a deep defile beyond, from the rocky heights +of which there issued a rushing stream of water that flowed into a +large, dark-looking pool below. + +But what at once riveted their attention, almost to the point of +fascination, was an extraordinary-looking tree that stood in the arena. +This tree had no leaves, but branches only. In colour it was of a +sombre violet-blue, tinged in places with a ruddy hue. The trunk was +about thirty feet in height, and eight or nine feet in diameter. The +branches, which were many--a hundred or more probably--drooped over +from where the trunk ended and trailed about the ground. But what was +most astonishing, these branches were all in motion. Though there was +no wind, they waved to and fro, ran restlessly along the ground like +lithe snakes, and intertwined one with another, at the same time making +a harsh, rustling sound. + +Straight in front of where they stood was a long pier of masonry that +ran out towards the tree, which was not in the centre of the arena but +was nearer to that part of the terrace where it grew narrow. In order +the better to observe the object that had so roused their curiosity, +the two young men walked across the terrace and some distance along +the pier; and, when they had proceeded a little more than half its +length, one of the long trailing branches--some of them appeared to be +two hundred or three hundred feet in length--came up over the end of +the pier, and, with a rustle, made its way swiftly towards them. It +was within two or three feet of where they stood looking at it, when +the puma, with a loud growl, sprang forward and bit at it. Immediately +the branch curled itself round the animal's body and began dragging +it along the pier towards the tree. Then two or three other branches +advanced and went to the assistance of the first one, coiling round the +poor puma and dragging it farther along, despite its teeth and claws +and its desperate struggles. In succession, other branches crept up +over the end of the stonework, and, just in time, Jack seized Leonard +and dragged him back. + +"For Heaven's sake come away, man!" he exclaimed in horror. "That tree +is _alive_, and will drag us off, if once one of those branches touch +us!" + +They had stepped back only barely in time, for a moment after a +trailing branch swept over the very spot on which they had halted. When +assured that they were really out of reach, they stood fascinated, but +filled with horror, while they witnessed the unavailing fight made by +the poor animal that had saved their lives. More branches came to the +aid of the others; they coiled round its mouth and closed it; round +its legs and bound them; and soon, helpless, a mere bundle in the +coiling, curling branches, as it were, it was drawn off the pier to the +ground below. Then it was rolled on and on till it had almost reached +the tree-trunk, where were shorter but thicker and stronger branches +waiting for it. These, in their turn, soon coiled round it; then, +slowly, they bent upwards, carrying the poor animal in their relentless +grasp, and lowered it into a hollow in the centre of the top of the +trunk, where it almost disappeared from sight. Then all the thicker +branches coiled round it and shut it completely out from view, forming +a sort of huge knot round the top of the tree and remaining motionless; +while the longer and more slender branches continued to play restlessly +about, seeking for further prey. Then, without a word, the two turned +away; nor did they speak till they found themselves safely outside the +great gates. Then they looked, horror-struck, at each other. + +Jack was the first to break the silence. + +"Great heavens!" he exclaimed. "What an escape! What an awful monster! +What a frightful death! And that poor animal--that saved us both! What +shall we say to the princess? Talk of 'traps'! If this gate was left +open as a 'trap'--and it looks to me so--we have reason indeed to be +thankful!" + +"What _is_ it?" Leonard asked at last. + +"A 'devil-tree.' It is a carnivorous tree. I've seen a small one +before; in a forest in Brazil that we were working through. One of the +dogs got caught in it and was nearly killed before we cut it free with +our axes. And then it was badly hurt, and so was I; a branch caught +hold of my hand and tore some of the flesh off it. And where we cut +this branch it _bled_! A dark crimson-blue liquid oozed out that stank! +Oh, there, I can't tell you what the stench was like! I've smelt _some_ +bad smells in my time, but that beat anything I ever came across! But +that was only a small bush. I had no idea they could grow into great +flesh-eating monsters like this! Why, that thing must have been there a +thousand--ah--two thousand years, I should say. Fully that." + +"But," said Leonard, "why is it kept here? who feeds +it--and--what--is--it--fed--on?" + +He asked this last question slowly, and looked at the other in blank, +horrified amazement. + +"It can't live without food," he continued. "And it must want a lot +too. Whoever can take the trouble to get it food of the only kind--as I +suppose--that it would care for? And why is it there in the middle of +that strange place? One would almost think it was kept there as a kind +of show or curiosity; and yet--we have never heard about it all the +time we have been here! And it is there, with the gate open, no fence +to guard people, or notice to warn them. Well! It's a mystery to me!" + +But if they had been astounded and horror-stricken at what they had +seen, they were still more mystified and upset by Ulama's behaviour +when they told her of their adventure; for she fainted right off and, +when she recovered, seemed so overcome with terror as to be unable to +say a word. No explanation would she give; save that now and then she +murmured, almost in a moan, to herself, + +"Then it _is_ true! And I never knew! It is horrible--too horrible!" + +When Leonard expressed his sorrow about the puma, she hardly seemed to +notice it. + +"Ah yes!" she said once. "Poor Tuo! I shall miss him--and such a death, +too! But oh, he saved you and your friend! And then, he was but an +animal--but the others!" + +At her express desire they promised not to speak to any one else about +it. + +"I will tell you why--or you will know why--later," she added. "But you +can speak privately to Monella about it; to no one else just now!" + +When they found an opportunity of speaking to him about it, he looked +very grave. + +"You have had a narrow escape," he said. "Heaven be thanked you did +escape. I cannot explain more to you now, but may be able to do so +shortly. Meantime, please do as the princess says, and keep this matter +to yourselves." + +All this time Leonard's relations with Ulama had remained unchanged; +they had not been placed on any settled footing. Monella had asked him +to take time to make up his mind, and had intimated that nothing would +be said or done meanwhile. Leonard had, however, been too impatient to +put his fate to the test to be able to wait after the encouragement +Monella had given to him. But, whether Ulama had spoken on the subject +with her father, he knew not; for it so happened that he had not seen +her alone since their love-scene in the boat. + +And now she was evidently much discomposed about their adventure with +the 'devil-tree'; though she did not refer to it again. + +Naturally too, the recollection of it was very much in the minds of the +two young men. Leonard asked Templemore, one day, what the branches of +the one he had seen were like. + +"They were covered with small excrescences," he replied, "that are +suckers and piercers in one. They pierce the flesh and then suck the +blood. The whole affair is a sort of gigantic vegetable 'octopus,' +or devil-fish, only that it has a hundred or more 'arms' or branches +instead of eight, as the octopus has. I have heard of devil-fish +having been caught as large as eighty feet in length, on the coast of +Newfoundland. But I never knew that its vegetable prototype grew to +anything like the size." + +"Of course I have seen devil-fish," said Leonard thoughtfully; "but +they have a mouth--a great beak--to which their arms carry the food. Do +you think it is the same here? You saw that the branches carried the +poor puma up into a hollow in the top of the trunk. Do you suppose the +thing has a kind of mouth there?" + +"Goodness only knows! It must be an awful sort of affair, if it is so. +The whole thing is monstrous and uncanny. Don't let us talk about it!" + +But, as a result of this experience, they sought in another direction +for a likely place from which to make their intended signals; and +finally they found one convenient for their purpose. Then they made two +or three trips to the canyon to bring up the requisite powder. They +also brought back from the secret cave a number of things Monella +wanted. From the first, at his suggestion, they had told no one except +the king, Ulama, and Zonella, of the means by which they had gained +access to the mountain; and these had promised to keep the knowledge to +themselves. + +"The place has evidently been so long unvisited," Monella had remarked, +"that probably most of those who once knew of it have forgotten all +about it. No need to remind them just now. Many years ago, as I have +been informed, a project was started for filling it up." + +"Filling it up!" + +"Yes, and if you go to the other end of the canyon--that by which we +entered--you will find, even now, in the thick wood that everywhere +surrounds the top of the canyon, vast numbers of great boulders that +were quarried from the surrounding cliffs and hauled to the edge in +readiness to be thrown down. They lie, in fact, just over the cavern we +came in by. There they have remained for a very long time, it seems. +Had that intention been carried out, all our work in cutting through +the forest and finding the entrance to the cavern, as you can see, +would have been thrown away." + +"And what stopped it?" + +"It is said that the people threatened a rebellion. The belief in the +eventual return of Mellenda--of whom you have heard--is deep-seated; +and, though the people here are anxious enough to keep to themselves, +they would not assent to closing irrevocably the only means by which +their hero could gain admittance, should he ever come." + +"Do they expect him to come with a host of followers--a conquering +army--or do they expect the great lake to come back, and that he will +arrive with a grand fleet of ships?" Templemore asked, with somewhat of +a sarcastic smile. + +Monella passed his hand across his brow in the half-dreamy manner +that was his at times, as though striving to collect his thoughts, or +to arrest and force into shape some half-formed conception that had +flitted across his mind and escaped his grasp. For a minute he stared +vacantly away into the distance and was silent. Then, with a look as +though of pain at failing to catch the fleeting image, he turned away, +saying simply, + +"I cannot tell you." + +During the days that followed, Templemore passed much of his time in +the museums; time that Elwood spent in a lover's dream of happiness +with Ulama. In the relics of the former history of this strange +people, Templemore took a deep interest; and in the archives and +ancient manuscripts he found many evidences of the former existence of +scientific and engineering knowledge that astonished and perplexed him. +On the true meaning and import of some of these he sought the help of +Monella, who would frequently accompany him in these visits, and, from +his better knowledge of the language, was able to assist him to unravel +their curious contents. + +"These people must once have been great engineers and architects!" he +exclaimed in surprised admiration on one of these occasions. + +Monella smiled and made reply, + +"There is nothing so surprising in that, if you comprehend the true +significance of the gigantic earthworks still extant in many places on +this continent. Have you seen any of them?" + +"No; but I have both heard and read of them." + +"I have seen them; and I tell you your mind can form no idea of their +extent, of the scientific knowledge and the prodigious amount of time +and labour that must have been expended on them, unless you actually +see them. They are of various forms, mostly geometrical figures upon +a vast scale--miles in extent. The wonderful thing is that a certain +figure is repeated exactly in different places hundreds of miles +apart. Yet you shall take your cleverest engineers of the present day, +give them the advantages--or supposed advantages--of all your modern +discoveries and machinery, and scientific instruments, and, say, +unlimited workpeople to do their building, and _then_ it would tax all +their skill to construct a work _exactly_ similar to one of those great +figures. Yet now, upon some of them, trees are growing that must be +over a thousand years old!" + +"And what were they for--what was their object?" Templemore asked. + +Then there came over the other's face again that curious look as of one +seeking for a lost recollection; but it seemed to evade him, and he +answered somewhat as before, + +"I think I ought to be able to tell you," he replied, "but I cannot now +seem to remember." + +It was while thus together one day that Templemore asked him for some +further information concerning the 'Plant of Life.' + +"You have told me," he said, "that your people, with whom you lived in +that secluded valley high up in the Andes, had with them the 'karina' +and cultivated it. Therefore I suppose you yourself have been in the +habit of taking it?" + +"Always. And in my travelling to and fro in the world I always had with +me a good supply of the dried herb. I was accustomed to leave stores +of it in certain towns, so that if I lost what I had with me by any +accident, there was more within easy reach." + +"I see. But what I am puzzled about is this: why, if the virtues of +the plant are so great, do people ever die at all? And why do some live +longer than others?" + +"As to the first question," Monella answered, "man was never intended +to live on this earth for ever. The human frame _must_ wear out sooner +or later. As to the second query, some constitutions are naturally +stronger than others, and these endure longer, just as is the case in +the world outside where the plant is not known. The effect of the plant +is simply to keep the blood pure, if originally pure. If, however, +there is an inherited taint, that taint will make itself felt sooner +or later and undermine the vitality of the system. In this case the +plant will only result in ensuring a somewhat longer life than would +otherwise have been the case. Sooner or later the vitality will fall +off and gradual decay set in, although (the blood being kept still +pure) ordinary diseases are kept at bay. Lastly, there is the question +of the will." + +"The _will_?" + +"Yes; that has a most powerful influence. If a man who has inherited +a constitution that is absolutely sound, from ancestors who have +possessed the same through many generations, and if he has, in +addition, a strong _will_, powerful beyond the average, he may live +longer--if he is so minded." + +"I--do not understand you," said Templemore, somewhat puzzled. + +Monella gazed at him with a smile that was full of sadness. + +"You would," he answered, "if you were old yourself; if you had +outlived all that made life worth having--your wife, and others you +love, your ambitions, your hopes. _Then_ does the soul grow weary, +and restless as well; it is like unto a bird that is caged whose time +for migration has come. It will either fret or pine itself to death, +or beat itself to death against the bars of its cage. Only two things +can then keep the soul from taking its flight; the _will_ to live to +complete some unfinished work, or a delight in a worldly, wicked life. +A nature superlatively evil, like Coryon's, may enable its possessor +to live on and on for an indefinite time; where better men take the +'falloa' and die. Or a man, not himself enamoured of life upon this +earth, may exert his _will_ to carry out to its end some great work to +benefit his fellow-creatures, and he too may keep the 'falloa' at arm's +length for an unusually long period. In other words, the 'falloa' is a +form of melancholia, of weariness with the world, of an inward sense +that life's work is completed. It is the result of that feeling that we +are told took possession at last even of him who has been called the +Wise Man of the World--King Solomon--whose wisdom and riches and power +only brought him to the same point I have indicated--that at which the +soul declares that all earthly things are but vanity." + +On another occasion, Templemore was accompanied by Zonella and Colenna; +and the latter took him into a gallery he had not before seen, the door +being usually kept locked. + +In it, to his surprise, were ranged hundreds of stands of arms and +military uniforms, helmets, spears, shields, swords, daggers, and red +tunics, all kept in splendid condition, as though for instant use. All +the helmets had little silver wings at their sides, and the shields +were engraved in the centre with a strange hieroglyphic, the same that +he had noticed chiselled upon the fronts of many of the principal +buildings. + +"There," said Colenna, "are the arms and uniforms of Mellenda's +soldiers. Over in Myrlanda, in the great temple of the White Priests, +are hundreds more; all kept ready for use, as you see these here. You +see the silver wings upon the helmets, similar to those on that of +Mellenda's suit that stands in the other gallery. And that figure upon +the shields is the sacred sign that was engraved upon his signet-ring. +It signifies his seal or sign-manual. Wherever you see that mark, it +refers to him; on a building it implies that he designed or built it. +His royal colour was red, as the king's to-day is blue; and these red +tunics are for his soldiers." + +"When they come," said Jack, discreetly repressing the incredulous +smile that almost forced itself upon his lips. + +"When _he_ comes," said Colenna, lifting his hat reverently. "Yes, when +_he_ returns to us." + +"You don't believe in that, I know," interposed Zonella; "yet we all +do; and it is a good thing we do, I think, for I fear many in the land +would go mad under their dread of Coryon, if they did not believe in a +happier future for the country. But there," she added sadly, "it does +not matter to _you_. You have no interest in what may go on here in the +future. You intend to go back to your own country, and care little for +the sorrows or the fate of those you leave behind." + +Colenna had walked away some little distance, to examine a shield that +he thought was not quite so bright as it should be. + +"Not care!" Jack exclaimed, impulsively. "Why, how can you say that? It +is that thought that grieves me all the time I am here; that makes me +doubt how I shall ever be able to make up my mind to leave. To leave +behind one's dearest----" + +Zonella turned to him quickly, with a heightened colour and a bright +look. This was so unexpected that he stopped and hesitated. + +"Well?" she said. "You said your dearest----" + +"My dearest friend, Leonard--of course," he answered, looking at her in +some surprise. + +But Zonella's face paled, and she turned away. + +"Let us go," she said with a shiver, as though a cold wind had blown +upon her. "This old gallery is kept locked up so much it gets to smell +musty, and makes one feel quite faint." + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +SMILES AND TEARS. + + +One morning, Monella sought Leonard and reverted to their former +conversation about Ulama. + +"You have well considered all the words I spoke to you, my son?" he +said. "Are you still of the same mind?" + +"I had hoped that you knew me too well to think it necessary to ask the +question," Leonard said earnestly. "Since I first looked upon Ulama, my +love for her has been given past all recall. I have never wavered in my +resolution to remain here for her dear sake, if I may hope to gain the +king's consent." + +"Then," returned Monella, "the king would talk with you concerning it. +Let us go to him." + +And, without further preface, he led the young man into the private +chamber of King Dranoa, where he left him. + +The king, Leonard thought, looked ill and careworn; but he received him +with great kindness, and in a manner that quickly reassured the anxious +lover. + +"It has been no secret to me for some time," said Dranoa, "that thou +hast looked with affection upon my child. She, too, hath spoken to me; +I see that she hath set her heart upon this thing, and I love her too +dearly to desire to thwart her wishes, unless for some weighty reason. +Here I see no such reason; for, though thou art a stranger, yet thou +art worthily recommended by one upon whose judgment I have learned to +place reliance. He that led thee hither is not a man to act lightly or +without full consideration in a matter of such paramount importance; +if thou hast gained his confidence and esteem, I doubt not that there +are good reasons for it. He hath the unerring eye that pierces to the +very heart, and that no hypocrisy, no cunning, can deceive. Were it +the case that my dominions were to-day the great empire over which +my forefathers held sway, I would seek such a man's advice in the +appointment of my generals, my ministers, my governors for distant +districts. Therefore do I feel that I can rely upon his judgment, even +in a matter so momentous as the choice of one to espouse my child and +to succeed me on my throne. And knowing, as I do full well, that the +'falloa' hath laid its hand upon me and that my days in this my land +are numbered, it is grateful to mine heart to feel that my child will +be comforted, when I am gone, by one whose affection for her is pure +and wholly hers, and who will have at his side a friend and counsellor +who will guide his youthful steps in the path that I would have him +follow. This conviction hath lifted from mine heart a grievous trouble, +and hath enabled me to bear without sorrow or regret the knowledge that +the fatal sickness hath taken hold upon me. For the fact that I shall +now soon quit this earthly life I care nothing in itself; it hath been +the fear of what would then befall that hath filled me with forebodings +and with fear. But, if I see--as I hope to see--the power of the Black +Coryon broken and destroyed for ever; my child wedded to one worthy of +her love and honour; my successor aided and advised by one so competent +to guide as is thy friend, then indeed I shall feel I can lay down the +burden of life with thanksgiving, and take my way to the great unknown +of the hereafter without fear, without regret, without a sigh; but, +instead, with the great content of one who feels he hath nothing more +to wish or hope for upon earth. For know, my son," continued Dranoa +with grave emphasis, "no man wisheth to prolong his life for that which +it hath yielded, but rather for that which he is hopeful it may yield. +The proof of this is easy; no man desireth to live his life over again; +therefore he is, at heart, and from actual experience, dissatisfied +and wearied with life; not charmed with it. Yet do many cling to it, +fatuously believing, in the face of all their own actual experience, +that it shall yet, in the future, afford them joys and gratifications +they have never found in the past. These, my son, are the words of one +who hath lived long enough to gain the wisdom that teacheth how to sift +the wheat from the chaff." + +Dranoa paused, and remained silent awhile. Then he resumed, with a +change of tone, + +"But I wish not to weigh down thy young imaginings with the sober +knowledge that belongeth not to thine years but to mine. It will +be sufficient to give thee counsel that is more suited to the +circumstances. Therefore I say this to thee: thou hast a good heart and +good instincts--trust them, follow them honestly; and leave the rest +to the Great Spirit that ruleth over all. And now I have but one more +thing to say; it were better for the present that this that is between +us were not known openly. Personally, that will not concern thee. When +the time hath come, I will myself announce it to my people. Meanwhile, +thy mind will be at rest with the knowledge of my approval of thy suit." + +Leonard gratefully poured out his thanks to the kind-hearted king; then +went to seek Ulama. + +He found her sitting alone in an apartment that overlooked the lake, so +deep in thought that she did not hear his coming. She was leaning on +the window-sill gazing pensively upon the beauties of the scene that +lay outspread before her. + +But Leonard thought, as he caught sight of her and stayed his steps +upon the threshold, that she herself was the fairest creation of all, +posed as she was with that unconscious grace and charm that seemed +with her to be innate. For a full minute he stood in silence; then, +still without moving towards her, he softly called her name, as though +fearing to approach her till he had permission. + +She turned her head towards him with no surprise, but with a look of +sweetest pleasure in her gentle eyes. + +"I did not hear you," she said dreamily, "and yet--I know not why--I +was looking for your coming." + +"And what were you thinking of so profoundly, sweet Ulama?" + +"I was thinking," she replied, "how much more beautiful our lake and +its surroundings have seemed to me of late. I scarce noticed them +before; I suppose because I have known them all my life. Yet, now +that you have pointed out some of their beauties, I not only feel and +appreciate them, but I note many others on all sides that I never saw +before. It is very strange! I wonder why it is?" + +"It is _love_, Ulama," Leonard said, coming quietly to her side and +laying his hand lightly on her shoulder. "Love can make the plainest +works of nature beautiful; small wonder then if it makes those that are +really so display new and unsuspected charms. It is because love has +taken up his dwelling in your heart that you now see new beauties in +these familiar scenes." + +But Ulama shook her head sagely, and smilingly made answer, + +"You know you told me that the first time you saw our lake you deemed +it the fairest spot on all the earth. And you did not know me then, so +could not love me. How then can what you say explain it?" + +Leonard laughed and took her hand in his. + +"You forget that I had seen you in my dreams and had loved you +long before," he said. "Perhaps some instinct told me that here I +should find the abode of her who already had my heart. Or, if that +explanation does not please you, here is another. Love and sympathy are +inseparable; you admire, now, things that you thought little of before, +because you see that _I_ admire them." + +"Yes; that may be," Ulama admitted, with a thoughtful look. "But then, +it does not explain why _you_ should see beauties where _I_ did not. I +think you must have a quicker appreciation of the beautiful in nature +than is given to me." + +"It may be so; and that in turn explains how it came about that I was +so quick to realise the beauty of the fairest daughter of Manoa!" And +Leonard's look was so tender, so full of loving admiration, that it +brought a rosy glow to Ulama's cheek. "And it also reminds me that I +sought you here to tell you something of importance, something that has +brought joy and gladness to my heart. I have just been talking about +you with the king." + +The colour in the girl's cheek grew deeper; and now she turned her +glance again upon the landscape that lay sleeping in the morning +sunlight. + +"Dear love," continued Leonard, "think what it means to me--to both of +us, I hope--when I tell you that the king has given me permission to +ask you to give yourself to me! Ah! Not only has he done that, but he +has done it in a manner--accompanied it with kind words of trust and +confidence that have filled my whole heart with gratitude. He speaks as +though I had already _proved_ that which I can only hope to show in the +future--my true desire to make myself worthy of your love. His kindness +and many marks of friendship towards one who is but a stranger here +have overwhelmed me. I feel the whole devotion of my life to you and +him can scarce repay such generous, ungrudging proofs of his confidence +and favour." + +"You have a good friend in Monella," Ulama said quietly. "He never +fails to speak well of you when occasion offers. And he is one of our +own race, and has had great experience of the world outside, of which +we know nothing; and my father knows he can rely on his opinion." + +"Yes, I know that is true, dear love, and my heart burns with gratitude +to him too. And now, beloved"--and he put his arms round her and drew +her to him--"may I not think of you as all my own? Let me hear you say +with those dear lips that you know now what love is, that it has sprung +up unforced in your pure heart; let me hear you say, 'Leonard, I love +you!'" + +And, as he drew her closer to him and her head nestled upon his +shoulder, a whisper, that seemed but a faint sigh, breathed softly the +words so sweet to hear for the first time from a loved-one's lips--"I +love you!" + +Later in the day Leonard told Templemore of his interview with the +king; and, as he did so, a look came over his face that, as his friend +expressed it to himself, "did one's heart good to see, even if but once +in a lifetime!" + +"In your happiness I too feel happy, dear old boy," he said. "And I +should have little concern, for the time being, if only those at home +knew we were alive and well. As it is, the thought of their anxiety +troubles me unceasingly." + +"Let us hope our signal flares were seen and will be reported," Leonard +answered. "I think they must have been seen; and, if so, Carenna is +sure to hear of it, and will find some way of sending word." + +This referred to what they had done to carry out Leonard's suggestion. +After some perseverance in watching from the spot they had selected, +they saw, one evening, camp fires far out on the savanna. At once they +made their signals with small heaps of powder, and these they repeated +several times. No response whatever came; nor did they expect any. +There was nothing for it but to wait patiently in the hope that their +signals had been seen. + +Then ensued a time, lasting many weeks, which was almost uneventful. To +Leonard and Ulama it was one uninterrupted dream of blissful happiness. +To Templemore it was pleasant and interesting, for he found plenty to +engage his mind. He studied the designs of the chief buildings; of the +bridges that spanned the streams that fed the lake. In the arches and +general construction of these he formed engineering ideas that were new +to him. He visited often the great waterfall that formed the outlet +of the lake, and declared that the sight of the vast body of water +shooting out in its leap of two thousand feet, its deep, thundering +roar, and the play of colour when the sun shone into the mist and +spray, made up a combination that threw Niagara itself--which he had +seen--into the shade. + +One day, when Ulama and Zonella were alone together, the former thus +addressed her friend, + +"Sometimes of late I have fancied there has been some unpleasant +passage between you and Leonard's friend. I myself am so fortunate, so +happy, that I like not to see those about me otherwise. I would have +all my friends as happy as myself." And she took Zonella's hand and +rubbed her face affectionately against it. "Tell me, Zonella, have you +two quarrelled?" + +For a moment Zonella's face, usually so pleasant to behold, looked hard +and almost fierce. Then it softened, and, with a loud cry, she threw +her arms around Ulama; she hid her face in the gentle bosom, and burst +into a torrent of impassioned tears. + +It was some time before Ulama, greatly surprised as well as pained and +puzzled, could understand the meaning of this outburst; but presently +Zonella, growing somewhat calmer, sobbed out, + +"Ah! _You_--you little know, little think what I have suffered. He +cares no more for me than he does for you--perhaps less. His heart is +elsewhere; he is set upon going away from our land, and only his regard +for his friend delays him." + +Ulama's beautiful face bent over Zonella's, and her tears fell upon the +other's cheek as she pressed her lovingly to her bosom. + +"Alas! Alas! My poor Zonella! And is it possible that love, which has +been so sweet to me, should bring to you but pain and suffering? I +almost fear for my own happiness; that my selfishness in yielding to +it has blinded me to what was going on with the others. But it never +occurred to me that love that is to me so wonderful in the joy and +pleasure it confers, could also be the cause of misery and sorrow. +And yet," she added thoughtfully, "you are not without one to love +you. Poor Ergalon has long been faithful to his love for you. Oh, how +strange and contrary it all seems! Poor fellow! Perhaps you have made +him suffer even as you yourself have suffered. Can his love not console +you? I know so little myself that what I say may be only foolishness, +yet----" + +Zonella smiled faintly, and shook her head. Then she kissed the other +tenderly. + +"Let us say no more, my dear," she said. "I am sorry I gave way as I +did; but you took me by surprise. Perhaps, too, your implied advice is +wise. It might be better to try to love the one you _know_ does truly +love you, than to fret your heart out after one who loves you not, and +who is beyond your reach. At least, as you say, there _is_ one in the +world who loves me." + +Thus the time sped on. Monella was much away; sometimes for a week +together; so the young men saw comparatively little of him. Templemore, +on one occasion, expressed a wish to visit Myrlanda with him, but +Monella said there were difficulties in the way. + +"It is better you two should remain here for the present," he declared. +"At a future time, let us hope it may be different." + +But one day Monella came to him with a look of gravity that at once +aroused his interest. + +"It is time," he said, "that I should show you something of the truth, +that you may understand what lies before us. Can you brace up your +courage and your nerve to stand a severe trial?" + +Templemore opened his eyes in astonishment. + +"Need you ask?" he answered. "Have you ever known me wanting in +courage?" + +"Ah, no. But this that I refer to requires courage of a different sort. +Yet it must be faced. But I warn you it will be a shock. Make up your +mind to a test that will tax all the nerve you can summon to your aid." + +"And Leonard too?" Jack inquired, wondering. + +"No. Say nothing to him. Let his dream be happy while it may. Be ready +to come out with me to-night, when Ergalon shall come to seek you. And +bring your rifle." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +THE DEVIL-TREE BY MOONLIGHT. + + +It was about ten o'clock when Templemore, with Ergalon as guide, came +out from the king's palace by a side-entrance that was little used, and +the door of which the latter now opened with a key. Outside, at a short +distance, they found Monella pacing up and down. + +Before leaving, Templemore had told Leonard just so much as would +explain his absence; then had managed to slip away unobserved by their +friends of the king's court. + +The night was fine but chilly, and all three were muffled up. In the +sky overhead the moon shone calm and clear, lighting up the valley +with great distinctness; but across its face wild-looking clouds were +scurrying, showing that a strong wind was blowing up above, though +little of it was felt below. Only now and then an eddying gust would +sweep down the hillside and stir the trees around them, then die away +with a rustling sigh or a low moan. + +Ergalon led the way; skirting the town he took a roundabout road that +Templemore soon saw led to the neighbourhood of the scene of their +adventure with the devil-tree, though they were approaching it from a +different direction. Finally, they entered a thick wood that covered +a steep hill; and now Templemore's companions made signs to him to +observe strict silence and to proceed as quietly as possible. When they +had reached the summit of the slope, and stood on the ridge within the +shadow of the trees, which here ceased abruptly, Templemore uttered a +half-smothered exclamation. Instantly, he felt Monella's heavy hand +upon his shoulder grasping him with a grip of iron; and it brought to +him the recollection of the caution he had received. + +"Whatever you see or hear," Monella had rejoined, "you must remain +absolutely quiet and utter no sound; do nothing that might betray our +presence." + +What had excited Templemore's surprise was the fact that he found +himself looking down into the great amphitheatre in which stood the +well-remembered tree. Its long trailing branches were still moving +about swiftly in their strange, restless fashion; but most of the +shorter and thicker branches were curled up at the top of the trunk +in the same kind of _knot_ as they had formed after carrying thither +the body of the puma. Viewed in the bright moonlight, the tree was +a hideous monstrosity that had yet a certain terrible fascination +which attracted and retained the sight while it revolted and repelled +the mind. The coiled branches upon the top reminded one irresistibly +of the snakes entwined round the head of the Medusa; they formed +a kind of crown, of a character suitable to the frightful monster +whose formless head, if one may so term it, they encircled. The +appearance of the whole thing was repulsive, ghastly, ghoulish. There +was that in the mere form and outline of this gruesome wonder of +the vegetable world that instinctively aroused aversion. Its naked +branches--that in ordinary circumstances could belong only to a dead +tree--its colour--half funereal, half of a deep blood-tint almost +unknown amongst botanical productions--its never ceasing movement, +so suggestive of an everlasting hunting after prey, of an insatiable +craving for its hateful diet of flesh and blood, of sleepless hunger, +of tireless rapacity and relentless cruelty--all these made up an +unnatural creation that appalled the instincts and chilled the very +blood of those who looked upon it. This had been the feeling, or +combination of feelings, that had made itself felt in Templemore's mind +when he had first seen the spectacle by daylight; it impressed itself +much more strongly now that he saw the tree in the cold moonlight--now +standing out clear and well-defined, now plunged into semi-obscurity, +as the hurrying clouds chased each other across the sky above and threw +their fleeting shadows beneath. + +From the spot where the three men stood a clear view was presented of +the opposite side of the enclosure--_i.e._, of the side nearest to +the tree, which was there sufficiently close to the main terrace for +its branches to sweep over it; but the terrace was here protected by +a covered-way or verandah formed of metal gratings, the interstices +in which were small enough to keep the dreadful writhing snake-like +branches from pushing through them. When Templemore had seen the place +before, this part of the terrace had been open; for the metal screens, +or gratings, were, in reality, sliding shutters that could be withdrawn +into grooves in the rock beyond. Here, at the end of the covered-way, +was a gateway that formed the entrance to the labyrinth of caverns and +galleries in the cliff in which Coryon and his adherents lived. + +These sliding screens were movable at the will of those within the +gateway. They could be either moved along in their grooves and thus +protect those traversing the covered-way, or withdrawn, so that the +branches of the fatal tree, in that case, guarded the entrance most +effectually; for no man might then venture to approach the gateway and +live. + +Underneath, there were cells in the terrace, also within reach of +the tree; and screened off, in like manner, by sliding grated doors. +Through these gratings came faint beams of light. + +Templemore noted all these things; yet, while his gaze wandered to +them, each time the tree itself attracted it again and seemed to hold +it spell-bound; and he waited--waited, hardly daring to breathe; waited +for he knew not what; waited as one expectant and oppressed by a dim +unshapen foreshadowing of some new and nameless horror. + +Nor was it without reason; for, slowly, the coiled 'crown' unfolded, +and _something_ came little by little into view. Gradually the +_something_ rose out of the hollow in the trunk, was carried up clear +of it, then lowered over the side towards the ground. In shape it was +cylindrical, and of a colour that could not be discovered in the fitful +moonlight. Soon it was deposited upon the ground, and the branches that +had lowered it released their hold, and it remained for a brief space +untouched. Then other branches crept up to it with tortuous twistings +and, coiling round it, raised and swung it to and fro, then quickly +dropped it. Anon, yet other branches would do the same; only, in their +turn, to drop it or to hand it on to others. Thus was it passed about; +now lifted high in the air by one end, then by the other, anon dangled +horizontally in mid-air. In time it made the circuit of the tree; but +each branch, or set of branches that laid hold of it, rejected it +eventually, as though, by some fell but unfailing instinct, they knew +there was nothing left in it to minister to their hateful appetite. +And all the while the shadows came and went, and the moon looked down +between them and lighted up the hideous scene. + +Meantime, from out the dark and filthy water and thick slime of the +large pool a few hundred yards away, crawled uncouth monsters the +like of which Templemore had never looked upon, save, perhaps, in +some fanciful representations of creatures said to have existed in +pre-historic times. These mis-shapen reptiles were from ten to twelve +feet in length. They had heads and tails like crocodiles, and in many +other respects resembled them; but in place of the usual scales they +were covered with large horny plates several inches in diameter; and in +the centre of each plate was a strong spine or spike, thick at the base +but sharp at the point, and four or five inches long. + +These creatures crawled up to the fateful tree; and it was quickly +evident that they came to claim their share in the foul repast--the dry +husk and bones from which the tree had sucked the rest. Their armour +made them safe against the tree; for the branches no sooner touched +their bodies than they recoiled, baffled by the sharp points they +everywhere encountered. Two or three of these horrid reptiles began to +drag the dead body towards their haunt, and finally carried it away, +but not without several tussles with the twisting, curling branches +which seemed loth to relinquish their prey; or, perhaps, wished to play +with it a little longer, as a cat might with a mouse. + +Monella had handed his field-glass to Templemore, still keeping a hand +upon his shoulder. The young man placed it to his eyes, and in an +instant gasped out, + +"Great heavens! _It is a human body!_" + +Yes!--if that may be so called which was but the mutilated husk of +what had once been a living, breathing, human being! But now there was +little left beyond a shapeless form! + +Templemore felt sick, and almost reeled; but Monella's grasp up-held +him, and was a silent reminder that he was expected to master his +emotions, however strong and painful they might be. + +"It is no time to give way," Monella whispered in his ear. "Wait and +watch!" + +It was, however, almost more than Templemore could do. He felt like +Dante led by his guide to witness the tortures of the damned. But here, +as it seemed to him, was a scene that rivalled in horror, if not in +agony, even the scenes in the 'Inferno.' He set his teeth and clenched +his hands; his breath was laboured, and his heart almost stood still. +But for Monella's hold upon his shoulder he must have fallen. + +But now there came out of the covered-way two figures; they stood on +the terrace and bent their gaze upon the scene, silent and motionless. +They were dressed in flowing robes of black, or some dark colour, that +were emblazoned on the breast with a golden star. + +Grim, weird figures were they; their dark forms showing sharply against +the light-coloured rocks behind them, the while they gazed with cruel +composure upon the ghastly contention between the loathsome reptiles +and the tree. + +When it was ended, and the beasts had disappeared with their prey into +the dark waters of the pool, one of the figures on the terrace put a +whistle to his mouth, and a low piping sound reached the ears of the +concealed watchers. + +Immediately a rumbling noise was heard; and one of the sliding gratings +beneath the terrace rolled back, thereby disclosing a cavernous +cell, in which was a lighted lamp on a rough table. Then a figure +seated by it, his face buried in his hands, sprang up with a loud +cry, and retreated into the thick gloom beyond. But the terrible +trailing branches swept in after him, twined round his legs and +threw him down, then quickly drew him out feet foremost. Vainly he +shrieked, and clutched at this and that; at the table, at the edge of +the sliding door; relentlessly, inexorably, he was dragged from one +futile hold to another, upsetting the lamp in his struggles, till he +was outside. Other branches swooped down upon him, coiling round him +in all directions, and stifling his cries as, slowly, with an awful +deliberation and absence of hurry, or even of the appearance of effort, +he was hauled high into the air and disappeared into the hollow of the +fatal tree. The great branches silently arranged themselves into their +knot-like circle; at another sound of the low whistle the sliding door +returned to its place with a sullen rumble, and the two dark-robed +spectators turned and left the place. + +Then Monella and Ergalon also came away; and it is no disparagement +of Templemore's courage or 'nerve' to state that they had almost to +carry him between them. When they had got to a safe distance, Monella +placed him on a boulder, and held to his lips a flask containing a +strong cordial. Templemore, who had been on the point of fainting, felt +revived by it at once; the liquid seemed to course quickly through his +veins, and the feeling of deadly sickness, after a time, passed away. + +Monella, meanwhile, contemplated him with compassion and concern, but +said no word. Presently Templemore gasped out, + +"What horrors! What frightful, cold-blooded atrocity! What a race +of foul fiends! Great heavens! To think such things go on in this +fair land--a land that seems so peaceful, so contented, so free from +ordinary pain and suffering!" + +"Ah, my son," replied Monella, and there was an indescribable +sadness in his tones, "_now_ you can understand the great horror in +the land; that which has oppressed it for many long ages; that casts a +gloom upon people's lives; that turns to gall and bitterness what, but +for it, would be a life of innocent enjoyment." + + [Illustration: "OTHER BRANCHES SWOOPED DOWN, COILING ROUND HIM." + [_Page 252._] + +"But why----?" Templemore exclaimed almost fiercely; but the other +checked him. + +"I think I know what you would say," Monella went on. "You would know +two or three things, I think. To the first question (as I read it) +I reply that the reason you have not heard of this thing from other +people is that they have learned, from long habit, never to refer to +it, even to one another. Almost incredible, you think? Not more so than +are many things that happen in your own life, in your own country. I +could name many known to all, yet alluded to by none--often wrongly, as +I hold. Still, there is the fact. It is the same here. This horror in +the land broods over, enthrals the people; yet, because they hold it in +such dread, they make an affectation of pretending not to know of its +existence; perhaps, in mercy to their children. + +"Next, it surprises you that _I_ have not told you sooner. The answer +is simple. You are not like myself; I am one of this people; you are +but a sojourner in the land--a visitor. I had the desire to make your +sojourn here as pleasant as it could be; that your interest in the many +curious things you see about you should not be lessened, nor your stay +here rendered unhappy by the knowledge of that which you have seen +to-night--the earlier knowledge of which could have done no good to any +one. + +"Lastly, you naturally desire to know why, in that case, I have now +chosen to enlighten you. For this reason: the time is approaching when +certain plans of mine and of the king's will be completed, and when I +devoutly hope we may be able, with God's help, to end this thing for +ever. In that I shall ask you to help us--I hope you will aid us all +you can." + +"I will," said Templemore impetuously. "Against such a hellish crew as +that I am with you heart and soul. I think I begin to understand----" + +"Yes, I never doubted your readiness to take part with us. But it was +necessary to give you absolute proof of what goes on, that you might +understand those with whom we have to deal. You have now seen for +yourself----" + +"Ay, I have seen!" Jack shuddered. + +"And will now understand that, when the time comes to extirpate +this serpent brood, there must be no hesitation, no paltering, no +half-and-half measures, no mercy. It will be of no use to kill the old +snakes and leave the brood to grow up again, or eggs to hatch. Do you +take in my meaning?" + +"Yes, and think you will be right and well justified." + +"Good. If you wonder why, knowing all this, I have done nothing +heretofore, it is that the king's plans could not sooner be matured. +Meantime we have stayed the horror for a while." + +Jack uttered an impatient exclamation. + +"Oh, yes," Monella declared, "we _have_, and you have helped to do it. +These wretched creatures you have seen sacrificed to this horrible +'fetish-tree' of theirs, are their own soldiers--those who escaped from +us by running away. They deserve no pity. They themselves have given +many an innocent victim--even women and children--to that tree----" + +"I know that to be true," Ergalon interposed. + +"The truce we forced on Coryon," resumed Monella "has had this effect +at least--it has saved the lives of numbers of poor creatures who would +have been seized and sacrificed during the time that we have been here. +Instead of that, however, the arch-fiend Coryon has had to content +himself with making victims of his own wretched myrmidons by way of +punishment for their running away from us. They are as bad as he--very +nearly. At any rate they are not worth your pity." + +"Well, I am glad to hear that, at least," said Templemore. "It takes +away a little of the load of horror that turned me sick. Truly, of all +the diabolical atrocities that the mind of man in its depths of cruelty +and wickedness ever conceived----" + +Ergalon shuddered now in his turn. + +"I can look on at the sacrifice of victims such as these," he said +gravely, "because I know that every one of them has deserved his fate +by acts of cruelty; but when it is a case, as it has been in the past, +of women, young girls, and poor little children----" + +"For Heaven's sake say no more," Jack entreated; "I begin to feel sick +again at such suggestions! I will fight to the death against such +wretches. As it is, for the rest of my life I shall see before me in +my dreams what I saw to-night. Surely no wilder phantasy, no more +outrageous, blood-curdling nightmare ever entered the most disordered +brain. And now it will haunt me to my life's end!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +TRAPPED! + + +One day the king announced his intention to fix a day for Leonard's +formal betrothal to Ulama according to the usage of the country. +Immediately the people began preparations to do honour to the event; +and congratulations and marks of friendship and goodwill were showered +upon the young couple by all those who were well affected towards the +king. + +In the opposite camp, however, as might be expected, the announcement +was differently received; and, indeed, the crafty Coryon took advantage +of it to sow dissension among some of the people, and to suggest +opposition to the proposal. His adherents had certain supporters in the +land; people who bought their own security by aiding Coryon secretly +against their neighbours. This was why the king had shrunk from +pushing matters to the extreme against the priest. He knew that these +half-hearted or doubtful ones were quite as likely to side with Coryon, +at the last moment, as with himself, and that thus a civil war would be +inaugurated. + +Monella, since he had come into the country and espoused the king's +side, had thrown more energy and method into the cause than had been +previously bestowed upon it. Through the Fraternity of the White +Priests, and their covert friends and sympathisers, and through +Ergalon, who had secretly gained over some of Coryon's people, +an active work had been carried on amongst all classes, and with +satisfactory results. But Coryon, on his side, had been busy too; +though hitherto with less success. Now, however, he found a useful aid +in the objection many felt to seeing the king's only daughter wedded +to one who--as it was cunningly suggested to them--was a stranger, +an adventurer, come from no one knew where, and unable to show such +evidence of descent and other qualifications as should entitle him to +seek alliance with the daughter of their king. + +But Coryon's emissaries worked silently and unseen; and there was +nothing outwardly to show that two undercurrents were gradually gaining +strength and approaching that point whence the slightest accident might +bring them into active opposition. + +Indeed, in announcing the proposed betrothal, the king had, for once, +acted directly against Monella's advice. The latter had counselled that +the matter should be kept secret until the contest with Coryon--now in +abeyance--had been finally decided; for he foresaw the use to which +Coryon would put it. + +Leonard and Ulama were too much taken up with each other and with their +own happiness to trouble themselves about the 'pros and cons' that had +weighed in the minds of Monella and those who thought with him. That +the effect of the proclamation would be to hasten his marriage was, of +course, sufficient to commend it to Leonard; and he left all the rest +to others. + +Templemore knew not sufficient of what was going on around him to +have any opinion upon the subject. Since the night when the real use +to which the great devil-tree was put had been revealed to him, he +had been very unhappy. He felt as might one who had been slumbering +peacefully in sight of a terrible peril, to whose existence he had +suddenly been awakened. Not that he had any fear for his own safety; +yet he was filled with a nameless dread, a vague sense of horror and +distrust, of unreality, in the life about him. He could not but realise +that there would be no real peace, no security for life or property, +until an absolute end had been put to Coryon and his atrocious crew, +and their abominable fetish-tree destroyed. But when would that be? +he wondered. His sense of disquiet was increased by having to keep +from Leonard the knowledge he had gained, and being thus debarred +from discussing matters with him. Not, however (as he acknowledged to +himself), that that would have been of much advantage; for Leonard was +too much absorbed in 'love's young dream' to be likely to discuss such +things coolly and critically. + +Three days before that fixed for the ceremony of betrothal, which +was to be marked by a still grander entertainment, the king gave a +preliminary _fête_. There was much feasting for all and sundry; boats, +gaily decorated with flowers and banners and coloured streamers, glided +to and fro upon the lake; the young people skilled in diving from great +heights into the water with their parachute aids, contended for prizes, +and there were many other forms of gaiety and festivity. + +Leonard and Ulama, seated upon a terrace, looked upon the scene, and +waved their hands in frequent recognition of friendly faces and signals +here and there amongst the crowd. Ulama's lovely face was radiant, +and the soft light in her gentle eyes, her pleased acknowledgment of +the tokens of affection and the good wishes she received on every +side, and her grateful smiles for all, were charming to behold. Her +wondrous grace and beauty seemed, if possible, enhanced by her +half-shy, half-proud glances, and the flush that mounted to her cheeks +when she turned her eyes with love on Leonard. Never before, even in +that country where the charms of the daughters of the land exceed the +average, had such a vision of lovely maidenhood and such rare beauty +been beheld. And yet all those who knew her, loved her as much for the +innocence and sweetness that beamed ever in her face and guided all her +thoughts and words and actions, as for the physical perfection that +compelled their admiration. + +She stole her little hand into her lover's and sighed quietly. + +"I am so happy, and yet my eyes are full of tears. And I feel half +frightened too; frightened lest my happiness should be too great to +last. Is it wrong, then, to be happy, think you? It almost seems so, +when I know so many others are unhappy." + +Leonard fondly pressed her hand, and gazed deep down into her eyes. + +"If you feel happy in your love, dear heart," he answered, "it is +because you love so much; and surely to love cannot be wrong, or to +take pleasure in it. Besides, in that you think so much of others you +but show your sweet unselfishness. Therefore, trouble not yourself +about the regrets for others that accompany your love. For, if to-day +they sorrow, they have had their times of happiness in the past, or may +have them in the future." + +"It may be so," replied Ulama. "I doubt whether in all the world there +is another maiden who loves as I do, and therefore who could know the +dread that weighs me down. But as for me--ah, I tremble at my own great +joy, and fear it is too great to last. And every one is so kind to me +and seems so rejoiced to see me happy--that--that I can hardly keep +from crying." + +And for a brief minute the gentle-hearted girl placed her hands before +her face to hide her tears--tears that were born of the great gladness +of her love and her tender sympathy for others. + +And so for these two the day passed, like many that had gone before it, +in a blissful dream; but it was a dream from which they were soon to be +roughly awakened to the dark knowledge of what wickedness can achieve. + +For, amid the feasting and among the revellers, were evil beings +who had plotted in their black hearts to kill the joy of the +gentlest-hearted maiden that ever with her sweetness brightened this +sorrow-laden earth; wretches that even then were spinning around her +the treacherous web designed by the fell Coryon to end her dream of +happiness for ever. + + * * * * * + +When Templemore woke up the next morning he gazed about him in +surprise. He was not in his usual sleeping apartment; but, instead, in +some room that was strange to him. It was small, dingy and ill-lighted, +and the couch upon which he found himself was not that on which he +had lately slept. He sprang up and, in vague alarm, looked round for +his clothes and his arms; the clothes were there, but there was no +revolver, and his rifle was nowhere to be seen. Even his sword and +dagger, that formed part of his usual dress, had been removed. Dressing +himself hastily, he rushed to the door, but it was fastened. + +"Great heavens!" he exclaimed, "I am a prisoner; my rifle and pistol +have been taken away in my sleep. Oh, what, what has happened to +Leonard? What can it all mean?" + +He hammered at the door, but no answer came. Then he tried to look out +of the window, but it was too high for him to be able to see anything +through it but the sky. There was nothing to be done but wait; so +he sat down upon the bed, a picture of misery and bewilderment, and +forthwith began to formulate all sorts of theories and ideas to account +for what had happened to him. + +When, after a long interval, the door was opened, a man entered whose +dress showed him to be one of Coryon's black-tunicked soldiers. He +brought in some food, and a pitcher and a mug, which he deposited upon +a small table, and was turning to go, when Templemore sprang up and +addressed him. He felt so incensed at the sight of this emissary of +Coryon's that he could indeed scarcely refrain from hurling himself +upon him, despite the fact that the man was armed. But just outside the +door, as he could see, were other soldiers; he could hear, too, the +clank of their arms, so he knew that to attack the one before him would +be worse than useless. + +"What is the meaning of this?" he demanded. + +The man, who was just on the point of going out, turned back for a step +or two, and then said in a low tone, + +"You are the prisoner of the High Priest Coryon." + +"But how, and why, and where?" + +The man shook his head quietly. He was not an ill-favoured fellow, and +regarded his prisoner in a half-friendly manner, Templemore thought. + +"You are still in the king's palace," he continued, "but your friend +and the princess have been taken away to Coryon's abode." + +"Taken away to his place? Great God help them and help us all, +then!" Jack moaned, as the picture of what he had seen there that +well-remembered night rose up before his mind. "And how has all this +come about? and where is Monella, and where is the king?" + +"I may not talk to you," the soldier answered. "I have disobeyed orders +in telling you thus much. But Ergalon was a friend of mine and I know +that he is a friend of yours." And he went out, closing and fastening +the door behind him. + +Here was terrible news! Leonard and Ulama prisoners of Coryon; perhaps +immured in one of those awful dungeons within reach of the terrible +tree, where the very sight of what went on beyond those barred and +grated doors was enough to drive the bravest mad; and where, at any +moment, that whistle--a door run back--and then----! + +"It's too dreadful--too horrible to think of!" Templemore exclaimed. +He sprang up and began pacing restlessly up and down. "I shall go mad +myself, if I dwell upon such thoughts." + +The hours dragged slowly by till evening, when, just when it was +growing dark, the door was once more opened and the same man came in +and, looking at Templemore, made a sign to be silent. Then he returned +to the door and led in a muffled figure, and, without a word, retired. +The figure threw back a hood that covered the head, and Templemore, +with glad surprise, saw that it was Zonella. + +He ran forward and took her hand in his. + +"Zonella!" he exclaimed. "This is surprising, and gladdening too. It +does one good to see your face after all that I have been imagining. +Tell me--what does it all mean?" + +She laid her finger on her lips and said in a hushed voice, + +"It means that the cunning, treacherous Coryon has played a trick upon +us all, and made you prisoners. Your friend and our beloved princess +have been carried off, the king himself is kept a prisoner in his +room, and so are many of his ministers." + +"And Monella and Ergalon?" + +"Monella was away in Myrlanda, as you know, and so has escaped; and +Ergalon--who is free too, but in hiding--has sent a trusty messenger to +warn him." + +"And you?" + +"I am virtually a prisoner too. That is, I am forbidden to leave the +palace. But I am free to go about within it. The whole place is full of +Coryon's soldiers." + +"Can you tell me how it was managed?" + +"The 'loving cup' was drugged. All who partook of it fell into an +unnaturally heavy sleep. You remember almost every one throughout the +palace drank some, in honour of your friend and our poor princess. +Alas! alas! My dear, my loved Ulama!" + +She sobbed bitterly, while Jack marched excitedly up and down the place. + +"Is there no hope--nothing to be done?" he exclaimed despairingly. + +"There is only one thing," was answered in a low, hesitating tone. + +"What is that?" he asked eagerly. + +"I have come to try to aid you. If you wrap up in this cloak and go out +quietly now, while it is half dark, you may get clear out of the palace +unobserved. One of my maids is waiting for me without, and will show +you the way. I warned her of my plan, and she is to be trusted." + +"What! And leave you here in my place to suffer Coryon's vengeance? +Why, Zonella--dear, kind friend--what must you think of me?" + +"I can think of nothing else," she answered simply. "And for me--I care +not. Whatever may befall me, _you_ will be able to get away; perhaps +even to serve your friend." + +Jack took her hand in his, not noticing that she seemed to shiver under +the touch. + +"Such an offer is too kind, too much, my dear, good friend," he said. +"It cannot be; we must try----" + +"For _my_ sake, then," she exclaimed impulsively. "I would rather +die myself than see you carried off to yonder dens. Or"--she paused +confusedly, and then went on--"for your friend's sake. Think! Consider! +Do you refuse merely from any thought about me? Think what you might be +able to do for others--for your friend, for Ulama!" + +Templemore passed his hand over his face; the tears were coming into +his eyes. When he tried to speak again, he felt half choking. + +"You are a noble girl, Zonella," he answered with emotion; "and when +you appeal to me on _their_ behalf you cannot know how hard it is to me +to stay on here, knowing that I have the chance--just the chance--of +saving them. But it cannot be, dear friend, it cannot be; but--I thank +you. My whole heart thanks you." He pressed her hand, and turned +sorrowfully away. + +Presently, she spoke again, this time in a different tone; indeed, her +voice sounded hard and strained. + +"Then Ergalon shall risk his life for you," she said. "I know that +which will induce him to attempt what to-day he said could not be done. +I will seek him at once. For now, good-bye; do not go to bed, but be +ready, if you hear some one at the window. You can reach it, if you +stand up on the table." And, without further explanation, she left him. + +Templemore sat for long pondering upon this strange interview, and +wondering too what she had planned; and the time seemed to drag +wearily while he waited for some signal at the window. + +It was about midnight, as he judged, when there came a tap, tap from +the outside. He sprang on to the table; then by the dim light that came +through the window he could discern the upper part of a man's body +swinging on a rope. + +"Is that Ergalon?" he whispered. + +"Yes," came back the answer. "If I send you in a short rope and you +wait till I have gone down, you can then pull in the rope I am on, get +on to it, and come down yourself. Do you dare try it?" + +"Yes." + +"Then here it is. Now wait till you find you can pull this one in." + +Templemore felt about and caught hold of a small cord that was hanging +inside the window--which was open to the air--and he pulled lightly +at it till he felt the strain upon the rope to which it was attached, +relaxed. Then he pulled harder, and a portion of a thicker rope came +inside. By its means he was able to climb up on to the sill. With +some trouble and manoeuvring he got outside and was soon sliding down +the rope, which Ergalon steadied from below. It was very dark, and he +descended amidst some trees where it was darker still. When he touched +the ground, at first, he could see nothing; but Ergalon turned on the +light of a bull's-eye lantern. It was one of those Monella had brought +with him, and lent by him to Ergalon. + +A voice, that he knew to be Zonella's, whispered, + +"That has been well done. Now what do you propose to do?" + +"I must get down to the canyon by which we came into the mountain. +There we have left spare weapons. But I can't get down in the dark; +not even, I fear, with the lantern." + +"There will be a moon later; perhaps that will help. Let us go in that +direction." + +"What! you, too?" Jack asked in surprise. + +"Yes, why not? I shall be as safe with you as in the midst of Coryon's +hateful minions, and I may be of service." + +"You couldn't climb down that place and up again," Jack reminded her. + +"Then I can wait near the top, and Ergalon can go with you to help you +carry what you want." + +"But we shall be a long time, all day to-morrow." + +"No matter, I will manage." + +Then the three made their way with much difficulty, owing to the +darkness, to the top of the canyon. Here they sat and talked in guarded +voices till the moon had risen high enough to light the hazardous +descent. + +Templemore learned how Coryon's plans had been carried out; how +Ergalon's escape had been due to his absence from the palace, awaiting +the return of a messenger from Monella. At a late hour, on his way back +to the palace, he had been warned by a friend amongst Coryon's people. +On this he had sent on the messenger to Monella to inform him of all +that had occurred. The man had been only just in time to get through +the subterranean road before Coryon's soldiers took possession of it +and closed it. + +Templemore's escape had been planned by Zonella. She had smuggled +Ergalon into the palace and up to the roof disguised as one of her own +maids; and in this she had been aided by one of his friends amongst +the soldiers of the priest. Ergalon had at first objected strongly, +conceiving that the attempt was foolhardy and could not succeed; that +he would only lose his own liberty and, perhaps, his life, and that +Monella might be displeased. In short, he had considered himself bound +to do nothing that was in any way risky until Monella had communicated +with him. But Zonella had contrived, by some means, to persuade him; +and had herself stolen out and steadied the rope for Ergalon in his +perilous descent. + +From his friend in the opposite camp Ergalon had learned one very +important thing--that nothing was likely to be done to Leonard or Ulama +till the day that had been named for their betrothal. That day Coryon +had fixed upon, with cruel irony, for the holding of a sort of trial, +the result of which would be a foregone conclusion. + +"Therefore," said Ergalon, "if you can get back by the morning of +to-morrow" (it being then already morning) "you will be in time; though +I fear you will find it difficult to effect much good alone, and I +cannot yet tell when the lord Monella may be able to get through the +subterranean passage to come to your assistance." + +"We will try, anyhow," said Jack, setting his teeth with grim +determination. "And, if I fail, we will die together. One can but die +once. I think it is possible to get back with a couple of rifles and +pistols and the necessary ammunition by the morning. If human effort +can do it, it shall be done; and I can then put a pistol into your +hands, too, my good friend." + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +'IN THE DEVIL-TREE'S LARDER!' + + +Leonard awoke from a deep sleep, on the morning after the _fête_, to +find himself, like Templemore, in a place that was strange to him. + +So profound had been the slumber induced by the drug that had been +mixed with the drink, that he had been carried all the way to Coryon's +retreat in absolute unconsciousness. When he at last woke up, he was +in one of the cells under the terrace within the reach of the great +flesh-eating tree. + +No words can describe the horror and anguish that filled his breast +when, by degrees, he realised the dreadful truth. Not only did he +shudder at the thought of his own too probable fate, but the fear that +his sweet Ulama might share the same awful doom drove him almost to the +verge of madness. He cursed the false sense of security that had led up +to this terrible result. A few simple precautions would have frustrated +this treachery! But it was too late! + +Through the grated door he could see the great devil-tree, hear the +swishing of its long, trailing branches, watch them come up to the +grating and search about over its face for some opening large enough +to penetrate, even trying to wriggle in through its small slits and +perforations. In the centre of the cell was a block of wood fixed +in the ground to serve as a table. A small stream of water ran down +from a pipe above and fell into a channel in the floor, and a pitcher +stood beside it. For chair there was a smaller log of wood; the 'bed' +on which he had found himself was simply a bag of straw whereon were +laid two or three rugs. An iron door shut off the back from an interior +gallery, and the cell was partitioned off from others, on each side, by +grated screens, like that in the front. The occupants of adjacent cells +could, therefore, see each other. + +As Leonard looked round in astonishment and alarm, and exclaimed, +involuntarily, "Where am I?" a discordant peal of mocking laughter rang +out from the cell upon his right. + +"Where is he! He doesn't even know where he is!" a harsh voice cried +out. "He--one of the gods that wielded the lightning and thunder! After +all, caught by Coryon, and brought here like the rest of us! Ha! ha! +ha!" + +Leonard, shocked and amazed, went to the side whence the sounds +proceeded, and there saw, peering through the bars, a horrible face +that grinned at him with hideous sneers and wild-looking eyes. The hair +and beard were matted and dishevelled; the face and figure, so far as +he could make them out, looked gaunt and thin. He was dressed in the +black tunic with gold star that denoted one of Coryon's soldiers. + +"Ha! ha! ha!" laughed the mocking voice. "You don't know where you are, +eh? I'll tell you, my lord, son of the gods, that can kill us soldiers +with a magic lightning wand, but can't keep yourself out of Coryon's +clutches--you are in the 'devil-tree's larder'!" + +"The devil-tree's larder!" + +"Yes, my lord; the devil-tree's larder. That means that they have put +you here to keep you cool and in good condition, before they hand you +over to be food for their pet out there." And he pointed to the tree. + +Leonard shuddered, and the awful truth of the man's statement forced +itself upon his mind, in spite of his wish to believe it too atrocious +to be possible. He went up to the door in the front and examined it. He +saw that it ran in grooves at the top and bottom. + +"Ah," said the mocking voice behind him, "that's right. You see how +it's done now. They run that back from inside, sudden-like, some time +when you don't expect it; and in come the twisting branches that lay +hold of you, and out you go to make him a nice meal. Ha! ha! ha!" + +Leonard turned and stared in helpless horror. Was it possible that +there was such cold-blooded, fiendish cruelty in the world? Yet--he +remembered the fate of the poor puma. He trembled, and turned sick and +faint; while the one in the next cell continued to jeer and mock at him. + +"Where is your lightning-wand, my lord? Why have you not brought it +to try it on the tree? You managed to get _me_ brought here; and now +you've managed to get here yourself!" + +"I got _you_ brought here? How? What then are you doing here?" Leonard +asked, his surprise overcoming his disgust. + +"What am I doing here? Why, the same as you--waiting in 'the +devil-tree's larder' till I'm given to him for a meal--as you will be. +And it's all through you; because you killed some of us and we others +ran away; this is what they do with us." + +Leonard shuddered again, while the man went to the stream of water +that, as in Leonard's cell, was pouring down from a pipe above, and, +filling the pitcher, took a long drink. + +"Makes you thirsty, this sort of thing," he said, with another jeering +laugh. "You'll find that water there mighty handy if they let you stay +here long enough. Ha! ha! ha!" + +The man was evidently in a state of high fever. The place was full of +foetid odours given off by the foul tree; and, apart from that, the +want of sleep would superinduce fever, if, indeed, it did not drive mad +the wretched occupants of the cells; for who could sleep for more than +a minute or two at a time in one of those dens, where, at any moment, +the door might be run back and the miserable prisoner delivered over +to the fatal branches? It was this constant, ever-present dread that +banished sleep, and must inevitably end in madness for the victims, +provided they were kept there long enough. + +Then the thought flashed upon him that Ulama also might be an occupant +of one of these awful cells; and at that such a burst of grief and +agony came over him that he hid his face within his hands and groaned +aloud. + +"Yah! don't give way like that, my lord. Being here's not so bad when +once you're used to it! Look at me! You don't see me worry and cry like +a great girl. I take it quietly; I've been too used to seeing others +here. Many's the time I've had the pulling back of these doors and have +seen a man or a woman hauled out squealing and kicking like an animal +going to be killed; and I've laughed at them. I thought it such fun! +And now those who used to help me and laugh with me, they're waiting to +see how I like it; and they will laugh at me, too, just the same. But I +don't care. What does it matter? It's nothing, I tell you, when you're +as used to it as I am." + +The wretched creature thus trying to delude himself with boastful +talk and jeering at his fellow-captive, was himself, it was easy to +see, worked up into the highest state of nervous dread and fear. The +least sound made him start and look with straining eyeballs in the +direction from which it came. He kept going to the pitcher for draughts +of water, and never remained still for a single instant. If he sat down +for a short space, the twitching of a foot, or leg, or hand, spoke of +agitation within that would not be controlled. + +Leonard turned from the sight with mingled feelings of disgust and +loathing and, going to the other side, looked through the grating of +the adjoining cell, to see whether it was occupied. And, looking, his +heart seemed to come up into his throat when he saw a silent female +form seated with its back to him. The exclamation that escaped him +caused the form to turn, when he saw that the woman was a stranger. +Her face was pleasing in its features, and good-looking, but had in +its expression such a burden of unspeakable horror and despair that +he shivered as he met her glance. At sight of it, for the moment, he +almost forgot his own misery, and he asked gently, + +"And who then are you?" + +For a few seconds there was no reply; then, in a voice that had in it +the suggestion of much sweetness, albeit now forced, and unnatural, + +"I scarcely know. Once I was a happy young girl; then a well-beloved +and loving wife and mother; now I am only something with which to feed +yonder monster." + +"Yes," continued the woman dreamily, "I was once good-looking, they +said. Certainly, my husband thought so; and that was enough for me. But +it was my curse, alas! for Skelda, the chief of the priests next to +Coryon, thought so too. He stole me away from my home and my children +and forced me to become one of his so-called wives. And now, because my +sorrowing and pining have seared and furrowed my good looks, even as +they had eaten into my heart, he has tired of me, and has sent me to +the fate that, sooner or later, we all come to here--all of my sex, at +least, as well as many of the other among those who are not priests. +Yet," she added, "it is but five years since they brought me here. What +I look like now you can see for yourself!" + +Leonard looked at her with pity; and there came into his mind the +remembrance of Ulama's words of the day before--"It seems almost wrong +to be happy when I know so many others are unhappy"--and his own light +rejoinder. And he reproached himself in that he had been content to +bask in love and self-enjoyment while, close at hand, there were such +abuses, such direful sufferings. True, he had not actually known +their whole nature and extent; but he _had_ known of the so-called +'blood-tax'; and had heard enough to make it certain, had he given the +matter due consideration, that there were evils in the land that cried +aloud for remedy. + +Then his thoughts reverted to Ulama, and he asked, + +"Do you know aught concerning the Princess Ulama?" + +"I know that she was to be brought to this place, and that she was to +be put into the cell I occupied before they brought me here yesterday. +It is underground; a long way from this part." + +At least, then, the poor child, Leonard thankfully reflected, was not +in one of the cells in sight of the dreaded tree. + +Presently he asked the woman whether she had known Zelus, the son of +Coryon. + +"Ah yes! Who did not in this land?" was the reply. "The monster! A +great spasm as of relief and joy came upon us all--all the women, I +mean--when we heard of his death. He was the worst of them all, though +one of the youngest. No one was safe from him. Even the princess he +sought to bring here to treat as he had treated so many others!" + +"I know. I killed him when he was in the very act of raising his +cowardly hand against the king's daughter," said Leonard quietly. + +The woman turned and looked at him with more of interest in her manner +than she had yet shown. She scanned him closely. + +"Then," she said, "you must be one of the strangers of whom we heard. +But you are young, and not, as I have been told, of our race. We heard +of one older, one who, it was said, belonged to our people. And when we +heard that, we all rejoiced; for surely, we said, he brings us tidings +of what all have been expecting. Therefore, we who were held here in a +bondage that is a daily, hourly torture, a never-ceasing degradation, +we welcomed your coming as a sign that the Great Spirit had at last +brought our long punishment to an end. I, even I, dared to hope I +should escape the fate that has befallen all others, and should live to +see again my husband and children before I die. But, alas! it was but a +dream--a delusive, passing hope, a thing too good to come in my time. +Four months have passed and nothing has occurred, though ye smote the +hated Zelus quickly; and even Coryon was filled with fear and dread. +Why have ye failed to do more, and, instead, fallen victim to Coryon?" + +Ah! why? It was a question that now sank deep into Leonard's soul +and tortured him with vain regrets and self-reproach. For he had a +heart that swelled with kindness towards his fellows, and a tender +conscience; and the more he thought things over, the more difficult he +found it to feel that he was without blame. He had been too selfishly +wrapped up in his own personal feelings, he now acknowledged; too +little interested in those very matters that, as the king's future +son-in-law, should have taken, if not the first, at least a prominent +position in his mind. And then, to be ignobly trapped, at a time when +there was nothing but feasting and amusement in their minds! Their arms +taken from them--they who could have kept at bay all Coryon's soldiers +and dispersed them, had they but been vigilant and wakeful! It was +a cruelly humiliating thought--it was worse; for the child-hearted, +innocent Ulama, who had a right to rely on his protection, had been +sacrificed also to his self-abandonment and want of watchfulness. + +Thus did Leonard reason, now that his opportunities had vanished. He +knew not what was the true explanation of the position in which he +found himself; but a vague, half-formed idea crept into his mind that +Coryon would hardly have ventured upon such a daring stroke unless he +had felt he could rely upon the support, or, at least, the indifferent +neutrality, of a certain proportion of the people. And if he, Leonard, +had shown more interest in the affairs of the people over whom he +was one day to be king, he might have gained so firm a hold on their +confidence and affections as would have rendered Coryon's schemes +hopeless from the very start. + +But such thoughts, whether well or ill-founded, came now all too late. +Here he was, caged, and at Coryon's mercy. His relentless enemy had but +to give the signal and he would be consigned to an awful death. + +He had some further talk with the woman, who told him terrible +tales of indescribable barbarities and iniquities perpetrated by the +priestly tyrants under the covering of their 'religion'; tales that +made the blood within him boil, and filled his soul with savage, though +helpless, indignation. Then he asked the woman's name, and was told it +was Fernina. + +At last, he asked the question that, though often upon his tongue, yet +he had shrunk from giving voice to. + +"And what do you suppose will happen--here?" + +She sighed and shook her head, hopelessly, despairingly. + +"Only what always happens," she answered, in a dull, listless tone. +"None that are once placed here ever escape the fatal tree; except that +sometimes they are carried up above and laid on what they call 'the +devil-tree's ladle.'" + +"'The devil-tree's ladle?'" + +"Yes; it is a contrivance on wheels; a kind of long plank shaped at one +end like a great spoon. Those who are to be given to the tree are laid +upon it, bound so that they cannot move, and then pushed out along the +stone-work till they are within reach of the branches; those who push +the plank at the other end being far enough away for their own safety. +It is part of the system of terrorism and torture here," Fernina added, +"to place some of us, at times, in rooms that are in the rock above, +and that overlook this place, and to keep us locked in there for days +and nights, that we may be cowed and frightened at the scenes that are +enacted here. Often, a hateful fascination compels you to become an +unwilling witness; in any case, you cannot avoid hearing the shrieks +and moans; imagination supplies the rest." + +Leonard turned away, not caring to hear more, and sat down to brood, +eating his heart out with keen regrets, all now unavailing. The +jeering of the half-mad wretch in the other cell had ceased; he, +too, had fallen into a sort of brooding lethargy, and so was quiet; +but a constant tap, tap, tap, of one foot on the stone floor told he +was not asleep. Thus the hours dragged by in silence, save for the +intermittent, stealthy rustle of the branches outside, as they came +prowling over the face of the gratings in their sleepless seeking after +the prey they seemed to scent within. + +Once, a small grating at the bottom of the door of each cell was +opened, and a platter with coarse food upon it was pushed in; then the +space closed up again. The sounds made them all, for the moment, start; +then they relapsed again into the stupor of despair. None touched the +food or even noticed it. But the man in the further cell had now seated +himself near the little stream of water and, every now and then, he +roused himself to take long draughts. + +When it grew dark, a lighted lantern was pushed under the door into +each cell, as the food had been. Leonard felt drowsy and longed for +rest; yet was afraid to lie down or to close his eyes. Now and again +they even closed against his will in a short doze; but it was never of +long duration, and each time he woke it was with a renewed sense of the +horror of his situation. + +He had just roused from one of these brief snatches of sleep, and had +had time to remember once more where he was, when a low rumble made +him spring up and look around. Then the man in the next cell gave an +awful cry--a cry that rang in Leonard's ears for many a day--and at the +same moment the grated door of his prison slowly began to move. In his +demented terror he banged himself against the partition between the two +cells, tried to get his fingers into the slits that he might cling to +it; then climbed up on to the wooden block in the middle of the cell. +But the rustling branches neared him, sought for him on every side, and +soon mounted the log and caught him in their deadly embrace. Slowly, +but irresistibly, while he never ceased his cries or his vain struggles +and clutchings, the coils around him tightened and dragged him out into +the darkness, where his cries gradually became weaker, and were finally +heard no more; and when they ceased, and he heard the door rolling +back, with dull rumbling, to its place, Leonard tottered to the pile of +rugs in the corner of his cell, and fell upon them in a swoon. + +When he returned to consciousness a bright light was shining through +the grated door. He got up and, like one who is but a helpless +on-looker in a fevered dream, he went to the bars and gazed out. It +was bright moonlight outside, and there he saw the same ghastly scene +repeated that Templemore had witnessed a short time before. He saw +the dead body of the latest victim of the tree's insatiable thirst +for blood dangling amongst the branches; caught up, now by the neck, +and now by the feet, and passed on from one branch to another in what +seemed a new dance or sport of death; and finally carried off by the +great crawling reptiles that had come up to claim their share in the +repast. + +While the scene lasted, Leonard seemed incapable of volition; his limbs +refused to obey the will of his reeling brain and to bear him away +from the sight. But, when the creatures had disappeared, he turned and +made his way once more to the low bed, where he remained in a state of +torpor till the day was far advanced. + +After what seemed a long interval, he sat up and rubbed his eyes, after +the manner of one just awakened from the horror of a nightmare. Then he +saw the woman who occupied the next cell standing with her eyes fixed +on him; and, when she found he was once more awake and conscious, she +addressed him. + +"I am sorry for you," she said. "Even in my own misery I am not so +blinded but that I can see that your burden of sorrow is a heavy +one--more than you can bear. Yet methinks, were I a man, I would not +thus give way to it. I am but a woman, but my greatest wish--since +nothing else is left me--is that I may see Coryon once more--stand +face to face with him--and show him that all his calculated cruelty +and subtle ingenuity of torture have not subdued my spirit, nor the +scorn that a heart conscious of having done no wrong can feel for such +as he. I would give him back look for look, hate for hate, as I have +before to-day; and make his wicked eyes quail before mine with the +consciousness that the spirit of one he has unjustly oppressed can +show itself greater than his own. But with _you_--he will but laugh at +you--for I feel, somehow, you will be taken from here to meet him. I +suspect he has sent you here first to crush your spirit with the sight +of the horrors that are perpetrated here. He--have you ever seen him?" + +"No," Leonard answered, staring at her in amazement. + +"Ah! then you know not what he is like. I tell you," the strange woman +went on, her eyes lighting up with unexpected fire, "he is a man whose +mere glance strikes terror into the souls of ordinary men. There is +that about him that makes you shrink as from some unearthly incarnation +of all the powers of evil; and in that he delights, yea, more, even, +than in torturing his victims." + +Here she broke off abruptly; then resumed, in a different manner. + +"I have been wondering whether you are he who was to have wedded the +princess?" + +"Alas! yes. You have divined aright," Leonard answered sadly. + +"Then," said the woman, with increasing warmth, that gained as she went +on an energy that was almost fierceness, "then, the greater the reason +you should throw off this weakness and gird up your strength to meet +the haughty tyrant and show him that your spirit is equal to his own. +In all his ill-spent time upon this earth--and they say it has been a +very long one--it is his boast and his pride that scarce any can meet +his glance without quailing under it. Think! Think how he will triumph +over you--how he will point the finger of scorn--turn the look of +cold contempt upon the one who aspired to be the future king of this +country--and _that_ means to stand on an equality with himself--and +yet, as he will declare, is but a weak, puling, or ordinary mortal. +Ah! would I were in your place! You can but die. But I would make him +feel that I had a heart, a spirit, more dauntless, more unconquerable +than his own. Ay! I would die knowing that for many and many and many a +year to come, the remembrance that he had met _one_ spirit he could not +intimidate or master would be to him an instrument of defeat and shame, +eating into his proud heart, even as the suffering he has caused to me +has gnawed into my own." + +The woman spoke at the last with a force that almost electrified her +hearer. Leonard felt roused as, perhaps he had never been roused before. + +"You are right, my friend!" he exclaimed, "and I thank you. As you +truly say, he who aspires to high things should show himself worthy +to achieve them, and not even the shadow of a dreadful death and +cruel sufferings should have the strength to cow his spirit in the +presence of this most cold-blooded and revolting tyrant. If I have +shown weakness, it was not from personal fear, but from thought of the +suffering of one dearly loved, and my self-reproach for having been +the unintentional cause of it. It is well that I met you; for you have +taught me how I should meet this Coryon!" + +"And," said the woman, "if you want one unerring shaft to launch at +him--one that I know will pierce the armour of his pride and drive him +to the verge of madness--tell him you know one woman whose spirit more +than matches his; tell him that she is called Fernina." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +CORYON. + + +At sunrise on the morning of the day that was to have witnessed +Leonard's public betrothal he was sitting staring gloomily, through the +grating of his cell, at the never-resting branches without, when the +sounds of drums, on which a long tattoo was being beaten, broke on his +ear. The sounds came from both near and far, some half-muffled in the +galleries and caverns of the cliff, others echoing from one side to the +other of the rocky enclosure till they died away in the far distance. + +Since the previous morning nothing further had occurred; the woman was +still in the cell on one side of him; no new victim had been brought to +occupy the other. + +The roll of the drums caused Leonard to start up and look about him. +He was haggard and worn from want of sleep, but his step was firm, and +his face was stamped with a look of quiet resolution that showed he had +taken to heart his fellow-prisoner's advice. When he rose up she spoke. + +"It is as I thought," she said; "they are to have one of their +gatherings to-day, when the tree will be given its meal in sight of all +who are summoned to be present. That is why one of us was not given to +it last night, no doubt." And she gave a short, hard laugh, that was +far from pleasant to hear. + +"No doubt it is your turn," she went on in a softer tone. "You must +summon all your fortitude. Be brave! If one must die, one needs not +show such craven fear as that half-mad wretch exhibited the other +night." + +"You speak well, my good friend, and what you have said to me has +braced me up. Would that, before we part, I could say or do something +to serve or comfort you." + +"That cannot be; only remember what I told you--if you want a taunt +to hurl at the tyrant's head, a taunt that will stab him through his +self-admiration, you know now what to say. Soon they will be here for +you. Ah!" here she broke off, as though a new thought had come to her. +"On these days they are all assembled outside--all the men. Only the +women and children are left within their dens. Oh, if I could but get +free for half an hour! I know some of their secrets, and could play a +trick upon them that would go far to square accounts between us. But, +of course," she added mournfully, "it is foolishness to think of it." + +Overhead could now be heard the scuffling of many footsteps, and, anon, +more drum-beating, with much blowing of horns and trumpets. Next, there +were shouting and cheering, followed by what appeared to be a speech +from some one; but the words were not intelligible to the two anxious +listeners. + +At one time the noise had brought a faint hope into Leonard's mind that +it might portend the approach of friends; but the words Fernina had +just spoken quickly dissipated any such idea. + +Presently, steps were heard in the gallery outside, a key was inserted +in the lock, and two of Coryon's black-coated soldiers entered. They +were both armed with drawn swords; and one of them, addressing Leonard +in gruff accents, said, + +"You are to come with us." Then, turning to his comrade, he asked, +"Have you the cord?" + +"No," was the reply, "I thought you had it." + +"And I thought you were bringing it. Go, get it." + +The man went out. + +Then he who had remained, raising a warning hand to Leonard, addressed +him in low, guarded tones. + +"The lord Monella," he said, "is hastening to thine aid with many armed +followers; but he has been detained in the underground pass. Whether he +will arrive in time, I know not; if not and thou be harmed, thou wilt +be avenged." + +"Who art thou, then?" asked Leonard. + +"A friend of the lord Monella's." + +"And my other friend--what of him?" + +"He was a prisoner, but escaped, and has gone--I know not whither." + +"Heaven be praised for that! Ah, I can guess where he has gone!" Just +then a sudden thought came into Leonard's head. + +"See, friend," he said earnestly, "canst thou not turn the key in the +lock of the next cell and give the poor creature there one little +chance for liberty?" + +"I do not know, but I will see. If the key fits, I might." + +"Quick, then, ere thy fellow returns." + +The man hastily took out the key and tried it in the lock of the +woman's cell; it fitted, and he unlocked the door; then withdrawing the +key, he replaced it in the door of Leonard's cell. + +"Roll that log to the door to keep it close till you think it safe to +venture out," Leonard advised the woman. She had but just done so when +they heard the steps of the other soldier in the gallery. + +"What is thy name, friend?" Leonard asked him in a whisper. + +"Melta," the man answered; and then, when the other made his appearance +with some cord, he began to rate him for having been so long. + +Leonard was bound in a loose fashion, just sufficient to prevent his +free use of either arms or legs, and led away. On his way out he said a +kindly word to Fernina. + +"The Great Spirit help you," was the reply. "I have no fear for you +now; you will die with courage, if it be so fated. A heart that can +feel and think for a stranger in the midst of such distress as is yours +to-day is the heart of a brave man. But we may yet meet again." + +Leonard shook his head sadly. + +"I have no false hopes," he answered. "I do not expect that help can +now come in time. I may be avenged; that is the most I can hope for." + +"Yes!" said the woman in a meaning tone; "you will be avenged; and so +shall I." + +The man who had been sent for the cord laughed jeeringly at the woman +when she said this, but took no further notice of her; and the three +proceeded along the gallery till they came to some steps at the end. +Ascending these they entered a broader gallery or corridor above; +then, turning back, they passed out through the gateway and along +the covered-way, finally emerging on the main terrace of the great +amphitheatre. + +Round the sides of the enclosure a large number of people were +gathered. Among these were black-coated soldiers to the number of, +perhaps, two hundred; the others, of whom there were from four to five +hundred, also carried arms of some sort, spears or swords. When Leonard +cast his eyes around and noted them, the heart within him sank, for he +saw how difficult would be a rescue, even with the armed followers that +the man Melta had said accompanied Monella. + +In the centre of the great terrace, upon a high chair carved and +emblazoned, and with a great banner waving above his head, sat the +dreaded Coryon. Round him were grouped, first his nine priests in +black robes, and Dakla and others of his chief officers; then, ranks +of soldiers and, among them, some of the king's ministers and chief +functionaries, all bound as Leonard was. But the king himself was not +there; nor was Ulama; and Leonard, when he had assured himself of this, +turned his gaze on Coryon. + +It was well that he had been warned that he would need all his courage +to enable him to look upon this man unflinchingly. Even thus prepared +he found it barely possible to keep down the emotion the sight excited +in his breast. + +He saw before him a man of great height and powerful frame, clad in +a black robe with a star on the breast worked in virgin gold and set +with jewels. His grey hair and beard were unkempt and long, his skin +of a dark swarthy hue, his forehead, albeit broad, was receding, and +furrowed, and wrinkled into a sinister scowl, and his lips were parted +or drawn up in a set snarl that disclosed teeth more like a wild +beast's fangs than a human being's teeth. When Leonard first caught +sight of him, he was standing with one arm extended as though he had +just finished some harangue; but, when Leonard was brought up, Coryon +sat down. Then he slowly turned his glance upon the prisoner. + + [Illustration: "HE WAS STANDING WITH ONE ARM EXTENDED." + [_Page 286._] + +And beneath that glance a feeling of cold horror stole into Leonard's +breast; he felt as though an icy hand were about to seize his very +heart and wring it in a grip of iron. It was the nameless dread that +a man may feel in the presence of something that his instincts tell +him is a deadly enemy, yet of which he cannot discover the form, or +size, or nature; whether earthly or supernatural. Here, certainly, the +outward shape was that of a man, but in the eyes there was something +suggesting that their owner was not a man at all, but a living +incarnation of depravity--a demon with eyes, for the moment quiescent +as with the cold glitter and deadly malignancy of the serpent, but +instinct with suppressed power, and ready to flame up with terrible, +relentless, overwhelming energy. Mingled with the snake-like glitter +of malevolence there were lurid flashes that darted forth perpetually, +causing the beholder to recoil as though from actual darts. At sight +of him one thought of some nameless monster coiled up and meditating +a spring upon its prey; a monster that was the implacable foe of the +whole human race, that embodied, in human form, all the power, the +attributes, the cruelty, of an arch-demon from another world. + +From such a being the soul shrinks with a horror that is less earthly +fear than the natural loathing of evil things that is implanted within +the breasts of all endowed with pure and holy instincts; and this was +Leonard's feeling while he stood, half sick and faint, enduring and +returning Coryon's fixed look. + +But just when it came upon him that he must either shift his glance +or drop helpless to the ground, the thought of all the child-like, +innocent Ulama must have suffered through the shameless treachery of +this fiend in human shape came into his mind; and, with the thought, +forth from his heart rushed out the blood, bursting through the icy +grip that had all but closed upon it, and coursing through his veins in +a leaping torrent, like one of those great waves of fiery indignation +that sometimes, for a while, gives to one man the strength of ten. With +a sudden impulse that forgot everything but his righteous anger, he +put forth such an effort that he broke the cords that bound him; then, +rushing impetuously upon Coryon, before any one could interfere, he +actually had him by the throat in a clutch that, spite of the other's +own gigantic strength, would have ended his vile life if, for a few +seconds longer, his assailant had been left alone. But a dozen hands +laid hold of him and pulled him back, bruised and panting, to the +custody of the men he had escaped from. But, though baffled and injured +in the struggle, there was in his eyes a light almost of triumph when +he turned round and faced his enemy once more. + +"Aha!" he shouted. "Coward! Hateful murderer of women and children and +unarmed men! Thou darest not come down and meet me man to man! Though +thou art near twice my size, I had choked the foul life out of thee, +had we been left alone!" + +At first, Coryon made no answer, except to glare at his late assailant +with his evil eyes; but they fell away under the other's dauntless +look, and he put his hands to his throat as if in pain. + +"This will cost thee dear," at last he said, in a harsh, croaking +voice; but Leonard replied with a cold smile, + +"Thou canst but kill me; and I would not beg mercy from such as thou. +Why dost turn thine eyes away, coward Coryon? Dost feel at last that so +foul a thing may not endure the glance of an honest man?" + +Coryon sprang up and stood for a moment with his hands extended +towards his prisoner, his fingers closing and opening convulsively as +though he half intended to accept the challenge in the other's words +and looks. Then he managed to control his passion and sat down again, +first addressing a few words in a low tone to a priest who stood beside +him. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +ON THE 'DEVIL-TREE'S LADLE!' + + +When Coryon sat down, a kind of buzzing or hum or talk in low tones +broke out on all sides. Exclamations and expressions of astonishment +were heard, for never had such audacity been known in a prisoner +standing thus on the very brink of death and almost within reach of the +clutch of the fatal tree. + +Leonard was now bound again, and Dakla sent two or three of his +subordinate officers to stand beside him. But, even while they bound +him, the guards, as he could hardly fail to see, treated him with a +measure of involuntary respect; and well they might, for there was not +one amongst them that durst look the evil Coryon in the face. + +Then was brought out the contrivance called the 'devil-tree's ladle'; +it was simply a long plank widened out at one end, and mounted, in the +centre, on wheels. An irrepressible shudder passed through Leonard when +he saw this grim apparatus. But there was little outward sign of his +emotion, and his eyes were soon again fixed on Coryon, who rose and +thus addressed those present, + +"Friends, ye all see here a confirmation of that which I have already +explained unto you this morning. Yonder stands one of the strangers +whom the king hath admitted to his friendship; the man he was about +to honour by alliance with his royal house. Ye can see for yourselves +the untutored passions by which this youth, who was, forsooth, to have +been your future king, is swayed, and his lack of seemly behaviour in +the presence of one like myself, who hath for so many years held a +high position in the land, and hath conferred so many benefits upon +it. Not the least of these, my friends, is that which I have just +achieved--only just in time. I have, with the joint help of those +powerful gods whom we all here serve, been able to defeat and overcome +even the magic with which these men were armed. Ye all know, or have +heard, how they came provided, by some enemies of our race outside the +country, with magic wands that brought down lightning and thunder and +death upon those opposed to them; and to their seeming power the king +weakly yielded, and allowed these strangers to assume high stations +in the land. Zelus, my well-beloved son, early fell a victim to their +lawless intrusion into our domains, as did many of my people whom I +sent to capture them. But in the end I have prevailed against them; I +have taken from them their magic wands, and now they are, as ye all can +see, but ordinary men. But a punishment hath fallen upon the king, for +he is sick to death, and that is why he is not here to-day. He hath +not long to live, and soon the country will be without a king. Now it +seemeth to me certain that the people are averse from accepting this +young stranger as the successor to their dying ruler, and that they +desire one of their own race. This hath caused me much anxious thought, +but I have at last, I think, discovered a solution of the difficulty. +_I_ will espouse the Princess Ulama, and become the king's son-in-law; +thus will your minds be set at rest; for ye will know that whenever the +king dieth he will be succeeded by a ruler who is not only of your own +race, but hath served his country long enough to satisfy all objectors +as to his experience, or his ability, or his solicitude for the welfare +of his native land." + +While uttering these words, Coryon looked with a hardly-veiled smile of +malice at Leonard, who, listening to the infamous proposal wrapped up +in such unblushing hypocrisy, started as though he would have rushed +again upon the speaker; but he was held too firmly by those who now +surrounded him. He could scarce keep from groaning aloud at what he had +just heard. + +Coryon marked with evident satisfaction this effect of his +announcement, and proceeded, in an unctuous voice, and with an +affectation of great resignation, + +"In doing this, good friends, I have, I assure you, no thought, no +feeling save the welfare of my country. I had not thought ever to take +to me another wife; though I had looked with favour upon the desire of +my son Zelus to ally himself with our king's daughter. But, since this +young stranger hath rendered that impossible by slaying treacherously +mine only son, I will accept the necessities of the situation, and +sacrifice my own feelings for the general good. Perhaps, after all, +it is as well; for in me ye will have, as ye all know well, one who +thinks always only of his people's weal. For long ages I have guarded +the land from outward foes by making friends of the powers of darkness. +This, and this alone hath protected us from invasion by the hordes of +wild men that we know exist beyond our borders. The powers, whose High +Priest I am, have guarded us through many centuries, and have planted +around the limits of our island a forest impenetrable and filled with +terrible creatures for our protection. True, they let these strangers +through, but only as a warning of that which might befall if we forgot, +even for a moment, our religion, or rebelled against the sacrifices +it requires and that our gods look for from us and will insist upon. +True, we have to sacrifice some of those we love to our sacred tree, +but what is that compared with the benefits and advantages that the +rest receive? We have peace, prosperity, contentment, freedom from +invasion, from wars, from enemies and dangers of all kinds; and, +compared with these, the price that hath to be paid is, after all, but +small. Henceforth, too, there will be a stronger guarantee for peace +throughout the land, in that your king and the head of your religion +will be one. And you, my faithful followers, who have served me well," +continued the arch-hypocrite, casting his eyes around, "will no more +be called upon to reside in the rocky fastness that has been so long +our home; for I shall take up my abode in the palace of the king and +there shall ye all follow me." At this a loud cheer went up from all. +"And now to more immediate duties. I have condemned this murderer of my +son to death; he shall end his life befittingly as a sacrifice to the +gods whose power he hath defied in coming here--defied only to his own +doom. So shall perish all who brave me; and so shall perish this man's +friends, his murderous abettors who, too, are in my power. And now, +sirrah, if thou hast aught to say, thou hast just a minute. If thou +hast aught to ask me, now is thy final opportunity." + +When he ceased speaking, Coryon sat down, first casting at Leonard a +hideous glance of triumph. Leonard saw the sneer and knew that his +enemy's desire was to excite him to a farther display of useless anger; +but the knowledge only served to calm him, and, when he spoke, it was +in a voice that had in it neither bitterness nor passion, but only a +great sadness. He did not wish to gratify Coryon by exhibiting anger; +and thus he spoke, + +"It is true I have something I would say, but it is not to thee, O +Coryon, but to those who are not Coryon's degraded servants, but free +agents, who have been misled into supporting him here to-day. To you, +good people, I address myself." And Leonard cast his eyes around upon +those who were not wearers of Coryon's uniform. "I have much to say and +much to ask. Know that the power of this boastful tyrant who declares +with mock humility his wicked purpose to force the youthful daughter +of his king into an alliance that revolts her--know, good people, +that his power is almost at an end, and that he will never enter into +that palace, in which he has promised to find place for his credulous +followers. He may kill me if he will, but my death will naught avail; +a few hours hence he will be either a prisoner in the hands of those +who came with me, or hiding in his underground haunts like a hunted +animal that dares not show its face above the ground. But the end will +be the same. He will quickly be hurled out, and a terrible punishment +will be meted out to him and to all those who abet him--every one, +that is, who shall support him. Therefore I say this to you, when +my friends come--as come they will--do not help Coryon's myrmidons +against them. They will come armed with a fearful power that you can +scarce conceive; you shall see the very rocks fall away before them in +crashing thunders as they hunt these rats out of their holes. If you +fight on Coryon's side, they will mow you down like grass before the +scythe. On the other hand, if you side not with these doomed ones, but, +instead, ask for mercy, you shall find it; for we came not to this land +to teach cruelty and murder, but to deliver it from the tyranny that +has so long oppressed it. That is my advice to you; what I would ask is +that you tell your fellow-citizens that I am sore distressed in that +I have done far less than I might to win their affections and their +confidence. That I have made a terrible mistake, that it has led me to +this situation, I now see. But my error I shall expiate with my life; +when I am dead, and you see the benefits my friends will shower on the +land, then tell all that I was of the same mind, and was full of naught +but kindly feelings. But--my great--love for one so fair--as your +young--princess--took up my thoughts, perhaps, more than should have +been the case." Leonard's voice almost failed him here; but by a strong +effort he recovered himself and went on. "That is all that I would ask; +let them remember me and think kindly of me. You will see in those days +who has spoken truly--whether I, or Coryon. You will know how false has +been every word he has said to you to-day. Even what he says about my +friends is false; they are _not_ in his power, nor has he deprived them +of their magic power, as you will all quickly see. To say that by his +atrocious so-called religious rites he has guarded and advanced this +country is a lie----" + +"Silence!" exclaimed Coryon, who had all this time been moving +restlessly in his seat. + +"I come from a land--the greatest on the earth--that has an empire +upon which the sun ne'er sets; we have no such wicked murders called +sacrifices; yet we are safe against our enemies, and----" + +"Silence, I tell thee! What think'st thou we care about thy country or +thyself?" Coryon burst out. + +"I say," Leonard went on, disregarding him, "that every word this man +utters is a lie. He cannot say one single sentence without uttering a +lie----" + +"If thou sayest more, I will have thee scourged as well as killed," +Coryon cried, in growing rage. "It speaketh well to these good people +for my patience that I have let thee have thy say thus far. Never, for +many a year, has mortal dared to flout me to my face as thou hast +done." + +"O Coryon!" Leonard exclaimed, turning and facing him, "truly did I say +that thou could'st not speak one single sentence without uttering some +lie, and now thou art convicted. For I know of one, at least, that has +flouted and dared thee to thy face; one whose spirit thou couldst not +quell; and she but a woman--her name Fernina!" + +At this a perfect howl of rage escaped from Coryon's lips. He sprang up +and clutched at the air, and gasped; and, for a moment, Leonard half +thought he would have a fit. But he recovered himself, and shouted, in +a screaming voice, + +"Seize him! Gag him! Lay him on the feeding-ladle of our sacred tree! +We will see how he fancies its embrace!" Then, turning round and +addressing some one near him, he cried out, + +"Bring forward the princess, that she may witness this my act of +justice towards the murderer she would have taken to her bosom. Let my +future wife look on. Ha! ha! ha! My future wife! How dost thou like the +title, murderer of my son, and would-be king?" + +His rage was something fearful to behold; many even of his own +myrmidons trembled, and they made speed to do his bidding. + +Leonard was seized and bound to the wheeled plank, and, after trying +in vain to turn his head to take one last look at Ulama, he closed his +eyes and resigned himself to prayer. At the same time Ulama, looking +but the mere ghost of her former self, was led to the side of Coryon's +chair between two women, and forced to look upon the dreadful scene. At +the sight of Leonard bound to the fatal plank, and the grim tree with +its restless branches ever twisting in avid hunger for their prey, a +look of stony horror came over her face; she gave one gasping, sobbing +cry, and fell back unconscious. + + [Illustration: ON THE DEVIL-TREE'S LADLE. + [_Page 297._] + +For some moments Coryon paused; he was inclined to wait till Ulama +should be restored to consciousness, for he wanted to prolong the +torture of the lovers somewhat before finally consigning Leonard to his +fate; but his fury mastered him, and he gave the signal to the two men +holding one end of the plank to push it out along the stone pier. + +They had just begun to move it when a shot was heard, and one of them +fell to the ground; and Leonard, turning his head, saw Templemore, high +on the rocks above, kneeling with his rifle at his shoulder. + +Coryon saw it too, and, with a shout, and many threats, urged the other +man to push out the plank; but, instead, he started back in terror, and +only just in time to escape a second bullet that came singing past his +ears and wounded a soldier standing near. + +Coryon, mad with rage and disappointed malice, snatched a spear from +a soldier beside him, and ordered others in front of him to seize +the plank and push it out, prodding at them with the spear to force +obedience; but one, who stepped forward at his bidding, fell before +he could reach the plank. Meantime, Templemore, followed by Ergalon +and the brave Zonella, had come leaping down from ledge to ledge, +threatening all who barred his way, and shooting down one or two who +tried to stop him. He now stood, a revolver in each hand, at the end of +the plank, and there he kept a circle around him, while Ergalon cut the +cords by which Leonard was bound, released the cloth that had been tied +round his mouth to gag him, and helped him to his feet. Immediately he +rushed to Templemore. + +"Give me a rifle, Jack! Let me shoot down that son of Satan and rid the +earth of him for ever." + +Ergalon was carrying three rifles, the one Templemore had been using +and two spare ones; one of these he handed now to Leonard. + +But, in the interval, Coryon's chief officer, Dakla, had taken in the +situation; and having already had experience of the weapons with which +he saw Templemore was armed, had advised Coryon to retreat into the +covered-way. + +"It is useless to stay here, my lord," he said. "Thou wilt surely be +killed! Haste to the shelter while there is yet time! There I think +thou wilt be safe. If not, thou canst retreat within the gates." + +"Dost think the danger is so great, good Dakla?" Coryon asked, +incredulously. + +"I am sure of it, my lord. Haste thee--and take some soldiers with thee +and keep them between thee and thine enemies, or thou wilt never reach +the shelter alive. I will leave some men here and take others up on to +the rocks above, whence we can hurl down great stones upon them. Haply, +if no more come, we may yet prevail against these." + +Coryon and his priests and immediate followers hastened away, +accordingly, leaving the still unconscious Ulama, in charge of the two +women, behind his chair. He was only just in time, for a soldier he +forced to walk beside him fell by a shot from Leonard's rifle a moment +before they gained the shelter of the covered-way. + +Leonard saw the women beside Coryon's chair, and, though he knew +not that Ulama was lying there unconscious, he guessed she was near +the spot; therefore he feared to fire more shots in that direction; +while he knew it would be useless to fire at the iron-work of the +covered-way. For a space, therefore, there was a pause; but soon +Dakla's men appeared on the rocks above them and began to roll down +stones and boulders. + +The position of the little band was now becoming critical. To retreat, +leaving Ulama in the hands of Coryon, was not to be conceived. Yet they +could not advance, for a compact body of men stood ready to receive +them; and at these they durst not fire lest they might hit Ulama or +one of her attendants. Yet every minute they stayed where they were +increased their danger. Great masses of rock, started by persons above +who showed only an arm or hand above the ridge, came crashing down and +shooting past them. And, when a head was raised above it here and there +to take a hurried aim, it was seen only for a second, and gave little +opportunity for a shot. + +They had had two or three narrow escapes, and had avoided injury +only by leaping out of the path of the rocks that came crashing and +bounding down. Jack urged Zonella to go back, but she stoutly refused; +and he was at his wits' end what course to take, when loud shouting +was heard in the direction of the entrance of the enclosure. Soon, a +rush of armed men in red tunics came along the roadway at the rear of +the black-coated soldiers standing around Coryon's chair. Instantly +Coryon's men gave way, and rushed across the terrace towards the +covered-way; while the red-coated men poured in and spread themselves +out on either side. + +And now could be seen men carrying flags and banners, and amongst them +two of mighty stature; one of them, the taller, dressed in the coat +of mail and the helmet with silver wings that had been preserved so +long in the museum and that was said to have belonged to the legendary +Mellenda. He wore, too, the great sword that belonged to the suit, and +it seemed, upon his towering form, to be of no more than usual and +proportionate size. + +As this majestic figure came more closely into view, accompanied +by Colenna and some others of the king's officers, Leonard and +Templemore's astonishment were great at recognising no other than their +friend Monella! + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +RALLYING TO THE CALL. + + +To make clearer the events described in the previous chapters, it +should be stated that, when Templemore and Ergalon had returned from +their journey down the canyon in quest of arms and ammunition, they +found with Zonella, who was anxiously awaiting them, a messenger from +Monella. + +It was not yet daylight, and the two who had made the descent and +ascent of the difficult path under conditions of considerable hardship, +were very much exhausted. They were therefore glad, though surprised, +to find that, in their absence, Zonella had provided both food and wine +for them. + +"How pleased I am to see you I need scarcely say," she exclaimed. "But +first, eat and drink, while I talk. I have much to tell, and there is +yet time to spare. Therefore, rest and refresh yourselves, while I +relate what has been made known to me. + +"Your friend, Monella, has done wondrous things. It seems--as Ergalon +here no doubt has been aware--that he has long been quietly making +preparations for some such crisis as the present. Coryon, it is +true, by his treachery, has stolen a march upon him, but he is being +gradually and surely enmeshed in the net that the lord Monella has +drawn around him. For a long time Sanaima has been secretly drilling +numbers of his followers in Myrlanda, where he has a large store of +arms, and he and Monella have gained over many of Coryon's men; in +particular, some of those sent to close the subterranean pass. When, +therefore, the two, with many armed men, presented themselves at +the entrance to the pass and found the gates closed against them, +instead of making a desperate fight of it in which many must have +been killed on both sides and the news of it have been carried to +Coryon's ears, they waited for their friends inside to act. Soon, +those of them amongst the soldiers who guarded the approach, seizing +their opportunity, fell upon their fellows in their sleep, bound them, +and opened the gates. The same thing has occurred in the palace; +all Coryon's soldiers really devoted to him have been quietly made +prisoners, and the palace is now in the hands of Monella and Sanaima +and their friends; and Coryon knows it not. + +"Now, when Monella found that you had escaped, he divined whither you +had gone, and sent messengers here to await your return; and I sent +them back at once to tell him I expected you here ere long. And now +another has arrived with instructions, in case you should return in +time to put them into execution, as--the Great Spirit be praised!--you +have. Monella has sent two or three of Coryon's own people to him with +various messages to allay his suspicions; and Coryon quite believes +that you are still a prisoner, and that Monella is still in Myrlanda, +unable to get through the pass. Others of Monella's men, dressed in +black tunics taken from the prisoners, are now placed at intervals on +guard at all the approaches to Coryon's retreat; where already, by this +time, nearly all his followers and his adherents amongst the people +are assembling. There will be some hundreds altogether; all hostile to +you and your friends. But, when they are all assembled, Monella will +gather together also many hundreds from the people outside, and march +them to the amphitheatre and so surprise Coryon and all with him." + +"But how," asked Templemore, "if Coryon gets to hear of it?" + +"He will not. No move will be made till all are gathered in the +amphitheatre; after that, any stragglers going thither from the town, +and any messengers sent thence by Coryon, will fall into the hands of +Monella's disguised soldiers, and will be quietly seized and bound." + +"I see. And now what is to be done to make sure of the safety of our +friends?" + +"The directions are these. You are to go quietly, through the forest, +to the wood at the edge of the amphitheatre where----" + +"I understand," broke in Ergalon. "It is the place,"--turning to +Templemore--"where we stood and looked down upon the great devil-tree +that night. I can take you by a route that leads through the woods all +the way, and thus we shall not be seen." + +"Yes, that is right," resumed Zonella. "When you get there, you are to +remain concealed, and watch all that goes on, and, unless compelled, do +nothing till the arrival of Monella and his friends. But, if it should +be absolutely necessary to interfere before that to save our friends, +why, then, of course, you must do the best you can." + +"I only hope we may be in time to save them," said Templemore, with a +sigh. "I am terribly anxious. Let us be going; it is already getting +light." + +The three then started--for Zonella insisted on accompanying them--and +the messenger was sent back to inform Monella. When they approached the +amphitheatre, four black-coated soldiers suddenly sprang up before them +from among the bushes, where they had been lying concealed. Templemore +drew a pistol, but Zonella stepped in front of him, and said something +in a low tone to the soldiers, who at once gave way and let them pass. + +"What did you say to them?" asked Templemore. + +"I gave them the pass-word," she answered quietly. + +"And what is that, if I may inquire?" + +"It is a word you do not regard with the same feelings as ourselves," +she answered gravely. "But in Manoa it has always been a word to +conjure with, and, so it is to-day--it is 'Mellenda.'" And, while she +spoke, she looked at Templemore half defiantly. + +But he made no reply, and they walked on in silence, and now with all +caution, to their destination. + +Meanwhile, so soon as the sun had risen, messengers were hurrying +hither and thither amongst the populace, knocking at doors, and +summoning all friendly to the king and the princess, to assemble in the +great square where stood the large museum. And, in reply to excited +questionings, they often only gave the magic word, 'Mellenda,' or said, +'Mellenda calls you.' + +Most of the population were early astir that morning, restless with +anxiety and fear for the princess and her betrothed, who had, they +were told, been carried off by Coryon. As stated, by the great mass of +people their princess was much beloved by the people; and Leonard, if +he had not gained their affection, had the sympathy, for her sake, of +all loyal subjects, and they were many. Indeed, all they wanted was a +leader; they were too cowed to take action for themselves. + +No wonder, then, that when such a leader came, announcing himself as +the long-expected, legendary Mellenda, the whole population, outside +those who were gathered around Coryon in the amphitheatre, rallied +to his standard, and clamoured to be armed and led against their +oppressor. That there were plenty of arms in the museum all well knew; +and, when the messengers ran to and fro, spreading the news of the +return of their hero-king, all the men who heard the tidings left at +once whatever they might have in hand, and hurried to the museum. There +they found Sanaima with a number of followers already equipped in +the well-known red tunics and winged helmets; and Colenna and others +engaged in giving out arms and uniforms to many more. + +And when, shortly after, Monella appeared at the top of the wide flight +of steps, clad in Mellenda's coat of mail, with the well-known banner +floating above him, and wearing at his side the mighty sword, every +man and woman and child amongst the crowd below gave a great shout and +knelt before him. Then Monella drew the mighty sword, that an ordinary +man could hardly wield, and, flourishing it in the air as easily as +though it were but the lightest cane, addressed the kneeling people in +sonorous tones that were heard by all, and were delivered with an air +of exceeding majesty and dignity, + +"Yes, my children! I have returned to you! After many days the Great +Spirit hath led my weary steps back to my beloved country, there +to finish my life's work, and end a long and troublous journey. My +pilgrimage through the ages hath been a punishment to me, even as the +same dreary time hath been a punishment to you; a punishment to myself +for having placed too high a value, in the times that are long past, +on power and conquest and dominion; to you, for that your forefathers +forsook their faith--the worship of the one Great Spirit--and embraced +the religion of the powers of darkness, and supported the atrocious +Coryon in a rebellion against their lawful king, and in the murder of +those near and dear to him. For that, the punishment hath been that +they should be oppressed and cruelly ill-treated by him they thus +supported, through many generations. But, at last, the anger of the +Great Spirit is appeased. He hath led me hither to deliver this fair +land from the horror that broods over it. I come to you, not with great +fleets of ships, with armies and generals, as of yore; but as a simple +wanderer returning to his home. Yet in my coming the Great Spirit sent +you all a sign; for I arrived but just in time to save her who is the +child of Manoa's ancient race of kings and--my own descendant. This was +the sign--this and the death of Zelus at the same time; which was a +warning to Coryon that he heeded not. But time presses, and I may not +say more now. The princess and our friends are in great peril, and I +go to save them. I go to break Black Coryon's power for ever, and to +punish him as he deserves. Then will I bring again to this fair land +peace, and happiness, and security for all." + +Then, amid acclamations, and shouts and cries of delight, Monella--or +Mellenda, as he now called himself--moved off towards the place where +Coryon, in fancied security, was boastfully proclaiming his intention +to espouse the princess, and to live henceforth at the palace as +supreme ruler of the country. + +Those of Sanaima's followers from Myrlanda, who had been instructed +in their duties, took charge, as officers, of ranks and companies of +the newly-recruited men. They were assisted by many officers of the +king's guard who had been held prisoners in the palace, but had been +released, and had now changed their blue uniforms for the red tunics +and winged helmets in the museum. + +Some, however, remained behind, to equip and despatch reinforcements +as men continued to arrive asking to be enrolled. Thus, if trouble +should arise with Coryon, Monella would have at his back, eventually, +an overwhelming force. And as the men kept marching off in companies, +the crowd of women and children and old men collected in the square +in which was the museum stood about in anxious groups, awaiting news; +hardly daring to hope for what all so fervently desired--the final +downfall of their ruthless tyrant. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +'THOU ART MY LORD MELLENDA!' + + +To return to the scene in the amphitheatre. Monella, and those with +him, advanced with measured tread; but suddenly his eyes fell on Ulama. +For a few moments he bent over her, then he came slowly to the front +and looked around him, and in that rapid survey he seemed to take in +everything. + +Beckoning to Leonard and Zonella he said, when they had joined him, + +"The princess lies there in a dead faint. This is no place for the poor +child. Bear her tenderly outside. My people will protect you." Then he +turned again to look around. + +In their surprise at the unexpected inrush, those on the heights had +ceased hurling down the rocks, and now they gazed in wonderment at +Monella and those with him. Beside him stood a tall man in a white robe +upon which was worked a figure of the sun in diamonds that flashed +and sparkled as he moved. His long hair and beard were snowy white, +his forehead, high and massive, was clear, and curiously free from +lines and wrinkles. It had the impassive look of one who suffers few +earthly cares to trouble him. His features were pleasant and benevolent +in expression, and the clear grey eyes were open and candid in their +glance. Like Monella, he was far above the usual height; and, like +him, was of imposing presence and stately mien. Altogether, one would +say of him that he was a _good_ man, a man to be trusted and respected; +he had at the same time the air of one deeply engrossed in intellectual +pursuits, or leading an ascetic life. He lacked just that touch of +tender human sympathy that made Monella's mere look so fascinating to +those with whom he came in contact, and that bound so thoroughly to him +those who yielded to its subtle influence. + +Ergalon had already whispered to the others that the stranger was +Sanaima, the ancient chief of the White Priesthood; and Templemore +regarded him with interest and curiosity. + +Above their heads waved great red banners with strange devices and +elaborately carved standard poles. At a sign from Monella, Coryon's +banner, that floated above his chair, was pulled down and trampled in +the dust; then the largest of the red ones was hoisted in its place. + +Next, Monella quietly seated himself in Coryon's chair and gazed around +the enclosure, his features set and stern, and his steady, piercing +eyes seeming to read the very heart of every one upon whom he turned +his gaze. The king's ministers and other prisoners had been unbound, +while Templemore had been hastily explaining, to the best of his +ability, all that had taken place. + +Presently Monella rose, and, waving his hand towards the people not +clad in Coryon's uniforms, he thus addressed them, + +"How comes it, that in this place of evil deeds and heinous crimes, +I find many of the king's peaceful subjects--or they who should be +peaceful--ranged round and calmly looking on at acts of cold-blooded +cruelty against the king's own child and those he calls his friends? +What have ye to say in excuse or extenuation? Choose the highest among +ye for a spokesman, and let him come forward and explain this shameful +thing, if so he can. Else I may include ye all in the punishment I am +here to mete out to these evil-doers." + +At this there was a great hubbub and commotion. Some of Coryon's +companions in the covered-way turned in a panic to make their escape +into the interior gallery; but found, to their dismay, that the gates +were fast closed and barred against them from within. And when they +glanced out at the rocks above, they saw red-coated soldiers, who now +lined the heights and kept still arriving in ever-increasing numbers. +Dakla and his principal officers had withdrawn at their advance, +and now stood, with the priests, crowded together just inside the +covered-way. Outside the iron screens the long, trailing branches swept +up from time to time, as though seeking to get at those within. + +After a hurried conference among the people, one of their number +stepped down on to the main terrace and placed himself before Monella. + +Templemore stood on one side of Monella's chair, rifle in hand, with +Ergalon close by holding the spare rifles, all ready loaded. He watched +with growing wonder the continual arrival of red-coated soldiers on +all sides of the rocky ridges. They all carried spears, or swords and +shields, and wore the curious helmets ornamented with little silver +wings that he had seen in the museum. And now, amongst them, were to +be seen many citizens in ordinary dress. But all kept a space between +themselves and those who had been there on their arrival; their manner +towards these was evidently unfriendly and threatening; and, since the +newcomers outnumbered the others, including all Coryon's people, the +position of the latter was growing anything but comfortable. And still +the red-coated men kept coming, pushing those in advance of them into +positions lower down and farther round the terraces of the enclosure. + +There was a general hush when the one who had been chosen spokesman +came forward and stood in front of Monella, who asked curtly, + +"Thy name?" + +"Galaima," was the reply, given in a clear, unhesitating voice. "I have +been chosen by those whom thou didst but now address, to speak in their +name. Seeing that punishment hath been spoken of, we desire first to +ask what authority thou hast to speak in the king's name; by what right +thou dost threaten us; and who thou art?" + +"You have the right to ask those questions," returned Monella coldly. +"Know then that I am King of Manoa--thy king, and the king of Coryon, +and of all in this country." + +"King of Manoa!" echoed Galaima in surprise, while similar exclamations +broke forth around. "But, my lord--I speak with all respect--how can +that be?" + +"The King Dranoa is sick even unto death. His illness hath been +hastened in its course by acts of base treachery perpetrated by +Coryon--with whom I shall deal anon. Finding himself dying and unable +to lead his soldiers to the rescue of his child, he hath abdicated +in my favour, for me to hold the post so long as I think fit in the +interests of the nation. Here (taking out from his bosom a roll of +parchment) is his sign-manual duly sealed and executed in the presence +of the High Priest Sanaima and others who are with me; and here is his +sceptre of office, and this is his signet-ring--these being given to me +by him in token of my authority, and also in the presence of Sanaima +and many others you see around me. Is it not so, friends?" Monella +demanded, turning to Sanaima and the others near. + +A loud shout went up in confirmation; then, at a wave of Monella's +hand, there was again a deep, expectant silence. + +Coryon had come out from the covered-way on hearing the unlooked-for +and unwelcome news, and now stood, a little in advance of his own +people, an attentive listener and observer of what was going on. + +"Thou hast heard," resumed Monella, in the same cold, stern tone. "I +come duly armed with authority to punish, and I have the power. Do thou +and thy fellows yonder desire to take part with the traitor Coryon, and +fight against us; or do ye disavow him and throw yourselves upon my +mercy?" + +"My lord, with all respect, I ask for the reply to my last question. +We came hither--of a certainty I and my immediate friends so came--to +protest against the king's choice of a son-in-law. We were unwilling +to have thrust upon us, as our future king, one who is of a different +race--who is a stranger in the land--and who, so far as it appeareth, +hath no claim to royal dignity. Now--with all respect, I say again--for +all we know, those same objections apply to thine own case. If, +however, I am wrong in this, and thou canst convince us that thou hast +reasonable claim to the dignity the king hath conferred upon thee, then +we are ready to submit ourselves as loyal subjects." + +"Thy logic is good," observed Monella with bitter emphasis, "for thy +present purpose; but it faileth to explain how it came about that, +instead of making known your sentiment in a petition and awaiting +the king's friendly explanation, as befitted faithful subjects, ye +supported Coryon in his treasonable acts--in kidnapping the king's +daughter and his friends. Further, ye were all proceeding, at Coryon's +mere suggestion, to put to death this stranger, without giving him +either time or opportunity to afford the information ye now profess +yourself so anxious to obtain. However, thou shalt have thy question +answered--and, that done, let me warn thee that I am in no mood to +suffer further trifling. King Dranoa's good-natured weakness, and my +own misplaced leniency, have already wrought too much misunderstanding. +Ask thy question of the lord Colenna, the king's High Chamberlain." + +Then Colenna stepped forward, and, in a loud, sonorous voice, that +resounded throughout the vast amphitheatre, cried out, + +"Know ye all, by the command of King Dranoa and the unanimous assent +of his ministers, that the great lord Mellenda, who hath been hitherto +known amongst us as Monella--which in ancient times had the same +signification as the word Mellenda--hath made himself known to his +people, and hath assumed the office of ruler of the countries of Manoa +and Myrlanda." + +At this extraordinary announcement Coryon moved back into the +covered-way with unsteady and almost tottering steps; while Monella +rose and, with another wave of the hand, signalled for silence. Turning +to Sanaima, he asked, with quiet dignity, but in a ringing voice that +all could hear, + +"And thou, august head of our religion, faithful through so many years +of persecution and despair, who dost _thou_ say I am?" + +Then Sanaima raised his hands to heaven as though to invoke a blessing, +and said, solemnly, + +"In the name of the Great Spirit whom I serve, I recognise and welcome +thee, my lord Mellenda!" + +But still Monella waved his hand for silence; and, raising his voice, +he cried, + +"Come forth, Black Coryon! I command thee! Come forth!" + +And Coryon came forward, and stood before him; but he durst not meet +his eyes. + +Monella slowly raised his arm and straightened it, pointing his finger +at his enemy. + +"And who, foul Coryon, who dost _thou_ say I am?" + +For the space of a few seconds Coryon looked his questioner in the +face. There was a brief struggle to hold his own and to repel with +proud defiance the glance Monella turned on him; then, bowing his head, +he murmured humbly, + +"Thou art my lord Mellenda!" + +Then a great shout went up. Again, and again, and yet again it was +repeated. "Mellenda! Mellenda! Mellenda!" It rang out from far and +near. It was taken up by a crowd of women and children without the +gates, and thence it travelled back and echoed from one side of the +rocky amphitheatre to the other. + +When, once more, there was silence, Galaima dropped upon one knee and +begged for clemency for himself and friends. + +"Lay down your arms, each one of you, and go!" the answer came. "Let me +not look upon your faces again yet awhile." + +Then Monella, turning to Coryon's soldiers, commanded them also to lay +down their arms and surrender themselves prisoners. + +Here Coryon showed the first signs of resistance he had yet exhibited, +and his officers, who had stood watching for a sign from him, withdrew +in a body into the entrance to the covered-way, seeing in it the best +opportunities for a last desperate fight. + +"My lord forgetteth," said Coryon, "that he hath given no assurance +that the lives of my people and servants will be spared." + +"I can make no terms with thee or with thy minions. I came here to +punish the evil-doers, as well as to save my friends," returned Monella +with grave meaning. "Thou hast been warned again and again since I came +into the land; I sent thee word that, if I came to thee, I would bring +retribution in my hand." + +"But surely," urged Coryon, in the smooth, oily manner he could put on +at will, "if we submit, my lord will require no more? Thy friends are +safe; no harm hath been done to them. May it not be that I remain here +with mine own people, within mine own domain--the domain that hath been +mine for centuries--in friendly alliance----" + +"What!" exclaimed Monella, turning wrathfully upon the crafty hypocrite +with a blaze of anger in his eyes, as might a lion turn upon a snapping +cur. "Thou darest to speak to me of _alliance_! Alliance with _thee_! +With a thing so foul, so loathsome, so detestable as thou! Shall the +eagle ally himself with the carrion crow? Enough!" He broke off, in +indignation at the insult, and, turning to the officers of his own +party who stood near, cried, + +"Seize them and bind them! Every one! Let not one escape! But take them +alive, if possible." + +A large number of the red-coated soldiers, led by their officers, now +advanced upon the crowd of Coryon's people gathered at the entrance +to the covered-way. Many of the latter came forward at once and threw +down their arms; while others stood irresolute. Coryon, himself, made +no effort to escape, and was seized by a couple of men, who quickly +bound his hands behind him. But Dakla and all Coryon's priests and +some half-dozen of his lieutenants and a few soldiers--perhaps those +who felt themselves most guilty--stood defiantly some little distance +within the gallery, determined to resist capture to the last. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + +A TERRIBLE VENGEANCE! + + +Of all the spectators of what had occurred in the amphitheatre, no +one, probably, was so utterly astonished and helplessly bewildered as +was Templemore. At Monella's assumption of the royal office he felt +no great surprise. It seemed almost a natural thing, taking all the +circumstances into account, that the king, finding his daughter stolen +away and himself too ill to pursue and punish her captors, should +delegate his authority to the man in whom he had of late reposed such +confidence. But at Colenna's announcement that in Monella he recognised +the long-expected, legendary Mellenda, Templemore was, as may be +supposed, considerably startled; and his perplexity was increased +when Sanaima, in his turn, subscribed to Colenna's declaration; but +when Coryon himself affirmed his belief in the marvellous assertion, +Templemore's ideas became so hopelessly confused, that he knew not what +to think or what to make of it. In other circumstances he would, no +doubt, have quietly settled matters in his own mind by deciding that +all present had become victims to a passing fit of madness or transient +delusion; but the grim realities of the strange drama that was being +played before him made it impossible to explain things by any such +hypothesis. + +It was in the midst of the conflict thus proceeding in his mind, that +Dakla and his fellows took up their attitude of defiance; so Templemore +promptly decided to postpone further thought upon the matter. It was +sufficient, for the moment, that there was the prospect of a fight in +which his friends would need his help; and he began handling his rifle +significantly, glancing while he did so at Monella. + +The latter had laid his hand upon his shoulder as though to stay him +until he should have had more time to study the situation, when a +rumbling noise was heard, and an iron door shot out from the inside +wall a little distance from the end of the covered-way, completely +closing it and shutting out from view the men within. So suddenly had +this been done that Dakla was almost caught by it, and would have been +jammed against the iron pillar into which it fitted, but that he had +managed to withdraw himself inside just in time to escape it. + +The impression upon the minds of those outside was that this +unlooked-for obstacle that intervened between those within the +protected gallery and their enemies, had been purposely made use of +to gain time to force open the interior gates and thus assist their +escape into the labyrinth of passages beyond. The first effect was +to dishearten those of Coryon's adherents who were still outside +in a state of indecision. Seeing themselves thus, as they thought, +incontinently abandoned by their leaders, they threw down their arms +without further ado, submitted to their captors, and, in few minutes, +were pinioned and marched out of the way. + +It now became a question what steps were to be taken to follow up those +who had so cleverly escaped, temporarily, at all events, from their +pursuers. These were, after Coryon himself, the most guilty of the +whole atrocious confederacy; and Templemore turned to Monella with a +look of inquiry. + +"What say you," said he, "shall we try whether that door is +bullet-proof?" + +But Monella again laid his hand upon the other's arm, and gazed, as +though in expectation, first at Coryon--who was standing out in the +centre of the terrace, guarded by two soldiers--and then, from him, +to that part of the covered-way nearest to the rocks that ended it. +His quick eye had noticed that Coryon seemed as much taken by surprise +as all the rest, and that there was, in his face, no trace of that +triumphant satisfaction that might have been expected if this manoeuvre +of his chief friends had been looked for. Instead, there was a fixed +look that was momentarily changing from surprise to terror. + +Templemore, following Monella's gaze, noted all this--and so did +others. A hush fell upon all present; every one looked at Coryon, and, +from him, to the length of grated iron screens, over the face of which +the branches of the fatal tree were playing with busy sweep, evidently +aware, by some unfailing instinct, that there was plenty of prey for +them within. And it was now noticed that the larger number of the +longer branches had gathered themselves upon that side. + +Gradually, the look on Coryon's face changed into one of absolute +horror, the while he stood staring at the outside of the +covered-gallery. + +To make what follows clear, it is necessary to describe this +covered-way a little more in detail. It has already been explained +that it formed the approach to an opening in the rock--closed by +gates--which was the principal entrance to Coryon's retreat. When +unprotected by the sliding gratings at the side, it was so near to +the great devil-tree that the longer branches could sweep its whole +width for some distance in front of the gates. At the side was some +masonry, above which the rock rose steep and almost over-hanging. At +the end, above the entrance, the rock rose also abruptly, and then +followed the line of the arena, shutting in the latter at this part by +a rocky wall that rose perpendicularly some fifty or sixty feet. But +the part within reach of the tree was roofed over by iron gratings, +forming a sort of verandah, which, in turn, could be rendered safe from +the terrible branches by sliding grated doors or shutters that could, +by machinery within, be moved forward in telescopic fashion along the +whole length accessible to the tree, and a short distance beyond. Thus, +when the side 'shutters' were withdrawn, the entrance-gates were very +effectually guarded by the tree itself. When they were extended, they, +in conjunction with the roof, constituted an efficient protection to +the covered-way. But herein lay also a cunningly-devised and deadly +trap; for, just within the entrance of this covered-gallery, was +another iron door that could be moved across the passage so as to +imprison any one caught between it and the gates at the other end. This +door came out of a scarcely noticeable slot in the masonry at the side; +and it was situated far enough along to place those thus caught within +reach of the tree, if the side shutters were withdrawn. + +Doubtless, many had fallen into this frightful trap. Thinking the +gallery well protected they would walk unsuspiciously along it towards +the closed gates, when those watching from within could close the +gallery behind them and open the sides; and their fate would then be +sealed. + +This was the only part of the main terrace within reach of the tree. +Round the remainder of the amphitheatre it was far removed from it, +and was of ample width. Only at this part, and upon the stone pier +that jutted out towards the tree from the centre, or down in the arena +itself, was there danger to any one moving about within the vast +enclosure. + +At a point in the cliff, high above the covered-way, was a small grated +door in the rock. This was another entrance to Coryon's fastness; but +it was sufficiently protected by the nature of the steep and narrow +path by which alone it could be reached. + +While those gathered around the enclosure, following Coryon's fixed +gaze, were watching the outside faces of the sliding doors or +shutters, these doors began to move; and, amidst a hush of awe-struck +expectation, they disclosed a gap which gradually widened, and through +which the fatal branches quickly darted. Then, from within, arose a +fearful and appalling cry, as the miserable prisoners caught in this +trap of their own contriving began to realise their situation. The +gap grew wider, and, anon, another opened farther on, and into this +the searching branches likewise entered, hungry for the prey within. +And, as the gaps grew wider, they disclosed to view an awful scene. +Some dozens of terror-stricken wretches could be seen fighting and +struggling with the writhing branches and with each other, amidst +a deafening din of screams, and shrieks, and yells; the officers +and soldiers using their swords, and the priests and others their +daggers, in a hopeless contest with the twisting branches that kept +coiling around them. In their mad struggles and desperate efforts the +combatants fought with one another, the stronger striving to push the +weaker in front of them; the latter, in turn, stabbing backwards at +those who thus tried to make use of them. Three or four, in headlong +terror, leaped from the terrace on to the ground beneath, where they +fell with dull thuds, and probably broken limbs; but, ere they could +rise, their legs were entangled in the ubiquitous branches and escape +became impossible. Dakla was seen, with a sword in one hand and a +dagger in the other, at one moment slashing furiously at the branches +that assailed him, at another striving to hold in front of him Skelda, +the next in rank to Coryon. Two of the priests were seen engaged in a +hand-to-hand struggle, apparently unmindful of the coils that gradually +encircled them and presently dragged both out, locked together, and +still frantically fighting with each other. They were carried up to the +top of the tree, and disappeared, still fighting, within the cavity. +But, though the rapacious tree had now as much as it could, for the +time, dispose of in this way, it had no intention of giving up its hold +upon the others. These it grappled in its toils, dragging them about +hither and thither, dangling them now this way and now that, but never +giving one a chance of escape--evidently bent on saving all up for +future meals--perhaps days hence. It was a gruesome scene that shocked +and sickened the spectators, for all they were so incensed, and justly +so, against the victims. + +Meanwhile, the iron door in the rock above had opened, and a woman was +seen hurrying down the dangerous path. Her hair was streaming loosely +about her shoulders, her eyes were wild and fierce, and she laughed and +gesticulated in a fashion that made those who watched her think her +crazy. She made her way to where Coryon still stood, a silent witness +of what was going on before him; and she then paused and surveyed the +awful scene with a smile that was almost devilish. + +Just then Skelda leaped out of the covered-way on to the ground +beneath; then, rising to his feet, looked round despairingly, and, +glancing up, he met the fierce gaze and cruel smile of the woman he +had so shamefully betrayed. She pointed her finger at him. + +"Ha! ha!" she cried triumphantly, "this is _my_ work, Skelda! _I_ +closed the gates and shut you all in with the outer door. My love to +you, my--_husband_!" This last word was hissed out at him between +clenched teeth. "My love to you, dear friend." And she mockingly threw +him a kiss on the tips of her fingers. Then, when the wretched Skelda's +feet were dragged from under him by a branch that had coiled round his +legs, she addressed herself to Coryon, who had now fixed his eyes upon +her, his evil face twitching convulsively with the fury he could not +suppress. + +"See, great Coryon! Mighty Coryon! All-powerful Coryon! See my +handiwork! Yes, _mine_! See what a woman's wit hath done for thy +precious friends. What a day to live to see! I saw thee in the clutch +of thy prisoner; heard thee called 'coward' to thy face. It was sweet +that; and sweet to see thy prey escape thee! And this is sweet too! +Look at thy great friend Skelda; see how he kicks and shrieks! Think of +it--all my doing! See how Dakla glares! Now he and Palana are fighting +one another! Oh, but it is a brave sight to look upon! Fit even for +the gods ye have served so well! I think I am almost avenged; but the +sweetest of all is yet to come--when I see _thee_ given to the tree, as +I _shall_!" + +Coryon struggled, but vainly, to get at her. She shrugged her shoulders +and turned her back upon him, then slowly approached Monella; the look +of triumph died away, and an expression that was partly of sorrow, and +partly of hard determination, took its place. Arrived in front of him, +she threw herself humbly on her knees. + +"My lord," she cried, with clasped hands, "I crave justice at thy +hands, I _demand_ it! In the names of the countless women and fair +children whom yonder monster hath given over to the same awful death +that hath now overtaken his own creatures; in the name of my own bitter +wrongs and sufferings, I demand that this loathsome being shall not +escape his just reward. I ask that he be given up to that tree to +which he has consigned so many; and that first he be confined in the +same cell from which I have escaped. I will lead thy officers to it. +Let him be kept there till the wicked tree, with recovered appetite, +shall be ready to devour him! Let him there endure the tortures he hath +inflicted upon me and countless others!" + +"Who art thou, daughter?" asked Monella gently. + +She shook her head mournfully and replied, much as she had to Leonard, + +"I am called Fernina, lord. Once, I was a joyous-hearted wife and +mother; but Coryon stole me away from my home to give me to his friend +Skelda. What I am now I scarcely know; misery and suffering, and shame +and infamies unutterable have made me--alas, I know not what!" + +"From my heart I pity thee, my daughter. Thy wrongs cry out for +punishment, and thy prayer is just. Show my officers the place. Coryon +_shall_ be the last meal of the accursed fetish he has fed with the +blood of so many victims." + +"I will go back by the way by which I came," Fernina answered, "and +will make safe again the covered-way; then will I open the gates, that +thine officers may take him in that way." + +By this time the covered-way was empty; every occupant had been +dragged or had leaped out and was held in the toils below. There was, +therefore, nothing to prevent its being used again. Fernina went up the +path and disappeared from view; then soon the sliding shutters were +seen to move back in their places; and, shortly after, she appeared at +one end of the covered-way and beckoned to those in charge of Coryon +to follow her. He was led down and placed in the same cell she had +occupied, and there shut in and left to himself, and to look out, if +he chose, at his friends in the tree's tenacious arms outside. Some of +them were so close he could have spoken with them. + +After Coryon had been removed, Sanaima turned to Monella; then raised +his hands and eyes towards heaven. + +"Let us thank the Great Spirit," said he solemnly, "that hath, at last, +delivered our enemies into our hands, and that without the loss of a +life, or so much as a wound upon our side!" + +And Monella added a heartfelt "Amen." + +"Of a truth," he added reverently, "the wicked have been caught to-day +in their own snare. At last, we may truly rejoice that the curse hath +been removed, for ever, from the fair land of Manoa. But this is a +fearful sight; let us hasten from it. But ere we do, Sanaima, send +kindly and trustworthy people to care for the poor woman Fernina and +the other women and children who are somewhere within. I cannot now +stay longer; I must look after the princess and return to the palace." + +"I will remain and look to them myself," answered Sanaima. "Now that +the Great Spirit hath at last given them into my charge, it is a trust +that belongeth to me, and to me alone." + +During the foregoing events, several messengers had passed to and fro +delivering messages, in low tones, to Monella or some of his officers, +and speeding away again with their replies, or upon other errands. In +this way Monella had learned that the princess had recovered from her +long swoon and expressed a strong desire to return to the palace to her +father, and he had sent back word to Leonard to accompany her. + +When, therefore, Templemore, with Monella and many more, reached the +great gates on leaving the amphitheatre, they found Ulama and all those +with her gone, and they now hastened to the palace after them. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + +'THE SON OF APALANO!' + + +On leaving the amphitheatre, Monella and his followers formed a long +and imposing procession. Only a few had been left behind to guard the +prisoners. These last were immured in cells pointed out by Fernina, +who was well acquainted with the interior arrangements of Coryon's +retreat. For within the rocks was an almost endless series of passages +and galleries opening, at the further end, on to an extensive hanging +terrace on the very face of the great precipice that formed one end of +Roraima's perpendicular sides. Even those of Coryon's followers who +had gone over secretly to Monella, were only partially acquainted with +the interior of this fastness; hence Fernina's assistance was found of +great use by Sanaima and those who remained with him. + +It can scarcely be said that the procession, as it left the great +gates of the amphitheatre, exhibited, at first, many signs of having +just been engaged in a victorious and successful expedition. Those +who formed it were, for the most part, silent and preoccupied; for +the scenes they had witnessed--and that, as they knew, were still in +progress--were of too horrible a character to be readily dismissed +from the mind. But, as they proceeded on their way, they met and were +joined by fresh bands of red-coated sympathisers; and these, not having +the same reasons for repressing their elation at the result of the +day's proceedings, broke out into cheering as they passed the groups of +people who were now coming out to meet them. For messengers had gone +on in advance to tell the news, and the crowds who had been waiting +so anxiously in the city, soon learned that Coryon's downfall was an +accomplished fact. They had already heard the good tidings of the +rescue of the princess and her lover and friends, and were only waiting +for this last crowning announcement; when it came, they became almost +delirious with joy, and soon poured out to meet the victors and give +them an enthusiastic welcome. + +Thus the procession that started so quietly--almost in sadness, as it +seemed--from the dismal amphitheatre, became at last, as it entered +the city, a veritable triumphal pageant, meeting on all sides, and +returning, cheers and shouts of joy and exultation. And when Monella, +with Templemore, Colenna, and others came into view in the centre of +the long array, every head was uncovered and every knee bent. Then, +when he had passed, the excited crowds rose and shouted again louder +than ever. And well might they do so; for they--and only they--knew the +full meaning of the horrors from which they had that day been delivered. + +By the time they had neared the king's palace, the crowd had grown so +dense that it was with some difficulty that space was cleared for the +passage of the principal persons into the building. At the entrance, +under the great archway, Leonard, looking pale and anxious, awaited +them. Running forward to meet Monella, he said, + +"I have heard the news and congratulate you all. But I am in sore +distress about the princess. We had much ado to bring her here, and I +fear she is very ill. Let me entreat you to go and see her at once, +and then let me know what you think about her." + +"Certainly will I, my son," replied Monella kindly, and hurried away; +while Leonard turned and greeted Templemore and the others with +him. Then they all entered the palace and went up one of the great +staircases and on to a terrace overlooking the open space where the +crowd was assembled, and there awaited Monella's return. + +Presently he came to them. + +"The princess is weak and much depressed," he said, "and will require +care for awhile; but I see no cause for anxiety. Naturally, the poor +child is terribly upset. She grieves, too, about the condition of the +king her father, and wishes to help nurse him, but this she has not +strength for at present. Patience, my son. Be patient and of good +heart." He looked with pity and concern at Leonard's haggard face +with its hollow, dark-ringed eyes and its worn-out look. "You have +suffered--cruelly--I can see," he added, placing his hand gently on the +young man's shoulder. "You have been sorely tried." + +"Ah!" returned Leonard with a heavy sigh. "You cannot imagine what I +have been through! My thoughts still dwell upon the horror of it; my +eyes still see the sights I gazed upon! I feel as though I shall never +be my old self again. And Ulama! Though I do not yet know how much she +saw or knew, I sadly believe she shares my feelings." + +"You are both worn out--exhausted, my son. Wait but a space--while I +speak to the crowd and dismiss them--and then I will give you a cordial +and refreshment; after that you must lie down and have a long sleep." + +"I fear even to sleep," said Leonard, shaking his head sadly. "I dread +the thought of sleep, for I know but too well what my dreams will be." + +"Nay, my son, have no fear. I will promise you dreamless, restful +sleep," Monella answered, and moved away to the front of the terrace. + +At the sight of his commanding form and upraised hand the shouts and +noise and all the subdued roar that till now had been continuous were +hushed. Then, as with one accord, all uncovered and fell upon their +knees. He spoke a few brief words and then dismissed them, pointing out +that his friends were in need of rest and quiet. + +The crowd, in respectful obedience, quietly dispersed, and Monella, +motioning Elwood and Templemore to follow him, led them into his +private apartments and there mixed and administered to both certain +drinks that had an immediate and wonderfully revivifying effect. These +potions had also the advantage of stimulating their appetites, so +that they were the better enabled to take the nourishment he pressed +upon them. Then he accompanied them to their sleeping chambers and +bade them lie down and take the repose they so sorely needed. None +of the three had had any sleep or rest--for Leonard's swoon in his +cell and subsequent state of torpor could scarcely be so called--for +the past two nights. The two young men were not only worn out, but in +that excited state in which the brain seems to insist upon going over +and over and over again the events of the previous troubled time, in +that ceaseless, monotonous whirl that makes all efforts at sleep so +useless. But Monella--who alone showed no sign of the strain all had +undergone--sat down by the side of each in succession for a short time, +and talked to him in his low, musical tones. What he talked of, or +what he did, neither could afterwards remember; but the effect was +magical. As Leonard afterwards expressed it, a soothing, delicious +sense of drowsy rest crept over his senses; a rest that was not sleep, +for he could still hear the usual sounds around, but gradually growing +hushed and muffled. Then came a sensation as of being lifted and wafted +away by a gentle wind; and in the sighing of the breeze there seemed +a delightful strain of music, a dreamy lullaby that carried with it a +restful peace sinking imperceptibly into untroubled repose. + +The strangest thing, perhaps, is that even the unimpressionable +Templemore was affected in the same way, as he afterwards admitted. Nor +was that all; for, on awaking, he was conscious of having had the most +delicious dreams, though he could not quite recall their subject. For +some time he lay in a state of blissful ease, striving to recollect +the dream that had left sensations so delicious, and afraid to rouse +himself for fear the remembrance should vanish altogether. He could +hear the usual sounds going on in the palace, the tramp of armed men, +and clashing and jingling of arms; but he was only half-conscious of +them. Then he heard his name called in tones that seemed to come from +the far distance, and, opening his eyes, he saw Monella standing beside +his couch and regarding him with a grave smile. + +"Wake up, my friend," he said. "It is time you roused yourself. I +wish to have some talk with you and Leonard. You have slept for +eight-and-forty hours!" + +Templemore sat up and rubbed his eyes. + +"I feel as if I had slept for months," he answered in a half-dazed way. +"And I've had such curious dreams, or visions; I feel quite sorry to be +awake again. It's a strange thing for _me_ to talk like that, I know," +he added with hesitation. + +"What did you dream of?" asked Leonard, who had entered in time to hear +the other's concluding words. + +"That's the strange part of it," returned Templemore, looking perplexed +and somewhat sheepish. "I've had a most extraordinary dream of some +kind, or a vision or something--_that_ I know, yet I cannot remember +what it was. All I can now tell you is that it was something so +extremely pleasant that it has left the most agreeable sensations +behind it. My very blood seems in a warm, delicious glow from it. What +can it be?" he added, looking in a bewildered way from one to the other. + +But Monella made no comment, and went away. + +"It's been just the same with me," said Leonard, in a low voice, that +had an expression almost of awe in it. "Monella woke me about half an +hour ago and I felt much like what you have described." + +"It's very odd," Templemore returned thoughtfully. "It must be the +drink he gave us. Do you remember what Harry Lorien said of him? That +he believed Monella was a magician? I begin to think him a wizard +myself. But, dear boy, how much better you look!" + +"So do you, Jack; and he tells me Ulama is the same--and it's all his +doing, you know. He _is_ a wizard; and that's all there is to be said +about it." + +"The question is," Jack went on, "what was it he gave us? Here it has +made us sleep nearly forty-eight hours; and it seems, has done us, in +that time, as much good as one would have thought would have taken +a week or two to accomplish, and yet it has left no dull, drowsy, +listless feeling, such as opiates generally do. I can't make it out." +And, shaking his head gravely, Templemore went to take his morning +plunge. + +When they sought Monella, he bade Leonard give him the particulars of +all that had occurred to him. Leonard recounted them. + +"It seemed very terrible to me," he said when he had finished, "at the +time; and truly I thought I should never get over it. Yet--now--it +seems such a long while ago--so far off." + +"That is well, my son," returned Monella. "For it has been a sore +trial. I have heard about _you_," he continued, turning to Templemore, +"from the lady Zonella and from Ergalon." + +"I owe a great debt to her--to him--to both," Templemore replied. +"Without their aid I fear things would have gone badly with Leonard, +and myself too." + +"Yes, Coryon had ably laid his treacherous schemes, and we all have +reason to be thankful for their failure," said Monella solemnly. +"Things came to a crisis just then. I had just matured certain plans +that Sanaima and I had laid out; and only the day before my long-lost +memory returned to me, and I remembered, all in a flash, as it were, +the whole of my former life." + +"That you were--that is--are----" Templemore began; but stopped and +looked confused. + +"Yes, that I am indeed Mellenda," was the reply, given with an air of +grave conviction. "I know the statement sounds incredible to you; you +are of that nature, have been brought up in that kind of school, that +makes such a thing sound impossible. But if _I_ myself feel and know +that it is true, and if my people around me know it and not only admit +it but rejoice in it, then, for me, that is sufficient." + +"Certainly," Templemore assented, feeling very uncomfortable under the +other's gaze. + +"Still--to you--let me be, while you remain here, simply what I have +been before--your friend Monella. I am the same being to-day that you +have known and, I hope, liked--that you have joined with in facing +danger and adventure--I am the same! The mere fact that I remember +things now that I had forgotten before makes no difference to me or to +our friendship." + +This was said with a look of such kind regard that Templemore felt his +own heart swell with responsive feeling. It was true he had a strong +inclination to regard the other as a sincere, but self-deceiving +mystic; but, apart from that--apart from this strange delusion, as he +deemed it, about Monella's being the legendary Mellenda--Templemore +looked upon him with feelings of the greatest admiration, affection, +and respect. And he had never been so conscious of those feelings as at +this moment. He took the hand that the other extended to him, and bent +his head respectfully. + +"Sir," said he in a low tone, "no son could respect and reverence a +beloved and honoured father more than I do you. No one could feel +prouder of the love and esteem you have been kind enough to show me; no +people, I feel satisfied, could have a worthier, a more disinterested, +or exalted ruler. If I find it difficult to realise the marvel that +you have related, if I have the idea that, perhaps, you are mistaking +your own dreams for actual realities, it is not from any doubt of your +sincerity or veracity--only that in that way alone can I bring myself +to explain the wonder." + +"And I, on my side, respect the honesty that will not allow you to +pretend what you cannot feel," was the reply. "To you let me be simply +Monella, and let us continue on our old terms of mutual friendship and +esteem. And now I am going to rouse your wonder and surprise with yet +one other unexpected statement. Your friend Leonard here is not the +son of the parents he has all his life supposed himself to be." + +Leonard sprang up with an exclamation. + +"I will explain how. You have already told us"--this to Leonard--"how +that your supposed father and mother, with yourself, and your Indian +nurse, once stayed some time with a strange people in a secluded valley +among the peaks of the Andes. I was not there at the time, but they +were my people." + +"Your people!" Leonard repeated with astonishment. + +"Yes, my son, my people! Apalano, and two or three others of whom you +have heard me speak--all, alas, now dead! I was informed of your visit +when I next came back to them, for a while, from my wanderings. I heard +of it and what had happened; how Apalano's little child--his only +one--had been killed by a venomous serpent." + +"The child of Apalano!" Leonard repeated in amaze. + +"The two children," Monella continued--"Mr. Elwood's child and +Apalano's--were wonderfully alike, and your nurse, the Indian woman +Carenna, was very fond of both, and was in the habit of taking them +out together. She was out with them thus one day, and left them +both sleeping in the shade of a clump of trees while she went a few +yards away to gather some fruit. She returned (so she says) in a few +minutes; then, thinking one of the children had a strange look she +picked it up in alarm; at the same moment a serpent glided out from +under its clothes and went away, hissing, into the wood. But the +child was dead; and it was the child of the Englishman. Then Carenna, +frantic with grief, and afraid to tell the truth to her master and +mistress, exchanged the clothes and ornaments of the children. The +trick succeeded; for the dead infant was swollen and discoloured; and +Apalano mourned the death of his only child, when it went away, in +reality, with the strangers and their Indian nurse." + +"Then," said Leonard excitedly, "I am----" + +"Ranelda, son of my well-beloved friend! Ah," said Monella, sadly, "it +was a cruel thing to do. It preyed upon the mind of my friend, and, I +truly believe, brought on the fatal sickness. But for that he might +have lived, haply, to see at last the land of his fathers--might have +been one of us here to-day." + +Leonard felt the tears come into his eyes at the picture called up by +this suggestion; and he said in a low tone, + +"Alas! My poor father! It was cruel--very cruel!" + +"It seems so," Monella returned with a sigh. "But God so willed +it. And He has also willed that you should be led back to your own +nation--that, after many days, you should join with me in the work that +I had set myself." + +"It's very wonderful. Yet it seems to me to explain those strange +dreams and visions that were ever urging me on to attempt the +exploration of the mysterious Roraima! I suppose, when Carenna found +out who you were, she confessed?" + +"Well," answered Monella, with a half-smile, "I made her do so. People +find it difficult to hide anything from me. I saw she had some secret, +and compelled her to divulge it. But, since she was so afraid to +confess to others, and especially averse to _your_ knowing it, I made +her this promise, that, if you desired to return from our adventure, +you should do so in ignorance of the actual facts. I was only to tell +you in case you freely elected to stay here permanently. That is why I +have kept it back thus far. I had intended to announce it to you and to +the people at the time of your public betrothal. Then they would have +received you, with one accord, as one having a right to rule over them. +And now you can understand why I have regarded you with such affection +from the first; and how glad I was to find, in Apalano's son, one so +worthy of my love and confidence. Your father was allied with my line, +and you are, therefore, akin to me. Worthy son of a worthy father! Let +me join with you in thankfulness that you have, after all, come into +the heritage that is yours by right! The young eagle was bound to find +its way to the eyrie for which it was best fitted." And Monella stood +up and laid his hand affectionately upon the young man's shoulder. +Leonard reverently bowed his head, and the other pressed his lips upon +his forehead. + +There was silence for some seconds. Then Templemore took Leonard's hand. + +"And let me too congratulate you, Leonard," he said fervently. "It is +good news for you--this; for, since you have elected to pass here the +remainder of your life, it will be a great comfort and advantage to you +that you have such good claims and qualifications for the position." + +"I am thinking about my poor father who died of heartache and +disappointment," rejoined Leonard; and in his tone there was a note of +genuine sorrow. "And I can scarcely forgive Carenna--fond of me as I +know her to have always been--for her cruelty to him." + +Presently Templemore turned again to Monella, saying, + +"Did Carenna then believe this mountain was inhabited, that you would +find here the people you came to seek? Did you yourself think that?" + +"As to myself, I can scarcely tell you," was the answer. "'Reason' +said that the hope of finding here the people of whom Apalano had so +often talked to me--for that was all I then knew--was chimerical; yet +Apalano's dying wishes, and some strange sentiment or instinct within +me, urged me on. Then, when I met with Carenna, I found she quite +thought it might turn out true." + +"Carenna thought it?" + +"Why, yes; but that is not very surprising, for, according to the +Indian ideas, it would not be the only instance in this country. There +is a belief amongst the Indians in several parts that some of the +unexplored mountains are inhabited by strange and unknown races. This +applies to those--and there are many; Roraima is not the only one--that +are surrounded by the curious belts of almost impenetrable forest. The +Indians believe that, if these forests could be passed, strange peoples +would be met with living on the mountains thus encircled; and they say +that on clear nights the lights from their fires may often be seen.[10] +Therefore Carenna was quite prepared to believe we might find Roraima +inhabited." + + [10] Mr. Im Thurn, referring to this belief amongst the Indians, + states that he has himself seen, from a distance, strange lights + on the Canakoo Mountains for which he was quite unable to + account. See 'Among the Indians of British Guiana,' p. 384. + +"I see. Then she, at least, will not have been so very much surprised +at our not returning, and may not have given us up for dead?" + +"Yes; that is probable enough." + +"And if she has heard of the signal flares we made when some +Indians--as I suppose they were--were camping in sight of the mountain, +she would look upon that as a sign of our being up here alive?" + +"I think that is very likely." + +"There is the suggestion of a little comfort in that," said Templemore; +"for, otherwise, those I left behind, and who are dear to me, must have +given up all hope and be now mourning me as dead. With Leonard it is +different. He stood alone in the world and has no one to grieve for him +more than as an ordinary friend." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + +THE TREE'S LAST MEAL. + + +"And now," said Monella, "I have some other news to give you; for you +have slept for nearly two days, and in that time much has been done. +While you slept we have been busy." + +"Do you _never_ sleep--yourself?" Templemore asked. + +"Yes; but not for long at a time. However, the long rest you have taken +is no reproach to you, for it was my doing. I saw that it was needful +to restore your strength and good spirits. You are the better for it; +the princess, the lady Zonella, and others have also had long rests and +are the better for it, as I have already told Leonard. The king Dranoa, +too, is better--in a sense; for he has now no mental trouble, and with +his sickness there is no physical pain nor suffering nor distress of +any kind. But he is very wishful now that the marriage of his daughter +should take place as soon as possible; for only then, he feels, will he +be able to die happily. In deference to his earnest wish I have settled +for it to be solemnised at the end of a fortnight; and, in view of the +fact that the state of his health cannot but be a source of sadness to +his people, I have deemed it better to order that it shall be a quiet +ceremonial, and not a great _fête_, as had been planned. This will not +offend your feelings, my son?" + +Leonard looked up with a bright smile. + +"After what you have told me," he said, "I feel, with gladness and +gratitude that it is not without reason that you have so often thus +addressed me--as your son. _Now_, I may indeed claim you as a father." + +"You may indeed," Monella assented; "I take the place of my lost +friend." + +"Then you have no need to ask whether what you think best pleases _me_. +If you will be my father, choose for me and instruct me; for I feel +I have need of your help to enable me to take up, and bear worthily, +the position I owe to you. I felt this," continued Leonard, with great +earnestness--"I felt this very strongly when I lay in that foul den +that the poor demented wretch called 'the devil-tree's larder.' I made +then a vow that, if it should please God to deliver me from the peril +that threatened me, I would thenceforth devote my life to the good +of the people I had come amongst. I repented sorely that I had given +my thoughts too much to selfish--albeit innocent--enjoyment; and I +vowed I would not be guilty of that selfishness in the future, if the +chance and the choice were offered to me. And now that they _are_, help +me--instruct me, my father, I pray you, in all that may enable me to +fulfil that vow." + +Monella gazed long and fixedly at the young man; and in his eyes there +was a glistening as of a tear. Then he rose and went to the window that +looked out over the lake, and stood awhile, with a far-off vacant look +that told his thoughts were wandering to distant scenes or persons. It +was some time before he looked round. + +And, when he again turned to speak to the young men, they were both +conscious that some indefinable change had taken place in his manner. +His face expressed unmistakably a great and exalted joy; and the eyes, +that at all times had had so strange a charm in them, had taken on +a new expression. For a little while Templemore strove in vain to +ascertain in what the change consisted; but presently it seemed to him +that they had lost that half-sad, half-wistful expression he had so +constantly remarked; and that they now conveyed, instead, a sense of +contentment and repose. + +"That which you have now told to me," said Monella, walking slowly up +to Leonard, "is as sweet to me as water to the thirsty in the desert." +With grave deliberation he placed both hands upon the young man's +shoulders and looked into his eyes with fatherly affection. + +"Know, my son Leonard--or rather Ranelda, as you rightly should be +called--know that in these words you bring to my soul the message it +has been awaiting--sometimes in hope, too often, alas! in doubt and in +despair--through the long ages. Yours is the hand--the hand of the son +of Apalano--that bears to me the key of my fetters; and yours are the +lips that announce my coming freedom! My work, then, nears its end, and +soon--ay, _soon_--I--shall--be--_free_!" + +While uttering these last words Monella raised his hand, and with +upturned face looked rapturously above him, as if his sight, piercing +the marble ceiling overhead, perceived some far-off scene that, while +invisible to his companions, filled him with the most intense delight. +Presently, he turned away with a regretful sigh, as though the vision +he had been gazing at had vanished, and added, with an absent manner, + +"Now, when I leave you, I shall feel----" + +He stopped; in his eyes there was a far-off look; and Leonard, who +had been looking on with wide-open, wondering eyes that comprehended +little, if anything, of his discourse, exclaimed in anxious tones, + +"Leave me--leave us! What mean you, my father? You surely do not think +of leaving the people you so love, to become again a wanderer?" + +Monella shook his head; and, appearing to rouse himself, he replied in +quite a different voice, + +"You misunderstand, my son; I speak of when I shall be called +away--called from this earthly life." + +"But that will not be for a long, a very long time yet," urged Leonard, +looking with confidence at the stalwart frame, and remembering the many +feats of strength the other had performed. + +Monella turned his eyes on Templemore. + +"Do you remember," he asked, smiling, "a conversation we had one day in +the museum; when I explained to you that no 'Plant of Life' or other +specific--no power, indeed, of earth--can keep in its earthly cage the +soul that feels its work is done, and that, therefore, frets itself +against its prison bars?" + +"I remember," answered Templemore in a subdued tone, and avoiding +Leonard's questioning eyes. + +"Ah! then _you_ understand me. And now"--this with a gesture that +enforced obedience--"now let us go back to that which we were speaking +of. I was saying that King Dranoa desires that you and Ulama should be +wedded without delay. To spare the feelings of the maiden, and give +her time, so that the matter may not come upon her too suddenly, I +have named a day two weeks hence. There will be no pageant, no public +_fête_; only the necessary ceremony, quiet and solemn." + +"I should prefer it so," murmured Leonard. + +"Then that is arranged; and it will take place in the great Temple of +the White Priests that has been closed for so many years. Workmen are +engaged upon it, and it is now being cleansed and renovated. It will be +ready in time. + +"The next thing I have to tell you is that Coryon has suffered his +punishment, and is dead." + +"Coryon dead?" the other two exclaimed in a breath. + +"He is dead," Monella repeated solemnly. "It seems that during the +night after we left, there were dreadful scenes in the amphitheatre. +Those large reptiles--they are called 'myrgolams' here--came out of +their pool and attacked the half-dead wretches entangled in the tree. +But the branches tried hard to retain their victims, and so--well, +you can almost imagine what took place. The creatures carried off the +miserable beings in scraps; tore them piece by piece from the clutches +of the branches till nothing was left!" + +He paused for a moment, and his listeners shuddered. + +"Thus it came about that the greedy tree was, after all, baulked of +most of its intended victims; all, indeed, save three or four; though +the deaths the others met with were not less horrible. Yesterday, +finding the monster had no victims in its grasp, I ordered the +separating door to be withdrawn. In a moment, Coryon was seized and +carried up into its awful gorge. With that, the tale of this terrible +tree must end. I have no heart to devote more criminals to it; though +there are some among the prisoners who are scarcely less guilty than +was Coryon. But these Sanaima will deal with; he will punish them as +seems best to him; and I have set men to work to dig a mine from one +of the cells so as to get underneath the tree. Then it can be blown up +with gunpowder. And I designed to ask you to superintend the work for +me," turning to Templemore. + +"That I will gladly do. And--the--reptiles?" Templemore was doubtful of +the name. + +"Kill them off, if you can, with bullets. And now, to turn to your own +affairs. Think not I have forgotten them; I know you are anxious and +will be getting restless and unhappy. As I said to you before, when +you go away, you will not go empty-handed. On the contrary, you will +carry with you such riches as will place you beyond the need of toil +for the remainder of your life. I need not say, 'Do not therefore be +an idle man,' for I know that you will never be. Whenever it pleases +you to go, some of my people shall escort you through the wood to +'Monella Lodge,' as we called it, and there await you while you go on +to Daranato and bring back such Indians as you require. Then, do you, +in turn, with your Indians, re-escort my people to the cavern; for, you +must remember, they are not used to forest life; nor can they, if left +alone, protect themselves against wild animals. Will that please you?" + +"Yes, truly it is all I can ask or wish for," Templemore responded. + +"I shall wish to know--that is, all here will wish to know," said +Monella, "that you get back in safety to 'Monella Lodge.' With the +heliograph mirror which you will find packed away at 'Monella Lodge' +you can send us back a message to that effect; then, with the one we +brought here with us, we can reply, and send you a 'God speed you' to +start you on your way. Shall it be so arranged?" + +"Gladly," responded Templemore with emotion. "But must I then resign +myself to the thought that I shall never see Leonard or any of you any +more?" + +"You must," Monella answered quietly, but firmly. "Leonard--or Ranelda, +as I prefer to call him--has asked me to guide him and instruct him; +and my first and last advice to him is, and will be, to keep his +people to themselves. Now let us consider this question from what you +yourself would term a practical point of view. The term 'El Dorado' +has come to be a synonym in the outside world for a sort of earthly +paradise, has it not? Originally handed down from actual facts and +history relating to this, the celebrated island capital of Manoa--the +Queen City of my once powerful and extensive empire--with the tales of +its wonderful wealth and the virtues of the Plant of Life; its memory +lingered through the ages long after the waters had receded and left +it isolated and unknown. And the Spaniards called it 'El Dorado,' +which has ever since been but another expression--as I have said--for +'Earthly Paradise,' or 'summit of every man's ambition.' Is it not so? +And seeing that the great curse that so long lay upon the land has been +removed, can you say that _now_ it does not deserve the term? Have we +not here a veritable 'Earthly Paradise'--an actual realisation of what +you in the outside world understand when you use the expression 'El +Dorado?'" + +"Truly I believe it." + +"Ah yes! It is so now--or will be henceforth, when those who have +had such sorrows here shall have outlived them," said Monella with +impressive emphasis. "But what I would put to you, is this; you have, +perhaps, seen something of frontier settlements, or miners' camps, +and gold diggings--at least, _I_ have--and you have heard of them. +Now, you know well enough that the only people who would care to brave +the hardships of the journey hither would be those led on by the lust +and greed of gold. Supposing things were reversed, and you were in +Leonard's place, and had here your wife--as he will have--your friends, +your own people--all that was dearest in the world, with ample wealth, +would you care to allow him, or any one else, to lead people hither, to +turn this 'El Dorado' into a 'Gold diggings,' a 'Miners' camp,' with +all their hideous associations, their gambling and drunkenness; their +rowdyism and their debauchery, their shootings and murders?" + +"No!" said Templemore thoughtfully, "you are right there. Still--surely, +between that, and forbidding intercourse altogether--forbidding me even +to come to visit my friend----" + +Monella smiled and gravely shook his head. + +"You think that, between the two extremes, there should be some middle +course possible," he rejoined. "Unfortunately--or fortunately--there +is none. _You_ will have no need to come here seeking for wealth. +You would not be likely to undertake the expedition alone. Those who +accompanied you would do so from self-seeking motives. Then, again, +you will have other ties; you will have your wife, children. You do +not contemplate dragging them hither through trackless wastes to greet +friends _they_ have never known as you have? They would not like it, +again, if you, a man of wealth, able to do as you pleased, were to +leave them for a long space while you made the journey hither alone! +And, finally, the thing is not practical or feasible for another +reason. You will have much ado to find your way out from here. You know +that in these regions vegetation spreads rapidly unless--as in the +canyon we came up, or in the clearing immediately outside around the +cavern by which we entered, or out on the savanna--there are special +causes that check its spread. Should you come back in a year's time, +you would not only find the road we cut out impassable--you could not +even trace it. The spread of the undergrowth, the fall of great trees +or branches, the hurling down of rocks from the heights above, floods +from the streams and watercourses--all these, and other forces of +nature in this wild region, will, within a few months, have combined +to block up or obliterate completely the path we cut with so much +difficulty. Is it not so?" + +"I fear you are right, though it had not occurred to me," Templemore +admitted with reluctance. + +"Then, again, with the wealth you will take back with you, you will not +care to remain in Georgetown. You will wish to travel with your wife; +in any case, it would be years before you would be likely to think of +undertaking another journey." + +"If ever you _do_, though, dear old Jack," Leonard burst in +impulsively, "if ever circumstances should arise to make you wish to +communicate with me, you can always do so by the heliograph, you know, +or perhaps by balloon, if I'm still alive." + +But, though Leonard put on a cheerful tone, it was easy to see that +both he and his friend felt deeply the severance that too clearly lay +before them. Yet, after Monella's argument, they saw no alternative. + +"I am as sorry as you can be," Monella wound up kindly; "but your +duties call you away from us, even as Leonard's call upon him to stay. +And now I must leave you, for many are waiting to see me. First, +however"--this to Leonard--"I will lead you to the princess." + +Leonard followed him from the apartment into another, where Monella +left him; and presently Ulama entered, looking radiant, lovely, +beautiful--so Leonard thought--beyond belief. + +At the sight of Leonard, she threw herself upon him with a joyous cry; +with her face upon his shoulder, she sobbed and laughed by turns. + +"Oh, my darling! my darling!" she murmured in gentle accents, "if you +only knew how _glad_ I am to see you! I've had such dreams--dreams +about you--dreams that frightened me so! They _were_ only dreams, were +they not?" + +She looked up anxiously, and fixed her glorious eyes upon his face, and +closely scanned it. Then she gave a sigh, the token of relief, and once +more she nestled her face upon his shoulder. + +"Yes!" she said softly, "after all 'twas but a dream! For you look +well, and your eyes are bright and happy-looking; and in my dream +you were looking _dreadful_! Your poor face looked so thin, and so +_different_, and your eyes so sunken, and they had dark rings around +them, and oh! their terrible, despairing look! But it was only a dream, +or you could not look well again so soon, as now you do. Yes, 'twas +but a dream, my darling! But oh! an _awful_ dream. I thought there was +a great tree--like that you said you saw one day; and it was a tree +that fed on human beings, and you were lying bound and they were going +to give you to that dreadful tree! Oh, Leonard, my love, think what +a dream that was for me! Think, for a moment, what I felt! And there +were other dreadful, awful things!" She shivered and cried softly for a +space. + +"Yes, my darling," Leonard answered soothingly. "But, as you say, 'twas +but a dream!" + +"Ah, yes! And now it seems far off; for, after it, came other dreams, +that were happy and delightful, so that the bad one receded ever +farther. Just when I seemed even at the very point of death from +horror, a cool hand pressed tenderly on my brow, and brought me peace. +It seemed to cool the fever that had made me think my very brain would +burst; and a voice said--oh _so_ kindly--'Be at rest, my daughter, I +bring thee peace, and surcease of thy sorrow.' Then I opened my eyes +and saw a strange form leaning over me. It was dressed in a warrior +dress, just like that which stands in our museum and which is called +Mellenda's. Helmet, sword, everything the same. Then I felt secure and +happy, for I thought the great Mellenda had come to deliver me in my +trouble. But--and this seems so strange--when I looked up at his face, +who do you think he was? Ah! you would never guess! But the countenance +was Monella's--your friend Monella's! Was not my dream a strange one?" + +"Strange, indeed, my dear one," said Leonard tenderly. + +"From that moment," went on Ulama, "everything was changed, everything +was _lovely_. It seemed to me that _you_ then came to me, and led me +from that scene of horror. Where we went I know not; but, hand in hand, +we wandered on, till you led me home. Then once more things became +confused--I can scarcely remember--but I'm nearly sure Mellenda seemed +to come to me again. And--yes--I remember, he repeated, 'Rest, my +child; I bring thee rest and peace.' Then he left me, and we wandered +on--you and I, my Leonard--through the loveliest, the most entrancing +scenes; among places, people, strange to me, yet all delightful; and, +oh, it all seemed _so_ sweet, so restful, so grateful, after the horror +of that first awful dream! At last I wakened, and they tell me I have +slept through two whole nights and nearly two whole days! Did you not +wonder that you saw me not the while? Tell me how you have passed your +time without me?" + +And thus the gentle, loving girl talked on with childlike innocence, +Leonard at first evading her inquiries, averse to mar her happiness by +telling her the truth. + +Indeed, it was not for some days, and then only by degrees and +carefully guarded words, that he revealed the truth about her 'dreams.' + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + +THE LAST OF THE GREAT DEVIL-TREE. + + +Templemore did not find the occupation of directing the operations +for destroying the great devil-tree a very agreeable or engrossing +one. His memories of the amphitheatre filled him with disgust and +loathing both of the place and of the vegetable monster it contained, +and he never went near them without reluctance; for all that, he stuck +conscientiously to the task now that he had undertaken it. But there +was neither excitement nor interest in it to keep his thoughts engaged, +and to prevent their brooding upon his desire to get back to those +dear to him. Now that everything was settling down peacefully in the +land, and there was nothing specially to keep him, he felt he was not +justified in prolonging further unduly his friends' suspense. He saw +comparatively little, too, of Leonard, who was continually engaged with +Monella and others in councils and consultations that naturally had +little interest for Templemore; though, no doubt, they would have been +glad enough of his company and assistance in their deliberations, had +he chosen to offer them. + +As a consequence, he wandered about a good deal alone; and took to +haunting the spot from which he and Leonard had made their signal +flares, and whence he could, with his glasses, just distinguish +'Monella Lodge' and the adjacent open country. Here he would sit by +the hour together, wistfully gazing out over the vast panorama spread +beneath him, and moodily watching for the slightest sign of life in the +far distance. Sometimes 'Nea,' the puma, offered herself as a companion +in his walks; at such times, when he went to the amphitheatre, he was +always in some concern to keep her out of the reach of the fatal tree, +lest she should meet the fate that had befallen her unfortunate mate. + +It had been arranged that he would wait till Leonard's marriage, since +it was so near. But he had determined not to delay his going more +than two days beyond it; and he now awaited the event with something +akin to impatience. At the same time, he knew that the journey back +to Georgetown would be anything but easy or agreeable. It had been +arduous, difficult, wearisome, and dangerous enough on the way up, when +he had the company of Leonard with his exhaustless boyish enthusiasm. +What would it be like, he asked himself, going all that weary road +again alone, for he would be alone in the sense of being the only +white man amongst a number of Indians. Then again, he must return +with very little to show for all the time, and trouble, and danger +he had incurred. Monella, it was true, promised him 'wealth'--and no +doubt would keep his promise in the form of a selection of precious +stones. _They_ were numerous and comparatively cheap in the country; +so Templemore had no scruples about accepting such a present. And, +when he reached Georgetown, they would mean wealth. That was all +satisfactory enough; but there was much, very much more he would have +liked to carry away with him; things of much less intrinsic value, but +of greater scientific interest. Of these there were more than could +be catalogued in a few lines; vessels of gold and silver; wonderful +antique jewellery, specimens of their armour, swords, etc., were +some; dress-fabrics also; an endless number of curious botanical and +zoological specimens, for others--these form only the beginning of a +long list of things he had in his mind, and would have liked to carry +with him. But well he knew the impossibility; the difficulties of +transport were insurmountable. In a country where it was difficult to +get carriers even for the bare food required, it was obviously useless +to dream of carrying back with him a 'collection' such as he would have +wished to take. + +There was natural disappointment in all this. It is hard for an +explorer to face danger, hardship, discomfort; to separate himself +from civilisation and from those he loves, and to risk illness, fever, +wounds and death, and then, having achieved success, to have to resign +himself to returning without those trophies he would have delighted in +exhibiting to an astonished and wondering world. But just, perhaps, +when he had convinced himself, by dwelling morbidly upon such thoughts, +that he had good cause for dissatisfaction, his good nature would +assert itself and remind him of the other side to the picture. Was it a +little matter to take back with him wealth enough to make his mother's +future secure and comfortable; to marry the girl of his heart, and to +be henceforth a man of means and affluence? And if his part in the +expedition ended in such result, had he any just cause for complaint? +Did he not rather owe a debt of gratitude to those who had urged him +on, in spite of his own scepticism, to share in their enterprise? At +this thought a rush of gratitude would come into Templemore's mind; +then he would torment himself in turn, with misgivings as to whether +he was not guilty of ingratitude in now feeling impatient to get away +from--to leave for ever--the friends who had thrown such good fortune +in his way. + +And thus Jack Templemore felt anything but happy in the days that +preceded Leonard's marriage. And, of course, he was in love, and felt +home-sick; so, perhaps, it is not much to be wondered at that he was +restless and changeable and ill at ease. + +Yet, had he been in a different mood, his stay in the place might now +have been very enjoyable, and of surpassing interest. He was free to go +where he liked and do as he pleased. The people were not only friendly +and willing and anxious to please, but showed pride and pleasure, if he +but spoke to them. The story of the rescue of Leonard and the princess +had been noised abroad and told and re-told over and over again, and +the part that Templemore had taken in it was well known. Then, again, +it had also now become known who Leonard really was; and the people +felt that what Templemore had done for his friend had been done for +them, inasmuch as it had saved for them the life of one who was of +their own nation and whom they now valued highly. Thus Templemore was +regarded as a hero, second only to Monella (or Mellenda). The people +were quite ready to credit him with qualities he did not possess; +for was he not the close and trusted friend of their own great hero? +If Mellenda had chosen this one from all the people of the outside +world--for they knew by this time that there _was_ a great world, +outside their mountains, peopled with white races--must it not have +been for some very good reason? Must he not be a great man, a hero, a +wonder, for the great Mellenda to have chosen him as his friend and +companion on his return to Manoa? + +Thus reasoned the simple-hearted people; and, since it was also known +that he was going away from them for ever--going back to the outer +world that was his home--it created a sort of mystery about him. Must +he not be some very great man in that world that could not spare him +even to stay and enjoy the friendship and favour of their own great +hero-king? + +So they regarded him with an interest and curiosity almost amounting +to awe. Mothers would bring out their children to look at him as he +passed, bidding them remember, for the remainder of their lives, that +they had once seen the wonderful stranger, the great friend of their +own great hero. + +Meanwhile, Ulama had given herself up zealously to joining with Leonard +in the work he had set himself among the people. She had been gently +and tactfully told the story of all that had occurred; she knew now +that her 'bad dream' had been only too true. The knowledge cast for a +while its shadow upon her fair face, and she seemed to lose some of her +childish gaiety and to become more staid under its influence. But it +also called into play all the womanly tenderness and sympathy of her +nature. When she heard of unhappy women and children needing care and +comforting, she eagerly desired to assist in the work in company with +Leonard and Sanaima; and thenceforth she devoted to it all the time she +could spare from attendance upon her ailing father. + +Amongst those in constant attendance on the princess might now be +seen Fernina. She had been brought to the palace by Sanaima, who had +discovered that her husband was no longer living. The meeting between +her and Leonard was affecting; he presented her to Ulama and commended +the poor woman to her kindness. Ulama knew now the particulars of the +terrible time the two had passed together in the dread cells within +reach of the great tree, and received her with a heart filled with +compassion. Fernina's gratitude and pride at the kindliness of her +reception were such that they went far to assuage her sorrows. Her two +children also were well cared for, and, by degrees, the old look of +dull misery in her face gave place to a softer expression that promised +to bring back, in a measure, her former beauty. It was understood that +Fernina would in the future take Zonella's place; for it had been +announced that the latter would shortly be married to Ergalon. + +One day Templemore informed Monella that the mine had been completed, +that he had placed the cask of gunpowder in position, and laid a fuse. + +"And the reptiles?" asked Monella. + +"I have left them alone--and for a reason. It seems to me they are +inclined to attack the tree; have done so, in fact. They are getting +hungry and have nothing else to attack, and, being well penned in, they +are beginning to feed on the only thing within their reach. After all, +the 'flesh'--if one may so term it--of a 'flesh-eating' tree may quite +possibly form an acceptable food for these ugly reptiles when they are +starving. If, when we have blown it up--or down--they are disposed to +devour it and so clear it out of the way, it may save some trouble." + +Then a day was fixed for firing the mine, and a large crowd of the +citizens assembled to witness the destruction of their enemy; but many, +whose memories of the place were sad, remained away. + +When the explosion took place, a long tongue of flame shot up into the +air with a thunderous roar, the great tree seemed lifted bodily up, +swayed, and then fell with a mighty crash full length on the ground, +disclosing a rent in the trunk from which a thick, noisome stream of +dark-coloured fluid slowly flowed. This gave off an odour so offensive +and over-powering that none could stay in the enclosure; so the crowd +quickly dispersed, with loud expressions of wonderment and admiration +at all that they had seen. But Templemore remained long enough to see, +from a distance, that the foul reptiles had approached the tree, and +were greedily drinking up the liquid that flowed from the wound in +the trunk. And, visiting the place next day, he found that they had +torn the rent still further open, and were busily tearing the trunk +to pieces, the branches now showing but feeble signs of life. In +the end they fulfilled his expectations and devoured every scrap of +the monster. Thus ended the existence of the terrible, horror-laden +devil-tree! + + * * * * * + +It was shortly after he had completed the destruction of the hated +tree that Templemore made a discovery that filled him with grave +uneasiness. He was wandering about among the heights that lay at one +end of the canyon--that immediately over the entrance-cavern--when +he found himself amongst huge blocks which had been quarried out (as +Monella had one day mentioned) with the idea of precipitating them into +the canyon to block it up impenetrably. On examining the quarry from +which they had been taken, he observed with alarm that some masses of +overhanging rock seemed almost on the point of giving way. A sort of +partial landslip had already taken place, and there were fresh-looking +cracks and fissures that threatened shortly to loosen the overhanging +masses and set them free to fall into the canyon below. He spoke to +Monella about this, and he at once accompanied him to the spot, and his +opinion confirmed his own. This made Templemore busy himself in earnest +with his preparations for departure; for he feared that, if these rocks +actually fell, the entrance to the cavern might be so blocked up as to +take long and arduous labour to clear it. + +It being now within a day or two of Leonard's marriage this was all he +could do in the matter. But Monella sent men down the canyon in charge +of Ergalon--since the latter now knew the road--to carry in advance and +deposit in the cavern some of the things Templemore desired to take +with him. They returned on the eve of the wedding, Ergalon stating that +all they had taken down had been duly stored as desired, ready for +Templemore when he went down. + +That evening King Dranoa was much better and insisted on presiding at +the evening meal. He even hoped, he said, to be able to be present at +the wedding. Ulama's joy at this, and the sweet delight that lighted +up her face, were alone enough to infuse happiness into those around +her. She looked at Templemore, too, and smiled and nodded her head in +a mysterious way that roused his curiosity; and, later, an explanation +came. + +At the very end of the repast a mysterious-looking dish or tray, whose +contents were hidden by a golden cover, was brought in with a good +deal of ceremony and was placed before the king. Then Ulama glanced +shyly at Templemore and clapped her hands. At this the king lifted the +cover, and displayed to view--not some new eatables, as Templemore +had anticipated, but--a beautifully fashioned belt, and several +exquisitely-worked purses that all sparkled and flashed with the little +diamonds and other stones that were worked in patterns into the silken +netting. And, when Templemore looked inquiringly at Leonard, that young +man only smiled and nodded mysteriously like the others. + +Then King Dranoa thus addressed him: + +"My friend, thou hast already heard, I believe, that we do not purpose +to allow thee to depart hence without begging thine acceptance of some +little testimony of our appreciation of what thou hast done for us. I +say we, for all here--all in the land indeed--are deeply in thy debt. +Without thy courageous help and unselfish devotion my dear daughter +would not now be here happy and joyous as she is to-night, and my +kinsman and son-in-law that is to be would, I fear, only too probably +have met a dreadful fate. Therefore, we have all joined in subscribing +to these presents, of which we beg thy acceptance. The princess hath +worked this belt, and inside it are some of her own chosen jewels that +thou hast often seen her wear. The lady Zonella, and others of her +maidens, have worked these purses--they are for thy friends--and we +have all contributed to their contents. I know naught about thy world +outside, but understand that what is in these satchels will be of far +greater value to thee, and those dear to thee, than to us here. I truly +hope it may be so; else I should hesitate to offer them, as being but +a poor return for what thou hast done for us. If, however, they can +purchase for thee, in the future, any surcease of toil, of trouble, +of anxiety, then, and only from that point of view, may they be worth +the offering. Take them, my friend; and may the blessing of the Great +Spirit go with them, and accompany thy footsteps throughout thy life." + +Then Ulama took the belt and poured out its contents upon the tray--a +magnificent, glittering heap of superb precious stones. Then she +emptied each purse in turn, making other sparkling but smaller heaps. +And each purse had a little label with a name to it; and Templemore +looked on in wonder as the contents of each were revealed and the names +read out by Leonard. There were three large purses, one for his mother, +one for Maud, and one for Stella. Smaller ones for Mr. and Robert +Kingsford, Dr. Lorien and his son; and two, still smaller, for Carenna +and Matava. No one had been forgotten. + +Templemore looked from the one to the other, his heart filled with +emotion. Even more than the overwhelming value of the jewels, he felt +the loving-kindness that had thus taken thought and trouble for those +dear to him. + +"But--Dr. Lorien and Harry--and--the others----" he said, hesitating. +"I don't see----" + +"The good doctor," Monella explained, "will be sorely disappointed +that he cannot come to see us and take back to the world some of +the botanical rarities we have here, and which, to him, would be +great treasures. These are to console him. As to the others of your +friends--this is the least we can do to show our regret for the sorrow +and anxiety they will have borne on your behalf, through us. That is +all." + +For some minutes Templemore was silent. + +"It is too much--a great deal too much!" he got out presently. "I don't +know what to say----" + +"Then say nothing, dear friend," Ulama interposed, with a merry laugh. +"Now let me put them back and show you how they all fit nicely into the +belt. You see, while you were working for us at that horrid old tree, +we had not forgotten you. Keep the belt always for my sake, and think +of us all lovingly in the future, as we always shall of you. Now I want +you to take me out on the terrace." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + +A MARRIAGE AND A PARTING. + + +In the ancient Temple of the White Priests Leonard and Ulama were +solemnly made man and wife according to the custom of the country. King +Dranoa was able to be present at the ceremony, and nearly the whole +population may be said to have assisted, for they thronged in crowds to +the great building where in ages past their kings had all been married; +though comparatively few of the populace could find room inside the +Temple. The remainder filled all the surrounding open spaces, and +waited patiently to greet the bride and bridegroom on their way back to +the palace. + +Templemore had a place of honour in the assemblage, and watched the +function with curious interest. Sanaima, with an array of white-robed +priests; Monella, with his commanding form, conspicuous by his noble +bearing; the beautiful Ulama, all suffused with blushes; and her +handsome bridegroom; the kindly, dignified Dranoa, looking weak +and pale, yet well-pleased and content; and the brilliant crowd of +spectators, officers in gleaming armour, and courtiers in gorgeous +dresses--all combined to form a noble pageant. The building, whose +interior Templemore now for the first time saw, was a magnificent +structure, and helped to add grandeur to the imposing spectacle. + +At the conclusion of the ceremony, the procession, on its way back to +the palace, was greeted with excited and enthusiastic cheers and cries +that seemed almost loud enough to shake the towering buildings past +which it slowly filed. + +In the evening there were general feastings and rejoicings. These were +continued till the night was far advanced; and it was morning ere the +city again subsided unto rest. + +The following day, Templemore was busy completing his preparations, +and going round to bid farewell to those he knew. But, towards the +afternoon, he was surprised to see a large crowd outside the palace; +and still more astonished on learning that the people were gathered +in his honour. The good-hearted citizens, it appeared, liked not the +notion of his going away without some public mark of the esteem in +which they held him; so, somewhat against his will, he was called out +on to the terrace that overlooked the place in which the people had +assembled. Monella, Ulama, Leonard, and all the members of the court +and of the king's household, stepped out with him; and the first two +each took him by the hand, and led him to a spot where all could see +him. Then a great shout went up, and he was cheered again and yet +again, till the strange feelings called up by the unexpected warmth of +the welcome he received made him go red and white by turns. + +"They have come for a sight of you, and a word of farewell ere you +leave us," explained Monella. "Will you not give them a few words?" + +Templemore was unused to oratory, and he would fain have excused +himself; but he saw that to do so would disappoint his friends. So he +made them a short speech, assuring them of his appreciation of their +friendly feelings. + +"The unexpected warmth and kindness you have shown in thus coming here +to-day," he said, "I shall always gratefully remember. If, in company +with the friends who led me hither, I have done aught that seems to you +to call for commendation, I will only ask you, in return, to keep for +me a tender corner in your memories when I have left you. If, when I +have gone, you will but think as kindly of me as I shall of you, then +indeed I shall be well repaid." + +Then Monella addressed them in his sonorous tones. + +"My children, I am well pleased that ye should have thus gathered here +to-day, and of your own accord, to show to my friend that you are not +unmindful of his part in the events of the past few months. I am glad +and proud that he should receive, before he leaves us, this proof that +my people are not ungrateful to one who hath done so much for them. +A great work hath been accomplished in the land since we three, as +strangers to you all, arrived some months ago. At the last, its prompt +completion was due in no small measure to your quick response to my +urgent call, at a time when hours were precious--and even moments. +When I left you in the times long past, I sailed away with fleets and +armies; when returning I was a simple wanderer. Yet ye gathered gladly +at my summons, and no voice was raised to question my authority. This +was well, and helped me to achieve success; yet might we have been too +late to save the well-beloved of your princess had not our friend here +kept all Coryon's vile following at bay till we could come to aid him. +If the dread devil-tree exists, to-day, no more, and all the wickedness +and cruelty that went with it have been trampled out for ever, if now +your minds are all at peace, and your daughters and your other dear +ones are secure--ye owe much of this to our friend's ready courage and +devotion; and I am rejoiced to see that ye have not forgotten it! + +"Now will my friend know that he bears away with him the love and the +good wishes of us all. We wish him all happiness in his future life; +our sole regret is that he cannot stay and spend that life with us." + +At this there were shouts and roars of applause, and other tokens of +assent. + +"And now, my children," went on the speaker, "I have somewhat else to +say to you. The ancient Temple of the Great Spirit is once more open; +see that ye neglect not to there offer up your thanks for the blessing +that hath been vouchsafed you. Give heed to the teachings of the worthy +Sanaima. See that ye take to your hearts the precepts that he will +expound to you. So shall the good work that I have begun be continued +and consummated after I shall have left you." + +Loud murmurs of surprise and objection were here heard. + +"Nay, let not that which I have said arouse your grief, my children. +Remember my long life and weary wanderings to and fro upon the earth; +these have been a punishment to me, even as events, during this same +time, have been to you. Ye would not wish to keep me here when I tell +you that my task is done, and my tired soul is seeking rest--rest not +to be found on earth, but only in the great domain beyond the skies. +I may not linger here now that the work that I was sent to do is +finished. I have freed you from the curse that did oppress you; have +brought you one to govern you who combines within himself the blood +both of your ancient White Priests and of our kings; and in Sanaima ye +have a wise counsellor and guide. Seek not then to stay me; when the +Great Spirit calleth, weep not and repine not, for then is the hour of +my deliverance. Then shall I be united, at the last, to my well-beloved +queen, my Elmonta, and my children that have gone before!" + +When Monella ended, he raised his hands and face towards heaven, and +stood gazing upwards like one inspired. His face seemed transfigured +and was lighted up as by a thrilling joy; and, as on the occasion of +his talk in the palace with Templemore and Leonard a few days before, +he appeared to see something invisible to those around him, but the +sight of which filled him with supreme content. Then he dropped his +arms, looked around him as though he had just awaked from sleep, and, +with bent head and tardy steps, walked silently away. + +Ulama caught Templemore by the arm. + +"Oh, do you think it can be true--what he says?" she exclaimed in +anxious tones, almost a sob. "It cannot be that we are about to lose +him? Do you think so?" + +"Nay, I see no cause to apprehend it," was Templemore's reply. "Our +friend seems as robust and as strong as a man can wish." + +"Yes! So think I, and yet--he has spoken in this strange fashion +several times of late. His words fill me with foreboding." + +She looked at Templemore with such sorrow in her gentle eyes that +he scarcely knew what to say to comfort her. And just then he was +obliged to leave her to return the salutes of the people, who were now +separating and returning to their homes or their various callings. + +The next morning, shortly after sunrise, Templemore stood at the top of +the hillside, not far from the entrance of the canyon--the spot from +which he had first seen the 'Golden City'--looking his last upon the +fair scene outspread beneath, and saying the last words of farewell to +his friends. Once more the people had assembled to do him honour, and +they now crowded the slopes on every side. + +Already some of the little party who were to accompany him to 'Monella +Lodge' had started and were on their way down the canyon, and Ergalon, +under whose charge they were, stood waiting for Jack Templemore. +The latter was surrounded by a little group, of whom the chief were +Leonard, Ulama, and Zonella, who seemed as if they could not make up +their minds to let him go. Monella, his arms folded, stood apart, +gravely looking, first at the group, and then out over the landscape +with dreamy eyes, his noble figure, outlined against the dark foliage, +the centre of a half-circle of officers and courtiers who stood +respectfully a short distance from him. Templemore was dressed in the +same clothes he had worn on his arrival; beneath them he had buckled +on the precious belt with the jewels it contained; his rifle was slung +across his shoulder. + +Amongst those around were to be seen Colenna and his son, Abla, and +others who had been amongst Templemore's first friends; and all +showed by their demeanour genuine sorrow at the parting. As a last +and special gift--one more token of his remembrance of his boyhood's +friend--Leonard had that morning handed to Templemore a deed of gift +making over all his property in the 'outer world' to Maud Kingsford. + +"It is nothing to give, since it is no longer of any use to me," he +observed, with a quiet smile. "But, since I _must_ convey it to some +one, let it be a dowry for Maud in addition to the purse the others +send." + +It would be difficult to say how many 'last hand-shakes' were given, +or how many times Ulama, with tear-dimmed eyes, pleaded for 'a minute +longer--just a minute,' Zonella, with sorrow in her looks, seeming +mutely to second the appeal. But the parting came at last, and, amid +loud huzzas, and the waving of hands and scarves, and other tokens of +good will, Templemore turned away and, with Ergalon, disappeared into +the thicket. + +Little was said by either as they made their way down the rough path, +and, even when they rested in the shade of the half-way cave, neither +seemed disposed for talk. Almost in silence they ate the refreshments +with which the forethought of their friends had loaded them, and drank +cool draughts from the rocky shallows of the stream. + +Suddenly, while they sat within the cave, waiting for the sun to move +so far that the path should be in shade, a heavy booming detonation +like the firing of cannon burst upon their astonished ears; and they +started up together and stood listening anxiously. + +"What on earth can that be?" exclaimed Templemore. + +Ergalon gravely shook his head. + +"Falling rock, I think," he answered. "If so, it must be farther down +the canyon." + +"Let us hasten," cried the other, a vision rising before his eyes of +the entrance-cavern blocked, and his being forced to return. "This is +what I have been fearing." + +Despite the sun, he started off at a rapid pace down the path, Ergalon +following and striving, as well as he could, to keep up with the +other's impetuous movements. During the remainder of the descent +they heard two or three other similar noises; and at each of these +Templemore hurried on still faster. + +When they reached the bottom, they came upon the little party who had +preceded them; they were standing in doubt and alarm, looking along +the valley, which was already partially blocked by fallen rocks, while +more continued to fall at intervals, crashing on to those already +fallen and sending up clouds of dust. With the group, looking on at the +scene in a sort of mild surprise, stood 'Nea' the puma. + +"The stars be praised," Ergalon exclaimed, relieved, "it's all at the +other end." + +"What do you mean?" asked Templemore in surprise. + +"Why, the rocks have not fallen near your cave," was the reply. "All is +clear there," and he pointed to the hidden cave. + +Then there were explanations, and, to Templemore's dismay, it now +appeared that Ergalon had mistaken his instructions and placed all the +things in the wrong place. He was not really to blame in the matter; +for he only knew of the one cave--that to which he had accompanied +Templemore when they had come down to fetch the spare weapons. He knew +nothing of any other cavern, and Templemore had not remembered this. + +The situation was a trying and terribly disappointing one, and +Templemore found himself in a grave dilemma. If he hesitated, it was +plain his way would soon be totally barred. If he went on, and risked +being crushed by the falling rocks, he must go alone; leave behind him +everything he had intended to take with him, save what he had on his +person, and make up his mind to face the dangers of the gloomy forest +by himself! Even now it was almost folly to risk death or serious +injury by making for the cavern. + +Templemore hesitated, the while that more boulders came crashing down. +Then he thought of what it would mean for him were he to be shut up +in the mountain for an indefinite period. He looked up keenly and saw +enough of what was going on to grasp the fact that the whole sides of +the canyon were crumbling and falling in, and it looked a sufficient +quantity to make it likely that the reopening of the road would be a +work of years. As that conviction dawned upon him, with a brief word +of farewell he dashed away from the group, and, despite their startled +endeavours to stay him and the entreaties they called after him, he ran +swiftly along the valley towards the entrance-cavern. After him bounded +the faithful puma; he had no time to give to the attempting to send her +back, and the two went rapidly on, dodging the great masses that now +crashed down faster than before. A massive boulder rolling down seemed +about to crush them, but they escaped it and disappeared in a cloud of +dust from the view of the spellbound witnesses of their hazardous race. + +Just when they reached the cavern a great stone pitched upon one +already fallen and, splitting into several pieces, sent heavy fragments +flying around in all directions, like an exploding bomb-shell. One of +these fragments struck Templemore in the back, smashing his rifle, and +throwing him, stunned and bruised, upon the floor of the cavern. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. + +JUST IN TIME! + + +At sunrise, one morning, a fortnight after the events recorded in the +last chapter, a party of travellers, consisting of three white men +and a number of Indians, set out from the Indian village of Daranato, +making their way in the direction of Roraima. + +The three white men were Dr. Lorien, his son Harry, and Robert +Kingsford; and among the Indians was Matava. As they toiled along the +rough path it was easy to see that the travellers were, for the most +part, travel-worn and weary; they moved forward in a half-listless +fashion, scarcely looking to right or left, and showing but little +interest in the scenes that lay along their route. Only when they came +to the ridge from which the first view of Roraima is to be obtained +did any of the party exhibit curiosity. Here a halt was made, and they +all gazed for some time silently at the great mass that raised itself +high above the surrounding landscape. This morning, clouds hung over +it and it appeared sombre, dark and threatening, and gave no sign of +the fairy-like lightness and beauty it sometimes assumed when seen from +this same spot. + +Robert Kingsford had come up from the coast, in the company of the +doctor and his son, bent upon solving, if possible, the mystery +that surrounded the fate of the two friends who had left Georgetown, +nearly nine months before, to join with an unknown stranger in the +exploration of Roraima. All that had since been heard of them was the +strange, almost fantastic account that had been brought back by Matava, +according to which they had actually found a way into the mountain, and +thenceforth had disappeared. The very entrance by which they had made +their way through the solid wall of cliff had been afterwards found +fast sealed; and no trace or clue to their fate had been left behind. +This had been Matava's account, and he had not hesitated to express his +belief that the three adventurers had been captured by the demons of +the mountain, and either eaten up then and there, or kept as prisoners +and slaves in durance vile. + +This story, however, did not satisfy the minds of the others, and +Robert Kingsford, seeing and compassionating the deep sorrow of +Templemore's widowed mother, and the still more passionate grief of +his own sister Maud, determined to investigate matters for himself. +Dr. Lorien was detained longer in Rio than he had expected; but, when +at last he returned to Georgetown, he readily joined the other in the +proposed expedition of inquiry. + +They had a very arduous and difficult journey up from the coast. It +happened to be a season of exceptional drought, and cassava, and food +of all kinds, were extremely scarce. The sun had been unusually fierce, +and the heat abnormal; hence, by the time they reached Daranato, even +the sturdy and seasoned doctor--a very veteran in tropical travel--was +nearly worn out; while the other two were in still worse plight. + +Add to these trials the fact that they had little, if any, hope of +succeeding in their quest, and felt, in reality, that the expedition +was, at best, but a sort of forlorn hope; and it will be understood why +they had started from Daranato dispirited and depressed. + +Thus, when they obtained their first view of the mysterious mountain, +the cause of all their trouble, they were not inclined to regard it +with any very friendly feelings; and its gloomy, forbidding look this +morning was reflected, so to speak, in their own minds. "There is our +enemy," they felt. "There is the fascinating, sinister chimera that +has bewitched, and lured away from us, our dear friends, and caused us +all this anxiety and useless trouble." And so, as Roraima frowned upon +them, they frowned back, and returned in kind its gloomy and unfriendly +greeting. + +But frowns and angry looks could do them no good; so the travellers, +with a very few words of comment, continued their route towards +'Monella Lodge,' where they arrived towards evening. + +Here, a mile or so from the 'haunted wood,' and almost, as it seemed +to them, under the very shadow of the mighty towering walls, they +set about making arrangements for a stay of several days. They found +everything in the cabin much as Matava had led them to expect; the +place, indeed, just as Templemore had left it at his last visit. Many +things had been left there that the travellers now found useful, and +that seemed veritable luxuries after the discomforts of their long +journey. + +Kingsford's thoughts were intent upon his missing friends; and, indeed, +this was also the case in only a slightly less degree with the other +two. All were oppressed with vague suspicions of the Indians, even of +Matava. Might these not have murdered the three travellers for the sake +of the things they had with them--articles and stores which would +be as priceless treasures to Indians; therefore which might quite +conceivably have offered a temptation too great to be resisted? + +However, amongst the tribe at the village, they had seen no signs of +'white men's' belongings to any unusual extent; and, now that they saw +what a number of things had been left undisturbed in 'Monella Lodge,' +their suspicions were very considerably lightened. For all that, they +found it difficult to believe implicitly the fantastic tale Matava had +told about the three adventurers' disappearance. + +The Indians gathered wood and lighted fires, while the white men made +a careful and interested inspection of the contents of the habitation +and its surroundings (the two llamas had been removed to the village, +where, however, they had both since died). Inside, they found a lamp +and a small cask still partly full of oil, which was a discovery they +appreciated when it grew dark. + +After their evening meal, the three friends sat for some time smoking +their pipes and discussing the strange situation in which they found +themselves. They were now within reach of their journey's end. If the +tale told by Matava were correct, and the road through the forest were +still fairly clear, they ought to be able to reach the mysterious +cavern the next day; when they were determined, if requisite, to blow +open the entrance with gunpowder. In addition to that which they had +brought with them, they had found a considerable quantity at 'Monella +Lodge.' This surprised them; for in this country gunpowder is more +valued by Indians than almost anything else. + +The three friends were sitting talking, and were thinking of retiring +to rest for the night, when Matava came rushing excitedly into the +place. + +"Come quickly, my masters," he exclaimed. "Come! Come and see the light +on the mountain!" + +Somewhat languidly those addressed rose and went out. They had so often +heard the usual stories of lights seen at night on unexplored mountains +that they attached but little importance to them. They had treated +in like manner a statement by Carenna and Matava that some Indians, +camping out on the savanna a few months before, had seen strange and +unusually bright lights, that they took to be signals, on Roraima's +summit. The Indians had been scared and broke up their encampment at +once, fearing the lights might have been placed there to lure them into +the power of the demons of the mountain. + +When, however, the doctor stepped outside, and looked up towards the +top of the stupendous precipice, he saw a brilliant flame that had all +the appearance of a signal beacon. + +"It doesn't look like a forest fire," he said to Kingsford, while they +were examining it carefully through their field-glasses. "And now and +then I almost fancy I can make out human forms passing in front of it." + +The others had the same impression, and Harry Lorien declared he could +see flashes of light, as though the beings round the fire were dressed +in clothes, or carried something, that reflected the firelight. + +"Let us try burning a little powder," the doctor suggested, "after the +fashion Matava says was arranged between him and the others, but which +they never carried out." + +So they sent Matava for the powder, and told him to fire it in the +manner that had been settled between him and Monella. It is true none +of the three messages agreed upon would be applicable to the present +occasion--but that they could not help. + +Presently, three tongues of flame leaped up into the air, then suddenly +died out, leaving those around temporarily half-blinded by the glare. +Then they stood for some time anxiously watching through their glasses. + +What seemed a long interval ensued; when, suddenly, three brilliant +gleams flashed out on Roraima's height, in exact imitation, as to the +intervals between the flashes, of the signals they had themselves made. + +"Try another," Doctor Lorien cried, in growing excitement. "Arrange the +three differently this time." + +This was done, and the answering flashes came back, again in exact +imitation; and this time with scarcely any delay. + +Doctor Lorien seized Kingsford by the hand. + +"Heaven be praised for this!" he exclaimed, his voice half-choked with +emotion. "It begins to look, indeed, as though Matava's account were +true; as if our dear friends may be alive after all!" + +Words cannot describe the delight with which the travel-worn party +hailed these signs, that so unmistakably pointed to the conclusion +suggested in the doctor's words. There was one thing, certainly, they +could not understand; none of the signals agreed upon between Monella +and Matava had been given from the mountain; but they were inclined to +attribute this to Matava's having, after the lapse of time, forgotten +or mixed up what had been arranged. Only the thought that their +supply of powder was not unlimited restrained them from continuing +the signalling; but they were reluctantly compelled, as a matter of +prudence, to discontinue it. + +"Now," said the doctor, "we can attack the 'haunted wood' with a good +heart. Surely, our friends will come down to meet us, now that they +know we are here!" + +Before daylight they were all astir, and set off at once on the +journey through the forest, Matava guiding them. The road, or track, +was followed with difficulty, and was almost blocked at times. Only an +Indian's instinct, indeed, could have made it out. In places the rough +temporary bridges that had been made over water-courses had been washed +away, but, the water being very low from the long-continued drought, +this caused no serious difficulty. They met with some adventures by the +way, which were, however, suggestive of the dangers that lay around +them rather than important in themselves. At last, towards evening, +Matava told the doctor they were getting near the cavern. And now he +begged him to proceed with caution. He could not get over the fear that +the 'demons of the mountain' had eaten up or captured their friends, +and were now awaiting more victims whom they had lured on by imitating +and answering the signals of their murdered friends. + +This theory did not find much favour with the doctor; for all that he +so far yielded to the entreaties of the Indian as to send him on to +scout in advance, while he, and the others of the party, walked in +silence behind. And, since Matava now moved with especial care, they +made slow progress. + +As it happened, however, Matava's caution was in a measure justified; +for just when they came to the part where there was an opening in the +trees, and they could see ahead of them the light that came down into +the clearing round the cavern, Matava stopped and raised his hand. + +All stood still, except the doctor, who moved up to the Indian's side +and looked whither he was pointing. + +For a moment or so he could see nothing to account for the other's +behaviour. To the right the stream that came out of the rock was now +plainly in sight; and ahead of them was the clearing. The entrance +to the cavern was as yet hidden by intervening trunks, but the +light-coloured rock could be seen between the trees. Matava slowly +raised his rifle and took a careful aim; then, as though dissatisfied, +he lowered the weapon and stood with up-lifted hand enjoining silence +upon those behind him. To make sure, he turned round and, with many +gestures, impressed upon them all to keep motionless and silent; then, +having satisfied himself that they understood and would obey his signs, +he faced round and again raised his rifle. + +And now, Doctor Lorien, following the line of the Indian's aim, +became conscious of a slight movement among the trees in front of +them. Presently--the Indian still waiting his opportunity to fire--he +saw that a great hanging mass was swaying to and fro, passing and +re-passing the space between the trunks of two trees. At first he +thought it was a large mass of hanging creeper, but, remembering that +there was no wind to cause the movement, he looked more closely and saw +that it was the head and part of the body of a gigantic serpent that +was depending from a branch above. Suddenly, Matava's rifle rang out, +and a moment after an enormous mass fell to the ground and writhed and +twisted about in horrible contortions. + +Then a loud, hoarse roar was heard, echoing through the forest. The +startled travellers looked about on every side, but could see nothing +to explain the sound; then it came again and again, while the colossal +folds in front of them, half hidden by the trees, continued to rise +and fall, lashing against the trees and shrubs with blows that seemed +almost to shake the ground. + +Matava advanced and fired other shots into the struggling monster; +then, watching his opportunity, made a rush and dexterously cut off +the creature's head with a blow of his axe. + +And now, looking towards the rock, they saw the 'window' entrance to +the cavern, and the head of the big puma from which had proceeded the +loud roars they had heard; and by the side of the puma was a pallid, +thin, haggard face that they had some difficulty in recognising as Jack +Templemore's! + +"You have come only just in time," he said, in a weak voice, with +a poor attempt at a smile, when the doctor had come near. "We were +almost done for; at least, I know I am. I scarcely know whether I have +strength enough to get the ladder out for you." + +They tied two lassoes together and threw one end in; this he fastened +to the ladder, and, thus assisted, it was got out. Immediately the +puma sprang down it and disappeared into the forest. Then the doctor, +followed by Kingsford and Harry, climbed up and entered the cavern, to +find Templemore lying on the floor unconscious. + +He was suffering from a sprained ankle and a badly bruised arm, and was +exhausted from want of food. It was some time before he could explain +matters to his rescuers; and they, meantime, were anxiously wondering +at finding him thus alone, with no sign about of his two friends. When +he had briefly accounted for their absence, he told how he had been +kept prisoner for more than a week by the great serpent that, all that +time, had relentlessly watched and waited outside. But, apart from +this, he could scarcely have got through the wood in his crippled state. + +"Still," he said, "but for that serpent, 'Nea,' the puma, would have +brought in some fresh meat. As it is, I have had to share with her even +the small amount of tinned food we happened to have left here." + +The flying pieces of rock that had injured him had broken his rifle; +and he had only a few cartridges for his revolver. + +"It's all been unfortunate," he said. "They put all the things in the +wrong cave, and, when I came to myself after my desperate race between +the falling rocks, I was in darkness and the puma was licking my hands +and face. With much difficulty I found my way to the front here and +pulled the stone away; then found a lantern and some oil, and got a +light. The entrance to the canyon I found was all dark--buried--and +I could still hear rumblings as of further falls of rock; but they +sounded distant. I imagine, therefore, that the valley must be buried +pretty deep. I set about making myself as comfortable as I could; and, +when I put the ladder out, 'Puss,' as I call her, went out hunting +while I bathed my ankle and arm. Several days she went out and brought +in something pretty regularly, and I thought I should be able to nurse +myself up and get well enough to struggle through the wood alone. But, +one morning, she refused to go out; that day I had a visit from a pack +of 'Warracaba tigers'; another time when she stayed in, looking out +myself, I saw that awful serpent hanging from a bough; and there it +has been day and night ever since; 'Puss' refusing to venture forth. I +fired all my cartridges, except two, at it without any effect. It kept +ceaselessly swaying its head about, and my arm pained me and my hand +trembled; and, unless you can put a bullet through its head, it's of no +use firing at a creature like that, you know. If my rifle had been all +right, the thing would have been easy enough. I kept two cartridges in +reserve--one for poor 'Puss' and the other for myself--and I think you +came only just about in time to save us both." And Jack's voice shook, +and he felt a choking sensation in his throat. It was clear he had +given up hope and had been making up his mind to face death alone. + +Robert Kingsford's gratification and delight in the fact that his +journey had, after all, turned out to be the means of rescuing his +friend, the lover of his sister, may be imagined. Nor were the others +less pleased; only the good doctor's satisfaction was clouded by +his inability to get out into the wonderful valley to obtain any of +the botanical treasures that lay so near at hand. But his chagrin +disappeared when Templemore, as some consolation, showed him the purse +of gems that had been sent to him. + +"We'll give up orchid-collecting after this, lad!" he exclaimed to +his son. "No need to wear out my old bones any longer in toilsome +wanderings, when we've got enough to live on comfortably without." + +Presently, 'Puss' came back with a wild pig, and great was the +rejoicing over the meal that followed. + +Then all, save Templemore--who could only look on from the window--went +out to examine the reptile monster they had killed and to gaze in +astonishment at its huge proportions. The Indians had already begun +to skin it, but had not finished the operation when the time came for +making their preparations to pass the night. + +These were complete--the four white men sleeping in the cavern and the +Indians bivouacking outside--when strange cries were heard echoing +through the forest. Instantly there was a great stir among the Indians. +With one accord they started up, exclaiming, "The tigers! The tigers +are coming!" Forgetting their fear of the 'demons' cavern,' they cried +out piteously for the ladder to be put out for them; and no sooner was +this done than they scrambled up it with all speed into the cave, and +pulled it in after them. + +In reply to the amazed inquiries of the others, Matava explained that +they had recognised the distant trumpetings of 'Warracaba tigers,' +those fierce animals that nothing--not even fires--can stay or keep at +bay. Soon, in fact, the animals could be heard on all sides around the +cavern, though but little could be seen of them in the darkness. Their +growls and roars and squeals were answered by hoarse roars of defiance +from the puma that were deafening as they reverberated through the +galleries of the cavern. Outside, the 'tigers' made frantic efforts +to leap up and get in at the window, while those within had much ado +to keep the puma from leaping out amongst them. They also fired a few +shots at them, but in the darkness--for the fires had burned low--they +were fired at random. + +"Why," said the doctor, "I should think there must be a hundred of +them! What an awful place this forest must be! I know that wolves hunt +in packs, but I never before heard of 'tigers' doing so. Wolves can't +climb trees as these can. It's awful, perfectly awful!" he added, the +while he listened to the diabolical noises going on outside. It was, +indeed, as a former traveller has expressed it, 'like a withering +scourge sweeping through the forest.'[11] + + [11] See Mr. Barrington Brown's 'Canoe and Camp Life Among the + Indians of British Guiana,' p. 71. He says these animals hunt in + packs of as many as a hundred or more. + +It was hours before the din died down; and then, just when the tired +travellers were falling asleep, the most appalling, human-like cries +broke forth, sounding first quite close at hand, and then dying away in +a long-drawn wail or shriek. + +Again the new-comers started up in alarm; but Templemore, smiling +feebly, bade them take no notice. + +"It is only the 'lost souls'," said he.[12] + + [12] See foot-note, Chapter V., p. 52. + +"The 'lost souls'!" exclaimed Kingsford. "What can you mean?" He began +to think the other must be raving. + +"I know no more than you do," was Templemore's reply. "So the Indians +account for those sounds, and that is all I can tell you. Since I have +been here they have serenaded me thus every night--even sometimes by +day--and at times I have thought all the 'lost souls' from the Infernal +Regions must have been let loose for my especial entertainment--or to +frighten me to death or drive me mad--I know not which. I really think, +if I had not had the company of this faithful beast--she always roars +back defiance at them--I _should_ have gone mad." + +Towards morning the sounds ceased, and sleep became possible for two or +three hours. But when, at daylight, the Indians rose and ventured out, +they found the great snake had been almost completely devoured. Only +some bones and a few bits of skin were left. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVI. + +THE END. + + +Templemore was carried, with much difficulty, to 'Monella Lodge,' where +an attack of fever supervened, and it was nearly two weeks before the +doctor pronounced him out of danger. + +Carenna came over from her village to nurse him, and tended him as +devotedly as she had Leonard. In the height of the fever he raved +constantly of the great devil-tree, of gigantic serpents, of Monella, +and of 'lost souls'; and, mixed up with all, were a number of names +strange to those who listened to him; for he had been too ill when +found in the cavern to give more than a brief idea of the adventures he +had passed through. + +While he lay upon his bed of sickness, anxious friends watched from +the mountain top for tidings of his fate, but received no intelligible +answers to their signals; for none of those now with Templemore knew +how to reply to them. Thus it was not till he was convalescent and +well enough to be taken out into the open air, that any interchange of +messages became possible. + +Those below, looking up, day after day had seen little flashes of +light, of which they could make nothing; but now Templemore explained +their meaning. A search in the cabin brought to light the mirror +Monella had thoughtfully packed up and hidden carefully away; and +Templemore was thus able at last to open communication with his Roraima +friends. + +His first signalled message to them brought back the reply:-- + + "_Heaven be praised! We are all so thankful! We have mourned you + as dead! And we are in great affliction, besides, for Monella, the + great, great-hearted Mellenda, is dead! He died peacefully the day + after you went away._" + +Then, presently, when Templemore had sent back a message of sorrow and +condolence, another came. + + "_The whole valley at the bottom of the canyon is half-filled up. + It would take years to clear it. And we pictured you as lying dead + beneath it all!_" + +Many messages passed to and fro during the remainder of the travellers' +stay; and then, after a time, Templemore having thoroughly recovered, +preparations were made for the journey back to the coast. + +Both Carenna and Matava were grieved at the thought that Leonard had +remained on the mountain for good, and that they were never likely to +see him more. Carenna, alone, however, expressed no surprise. She told +Templemore that the deception as to Leonard she had practised upon +the good people who had received them so hospitably in their lonely +mountain retreat had, all her life, been a sore trouble to her. It was +some consolation to her, therefore, to know that he had, after all, +been led back to his own people. She at first refused the valuable +present Leonard had sent her, saying that to receive forgiveness was in +itself more than she had hoped for. But, needless to say, Templemore +persuaded her into accepting it. Matava's delight with what had +been sent him was unbounded; especially when Templemore told him +what treasures he could purchase with it: rifles, pistols, unbounded +supplies of powder, and unlimited tobacco, and other things that +Indians prize. + +Meanwhile, Doctor Lorien and his son had been assiduous in collecting +specimens of all the botanical and zoological treasures with which the +neighbourhood of Roraima abounds; and, when the time for starting came, +they had good reason to be satisfied with the result. They might have +done still better, perhaps, if they had gone more into Roraima Forest; +but this they could not make up their minds to do. Indeed, they could +not venture far without an Indian guide; and this they could not get. +Neither Matava nor any one of the other Indians could be prevailed upon +to go into the wood again; and even the doctor was not very pressing. +All had had quite enough of the 'haunted wood.' For it now came out, +too, that Templemore had become a believer in the 'didi.' He declared +that more than once during his imprisonment in the cavern he had seen, +either at early morning or at dusk, strange human-like shapes--gigantic +apes--standing watching within the shadow of the trees. + +Nothing, he said, would induce him to enter that wood again. And he +felt certain that only the fact that the entrance to the cavern was so +high from the ground had enabled him to escape with his life. + +'Nea,' the puma, alone showed no fear of the gloomy forest. She went +hunting there daily, and nearly always returned with something to +reward her enterprise. + +When all was ready for the start, two or three last messages passed +between the travellers and their friends upon the mountain. + +"_Heaven keep you and all those dear to you! Your memory will always +be cherished by all here_," came from Leonard. To which Templemore +replied:-- + +"_Long life and happiness to you and your dear wife and all your +people._" + +"_God bless you, Jack!_" + +"_God bless you, Leonard!_" + +Thus they finally parted; and a few hours later the homeward-bound +friends looked their last upon Roraima from the ridge near Daranato. +The mountain was lighted with the red rays of the setting sun and +towered up in glowing splendour. The greens of the wood at its base, +varied and vivid in colouring, as they were, contrasted with the pinks, +and purples, and reds of the precipitous walls above, that now looked +again like a fairy fortress in the clouds, smiling, and fascinating in +its light, aerial beauty. + +"What a pity the city does not show!" said Harry. "What a glorious +sight it would make!" + +"At least you have conquered the secret the mysterious mountain has so +long and so well concealed," Doctor Lorien observed to Templemore. + +The latter gazed on the mountain gloomily. His mind went back to the +morning when he saw it first and the vague forebodings that had then +come into his mind. + +"I don't know," he said doubtfully. "I have not brought away with me +the most wonderful secret of all--the 'Plant of Life.' When I think how +I was cheated out of that, by the mountain itself, as you may truly +say--for its very rocks came crashing down to prevent my escape, or +to kill me if I persisted; or at least, to insure my leaving nearly +everything behind--when I think of this, it seems to me that Roraima +has guarded most of its secrets pretty effectually, and I am almost +persuaded there is something uncanny about it." + +Harry laughed at this; the more so that it came from Jack. + +"That's very fanciful--for you," he returned. "If it had been Leonard, +now, I should not have been surprised." + +"I am afraid my ideas of what is precisely practical and what is +fanciful have been a good deal modified," Jack confessed. "So would +yours, if you had passed through my experiences." + +"Well, after all, perhaps you haven't lost much," Harry returned. "A +small bundle of dried plants wouldn't have been of much use, and as to +the seeds, if, as I understand you, they only thrive high up on the +mountains, I don't see what you were going to do with them. Moreover, +very likely they would have been eaten up by insects, or lost, or got +wetted and spoiled, or something, before you got back or could have +planted them in a likely spot." + +Then they continued their journey, staying that night in Daranato, +where the great puma at first created a scare among the dusky +inhabitants, but, showing friendliness towards all, she was soon the +object of unbounded wonder and interest on every side. + +Some two months later there was again a little dinner party at +'Meldona,' Mr. Kingsford's residence, and the same faces were gathered +round the hospitable board--all but Leonard Elwood's. Maud looked +charming and happy as she glanced, now and again, first at Jack +Templemore's bronzed face, and then at her brother, listening, not for +the first time now, to her lover's wondrous tale. + +She and Stella had shuddered before at the accounts of the great tree +and its victims, and of the horrors of the 'haunted wood'; and had +talked of Ulama and Zonella, and wondered, again and again, what they +were like. + +"Poor Leonard! I am sorry to lose him," Maud said. "Yet, I suppose, +he does not need pity; for he is to be envied in many ways. Fancy his +dreamings--about which we used to tease him so--coming true after all!" + +"It is just a year ago to-day," observed Mr. Kingsford to the doctor, +"that you were at dinner here and first told us about that wondrous +stranger, Monella. We've had an anxious time ever since." + +"I have never known a happy moment till you all came back the other +day," said Maud sadly. "I am so thankful that the cruel suspense is +ended at last. I have often recalled the words Dr. Lorien used about +Roraima; that 'its very name had come to be surrounded by a halo of +dread and indefinable fear.' I can truly declare that it has been so +with me. I, too, had come to hate and dread the very name. It has +seemed to me like a great, remorseless ogre that had swallowed up two +of our friends, and, as I feared, was going to swallow up my brother +and two more. Yet," she added, looking at Jack, "had I known how things +really were, had I known of your lying lamed, and ill, and alone in the +den in that horrible forest, I think I should have gone mad! What a +comfort to you this dear, faithful animal must have been!" + +'Nea' was by her side, and she put her tear-stained face affectionately +down to the animal's head. The big puma had already established herself +as a favourite with every one in the house. + +"Truly," returned Jack, "such thoughts occurred to me while I was +cooped up there. I couldn't help going over things in my mind; and, +when I considered how the mountain itself, and all the horrors of the +forest, seemed to have combined against me to prevent my escape, I was +seized with a sort of hate and detestation of the place. And, ever +since, my sleep has been disturbed--and will be for years to come, I +feel convinced--by nightmare dreams of the sights and sounds that haunt +my memory!" + +"I feel that I have a grudge against it, too," the doctor avowed. +"Consider all the wonderful things you have told us that are to be +found inside! Then, just when I got so near, to be shut out in that +way! That 'Plant of Life,' too! I'd have given a good deal to have some +specimens of that, and some seeds. _I_ would have got them to grow, +somehow, if the thing could be done!" + +"I'm precious glad, then, that you didn't," the irreverent Harry put +in. "I'm hoping to be a physician--one day--remember! And what chance +would there be for me and the rest of the profession, if you taught +people how to live for hundreds of years without so much as an illness?" + +This very unexpected view of the matter from the vivacious 'budding +doctor' had the effect of turning the thoughts of the others from the +somewhat gloomy channel into which they seemed to have drifted. + +After dinner, the belt, and the purses, and their glittering contents, +were brought in and spread out to view. + +"Whatever else may be said," Mr. Kingsford declared, with emotion, +"there is not one here who will not have cause to remember the stranger +Monella, and Leonard, and their friends, with grateful feelings. And +you, Jack, above all; for, if I am any judge of the value of your share +of these things, you are a millionaire. And that brings back to my +mind the thought that is now constantly perplexing me, Who _was_ this +wondrous Monella after all? I really cannot bring myself to believe he +was--what was his name?--Mellenda, you know." + +"No," assented the doctor. "As a man, I have the greatest liking and +respect for him; but, as a scientist, I am bound to disbelieve in that +part." + +"Since I have no claim yet to be considered a scientist," said Harry, +"I suppose I am free to believe what I like. So I go the whole ticket. +I believe he was what I first pronounced him to be--a magician--and--I +swallow the Mellenda legend--whole! So there!" This very emphatically. + +"Oh dear, _yes_!" Stella exclaimed, her blue eyes opening wide at the +doubting ones. "Why, of course, it _must_ be true. It is so much more +romantic and poetic, you know!" + +Robert shook his head gravely. + +"No!" he said, very decidedly. "I honour and respect the man, and +his memory, from all I have heard of him, but--I cannot accept that +wonderful part of it." + +"Well, _I_ do," Maud exclaimed, looking round with a pretty air +of defiance, more particularly directed against Jack. "So that +makes opinion even, so far--three for, and three against. Now," to +Templemore, "of course, I know _you_ will side with the others." + +To every one's surprise, however, Jack also shook his head. + +"I don't know that," he answered, with a comically bewildered air. +"I've really had all my old notions so mixed up and blown about, that I +honestly admit I really cannot make up my mind. The whole thing is an +enigma that I cannot solve as yet--probably never shall. So you may put +me down as neutral--undecided--whatever you like to call it." + +Maud clapped her hands; and upon that the puma gave a loud roar, +evidently signifying _her_ assent and approbation. + +"Three for, three against, and one neutral," Maud cried "That's better +than I hoped for!" + +The doctor laughed, and his good-natured eyes twinkled. + +"You've all but beaten us," he said good-humouredly. "But, going away +from that part of the subject, I feel truly sorry to think that he +should have died so soon after he had accomplished the work he had had +so much at heart." + +"There again I am inclined to differ," Templemore answered slowly. "I +honestly believe that nothing could have happened to please him more. +All his later talk clearly showed that. He said he was utterly weary +of life, and anxious to be 'released,' as he called it; yet his love +for his people was so great, he let no sign of this appear till he felt +sure all had been finally achieved. It was the fear that that work +might be upset after he had gone--and that alone--that made him so +anxious to shut out all future communication with the world outside; +of that I feel convinced. It was that that influenced him too, I have +no doubt, in making me promise to keep my adventures there a secret +from the world in general. But, just at the last, almost when I was +coming away, a doubt seemed to come into his mind, and he said to me, +'I release you from that promise, if circumstances should arise in +which you conscientiously believe it would be conducive to the good of +my country to tell the story of your sojourn here.' What he meant I +cannot conceive; I only tell you what he said. Possibly time may show. +He seemed to have the 'gift of prophecy' to some extent in those days; +certainly, everything went to show that he foresaw, or expected, his +own approaching death." + + * * * * * + +This was all some years ago. + +Maud Kingsford and Templemore were married shortly after; and Stella +and Harry Lorien are now married too. And, when the two sisters appear +in society, they excite admiration, not only by their beauty, but also +by their matchless jewels--that once glittered on the bosom of Ulama, +Princess of Manoa, and that had adorned, probably, the persons of +generations of descendants of former mighty kings of that once mighty +empire. + +But of this nothing is known to the general public. Templemore and his +friends have kept the promise he gave, and preserved the secret of +Roraima. It was only a short time ago that circumstances arose that +seemed to him to justify a departure from the course he had hitherto +observed. This was when the dispute which has been dormant for just +upon a hundred years respecting the boundaries of British Guiana +suddenly reached an acute stage. + +"Truly," he said to his wife, then, "I think this is the contingency +our friend Monella must have had in his mind when he intimated that +in certain circumstances I was to be free to depart from the silence +he had enjoined. It seems to me more than ever the case that he must +have had 'the gift of prophecy' at that time. I cannot doubt that, +if he were alive now, and saw that the future international position +of Roraima was hanging in the balance, he would wish it to become +permanently British territory, rather than Venezuelan. And, if he could +know of the present state of indifference--or want of information--that +seems to prevail in England, I feel satisfied he would wish me to do +what I could to awaken the English nation to the true facts of the +question that is at stake." + +And that is how it has come about that, after some years of silence, +this strange story of Roraima and the ancient city of El Dorado is now +given to the world. + + +THE END. + + + + +Transcriber's note + + +Words in italics have been surrounded with _underscores_, and small +capitals changed to all capitals. + +Errors in punctuation have been corrected without note. The footnotes +have been placed directly after the paragraph they belong to. Missing +punctuation of the poem in footnote 6 was found on the internet. Some +words were hard to read but could be guessed from the context. Entirely +missing words were filled in and mentioned in the list underneath. Also +the following changes were made, on page + + vii "nöt" changed to "not" (the author did not actually visit) + + xiii pagenumber "xii" changed to "xiii" + + 27 "that" changed to "than" (far more sparsely populated than) + + 29 "Thoughout" changed to "Throughout" (Throughout the country) + + 31 "scarely" changed to "scarcely" (I can scarcely believe) + + 51 "Morover" changed to "Moreover" (Moreover, the Indians) + + 83 "Gorgetown" changed to "Georgetown" (do not alarm our friends in + Georgetown) + + 95 "o" changed to "of" (some kind of) + + 126 missing word guessed "to" (repay you to some measure) + + 202 "mysel" changed to "myself" (For myself I do not wonder) + + 381 "entertaintment" changed to "entertainment" (for my especial + entertainment). + +Otherwise the original has been preserved, including inconsistent +spelling and hyphenation. + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Devil-Tree of El Dorado, by Frank Aubrey + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 43944 *** |